TEP UserManual7.2
Uploaded by
Marcio N AmaralTEP UserManual7.2
Uploaded by
Marcio N AmaralTerraExplorer Pro ®
Version 7.2
User Guide
Skyline Software Systems Inc.
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Information contained in this document is subject to change without notice and does not represent a
commitment on behalf of Skyline Software Systems Inc. No part of this document may be reproduced or
transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying without the
written permission of Skyline Software Systems Inc., 13873 Park Center Road, Suite 201 Herndon, VA
20171 USA.
Copyright © 2019 Skyline Software Systems Inc. All rights reserved.
Printed in the United States of America.
Skyline, It’s your world, the Skyline logo, TerraExplorer, TerraExplorer Pro, TerraExplorer Plus,
TerraDeveloper, TerraBuilder, SkylineGlobe Server, TerraGate, SFS, and the TerraExplorer logo are
trademarks of Skyline Software Systems Inc.
Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are trademarks, or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders.
Trademark names are used editorially, to the benefit of the trademark owner, with no intent to infringe on
the trademark.
Protected by U. S. Patents 6111583, 6433792, 6496189, 6704017, 7551172, 8237713. Other patents
pending.
Technical support [email protected]
General information [email protected]
Contact Skyline on the Internet at http://www.skylinesoft.com
ii
TerraExplorer User Guide
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................9
About this Manual .........................................................................................................................9
Using the Online Help ...................................................................................................................9
TerraExplorer Resources ..............................................................................................................9
About TerraExplorer.................................................................................................................... 10
TerraExplorer Family .................................................................................................................. 12
TerraExplorer Desktop ................................................................................................................ 13
TerraExplorer Comparison Table ................................................................................................. 14
SkylineGlobe Product Suite ......................................................................................................... 17
CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED ................................................................................................. 22
Software and Hardware Requirements ......................................................................................... 22
License Mechanism .................................................................................................................... 22
Installing TerraExplorer Pro ......................................................................................................... 23
Uninstalling TerraExplorer Pro ..................................................................................................... 28
Starting TerraExplorer Pro........................................................................................................... 29
CHAPTER 3 NEW FEATURES IN RELEASE 7.2 ........................................................................... 30
Export 3D Mesh to Cesium 3D Tiles and I3S Formats ................................................................... 30
Import and Convert Cesium 3D Tiles and OSGB Mesh Layers to 3DML ......................................... 30
Measurement Tool Enhanc ements............................................................................................... 30
Copy and Paste Lay er Styles....................................................................................................... 31
Enhanced Support for Oculus Rift VR .......................................................................................... 31
Expanded Model Formats ........................................................................................................... 33
SGS Publish to TerraExplorer for Mobile ...................................................................................... 33
New Point Cloud Format ............................................................................................................. 33
Enhanced KML Support .............................................................................................................. 33
3DML Terrain Imagery and Elevation ........................................................................................... 33
Abort Capability for All Analysis Tools .......................................................................................... 33
Bug Fixes and Stability ................................................................................................................ 33
New Feat ures in Release 7.1....................................................................................................... 34
CHAPTER 4 BASI C CONCEPTS ................................................................................................... 48
Start Page .................................................................................................................................. 48
Application Layout ...................................................................................................................... 49
TerraExplorer Ribbon.................................................................................................................. 52
iii
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Quick Access Toolbar ................................................................................................................. 59
Creating and Opening a Project ................................................................................................... 60
Saving a Project ......................................................................................................................... 62
Closing a Project ........................................................................................................................ 64
Coordinate System ..................................................................................................................... 65
Using Screen Overlay ................................................................................................................. 67
3D Window Viewing Options........................................................................................................ 71
Light Source ............................................................................................................................... 73
Error/Message Log ..................................................................................................................... 73
Dragging and Dropping Files in TerraExplorer .............................................................................. 74
CHAPTER 5 PUBLIS HING TERRAEXPLORER P ROJECTS .......................................................... 76
About Publishing TerraExplorer Projects ...................................................................................... 76
Publish Project as Local Kit ......................................................................................................... 76
Extract and Publish Area as Offline Kit ......................................................................................... 77
Publish Project as KMZ ............................................................................................................... 80
Publishing a Project to SkylineGlobe Server ................................................................................. 80
CHAPTER 6 WORKI NG WITH SKYLINEGLOBE SERV ER............................................................. 86
About Working with SkylineGlobe Server ...................................................................................... 86
Logging In to a SkylineGlobe Server ............................................................................................ 86
Changing Your SkylineGlobe Account Password .......................................................................... 87
Loading a Project from SkylineGlobe Server ................................................................................. 88
Loading SkylineGlobe Layers ...................................................................................................... 89
Searching for SkylineGlobe Layers .............................................................................................. 90
Managing Your Own SkylineGlobe Lay ers .................................................................................... 91
Uploading Layers to SkylineGlobe Server ..................................................................................... 95
CHAPTER 7 NAVIGATING IN THE 3D WORLD ............................................................................. 98
About Navigating ........................................................................................................................ 98
Searching for an Address or Location ........................................................................................... 99
Obtaining Address Details ......................................................................................................... 100
Navigating to Locations ............................................................................................................. 100
Navigating to Objects ................................................................................................................ 101
Free Flight ................................................................................................................................ 103
Using Touch Screens ................................................................................................................ 112
3D Modes ................................................................................................................................ 112
Underground Navigation ........................................................................................................... 112
GPS Tracking ........................................................................................................................... 113
GP X Reader............................................................................................................................. 115
Walk Mode ............................................................................................................................... 117
Target ...................................................................................................................................... 118
iv
TerraExplorer User Guide
Look Around Tool ..................................................................................................................... 119
Locations ................................................................................................................................. 119
Multiple Coordinate Systems ..................................................................................................... 122
CHAPTER 8 EFFECTS ............................................................................................................... 125
About Effects ............................................................................................................................ 125
Weather E ffects ........................................................................................................................ 125
Animation E ffects...................................................................................................................... 126
Water Effects............................................................................................................................ 132
CHAPTER 9 SETTING THE PROJECT ........................................................................................ 136
About the Project Settings ......................................................................................................... 136
General .................................................................................................................................... 136
Date and Light Effects ............................................................................................................... 141
Layout ...................................................................................................................................... 142
Terrain Database ...................................................................................................................... 144
Screen Overlay ......................................................................................................................... 147
Environment ............................................................................................................................. 148
Navigation ................................................................................................................................ 151
CHAPTER 10 USING THE PROJECT TREE .............................................................................. 154
About the Project Tree .............................................................................................................. 154
Search Tool.............................................................................................................................. 157
Selecting Items from the Project Tree ......................................................................................... 159
Reordering It ems in the Project Tree .......................................................................................... 160
Working with Groups ................................................................................................................. 160
Adding Elements to the Project Tree .......................................................................................... 166
Sorting the Project Tree ............................................................................................................ 166
Capt uring the Tree State ........................................................................................................... 167
Shortcut Menus ........................................................................................................................ 167
CHAPTER 11 USING TERRAEXPLORER OPTIONS .................................................................. 180
About TerraExplorer Options ..................................................................................................... 180
General .................................................................................................................................... 180
Graphics .................................................................................................................................. 183
Navigation ................................................................................................................................ 185
View ........................................................................................................................................ 186
Screen Overlay ......................................................................................................................... 188
Add-ons ................................................................................................................................... 190
Language ................................................................................................................................. 191
CHAPTER 12 PRES ENTATIONS............................................................................................... 194
About Presentations .................................................................................................................. 194
v
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Creating and Editing a Pres entation ........................................................................................... 194
Viewing a Presentation.............................................................................................................. 207
Creating Movies........................................................................................................................ 208
CHAPTER 13 FEATURE LAYERS ............................................................................................. 210
Working with Feature Layers ..................................................................................................... 210
Loading Feature Layers ............................................................................................................ 211
Setting and E diting Feature Layer Properties .............................................................................. 234
Using Attribute Fields ................................................................................................................ 239
Working with Features .............................................................................................................. 261
Creating New Layers ................................................................................................................ 270
Streaming 3D Models Using Feature Layers ............................................................................... 271
Saving Feat ure Layers .............................................................................................................. 276
Uploading Feature Layers to SkylineGlobe Server ...................................................................... 277
CHAPTER 14 COMPLEX LAYERS ............................................................................................ 278
About Complex Layers .............................................................................................................. 278
Loading FLY and KML/KMZ Files............................................................................................... 278
Setting and E diting Complex Layer Properties ............................................................................ 279
Saving FLY and KML/KMZ Lay ers ............................................................................................. 280
Uploading KML Layers to SkylineGlobe Server ........................................................................... 281
CHAPTER 15 POINT CLOUD LAYERS ..................................................................................... 282
Loading a Point Cloud Model ..................................................................................................... 282
Uploading Point Cloud Layers to SkylineGlobe Server ................................................................ 289
CHAPTER 16 3D MESH LAYERS .............................................................................................. 291
Working with 3D Mesh Layers ................................................................................................... 291
Loading 3D Mes h Layers........................................................................................................... 292
Importing and Converting 3D Mesh Lay ers ................................................................................. 294
Setting and E diting 3D Mesh Layer Properties ............................................................................ 301
Working with 3DML’s Feature Lay ers ......................................................................................... 305
Display Tools ............................................................................................................................ 312
Classifying a 3DML ................................................................................................................... 315
Uploading 3D Mesh Layers to SkylineGlobe Server .................................................................... 316
Modifying a 3D Mesh Layer ....................................................................................................... 317
Exporting Mesh Layers to Models .............................................................................................. 317
Exporting Mesh Layers to Other Formats ................................................................................... 318
Converting Models to 3DML ...................................................................................................... 320
CHAPTER 17 IMAGERY AND ELEVATION LAYERS ................................................................. 322
About Raster Layers ................................................................................................................. 322
Loading Raster Layers .............................................................................................................. 322
vi
TerraExplorer User Guide
Moving and Clipping a Layer ..................................................................................................... 335
Imagery and Elevation Layer Parameters ................................................................................... 336
Converting Raster to MPT with Resolution Pyramid .................................................................... 339
Uploading Raster Layers to SkylineGlobe Server ........................................................................ 340
CHAPTER 18 WORKI NG WITH OBJECTS ................................................................................ 341
Creating New Objects ............................................................................................................... 341
Selecting Objects for Editing...................................................................................................... 342
Working with the Property Sheet ................................................................................................ 343
Editing Objects in the 3D Window .............................................................................................. 348
Messages and Tooltips ............................................................................................................. 354
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Objects ....................................................................................... 374
Moving Objects......................................................................................................................... 377
Setting Objects for Auto-Start .................................................................................................... 377
Attaching Objects to Other Objects ............................................................................................ 377
Loading Objects from the Data Library ....................................................................................... 379
Loading Objects from Sketchup Warehouse ............................................................................... 381
CHAPTER 19 OBJECTS AND LABELS ..................................................................................... 383
About Objects and Labels ......................................................................................................... 383
Text and Image Labels .............................................................................................................. 383
2D Objects ............................................................................................................................... 392
3D Objects ............................................................................................................................... 408
Dynamic Objects ...................................................................................................................... 425
Terrain Objects ......................................................................................................................... 432
CHAPTER 20 NAVIGATION MAP .............................................................................................. 442
About the Navigation Map ......................................................................................................... 442
Using the Navigation Map ......................................................................................................... 443
Adding a Navigation Map to the Navigation Map Window ............................................................ 443
Setting the Maps Order in the Navigation Maps Window .............................................................. 445
Deleting a Navigation Map from a Project ................................................................................... 445
CHAPTER 21 ANALYSIS TOOLS .............................................................................................. 446
Using Analysis Tools ................................................................................................................. 446
Measurement Tools .................................................................................................................. 448
Terrain Analysis Tools ............................................................................................................... 453
Line of Sight Tools .................................................................................................................... 474
Shadow Tools .......................................................................................................................... 494
Comparison Tools..................................................................................................................... 498
CHAPTER 22 WORKI NG WITH TOOLS ..................................................................................... 506
About the Tools ........................................................................................................................ 506
vii
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Using Tools .............................................................................................................................. 506
Snapshot Tool .......................................................................................................................... 507
Collaboration Tool ..................................................................................................................... 508
Extracting Terrain to MP T.......................................................................................................... 513
Extracting Terrain to VRML ....................................................................................................... 515
Extracting Terrain to Zebra ........................................................................................................ 517
Drawing Tools .......................................................................................................................... 518
Timespan Tool .......................................................................................................................... 533
Block Width Tool ....................................................................................................................... 535
viii
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
About this Manual
The TerraExplorer Pro User Manual contains information on using all TerraExplorer Pro commands and
features. The manual assumes you have a working knowledge of your computer and its operating
conventions, including the use of the mouse and standard menus and commands. If you need help
performing any of these tasks, consult the documentation resources provided with your operating system.
Using the Online Help
TerraExplorer Pro also contains complete Help documentation in an HTML format. The TerraExplorer Pro
help system includes all of the information in this manual plus more advanced click -and-jump navigation
tools with full color screen shots and illustrations.
Starting the Online Help
To open the online help:
On the top right corner of the screen, click the Help icon.
or
Press F1 at any time during the TerraExplorer Pro session.
TerraExplorer Resources
Information about the application and about your application license is easily accessible from the File
menu .
To open TerraExplorer resources:
On the TerraExplorer menu , point to Resources and then select one of the following:
Resource Description
TerraExplorer Help (F1) Opens TerraExplorer’s Help files.
TerraExplorer Provides access to the TerraExplorer Programmer’s Guide Help files
Programmer’s Guide
TerraExplorer Quick Opens TerraExplorer’s Quick Start Guide, which helps you find your
Guide way around TerraExplorer.
Interactive Tutorial Provides a set of samples written with TerraExplorer API. It allows
executing samples to see their effects and reviewing the source code
of each sample.
TerraExplorer Homepage Access further information and demonstrations located under the
TerraExplorer section of the Skyline website:
http://www.SkylineGlobe.com/. This page provides up-to-date
information on TerraExplorer and contains links to other sources of
information.
From the TerraExplorer web page, you can:
Download the latest TerraExplorer Viewer.
9
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
View a TerraExplorer feature demo.
Access the SkylineGlobe US and other online applications.
Access the Skyline online forum.
License Manager Opens the License Manager tool.
About TerraExplorer Displays basic license and product information.
About TerraExplorer
TerraExplorer is a cutting-edge 3D GIS desktop viewer and creator that provides powerful tools and a
high resolution 3D environment in which to view, query, analyze and present geospatial data.
With TerraExplorer's robust and extensive capabilities, realistic 3D visualizations can be created by
overlaying the terrain with unlimited data layers, 3D models, virtual objects and more.
Analysis
In addition to basic measurement and analysis tools for distance, slope, area, and volume
measurements, TerraExplorer features advanced and robust capabilities for line of sight, shadow display
and query, comparison and elevation difference, cross section, buffer query, flood analysis, terrain profile,
and more.
Display
Imagery and elevation layers of unlimited size and resolution in a wide range of formats can be overlaid
on the terrain and seamlessly integrated with feature layers and multi-resolution, stream-optimized 3D
mesh model layers for easy visualization, access, and analysis of 3D geospatial data. If a new layer is
based on a source that uses a different coordinate system, the layer can be reprojected to the project's
coordinate system.
Point, line and polygon features can be displayed and used to display advanced layer information based
on their attribute data. TerraExplorer also includes an extensive set of objects: 2D and 3D, dynamic,
buildings, models, point cloud models and video, that can be displayed on the terrain, as well as
advanced terrain objects that allow terrain modification within TerraExplorer Pro. A flexible clipboard
mechanism and sophisticated duplication tools make it easy to copy, paste, and position objects on the
terrain.
Realism is enhanced with environment settings that include lighting effects, horizon distance, fog color,
sky texture, cloud display, and shadow color.
Spatial Queries
TerraExplorer provides advanced capabilities for manipulating feature and 3DML data and analyzing
spatial relationships. Various spatial operations can be performed on a layer’s features, including merging
features into a single feature, clipping one polygon from another, exploding a multi-part feature into its
individual component features, and exporting selected features to a new file.
Complex spatial and attribute queries are supported. Features can be filtered based on attribute value or
based on their spatial relationship with a specified polygon, line point or object. A buffer zone can be
defined to include features within a certain radius of the selection.
Publishing Data
SkylineGlobe Server streamlines the TerraExplorer workflow, enabling complete projects and layers to be
optimized and published directly from TerraExplorer Pro to the cloud server. Through a single publishing
operation, the data is made available to all TerraExplorer clients: Desktop, Mobile, and TE for Web, as
well as standard geospatial clients such as WFS/WFS-T/WMS/WMTS/3D Tiles (Cesium).
10
TerraExplorer User Guide
Creating and Sharing 3D Presentations
TerraExplorer’s presentation tools enable you to create a presentation, in which you communicate a
specific view of the 3D World, by combining a customized flight route with a particular display of the
project. Your presentation consists of one or more steps, in each of which you control the display of the
3D World, including current camera position, layer and object visibility, system time, and popup messages
and captions. Presentations can be easily converted to standard video files.
Optimization
Advanced tools allow conversion of model files and of point cloud data from various formats to a stream -
optimized Skyline-proprietary format for improved display performance as well as download rate. The
Extract Terrain tool extracts and creates a subset of a local or remote terrain database for easy
distribution.
Product Highlights
Efficient streaming of raster, feature, and 3D mesh layer (3DML) data over standard networks.
Interactive drawing tools to create and add 2D and 3D objects, labels, modify terrain objec ts, and
buildings on a 3D terrain model.
Loads 3D models, video, and geo-referenc ed information layers
Supports editing and saving of layers to GIS standard file formats.
Communicates with external local and web applications using standard COM interface. Controls all
static and dynamic objects, information layers and application content.
Robust set of tools for measurement and terrain analysis.
Hyperlink feature links specific areas, or objects, to web pages, applications and databases.
Integrates text and web content messages.
Presentation tool enables sharing of geographical information through dynamic presentations.
Creates movies, as AVI, from any presentation.
Takes snapshots of the 3D Window and saves them to external files.
Powerful tool for creating 3DML data sets from point layers with individually referenced 3D models.
Users can easily share, post, find, and load necessary geographic data for a TerraExplorer project by
logging in to SkylineGlobe Server.
Publishing tool to create project directory ready for distribution to external users. Additional publishing
options enable extraction and publishing of a geographic subset of the project for offline users.
Provides improved level of security for local and remote users.
Advanced Ribbon customization options allow external developers to integrate new custom tools into
the TerraExplorer Ribbon.
Export the 3D Window, Project Tree and Navigation Map as ActiveX controls.
11
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Embedded Mode
All TerraExplorer versions can run as embedded ActiveX controls in any Windows application or Web
page. Using the power of the TerraExplorer API, developers can interact between the application or the
web page and the TerraExplorer controls.
TerraExplorer has several ActiveX controls, including:
The 3D Window
The Project Tree
The Navigation Map window
The TerraExplorer embedded mode is an integrated feature in all TerraExplorer products.
Data Flow
TerraExplorer can be used in a local desktop environment, accessing terrain and content data directly, or
in a network environment via the SkylineGlobe Server, Skyline’s private cloud solution. SkylineGlobe
Server provides streaming services for all your spatial data types including terrain (MPT/TBP), map
(raster-WMS/WMTS), feature (WFS/WFS-T), 3D Mesh (3DML, OGC 3D Tiles), and point cloud (CPT,
OGC 3D Tiles). Individual geospatial layers and complete projects can be directly uploaded and
published to the cloud server from TerraExplorer or other Skyline client applications, thus streamlining
your workflow and eliminating the need for any server-side login after initial installation. Through a single
publishing operation, data is made ready for consumption by all TerraExplorer clients: Desktop, Mobile,
and TE for Web, as well as standard geospatial applications.
SkylineGlobe Server DirectConnect enables you to serve terrain databases defined by the TerraBuilder
project file (TBP) to TerraExplorer clients and any application that reads the standard OGC WMS/WMTS
protocol, eliminating the need for time-consuming re-creation of complete MPT files. This is critical for
projects whose source data is constantly being updated or modified. DirectConnect leverages cache
technology and support for multi-core and multi-computer processing to provide scalability and accelerate
the publishing of massive data sets.
TerraExplorer Family
The TerraExplorer family of products is a range of 3D visualization clients that enables users to interact
with, edit and annotate a geo-referenced 3D environment. TerraExplorer can be used in a local desktop
environment, accessing terrain and content data directly, or in a network environment via the
SkylineGlobe server.
TerraExplorer Desktop – A cutting-edge 3D GIS desktop viewer and creator that provides powerful
tools and a high resolution 3D environment in which to view, query, analyze and present geospatial
data. With TerraExplorer's robust and extensive capabilities and ever-increasing interoperability,
stunningly realistic 3D visualizations can be created by overlaying the terrain with unlimited data
layers, 3D models, virtual objects and more.
TerraExplorer for Mobile – An advanced 3D GIS viewer and editor for Android and iOS mobile
devices with professional-grade tools for viewing, querying, analyzing and editing massive datasets in
a high resolution 3D environment. The app can load local TerraExplorer projects as well as access
online data from SkylineGlobe Server and other OGC compliant servers.
TerraExplorer for Web – A lightweight 3D GIS viewer that enables you to view high-resolution,
12
TerraExplorer User Guide
stunningly realistic SkylineGlobe 3D content in a web browser, without any plug-ins. The employment
of HTML5/WebGL standards allows TerraExplorer for Web to provide support for multiple platforms
and browsers. Built on the powerful Cesium open source library, TerraExplorer for Web further
extends the core functionality with additional capabilities and enhanced performance.
TerraExplorer Desktop
TerraExplorer Desktop is available in three versions, offering increasing levels of functionality :
Viewer – Users can navigate through and perform advanced terrain analysis of high resolution 3D
world environments created by fusing aerial and satellite photography, terrain elevation data and
other 2D and 3D information layers. TerraExplorer Viewer also provides basic editing capabilities,
including loading of online 2D and 3D layers as well as selected offline formats.
Plus – Adds loading of all 2D and 3D offline formats, feature layer editing and querying, advanced
objects and drawing tools, a set of tools for professional usage, and the advanced Pro API interfaces.
Pro – Adds publishing capabilities as well as uploading of data to SkylineGlobe cloud.
All tools, developed using the TerraExplorer Pro API, can be activated by TerraExplorer Pro,
TerraExplorer Run Time Pro and TerraExplorer Plus.
RunTime Pro
Run Time Pro provides full TerraExplorer Pro functionality for incorporation in OEM applications, using its
ActiveX components, the standard API and the ICommand interface. Run Time Pro cannot be used as a
standalone application and it does not provide the TerraExplorer Pro Ribbon user interface.
TerraExplorer Plus
TerraExplorer Plus, available as a stand-alone application, or as integrated ActiveX components, offers
similar capabilities to TerraExplorer Pro with the following limitations:
Advanced objects can be created and edited only by using the regular API, and not by ICommand:
Buildings
Dynamic objects
Video (on terrain and billboard)
Modify terrain
Hole on terrain
Feature layer operations can be performed only by using the regular API, and not by ICommand:
Spatial and attribute queries
Feature editing (modifying geometry or attribute values)
Creation of new layers
A project cannot be published as a Viewer Kit.
The terrain cannot be extracted to MPT or VRML.
No access is available to the advanced Drawing tools (Duplicate Objects, Create Power Line, etc.).
No access is available to the Convert Models to XPL tool.
13
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
No access is available to the Convert Models Layers to 3DML tool.
TerraExplorer C2MP Extension
The TerraExplorer family includes the C2MP extension (available in Viewer, Plus, and Pro versions) that
provides a unique set of command & control and mission planning features for military and defense users.
The extension includes the following tools:
MultiTracking (Cursor-on-Target, Predator, GPS Tracking)
FalconView Interface
MIL-STD-2525C Annotator
ACO Import
GRG Creation
Coordinate Marker
Route Planner
DAFIF Import
Enhanced Data Library support (creation and import)
Legend Creator
TEZ Creator
TerraExplorer Comparison Table
The TerraExplorer Comparison Table below compares the different capabilities of each of the products in
the TerraExplorer family. All products are based on TerraExplorer Pro, with each offering a different
subset of TerraExplorer Pro commands.
TerraExplorer Pro commands are accessible programmatically either from the standard API or from the
ICommand interface. ICommand is an API call that simulates a user click on the TEP Ribbon or menus,
activating a TerraExplorer command.
Most operations can be performed by both of the methods. To create a polygon, for example, you can
use the Creator.CreatePolygon(...) API to create a polygon and set all the parameters programmatically.
Alternatively, you can call ICommand.Execute (1012,5) (the equivalent of clicking Create Polygon on the
Ribbon). This call opens the property sheet and lets the user add the polygon and set its properties
manually, like in TerraExplorer Pro.
A few commands (e.g., Publish Project) are only available via the GUI or the ICommand interface, and
not programmatically from the standard API.
Legend
- Available in the User Interface and the API
API – Available only via standard API commands (not including the ICommand interface)
UI - Available only via the User Interface or the ICommand API (not available via standard API
commands)
C2MP – Available only in the C2MP extension
14
TerraExplorer User Guide
Capability Web Mobile Desktop Desktop Desktop
Viewer Plus Pro
Basic
3D fly-through
Load Fly and KML/KMZ projects
View objects, layers and features limited limited
Save project to Fly, KML and KMZ formats
Create groups and manage Project Tree
Create presentations
Create movie
Search addresses and layers
Change project settings
Collaborate C2MP
2D and 3D Layers
Load imagery and elevation layers Online
Load feature layers Online +
shape
Load point cloud layers
Load 3DML
Load BIM Limited Limited View Only
Load SGS base and feature layers
Spatial and attribution queries
Create new feature layer
Edit and update feature layers geometry and
attributes
Analysis
Measurement tools
Terrain analysis tools Limited Limited
Shadow analysis
Objects
View 2D and 3D objects Limited
Add and edit basic objects (label, line and UI
polygon)
Add and edit all 2D and 3D objects
15
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Capability Web Mobile Desktop Desktop Desktop
Viewer Plus Pro
Add and edit advanced objects (Building, Video
on Terrain, Terrain Modification, Hole on
Terrain and Dynamic Objects)
Advanced drawing tools (Duplicate Objects,
Create Pipelines, Create Power Lines)
Navigation
Navigation map
Underground mode
Navigation tools (GPS tracking, target and
multiple coordinate system)
Indoor editing and viewing
Conversion Tools
Make CPT
Make XPL
Convert models layers to 3DML
Create raster pyramid
Convert BIM layer to 3DML
Import and convert (DAE, OSGB, 3D Tiles)
mesh layers to 3DML
Export 3DML to other formats
Saving and Publishing
Publish local kit
Publish offline kit
Extract terrain
Upload data to SG cloud
C2MP Tools
MultiTracking (Cursor-on-Target, Predator, C2MP C2MP C2MP
GPS Tracking)
FalconView Interface C2MP C2MP C2MP
MilStd2525B Annotator C2MP C2MP C2MP
ACO Import C2MP C2MP C2MP
GRG Creation C2MP C2MP C2MP
Coordinate Marker C2MP C2MP C2MP
16
TerraExplorer User Guide
SkylineGlobe Product Suite
The SkylineGlobe software suite sets the standard for 3D desktop and web-based applications, enabling
an enterprise to build and efficiently publish realistic 3D environments that can be explored, queried,
analyzed and edited by desktop, web, and mobile clients. The suite includes:
Editors – PhotoMesh, TerraBuilder, and TerraExplorer Pro
Cloud Services – Streaming, Storing, and Cataloging
Clients – Desktop, Mobile, and Web applications
SkylineGlobe Product Suite
The SkylineGlobe Enterprise solution is scalable, with licenses to support from ten to tens of thousands of
concurrent users.
Whether deploying a desktop, mobile or web-based application, SkylineGlobe Enterprise provides a full
Application Programming Interface (API) allowing you to customize it according to your requirements.
Because SkylineGlobe Enterprise is based on open OGC standards such as WFS and WMS, it can
operate as a seamless 3D interface with other existing, legacy s ystems within the organization.
"On the fly" data fusion from disparate and distributed sources without data pre-processing allows you to
keep your 3D environment current and relevant.
Skyline’s range of products allows users to design an implementation customized to meet their
requirements. Deployment options include the ability to work in a networked or disconnected (off-line)
mode and make content available to the public or keep it restricted to secure networks and authorized
users. Highly efficient streaming server technology supports large enterprise deployments with minimal
hardware requirements.
17
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Editors
Skyline offers powerful applications for generating, editing and publishing 3D terrain and urban model
databases from a wide variety of data types.
TerraBuilder
TerraBuilder is a 3D terrain database creator with professional-grade tools for manipulating and merging
orthophotos, DEM and DSM raster files of different sizes and resolutions. The resulting photo-realistic,
geographically accurate terrain database (MPT) can be made available to local TerraExplorer clients or
published to remote clients using the SkylineGlobe Server.
PhotoMesh
Skyline’s breakthrough PhotoMesh application fully automates the building of high-resolution, textured,
3D mesh models from oblique and nadir photographs and Lidar captured from street view, drones, UAV
and airplanes. PhotoMesh results can be generated in standard 3D model (3DML, OSGB, DAE, OBJ),
raster (Orthophoto, DSM, DTM) and point cloud (LAS) formats. The 3DML format can be transformed into
powerful geospatial data that fully supports spatial operations and attribute queries, by loading it into
TerraExplorer and merging it with classification information.
TerraExplorer Pro
TerraExplorer Pro is a powerful GIS tool for merging unlimited, geo-referenced 3D terrain, 3D mesh,
Lidar, BIM, raster and feature layers into a 3D high-resolution, geospatial environment. The project and all
its individual layers can be directly uploaded and published to SkylineGlobe cloud server from
TerraExplorer. Through a single publishing operation, the project and its individual layers are made
available to all TerraExplorer clients: Desktop, Mobile, and TE for Web, as well as standard geospatial
clients. TerraExplorer Pro also provides powerful tools and a high resolution 3D environment in which to
view, query, analyze and present geospatial data.
18
TerraExplorer User Guide
Cloud Services
SkylineGlobe Server (SGS) is a private cloud solution that provides a comprehensive set of web services
for publishing, storing, managing and streaming 3D spatial data. SkylineGlobe Server provides streaming
services for all your spatial data types including terrain (MPT/TBP), map (raster-WMS/WMTS), feature
(WFS/WFS-T), 3D Mesh (3DML, OGC 3D Tiles), and point cloud (CPT, OGC 3D Tiles). All data on your
server is cataloged and referenced so clients can easily find the specific published layer required. Your
data is kept safe by multiple security layers, including restriction of each user group to predefined data
folders and a robust user authentication mechanism.
The server’s built-in complete user access control system allows easy management of users, groups, and
administrative roles controlling the server-side storage and client-side view/edit permissions.
SkylineGlobe Server is compliant with the following OpenGIS Implementation Specifications:
OpenGIS ® Web Feature Service (WFS) Implementation Specification
OpenGIS ® Web Feature Service Transactions (WFS-T) Implementation Specification
OpenGIS ® Web Map Service (WMS) Implementation Specification
OpenGIS ® Web Map Tiling Service (WMTS) Implementation Specification
SkylineGlobe Terrain Service
Powerful terrain service technology for streaming terrain data stored either in Skyline optimized terrain
databases (MPT) or in terrain databases defined by the TerraBuilder project file (TBP) to remote
TerraExplorer clients and any application that reads the standard OGC WMS/WMTS protocol.
19
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
SkylineGlobe Feature Service
Powerful feature service technology for streaming point, polyline, and polygon feature layers from files
and from the Oracle, SQL server, PostGIS and ArcSDE databases to remote TerraExplorer clients and
any application that reads the standard OGC WFS protocol. The Feature Service can stream most
TerraExplorer supported feature layer formats. It also supports advanced spatial and attribute queries
from TerraExplorer and other WFS clients. With SGS’s support for WFS-T (Web Feature Service-
Transactional), remote clients can edit (create, delete, and update features) the feature layer and save
changes to the data source.
SkylineGlobe Maps Service
Powerful maps service technology for streaming most TerraExplorer supported raster layer formats to
remote TerraExplorer clients and any application that reads the standard OGC WMS/WMTS protocol. The
layers are streamed as WMS/WMTS tiles in JPEG and PNG formats.
SkylineGlobe 3D Mesh Service
Powerful 3D city model service technology for streaming 3D Mesh Layer (3DML) databases from 3DML
files to remote TerraExplorer clients. 3D mesh layers (3DML) are high-resolution, textured, 3D mesh
models that have been compressed and stream-optimized to accelerate loading speed and efficiently
handle memory. The 3D Mesh Service also exposes the data as 3D tiles for TerraExplorer for Web and
Cesium based clients.
SkylineGlobe Point Cloud Service
Powerful point cloud service technology for streaming multi-resolution and stream-optimized point cloud
data from CPT files to remote TerraExplorer clients. The Point Cloud Service also exposes the data as 3D
tiles for TerraExplorer for Web and Cesium based clients.
Clients
Skyline offers a range of 3D visualization clients that enable users to interact with, edit and annotate a
geo-referenced 3D environment. Users can customize the database with data from a network, local drive
or the Internet. Overlaying data specific to the user’s requirements onto a 3D map creat es a targeted,
interactive picture that can meet the needs of a diverse user base and the specific requirements of each
individual user. Skyline’s client applications can be used in a local desktop environment, accessing terrain
and content data directly, or in a network environment via the SkylineGlobe server.
TerraExplorer Desktop
A cutting-edge 3D GIS desktop viewer and creator that provides powerful tools and a high resolution 3D
environment in which to view, query, analyze and present geospatial data.
With TerraExplorer's robust and extensive capabilities and ever-increasing interoperability, stunningly
realistic 3D visualizations can be created by overlaying the terrain with unlimited data layers, 3D models,
virtual objects and more.
TerraExplorer for Mobile
TerraExplorer Mobile is an advanced 3D GIS viewer and editor for Android and iOS mobile devices with
professional-grade tools for viewing, querying, analyzing and editing massive datasets in a high resolution
3D environment. The app can load local TerraExplorer projects as well as access online data from
SkylineGlobe Server and other OGC compliant servers.
20
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer for Web
TerraExplorer for Web is a lightweight 3D GIS viewer that enables you to view high-resolution, stunningly
realistic SkylineGlobe 3D content in a web browser, without any plug-ins.
21
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 2 GETTING STARTED
Software and Hardware Requirements
Requirement Description
Operating System Windows ® 7/ 8 /10 – 64 bit.
System Memory 2 GB of RAM (4 GB or more recommended).
Video Card 512 MB of video memory (1 GB or more recommended). Pixel and
vertex shader v3.0.
Processor 4 cores (8 cores recommended).
Browser Microsoft Internet Explorer 9 or higher.
Additional Software .Net Framework 4.0 extended deployment or later is required for
the Models to 3DML and extract & publish tools.
.Net Framework 2.0 extended deployment or later is required for
the Resolution Pyramid tool.
License Mechanism
TerraExplorer is protected by a licensing mechanism that controls its operation, license term, and
available capabilities. A license file issued by Skyline determines the licensing mechanism used.
The following licensing mechanisms are available for TerraExplorer:
Local Hardware Protection (HASP Key)
Workstation Dependent Software License
Skyline Floating License Server
HASP Floating License
Local Hardware Protection (HASP Key)
A HASP key is a physical hardware key delivered with the TerraExplorer Pro software package that plugs
into the USB port of the computer – to allow the operation of the product. Verify that the HASP key is
plugged into the USB port before starting TerraExplorer Pro.
Workstation Dependent Software License
Another type of license is the workstation dependent software license. This license does not require any
hardware protection but is limited to a specific computer. Before working with the workstation dependent
software license, you must first register to get a license locked to your computer. It cannot be transferred
without repeating the registration process.
Skyline’s Floating License Server
The license information can also be obtained using a floating license server which enables a number of
licenses to be shared among a larger number of users. When an authorized user wants to run
TerraExplorer, the user requests a license from the license server, and if one is available, the license
server allows TerraExplorer to run. When the user finishes running TerraExplorer, the license is returned
to the license server for use by other users.
22
TerraExplorer User Guide
HASP Floating License
The license information can also be obtained using a floating license server. By installing a phy sical
hardware key on the license server, a predetermined number of concurrent users on the same network
can use TerraExplorer, according to the license level defined by Skyline, without an individual hardware
key on each of their computers.
License Manager
The TerraSuite License Manager allows the user to view and update the current license level.
To activate the License Manager:
From the TerraExplorer menu , point to Resources, and then click License Manager or
Click Start>All Programs>Skyline TerraExplorer Pro and then click License Manager.
Installing TerraExplorer Pro
To install TerraExplorer Pro:
Note: On some operating systems, administrative privileges may be required.
1. If you have an old version of TerraExplorer Pro running, close it before continuing with the installation.
2. On your computer, browse to the setup.exe file and double-click. The setup program checks for an
existing TerraExplorer Pro on your computer. If there is another version of TerraExplorer Pro installed
already on your computer, a dialog box is displayed confirming that you want to uninstall the current
version.
InstallShield Wizard
3. Click OK to uninstall. The InstallShield Wizard is displayed.
4. Click Next. The License Agreement is displayed.
23
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
License Agreement
5. Click Yes to agree to the license agreement terms and continue the installation. The Customer
Information dialog box is displayed.
Note: This dialog is displayed only for users with administrative privileges.
24
TerraExplorer User Guide
Customer Information Dialog Box
6. Enter the required customer information, and click Next. The Choose Destination Location dialog box
is displayed.
25
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Choose Destination Location Dialog Box
7. Browse to the desired location for the TerraExplorer Pro installation, and click Next. The HASP Run-
time dialog box is displayed.
26
TerraExplorer User Guide
HASP Run-time Installation
8. If you want to install HASP Run-time, select the check box. Click Next.
27
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Install Dialog Box
9. Click Install. The installation copies the files to the destination folder.
Note: The .FLY file extension is associated with the last TerraExplorer or TerraExplorer Pro
application you have installed. If you want to change the association, open the application
you want to associate the .FLY file extension with, click TerraExplorer Options, and on
the General tab, click Set as Default. If you wish to keep using TerraExplorer as your
default viewer for .FLY files you should reinstall TerraExplorer after installing TerraExplorer
Pro.
Manual Installation of the HASP Driver
If you don’t install the HASP driver during TerraExplorer installation, you have an option to install it
manually.
To install the HASP driver:
1. Click Start > In the Windows run box, type: cmd, and then press Enter.
2. Type the path of the haspdinst.exe. file (included in the installation’s destination folder).
3. In the command prompt type: haspdinst.exe –i
Uninstalling TerraExplorer Pro
The Uninstall feature lets you quickly remove all folders and files that you installed to your hard disk
during the installation procedure.
To uninstall TerraExplorer Pro:
1. Exit the TerraExplorer Pro application.
28
TerraExplorer User Guide
2. On the Microsoft Windows desktop, click Start > Skyline TerraExplorer Pro > Uninstall
TerraExplorer Pro. The Uninstall dialog box is displayed.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions until all TerraExplorer Pro program files are removed.
Note: The .FLY file extension is associated with the last TerraExplorer or TerraExplorer Pro application
you have installed. If you uninstalled TerraExplorer Pro but wish to keep using TerraExplorer as
your viewer for .FLY files you should reinstall TerraExplorer.
Starting TerraExplorer Pro
You can start TerraExplorer Pro by doing one of the following:
Click Start > Skyline TerraExplorer Pro > TerraExplorer Pro.
Click the TerraExplorer Pro icon on your desktop.
Double-click on any .FLY file or any link to a .FLY file on an HTML page.
After the TerraExplorer Pro Start page appears, you are ready to open or create a FLY project.
29
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 3 NEW FEATURES IN RELEASE 7.2
Export 3D Mesh to Cesium 3D Tiles and I3S Formats
TEP 7.2 exports 3DML layers to Cesium 3D Tiles and I3S formats for compatibility with external viewing
and editing tools. Clip polygons can be used to export specific sections of a mesh layer.
Import and Convert Cesium 3D Tiles and OSGB Mesh Layers to 3DML
TEP 7.2 supports the import and conversion of Cesium 3D Tiles and OSGB layers to the stream
optimized, 3DML mesh layer format. This enables them to be streamed with SkylineGlobe Server and
merged with classification information so that you can access attribute data and perform feature layer
operations on the mesh layer. Selected sections of the 3DML can be imported using c lip polygons. New
Geometric Error Factor ensures proper display of imported 3DML in TerraExplorer.
Measurement Tool Enhancements
GUI Improvements – New distance and area measurement tools integrate all distance measurement
options in one dialog box, and all area options in another, to make it easy to perform multiple
measurements, and smoothly switch between commands.
New option to display horizontal and vertical distance measurements in 3D Window, in addition to
aerial.
Additional Display Units – TEP 7.2 expands the options for units of measure for speed and distance.
30
TerraExplorer User Guide
Copy and Paste Layer Styles
New styling copy-paste option enables you in two clicks to apply all the styling from one layer to another
feature or point cloud layer.
Enhanced Support for Oculus Rift VR
The new release offers enhanced support for the Oculus Rift virtual reality system:
Support for Oculus Rift S devices
Improved render quality and stability
Support for navigation modes
New virtual pointer casts ray from your hand controller to the 3D virtual world
Support for additional elements (video on terrain, decal labels, fire/explosion/smoke effects, and
more)
Head tracking to change viewpoint
Virtual TerraExplorer menus (measurement tools, show/hide layers, presentations, and more)
31
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
32
TerraExplorer User Guide
Expanded Model Formats
TEP 7.2 adds to its ever-growing list of supported 3D model formats: OBJ, a simple data-format that
represents 3D geometry.
SGS Publish to TerraExplorer for Mobile
The Publish Project to SkylineGlobe Server process creates three project URL’s: for TE Desktop, Web,
and Mobile. The TE for Mobile URL automatically opens the new TerraExplorer for Mobile v7 app.
New Point Cloud Format
TerraExplorer has added E57 point cloud files to its list of formats supported for conversion to CPT.
Enhanced KML Support
Support for additional tags
Clearer, more detailed log messages
3DML Terrain Imagery and Elevation
New options enable terrain imagery and elevation in mesh area to be replaced with the mesh’s lower
resolution data (Simplified Mesh) instead of the 3DML’s ground layer (created in 3DML from PhotoMesh)
for faster rendering and improved display performance.
Abort Capability for All Analysis Tools
New abort capability allows you to abort any analysis tool in the middle of calculations, thus avoiding,
potentially lengthy, unnecessary calculation processes.
Bug Fixes and Stability
This release improves overall stability and performance, and provides the following bug fixes:
Terrain profile for CPT data now displays accurately (NGN-235).
Fixed the display of DAE COLLADA models with a transparency element (NGN-256).
Corrected an issue relating to the shifting of converted LODTreeExport.xml layers (NGN-263).
Fixed issue relating to correct display of KML’s (NGN-291).
Resolved an API bug in which QueryElevationBuffer returned a null array for low resolution MPT and
small parameter values (APPS-1035).
Corrected a Display By Attribute bug relating to attribute names containing Chinese characters
(APPS-1155).
Resolved the issues related to display of feature layers in Chinese OS (APPS -1204).
Fixed a bug in TE Viewer 7.10 which affected the display of feature layers on local MPT (APPS -
1307).
Resolved an issue regarding altitude display when changing the altitude or altitude method of a
loaded Mapinfo TAB layer (APPS-1446)
33
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Publishing to SkylineGlobe from TerraExplorer now succeeds even when using a port other than the
default of 80 (APPS-1564).
New Features in Release 7.1
Integration of CityBuilder Tools in TerraExplorer Pro
Classify 3D Mesh layers - 3DML’s can now be classified directly from TerraExplorer, transforming
them into powerful geospatial data that fully supports spatial operations and attribute queries.
Import and Convert Mesh Layers - TerraExplorer 7.1 extends mesh layer support to include the
import and conversion of BIM and DAE formats to a stream-optimized 3DML.
New 3D Mesh Layer Capabilities
3DML Export to individual models - TerraExplorer 7.1 offers a wide range of options for exporting
polygonal areas of a 3DML, e.g., buildings, to individual OBJ models to enable you to easily extract
precisely the areas that you need. A point feature layer is also created in the export process that
34
TerraExplorer User Guide
contains the models’ positioning information.
Display Styles – Wide range of display options from x-ray to textured wireframe, as well as a new
swipe tool that enables you to dynamically swipe between styles to view the interior of buildings or
35
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
expose obscured sections of the 3D View.
Native support for 3D Tiles - Load mesh layers in OGC 3D Tiles (B3DM) format.
New 3D Mesh Layer Contextual Tab - Consolidates all relevant mesh layer commands in one tab
36
TerraExplorer User Guide
so that you can easily find the command or tool you need
37
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Enhanced BIM Capabilities
New powerful capabilities for BIM and other classified 3DML:
IFC support – Import and convert BIM models in Industry Foundation Classes (IFC) format.
Display by Attribute - Display the 3D elements in the selected 3DML classification layers based on
attribute values.
38
TerraExplorer User Guide
Colorize by Attribute - Colorize the 3D elements in the selected 3DML classification layers based on
attribute values.
39
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Swipe Display Style - Dynamically swipe between a 3DML’s display styles (e.g., x-ray, wireframe,
none) to view the interior of buildings or expose obscured sections of the 3D View.
New Analysis Tools
Swipe 3D Mesh Layers - New comparison tool supports enhanced spatial and visual analysis,
allowing you to carefully compare between two mesh layers , e.g., to contrast between the state of an
40
TerraExplorer User Guide
area before and after a disaster or visualize changes over time.
41
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
New Elevation Difference Tools - New tools analyze the elevation difference between 3D mesh
layers or between elevation layers in a defined polygonal area, allowing you to carefully compare
between two layers, e.g., to contrast between the state of an area before and after a landslide or
volcano, or to evaluate restorative efforts following mining activity.
42
TerraExplorer User Guide
Buffer Query – Tool scans for all 3D elements (e.g., 3D object or 3DML) within a set buffer zone of a
selected line and highlights them in the 3D Window. Can be used in implementation or testing of
security buffers around high-risk structures to ensure safe distance requirements.
Improved Volume Analysis - New Horizontal Surface option enables you to calculate the volume
added or removed by a horizontal surface, defined either by a polygon you draw or by polygons
already on the clipboard.
43
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Improved CPT Capabilities
Store attribute information in CPT – TerraExplorer’s Convert Point Cloud to CPT tool reads and
stores all scalar (attribute) information for each point in the CPT dataset. This attribute information
can be queried by the user for filtering and styling the point cloud model.
Style by attributes – Wide range of styling capabilities, based on point’s attribute information are
available in TerraExplorer 7.1 including point size, point color and point visibility.
Support LAZ format - TerraExplorer’s Convert Point Cloud to CPT tool now supports compressed
LAS (LAZ) format.
Improved Feature Layers Capabilities
KML layers - TerraExplorer 7.1 supports additional KML tags including Highlight tags
Reproject Feature Layers Elevation Values - New option to reproject the elevation values of
feature layers.
File GDB Editing Capabilities – New option to edit and save feature layers stored in File GDB
format.
Support for Oculus Rift VR
The latest release’s compatibility with the Oculus Rift virtual reality system offers an entirely new
perspective for viewing your model. With this new technology, users can fully immerse themselves in the
detailed, realistic 3D environment created in TerraExplorer, using slight, natural movements of their head
to easily fly through the 3D world. API is also available for the Oculus 3D navigation controls.
44
TerraExplorer User Guide
45
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Improved Integration to SkylineGlobe Server
SkylineGlobe Server Login - Relocated to top-right of application window.
Additional Tags for TerraExplorer for Web projects – TerraExplorer Pro 7.1 export additional
styling tags to enhance compatibility between TerraExplorer for Desktop and TerraExplorer for Web.
GUI and Usability
Snapping tools – Set of new snapping tools allow users to easily snap measurement operations or
feature editing tools to different elements in the 3D Window including points, lined and 3D edges.
New 3DML Contextual Tab – Consolidates all relevant mesh layer commands in one tab so that you
can easily find the command or tool you need.
Project Tree Radio Groups – New functionality enables you to set any Project Tree group as a radio
group, so that all items in the group are mutually exclusive.
46
TerraExplorer User Guide
SkylineGlobe Server Login - Relocated to top-right of application window.
Improved KML Support
TerraExplorer 7.1 features support for KML files’ radio group settings.
Mapbox Layer Support
TerraExplorer 7.1 supports the loading of Mapbox layers. A Mapbox access token is required.
API Improvements
Additional API method and properties are now available
47
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 4 BASIC CONCEPTS
Start Page
The Start Page is the first page you see after opening TerraExplorer Pro from the Program Files menu or
from the desktop icon.
When you start TerraExplorer Pro by selecting a .FLY file or link, TerraExplorer Pro opens the project
directly and does not show the Start Page. The Start Page also appears after you close your current
project.
TerraExplorer Pro Start Page
Start Page options:
Open TerraExplorer project from file – Opens a dialog box in which you can browse to a project
file.
Open SkylineGlobe.com demo project – Opens a .fly on http://www.skylineglobe.com with detailed
feature, raster, and mesh layers.
Videos of major TerraExplorer Features – Opens http://www.skylineglobe.com with videos
demonstrating TerraExplorer's key features.
Recent projects – Opens one of your recent TerraExplorer projects.
Business and Technology Relations email – Opens an email message targeted to Skyline’s sales
and marketing group.
Technical Support email – Opens an email message targeted to Skyline’s Technical support group.
48
TerraExplorer User Guide
License Agreement – Displays the TerraExplorer Pro Software license agreement on the main
window.
Application Layout
The TerraExplorer display is divided into four primary panels:
Panel Description
3D Window The heart of TerraExplorer Pro. In this window, you view the terrain
and overlaid content in 3D.
Project Tree Contains a list of all the items in the project organized in a tree
structure.
See “Using the Project Tree” chapter for further information.
Navigation Map Provides quick and easy navigation through the entire terrain. It
shows the location and direction of view of the camera. The
Navigation Map window offers a simple mechanism to integrate
file-based maps into the application. With the support of the
TerraExplorer Pro COM interface, web based maps can also be
integrated as part of the HTML window.
See the “Navigation Map” chapter for further information.
Error/Message Log The TerraExplorer log records and displays warnings, messages,
and errors to help you troubleshoot any TerraExplorer issue.
See “Error/Message Log” in this chapter for more information.
The Project Tree, Navigation Map and 3D Window can be arranged in five different standard layouts:
Standard Layouts
Five standard layouts are available:
Normal
Maximize
Full Screen
Stereo
Oculus VR
To select a standard layout:
On the View tab, in the Layout group, click one of the following layout options:
Layout Option Description
Normal TerraExplorer restored to normal size. If the layout was customized
(See “Customized Layouts” below), then it is restored to the
customized layout.
Maximize TerraExplorer application maximized to entire screen. Docked
panels set to auto-hide mode, and Ribbon minimized (See “Auto-
Hide” in this chapter for more information).
Full Screen 3D Window maximized to entire screen, and Ribbon hidden (Alt +
Enter).
49
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Stereo Side-by-side stereo view on any supporting displays (See “Viewing
in Stereo” in this chapter for more information).
Oculus Virtual Reality (VR) TerraExplorer is compatible with the Oculus Rift virtual reality
system, which enables you to use slight, natural head movements
to easily fly through the 3D world.
Note: In Normal or Maximize layout, the size of each of these panels can be adjusted by moving their
borders.
To move a border:
Rest the cursor on the partition until it changes to a double-headed arrow, and then drag horizontally
or vertically.
Viewing in Stereo
Stereo viewing provides added depth and realism to the 3D visualization. It uses a standard technique of
rendering two images – one for the left eye and one for the right – side by side on the screen. Supporting
displays (screens and projectors) use various methods to deliver the proper view to each eye, thus
conveying true-to-life 3D depth perception.
To view in stereo mode:
On the View tab, in the Layout group, click Stereo.
Multiple Windows in One Panel
The application’s panels can include any number of additional HTML windows in addition to the standard
window. Using the tab mechanism, you can switch between the windows.
Any HTML page can be displayed on the HTML window. This window is based on the Internet Explorer
browser and supports all features supported by the latest Internet Explorer browser installed on your
machine. HTML windows can be added as fixed windows, using the container settings, or as hyperlink
messages.
Using the capabilities of the TerraExplorer Pro COM interface, HTML pages can comm unicate with other
elements of TerraExplorer Pro.
Customized Layouts
You can create the application layout that is most convenient for you by repositioning panels (e.g., the
Navigation Map, Project Tree, Error/Message Log, or any of the TerraExplorer Tools) on the screen.
To reposition a panel:
1. Click the panel's title bar and drag the panel from its current location. A guide diamond with four
arrows appears.
2. If you want the panel to float in front of the other application panels, drag it to the desired location.
3. If you want to dock the panel, do the following:
a. Drag the panel towards the location where you want to dock it, and then rest the cursor on the
guide diamond arrow that best corresponds to the desired docking location. A shaded blue outline
of the panel appears in the area where the panel will dock.
b. Release the mouse button to dock the panel in the area indicated.
Note: All TerraExplorer Tools initially open in the same location - at the bottom, left side of the screen.
When multiple tools are opened simultaneously, a tab displays for each tool on the bottom of the
50
TerraExplorer User Guide
tool window. If you want to move one of these tools to a different screen location, click the tool’s
tab and drag it, as described in the steps above.
Hiding and Displaying Panels
The Project Tree, Navigation Map, Error/Message Log, and Tool Windows can be hidden from view,
leaving more room on your screen for the 3D Window.
Hide
To hide a panel entirely, do any of the following:
On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, clear the check boxes of the panels you want hidden.
Note: This option is only available for the Project Tree and Navigation Map.
Right-click the panel’s title bar, and from the shortcut menu, select Hide.
Click the X on the right side of the panel’s title bar.
To restore a panel that was hidden:
On the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select the check box of the panel you want res tored or
reopen the tool. For the Error/Message Log, click the icon below the 3D Window.
Auto-Hide
When a panel is in auto-hide, a tab appears on an edge of the screen that controls the panel’s display.
When the cursor rests on the tab, the panel displays, and when it is moved away from the tab and the
displayed panel, the panel disappears.
To auto-hide a panel:
Click the pushpin icon on the panel’s title bar.
To view an auto-hidden panel:
Move the cursor over the panel’s tab.
Note: If you want to hide the panel again, move the cursor off the panel.
To restore a panel from auto-hide, do either of the following:
Right-click the panel’s title bar, and from the shortcut menu, clear the Auto Hide option.
Click the pushpin icon on the panel’s title bar.
Message Bar
The Message bar displays a variety of text and HTML messages. Any hyperlink message for objects,
presentations or any other item in the system can be displayed on the Message bar. The Message bar
cannot include multiple windows. Anytime a new message appears, it overrides the previous one. The
Message Bar is a mandatory auto-hide window and cannot be removed.
The Message Bar can display the following information:
Hyperlink messages for objects, presentations, locations and tree messages.
Start project message.
System information messages that display the loading and saving status.
51
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Present measurement information (when the Measure feature is used).
Information by external applications and HTML pages using the COM interface.
TerraExplorer Ribbon
Similar to the Microsoft Office Ribbon, that is a component of the Office Fluent user interface, the
TerraExplorer Ribbon organizes all commands in logical groups, which are collected together under tabs.
Each tab relates to a type of activity, such as navigating in the map or working with objects. To reduce
clutter on your screen, certain tabs, such as the Feature Layer and Presentation tabs are displayed only
when their commands are needed.
There are eight primary tabs in TerraExplorer:
Home
Analysis
Layers
Objects
Effects
Navigation
View
Tools
The File menu located at the upper left hand corner of the application, replaces the TerraExplorer
button of previous versions. The following commands are available from the File menu :
Command Shortcut Key Activity
New CTRL+N Creates a new TerraExplorer Pro project. See “Creating
a New .FLY Project” in this chapter for information.
Open CTRL+O Opens an existing TerraExplorer Pro project (.FLY file).
See “Loading an Existing Project” in this chapter for
information.
Save CTRL+S Saves the current project. See “Save Project” in this
chapter for information.
Save As CTRL+SHIFT+S Saves the current project using a different name. See
“Save As…” in this chapter for information.
Publish Prepares the project for distribution to external users,
through one of the following methods:
Publishing the project and all its layers and
resources to SkylineGlobe Server, Skyline’s private
cloud solution. Through a single publishing
operation, the project is made available to desktop,
mobile and TE for Web clients, as well as standard
geospatial clients such as WFS/W FS-
T/WMS/WMTS/3D Tiles (Cesium).
Creating an easily distributable local or offline kit, or
52
TerraExplorer User Guide
KMZ file.
See “Publishing TerraExplorer Kits” in this chapter and
“Publishing a Project to SkylineGlobe Server” in the
“Working with SkylineGlobe Server” for information.
Print… CTRL+P Prints the current 3D View. The print option opens the
Print dialog box and allows you to select the destination
printer.
Resources Opens resources that help you learn how to use the
application or that display license information (e.g.,
Online Help, Programmer’s Guide, License Manager,
Interactive Tutorial). See “TerraExplorer Resources” in
this chapter for information.
Close CTRL+F4 Closes the current project and opens the Start Page.
See “Closing a Project” in this chapter for information.
TerraExplorer Opens a dialog box in which you determine your
Options working environment (e.g., cache size, navigation
mode, units, screen overlay. See “Using TerraExplorer
Options” for information
Home Tab
The Home tab contains standard commands for project management.
Home Tab
Group Description
Selection See “Selecting Objects for Editing” and “Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Objects” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for information.
Environment See “Date and Time” and “Environmental Effects” in the “Basic Concepts” chapter
and “Shadow Tools” in the “Analysis Tools” chapter for information.
Navigation See “Underground Navigation” in the “Navigating in the 3D World” chapter and “Walk
Mode” in the “Navigating in the 3D World” chapter for information.
Add See the “Working with Objects”, “Presentations”, “Feature Layers”, “Imagery and
Elevation Layers”, “3D Mesh Layers”, "Complex Layers", “Point Cloud Layers”,
“Locations”, and “Using the Project Tree” chapters for information.
Project See the “Setting the Project” chapter and “Publishing TerraExplorer Kits” in this
chapter and “Publishing a Project to SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Working with
SkylineGlobe Server” chapter for information.
Analysis Tab
The Analysis tab contains commands for performing measurements and terrain analysis.
53
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Analysis Tab
Group Description
Measurement See “Measurement Tools” in the “Analysis Tools” chapter for
information.
Terrain Analysis See “Terrain Analysis Tools” in the “Analysis Tools” chapter for
information.
Line of Sight See “Line of Sight Tools” in the “Analysis Tools” chapter for
information.
Comparison See “Comparison Tools” in the “Analysis Tools” chapter for
information.
Shadow See “Shadow Tools” in the “Analysis Tools” chapter for information.
Layers Tab
The Layers tab contains commands for adding layers to the project and for converting data to formats
which provide better performance.
Layers Tab
Group Description
SGS See “Loading SkylineGlobe Layers” in the “Working with
SkylineGlobe Server” chapter for information.
Feature See the “Feature Layers” chapter for information.
Complex See the "Complex Layers" chapter for information.
3D Mesh See the “3D Mesh Layers” chapter for information.
Point Cloud See the “Point Cloud Layers” chapter for information.
Raster See the “Imagery and Elevation Layers” chapter for information.
Objects Tab
The Objects tab contains commands for adding objects to the 3D World.
54
TerraExplorer User Guide
Objects Tab
Group Description
Label See “Text and Image Labels” in the “Objects and Labels” chapter
for information.
Video See “Video on Terrain and Video Billboard” in the “Objects and
Labels” chapter for information.
2D Objects See “2D Objects” in the “Objects and Labels” chapter for
information.
3D Objects See “3D Objects” in the “Objects and Labels” chapter for
information.
Terrain Objects See "Terrain Objects" in the "Objects and Labels " chapter for
information.
Dynamic Objects See “Dynamic Objects” in the “Objects and Labels” chapter for
information.
Libraries See “Loading Objects from the Data Library” and “Loading Objects
from Sketchup Warehouse” in the “Working with Objects” chapter
for information.
Effects Tab
The Effects tab contains commands for creating and setting environment and weather effects and
animations
Effects Tab
Group Description
Weather See “Weather Effects” in the “Effects” chapter for information.
Animation See “Animation Effects” in the “Effects” chapter for information.
Water See “Water Effects” in the “Effects” chapter for information.
Navigation Tab
The Navigation tab contains commands for navigating in the 3D Window.
55
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Navigation Tab
Group Description
3D Mode See “3D Modes” in the “Navigating in the 3D World” chapter for
information.
Navigate to See “Navigating Using Ribbon Controls” in the “Navigating in the
3D World” chapter for information.
Navigation Modes See “Navigating in Walk Mode” in the “Navigating in the 3D World”
chapter for information.
Map See the “Navigation Map” chapter for information.
Navigation Aid See “GPS Tracking,” “Target,” “Look Around Tool”, “Obtaining
Address Details” and “Multiple Coordinate Systems” in the
“Navigating in the 3D World” chapter.
View Tab
The View tab contains commands for changing your view, layout, and overlay of the 3D Window.
View Tab
Group Description
Layout See “Standard Layouts” in the “Basic Concepts” chapter for
information.
Terrain Imagery See “Terrain Opacity” and “Hide Terrain” in the “Basic Concepts”
chapter for information.
Show/Hide See “Hiding and Displaying Panels” in the “Basic Concepts”
chapter for information.
Units See “Units” in the “Basic Concepts” chapter for information.
Screen Overlay See “Using Screen Overlay" in the “Basic Concepts” chapter for
information.
Field of View See “Field of View” in the “Basic Concepts” chapter for information.
Tools Tab
The Tools tab contains commands that manage layout and display modes.
56
TerraExplorer User Guide
Tools Tab
Group Description
Snapshot See “Snapshot Tool” in the “Working with Tools” chapter for
information.
Extract Terrain See “Extracting Terrain to MPT”, “Extracting Terrain to VRML”, and
“Extracting Terrain to Zebra” in the “Working with Tools” chapter for
information.
Collaboration See “Collaboration Tool” in the “Working with Tools” chapter for
information.
Draw Tool See “Drawing Tools” in the “Working with Tools” chapter for
information.
Time See “Timespan Tool” in the “Working with Tools” chapter for
information.
Calculate See “Block Width Tool” in the “Working with Tools” chapter for
information.
Feature Layer Tab
The Feature Layer tab is only displayed when a layer is selected. It contains commands for editing and
querying layers and displaying layer properties.
Feature Layer Tab
Group Description
Layer See “Setting and Editing Feature Layer Properties ” in the “Feature
Layers” chapter for information.
Selection See “Working with Features” in the “Feature Layers” chapter for
information.
Edit See “Feature Layer Operations” in the “Feature Layers” chapter for
information.
Attributes See “Searching and Performing Operations by Attribute (Attribute
Table Tool)” in the “Feature Layers” chapter for information.
Load and Save See “Saving Feature Layers” in the “Feature Layers” chapter for
information.
57
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
3D Mesh Layer Tab
The 3D Mesh Layer tab is only displayed when a 3DML is selected. It contains commands for editing and
querying mesh layers, classifying them, displaying their properties, and saving/exporting them.
3D Mesh Layer Tab
Group Description
General See “Setting and Editing 3D Mesh Layer Properties”, “Display
Tools", and “Modifying a 3D Mesh Layer" in the “3D Mesh Layers”
chapter for information.
Mesh Layer See “Classifying a 3D Mesh Layer”, “Exporting Mesh Layers to
Other Formats”, and “Exporting Mesh Layer to Models” in the “3D
Mesh Layers” chapter for information.
Classification Layer See “Editing Feature Layer Properties”, “Saving Layer Changes to
the Original Data Source”, and “Saving Layer Changes to a New
File” in the “3D Mesh Layers” chapter for information.
Selection See “Selecting Features from the 3D Window” and “Spatial
Queries” in the “3D Mesh Layers” chapter for information.
Attributes See “Searching and Performing Operations by Attribute (Attribute
Table Tool)” and “Editing Feature Attributes” in the “3D Mesh
Layers” chapter for information.
Load and Save See “Saving Feature Layers” in the “3D Mesh Layers” chapter for
information.
Presentation Tab
The Presentation tab is only displayed when a presentation is selected. It contains commands for creating
and playing presentations.
Presentation Tab
Group Description
Locations See “Creating and Editing a Presentation” in the “Presentations”
chapter for information.
Operations See “Displaying Required Content on Application Screen” and
“Adding Captions” in the “Presentations” chapter for information.
Play See “Playing a Presentation”,“Setting Presentation Options”, and
“Adding Captions” in the “Presentations” chapter for information.
58
TerraExplorer User Guide
Movie See “Creating Movies” in the “Presentations” chapter for
information.
Shortcut Keys
Most commands can be accessed through a keyboard shortcut. You do not need to remember these
shortcuts, however, since they display on the screen when you press the ALT key.
Note: Some alternate shortcut keys appear in this documentation in parentheses in the section where
the command is explained.
To use a shortcut key:
1. Press ALT. The Key Tips are displayed over each main tab and over each command on the Quick
Access toolbar.
TerraExplorer Key Tips
2. Press the letter or number shown in the Key Tip over the tab/command that you want to use.
3. If you pressed a letter over one of the tabs, that tab is displayed showing Key Tips over the enabled
commands. Press the letter of the required command.
Note: Pressing ALT a second time hides the Key Tips.
Quick Access Toolbar
The Quick Access toolbar is a customizable toolbar that contains a set of commands that are
independent of the tab that is currently displayed.
Commands can be added or deleted from the Quick Access toolbar, according to each user’s needs and
convenience.
Adding/Deleting Commands from the Quick Access Toolbar
The Quick Access toolbar can be customized in two ways:
By right-clicking the required commands on each tab.
Note: This method is recommended for addition/deletion of just a few commands.
By opening a dialog box in which you select the commands to include in the Quick Access toolbar.
Note: This method is recommended for extensive modification of the Quick Access toolbar.
Adding/Deleting Commands by Right-Clicking
To add or delete a command:
1. If you want to add a command to the Quick Access toolbar, do the following:
59
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
a. On the required tab, right-click the command you want added to the Quick Access toolbar.
b. From the shortcut menu, select Add to Quick Access Toolbar. The command is added to the
Quick Access toolbar.
2. If you want to delete a command from the Quick Access toolbar, do the following:
a. On the Quick Access toolbar, right-click the command you want to delete.
b. From the shortcut menu, select Remove from Quick Access Toolbar. The command is deleted
from the Quick Access toolbar.
Adding/Deleting Commands Using the Customize Dialog Box
To add or delete commands from the Customize dialog box:
1. Right-click anywhere on the Ribbon.
2. From the shortcut menu, select Customize Quick Access Toolbar. The Customize dialog box is
displayed.
3. From the Choose commands from drop-down list, select the grouping whose commands you want
to add or remove from the Quick Access toolbar. The options include: all of TerraExplorer’s Ribbon
tabs, as well as File and Print Preview.
The Commands section displays all of the commands that are available on the selected option. The
section on the right side of the dialog box displays all the commands in all tabs that are presently
included on your Quick Access toolbar.
4. If you want to add a command, select it in the Commands list and click Add.
5. If you want to remove a command, select it in the section on the right side of the dialog box, and click
Remove.
6. If you want to change the order in which the commands are displayed on the Quick Access toolbar, in
the section on the right side of the dialog box, select the command whose position you want changed
and use the arrow keys on the right to shift its position on the toolbar.
7. If you want to restore the Quick Access toolbar its default group of commands, click Reset.
Note: The default commands included in the Quick Access toolbar are: New, Open and Save.
8. Click OK.
Moving the Quick Access Toolbar
The Quick Access toolbar can be located in either of the following locations:
Upper-left corner, above the Ribbon (default location) - Maximizing your work space.
Below the Ribbon - With more convenient access from your work area.
To move the Quick Access toolbar from its current location:
1. Right-click anywhere on the Ribbon.
2. From the shortcut menu, select Show Quick Access Toolbar Below the Ribbon/ Show Quick Access
Toolbar Above the Ribbon.
Creating and Opening a Project
You can do either of the following:
Create a New .FLY Project
Load an Existing Project
60
TerraExplorer User Guide
Creating a New .FLY Project
To create a new .FLY project:
From the File menu , select New (Ctrl +N). The Open Terrain Database dialog box is displayed.
1. Enter the name of the local or remote MPT database, or browse to the required local database. See
“Opening a Remote Database (MPT or DirectConnect Project) from SkylineGlobe Server” in this
chapter for information.
2. If you instead want to open a low resolution MPT included in the installation folder, type:
“%localterrain%”.
3. Click OK.
Opening a Remote Database (MPT or DirectConnect Project)
A remote database is an MPT file or a TerraBuilder DirectConnect project (TBP) published to a
SkylineGlobe server.
To open an MPT/TBP file from a SkylineGlobe server:
Use: <Layer Name>@<SkylineGlobe Server URL>:<Port Number>/SG
(e.g., washington-dc.12345.mpt@t globe.skylineglobe.com/SG)
Note: The Port Number is only required when not using the default port 80.
Note: When opening an MPT or TBP file from a SkylineGlobe server (that is configured to use
SSL) over a secure connection (SSL), use <Layer Name>@<SkylineGlobe Server
URL>:<Port Number>$/SG
To open an MPT/TBP file from a legacy TerraGate server:
Use: <Layer Name>@<name of the TerraGate server or IP address
Loading an Existing Project
To load an existing project from file:
1. From the File menu , point to Open and select Open Project from File. The Open dialog box is
displayed.
2. Enter a file name or URL, or browse to an existing .FLY file in your file system.
Note: If you use a URL, you must enter the complete address, including the file name. For
example:
http://www.skylineglobe.com/SkylineGlobeLayers/SG_ExternalFlys/ skylineglobe7.fly
Note: You can also open a .FLY project by double-clicking on any .FLY file in your file system or any
link to a .FLY file on an HTML page. If the TerraExplorer Basic viewer, and not TerraExplorer Pro,
is your default viewer for .FLY files, you can still use this feature by opening TerraExplorer Pro
and then selecting the .FLY file or link.
Note: At any point while loading a project, you can hit the ESC key to abort.
To load an existing project from SkylineGlobe Server:
1. From the File menu , point to Open and select Open Project from SkylineGlobe .
2. If you aren’t already connected to a SkylineGlobe Server, the Login SkylineGlobe Server dialog box is
first displayed. Click Log in to connect to a server. See “Logging In to a SkylineGlobe Server” in the
“Working with SkylineGlobe Server” chapter for more information.
61
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
3. The SkylineGlobe Layer dialog box is displayed showing all project layers on your SkylineGlobe
server.
SkylineGlobe Layers Dialog Box
4. Select the required project layer and click Load.
Saving a Project
You can save a project and its system information in a permanent file. The . FLY file is a compressed
binary file that contains all the project settings and content. The . FLY file does not include the actual
terrain databases (MPT file) or any other loaded 2D or 3D files. It only contains pointers to the local or
remote files.
The names of the external files are stored in the .FLY file in their full path format. You can copy .FLY files
to other locations in your local system, but not to remote computers or servers.
Note: You can create projects for distribution, either on an external storage device or on network
servers, by publishing the project. See “Publishing TerraExplorer Kits” in this chapter for more
information.
Save Project
To save a project:
From the File menu , select Save (Ctrl + S).
62
TerraExplorer User Guide
Save As…
To save a project under a different name or in a different directory:
1. From the File menu , select Save As.
2. In the Save Project As dialog box, select a path and type a new project name.
3. Click Save.
Export to KML
A TerraExplorer project can be exported to an OGC KML file. KML uses a tag-based structure with
nested elements and attributes and is based on the XML standard. All tags are case-sensitive and must
appear exactly as they are listed in the OpenGIS® KML Encoding Standard (OGC KML) reference. The
export process preserves TerraExplorer object properties as accurately as possible by translating
TerraExplorer objects to their equivalent KML geometries. If there is no KML element that precisely
represents a TerraExplorer object, TerraExplorer uses the closest match.
The following translations are performed:
TerraExplorer 2D objects Equivalent KML geometry
Rectangle, regular polygon, ellipse, circle Polygon
Arc:
Fill opacity =0 Line string
Fill opacity >0 Polygon
Arrow:
Polyline
style
Polygon
styles
Image label, text label Point
Video on terrain 3D model with direction to the source object
and with message that contains the video.
63
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer 3D objects Equivalent KML object
Box, sphere, cone, cylinder, 3D arrow, pyramid 3D model
Building 3D model
3D Model (that does not contain DAE) Label
Modify Terrain Does not export.
Hole on terrain Does not export.
Multi-polygon Multi-polygon
Polygon with hole Polygon with hole
3D Polygon
Polygon
with altitude = 0 relative to terrain
with altitude ≠ 0 relative to terrain 3D Model
Rectangle with texture, polygon (only with 4 Ground overlay
vertexes) with texture, imagery layer.
Note: Only if their resources contain the following
formats: jpeg, BMP, tif, png, gif.
When exporting a project with a presentation to KML, the following Tour tags are exported (Tag, Parent
Tag):
<gx:Tour> <gx:Document>
<gx:PlayList> <gx:Tour>
<gx:FlyTo> <gx:PlayList>
<gx:duration> <gx:FlyTo>
<gx:flyToMode> <gx:FlyTo>
<Camera> <gx:FlyTo>
<gx:AnimationUpdate> <gx:Tour>
To export a project to a KML file:
1. On the File menu , point to Save As, and then select Export Project to KML.
2. In the Save Project As dialog box, select a path and type a new project name.
3. Click Save.
Closing a Project
To close a project:
From the File menu , select Close. If you haven’t saved changes, a dialog box is displayed
64
TerraExplorer User Guide
asking whether you want to save your changes.
Note: When the application is in minimized mode, it stays open, but stops processing. All routes, flights,
dynamic objects, etc. halt their movement. No CPU power is consumed in this mode. When the
application is restored, all movement resumes from the point at which it was halted. The
TerraExplorer Pro application is also halted when the 3D Window is completely covered by other
applications.
Coordinate System
A coordinate system is a reference system used to represent the locations of project data within a
common coordinate framework. A coordinate system can be projected (X, Y), geographic (latitude-
longitude), or geocentric (X, Y, Z). Each coordinate system is defined by a Well-Known Text (WKT)
definition string, a simple structured, text-based format for spatial reference system information that is
easy to store and share between systems (See http://portal.opengeospatial.org/files/?artifact_id=999 and
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Well-known_text_representation_of_coordinate_reference_systems). A
coordinate system can optionally include a vertical datum that defines the origin for height values.
All project layers must be displayed in the terrain coordinate system. When you add a new layer to a
project, TerraExplorer tries to read its coordinate system. If TerraExplorer is able to do so, it automatically
reprojects the layer to the project’s coordinate system. If the layer does not include coordinate system
information or TerraExplorer is unable to read this information, you can indicate the coordinate system of
this source, as provided by the data supplier, in the Coordinate System dialog box. TerraExplorer then
converts the layer data to the project’s coordinate system. Although the source file retains its original
coordinate system, it is placed on the terrain according to the reprojection parameters.
Coordinate System Dialog Box
The Coordinate System dialog box is a high-level dialog box that allows you to select, view, and edit a
coordinate system. You can also use this dialog box to define new coordinate systems that are not
already defined. This dialog box is accessed in the following cases:
The coordinate system of a project’s base MPT is reprojected from the Project Settings, Terrain
Database tab. See “Terrain Database” in the “Setting the Project” chapter for information.
The coordinate system of a feature or raster layer is changed from the layer’s property sheet (In the
Projection Group, in the Coordinate System field, click Set.).
An imagery or elevation layer does not have coordinate information or TerraExplorer cannot read it
from file - in this case, the Coordinate System dialog box directly opens.
A navigation map’s coordinate system is changed from the Navigation Map Settings dialog box. See
“Reprojecting a Navigation Map” in the “Navigation Map” chapter for information.
65
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Coordinate System Dialog Box
To select a coordinate system:
1. Enter the coordinate system information using one of the following methods:
Click History and select one of the recently used coordinate systems. The last 20 coordinate
systems used are saved in the History for future use.
In the Search field, type the EPSG code or a phrase from the Coordinate system Description, as
indicated by the supplier, and click Search. Then select the required result from the search
results displayed directly below.
In the Well Known Text section, type the WKT. The Well Known Text representation of spatial
reference systems, regulated by the Open Geospatial Consortium (OGC), provides a standard
66
TerraExplorer User Guide
textual representation for coordinate system information. You can edit an existing WKT. See
"https://www.opengeospatial.org/standards/wkt-crs" for more information.
Note: A custom coordinate system is listed with all the other coordinate systems, with an
asterisk in the Custom column.
2. If the coordinate system includes a vertical datum, click Set and select a vertical datum from the list of
supported datums.
3. Click OK.
To delete coordinate systems from History:
1. Click History, and then in the list of coordinate systems, right-click the required custom system, and
select one of the following:
Delete the selected item – To delete only the selected item.
Delete all the history items – To clear all coordinate systems from the History.
2. Click OK.
Using Screen Overlay
There are several controls and indicators that can be displayed in the 3D Window to orient you and help
you navigate:
Navigation Controls
Center Sign
Status Bar
Scale Bar
Date and Time Slider
To display/hide a screen overlay element:
On the View tab, in the Screen Overlay group, select/clear the required element’s check box.
Navigation Controls
The navigation controls and virtual joystick enable you to rotate, tilt or zoom in or out of the terrain, free-fly
in the 3D World and change the camera tilt and plane direction. See “Navigating Using On-Screen
Navigation Controls” in the “Navigating in the 3D World” chapter for more information.
67
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Navigation Controls
Center Sign
The Center Sign displays the 3D Window center point.
Center Sign
Status Bar
The status bar displays:
The longitude, latitude, altitude, and direction of the plane/camera. Clicking on the status bar opens
the Jump to Location panel. See “Jump to Location Panel” in the “Navigating in the 3D World” chapter
for further information.
The current terrain buffering level in a graphical format. The display quality indicator represents the
current terrain resolution for the area shown in the 3D Window, compared to the estimated maximum
resolution available in the terrain database. The graphic bar indicates values from 0% -100% of
quality.
Copyright text (See “Screen Overlay” in the “Setting the Project” chapter).
Status Bar
Scale Bar
The scale bar shows the ratio of a distance in the 3D virtual World to the corresponding distance in the
actual world.
Date and Time Slider
The Date and Time Slider enables you to modify the current date and time so you can view each area of
terrain in the date and time range that you require. If the sun is used as the project’s light source, the
displayed light on the terrain corresponds to the sunlight there is on the terrain at the hour and date
68
TerraExplorer User Guide
indicated by the blue marker on the slider. The objects displayed on the terrain at each selected time
correspond to the timespans that were set for these objects. The timespan for an object or group can be
set in its property sheet.
Note: Project startup settings for the date and time can be set in the Atmospheric Effects tab in the
Project Settings dialog box. See “Date and Light Effects” in the “Setting the Project” chapter for
information.
To use the Date and Time slider:
1. On the Home tab, in the Environment group, click Time Slider. The Date and Time slider is
displayed on the upper left corner of the 3D Window.
Date and Time Slider
2. You can display TerraExplorer elements for a particular time and date or for a time range.
If you want to display data for a specific time and date, drag the blue marker and yellow arrow
together to the required date and time on the slider.
If you want to display data whose timespans fall anywhere in a time range, drag the blue marker
to the start point of the time range and the yellow arrow to the endpoint of the time range .
See “Timespan” in the “Working with Tools” chapter for more information on timespans.
Note: The yellow arrow displays on the time slider only when the Project time range or
Automatically adjust range to selected item settings are selected in the Date and Time
Setting dialog box. See below.
Note: If the sun is used as the project’s light source, the displayed light on the terrain
corresponds to the sunlight there is on the terrain at the hour indicated by the blue marker.
3. Click the Date and Time Settings icon to the right of the slider to select a mode. The Date and
Time Setting dialog box is displayed.
69
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Date and Time Setting Dialog Box
4. Select one of the following time zones. The time zone you select determines which time zone is used
for the time you select in the Date and Time Setting section in the same dialog box.
My computer -Your local time zone.
UTC (coordinated Universal Time) - UTC time (GMT + 0:00).
Specific - The time zone you select from the drop-down list.
5. Control the interval of time for which you can view objects and features with timespans by selecting a
date and time range for the date/time slider:
Project time range
The slider’s time range corresponds to the project’s time range. Date and hour adjustments are
both made on the same slider.
Always use <> at viewer position
70
TerraExplorer User Guide
The slider’s time range is 24 hours.
This option also requires you to select a specific time which will be the default current time (until
the time is changed on the slider).
One year range (two sliders)
The time slider’s range is 24 hours and the date slider’s range is one year.
6. If you want the date and time sliders ranges to automatically readjust to correspond to the timespan
of the selected item, select the Automatically adjust range to selected item check box.
7. Set the project’s current time and date or time range.
Note: The current date and time can only be set when Project time range is selected above and
there are objects or groups in the project for which timespans were set.
If you want to set a specific current time and date, set the same Start and End Date and Time.
The blue marker and yellow arrow are displayed together on the slider .
If you want to set a current time range so that all objects and features whose timespans fall
anywhere in the range display, set a Start Date and Time, and then set an End Date and Time.
The blue marker on the slider indicates the Start Date/Time and the yellow arrow indicates the
End Date/Time .
Note: Start and end date and time must be within the project range.
3D Window Viewing Options
The following settings affect the view in the 3D Window:
Terrain Opacity
Hide Terrain
Field of View
Units
Terrain Opacity
You can set the opacity of the terrain in the 3D Window. The opacity is defined as a percentage, where
100% is opaque and 0% is transparent. When the opacity is less than 100% (opaque) objects that are
submerged in the terrain become visible through it.
71
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Terrain Objects with Controlled Terrain Opacity
To change the terrain opacity:
On the View tab, in the Terrain Imagery group, drag the Terrain Opacity slider.
Terrain Opacity Slider
Hide Terrain
You can hide the terrain texture (the terrain appears as a black image).
To toggle the display of the terrain on/off:
On the View tab, in the Terrain Imagery group, click Hide Terrain.
Field of View
The field of view is the size of the camera’s viewing angle, or the zoom level of the camera. TerraExplorer
Pro’s field of view ranges from 15 to 90 degrees, with 53 degrees set as the default.
A wider field of view (larger angle) allows you to see more, with a decreased zoom level. A narrower field
of view (smaller angle) allows you to see less, with an increased zoom level. In some cases, you also
experience reduced performance of the TerraExplorer Pro application with a field of view less than 53
degrees.
To set the camera’s field of view:
On the View tab, click FOV and select one of the values.
Units
You can change the units used throughout TerraExplorer Pro. Changing the unit settings substantially
changes the display of your project: inputs and outputs, panels, property sheets, and Head Up displays
are all affected. Elevation, speed, distance and more, are affected by coordinate settings.
To change units:
On the View tab, in the Units group, select the speed, altitude, and coordinate units:
72
TerraExplorer User Guide
Parameter Description
Lat-Long Coordinates
Decimal Presents coordinate values in a decimal degrees format. This
option is only available when the terrain is defined in the Lat-Long
coordinate system.
Degrees; Minutes; Seconds Presents coordinate values in a degrees, minutes and seconds
format. This option is only available when the terrain is defined in
the Lat-Long coordinate system.
Speed
Km/h Sets the display units for speed to kilometers per hour.
Mph Sets the display units for speed to miles per hour.
Knots Sets the display units for speed to knots.
Altitude Units
Above Ground Level (AGL) Displays altitude values as meters or feet above ground level.
Absolute Values Displays altitude values as meters or feet above the terrain
database vertical datum base ellipsoid.
Light Source
You can turn the sunlight source on or off. When turned on, the sun, moon and sun flare objects are
positioned based on the project's current time, date and time zone, and the sun is used as the project's
light source. The sunlight affects the lighting on the terrain and on building objects.
Note: You can display a shadow effect based on the sun’s position for an entire scene (including terrain
and all 3D models, objects, and buildings), or for specific 3D objects in the 3D Window. The
shadows dynamically update when the system date and time is changed. See "Shadow Tools" in
the "Analysis Tools" chapter for more information.
To toggle the sunlight source on/off:
On the Home tab, in the Environment group, click Sun.
Note: Project startup settings for the light source can be set in the Date and Light tab in the Project
Settings dialog box. See “Date and Light Effects” in the “Setting the Project” chapter for further
information.
Error/Message Log
The TerraExplorer log records and displays warnings, messages, and errors to help you troubleshoot any
TerraExplorer issue. Logs can be exported and sent to Skyline support:
Errors - Alerts users of critical problems.
Warnings - Alerts users of conditions they should be aware of, which might cause problems in the
future.
Messages - Records various activities.
73
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Viewing the Log
To view the log:
1. Click the Log icon on the bottom of the 3D Window. The log opens.
Error, Message, and Warning Log
2. Click the Warnings, Messages and Errors buttons to toggle the display of their respective messages
on and off.
Clearing the Log
To clear the log:
At the top of the log, click Clear Log.
Stop Logging
To stop logging:
At the top of the log, click Stop Logging.
Hiding the Log
To hide the log:
On the top right corner of the log, click the X.
Dragging and Dropping Files in TerraExplorer
TerraExplorer’s drag and drop capability supports all raster and feature layer, image label, 3D model,
3DML, and CPT formats, in addition to, FLY, KML, KMZ, TBP, and MPT files. A single or multiple files can
be dragged and dropped anywhere on the 3D Window or Project Tree or to specific Project Tree groups.
Each dropped file is added to the current project as the TerraExplorer object that is the best match for the
respective file based on an analysis of the file’s properties as well as other factors. All file types supported
in TerraExplorer can be dragged and dropped into TerraExplorer, and are loaded into the project as
follows:
File Type How Loaded
FLY dropped onto TerraExplorer Start page (no Project file
project open)
74
TerraExplorer User Guide
FLY (project already open) Project layer
MPT dropped onto TerraExplorer Start page (no MPT Terrain database
already open)
MPT (MPT already open) Ignored
Geo-referenced layer Loaded in correct location on terrain
Non-geo-referenced layer Placed at the center of the 3D
Window
Feature layer Loaded with default settings
Raster layer: width & height < 1000px Image label
Raster layer: width & height > 1000px, elevation- Elevation layer
specific file format
Raster layer: width & height > 1000px, not elevation- Imagery layer
specific file format
Model dropped on polyline feature Dynamic object with the polyline as its
path
75
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 5 PUBLISHING TERRAEXPLORER PROJECTS
About Publishing TerraExplorer Projects
Projects can be published either as TerraExplorer kits, i.e., directories that contain the project and all
relevant files, or to SkylineGlobe Server, Skyline’s private cloud solution.
TerraExplorer kits can be distributed to external users using any external storage device. The Publish
TerraExplorer Kit process collects all the files that are used in the project and stores them in the target
directory.
When a project is published to SkylineGlobe Server, the project is made available through a single
publishing operation, to desktop, mobile and TE for Web clients, as well as standard geospatial clients
such as WFS/WFS-T/WMS/WMTS/3D Tiles (Cesium). The SkylineGlobe Server provides a
comprehensive set of web services for publishing, storing, managing and streaming your 3D spatial data.
The following options are available:
Publish Project as Local Kit - Gather local files and objects to a kit folder, maintaining references to all
network resources. When required, a TerraExplorer installation setup can be included in the kit.
Extract and Publish Area as Offline Kit - Extract a geographic subset of the project and copy all of its
local and network resources to local files, for use in a disconnected environment.
Publish Project as KMZ - Export a TerraExplorer project to an OGC KML/KMZ file.
Publish Project to SkylineGlobe Server - Publish an entire project and all its layers, resources, and
styling to SkylineGlobe Server, Skyline’s private cloud solution.
Publish Project as Local Kit
To publish a project as a local kit:
1. On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Publish Offline, and then click Publish Project as Local
Kit. The Publish TerraExplorer Kit dialog box is displayed.
The Publish TerraExplorer Kit dialog box is displayed.
76
TerraExplorer User Guide
Publish TerraExplorer Kit Dialog Box
2. In the Kit Folder field, enter or browse for the name of the folder that is to contain the files for the
TerraExplorer Kit.
3. In the Terrain database field, select one of the following options:
Field Activity
Do not copy terrain database Select this option to save time and disk space. You must copy the
to kit MPT file manually, directly to the external storage device (to the
same location as the .FLY file).
Copy terrain database to kit Select this option to copy the MPT file from its current location on
your hard (disk) drive to the Kit folder. This feature is only valid for
local MPTs and does not apply to remote files.
Keep link to original terrain This option enables creating and testing a TerraExplorer Kit
database without moving a large MPT file to the TerraExplorer Kit folder.
However, when creating a TerraExplorer Kit as a final stage before
saving to an external storage device, do not select this option
(otherwise, the .FLY project is not able to find the MPT file).
4. If you want to prepare an external storage device for a first-time user who does not already have
TerraExplorer installed, select the Include TerraExplorer install kit check box.
5. If you want to convert model layers to the optimized, fully textured 3DML format, select the check box.
If the check box is not selected, the layers with the models will be copied to the kit folder.
6. Click OK.
Extract and Publish Area as Offline Kit
The Extract and Publish Area as Offline Kit process enables you to create a directory for offline use that
contains the terrain, layers, objects, and resources of a selected subset of the TerraExplorer project.
After the user marks an area of interest by drawing a clip polygon in the 3D Window, TerraExplorer does
all the following:
Extracts the terrain in the selection area and saves it as an MPT in the kit folder.
Saves the section of each imagery layer that intersects with the selected area as a local MPT file in
the kit folder.
77
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Creates a subset feature layer (containing only the features that intersected with the selected area)
for each feature layer that intersects with the selected area in the kit folder.
Copies all objects that intersect with the selected area and any of their URL resources to the kit
folder.
To extract an area and publish it as an offline kit:
1. On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Publish Offline, and then select Extract and Publish
Area as Offline Kit. The Publish Project in Area to Offline Kit dialog box is display ed.
Extract and Publish Area as Offline Kit Dialog Box
2. In the Kit Folder field, enter or browse for the name of the folder that is to contain the files for the kit.
78
TerraExplorer User Guide
3. In the Project Area field, click Create and then in the 3D Window, mark the area of interest by
drawing a clip polygon.
a. In the 3D Window, click in the required locations to place the polygon points. You must place at
least three points.
b. Right-click to finish the polygon creation.
4. If you want to modify the polygon you drew, click Edit. Then do any of the following:
Move a node - In the 3D Window, place the cursor over one of the polygon’s nodes. The node
turns blue, and the cursor changes to Move mode . Click the node and drag it to the
required location in the XY Plane. Release the mouse button to set the node at the current
location.
Add a node - In the 3D Window, place the cursor over one of the red nodes and the cursor
changes to Move mode . Click to add a node, and then drag it to the required location.
Delete a node - In the 3D Window, place the cursor over the node you want to delete. The node
turns blue, and the cursor changes to Move mode . Right-click, and select Delete Node
from the shortcut menu.
Note: If you want to remove the polygon and create a new one, click Remove and repeat steps
3-4.
Note: You can also modify a polygon’s properties in its property sheet.
Extract Area Polygon Properties
5. In the Properties section, set the resolution of the project area by selecting a Meters per pixel value
from the drop-down list.
Note: The Meters per pixel list of values is based on the current terrain database (MPT file)
pyramid of resolutions.
6. If you want to prepare a TerraExplorer kit for a first-time user who does not already have
TerraExplorer installed, select the Include TerraExplorer install kit check box.
79
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
7. If you want to convert model layers to the optimized, fully textured 3DML format, select the check box.
If the check box is not selected, the layers with the models will be copied to the kit folder.
8. In the Properties section of the dialog box, select a Project area terrain resolution.
9. If you are updating an existing kit, you can skip terrain and layer extraction for existing files to
accelerate the process. In the Properties section of the dialog box, select any of the following check
boxes:
Do not replace existing terrain (MPT) database
Do not replace existing 3D layer files (3DML, CPT)
Do not replace existing raster files
Do not replace existing feature layer files
10. Click Publish to create the kit. The Estimate Size section of the dialog box displays the size of the
extracted MPT and raster files.
Note: While setting the size and resolutions of the different areas, the Estimated Size section
displays a rough approximation of the size of the extracted MPT file based on a calculation
(multiplication of the areas and the selected resolution). The final size of the extracted MPT
file can be distinctly different from the estimated size, e.g., if the original MPT file or raster
files have many areas with different resolutions.
11. Click Close to close the dialog box.
Publish Project as KMZ
To publish a project as KMZ:
1. On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Publish Offline, and then select Publish Project as
KMZ.
2. In the Save As dialog box type a file name and enter or browse to the folder that is to contain the
KMZ file. See “Export to KML/KMZ” in the “Basic Concepts” chapter for more information. The
published KMZ contains the KML project and all relevant project files.
Publishing a Project to SkylineGlobe Server
The Publish to SkylineGlobe Server process publishes the entire project and all its layers, resources, and
styling to SkylineGlobe Server, Skyline’s private cloud solution. Through a single publishing operation, the
project is made available to desktop, mobile and TE for Web clients, as well as standard geospatial
clients such as WFS/WFS-T/WMS/WMTS/3D Tiles (Cesium). The SkylineGlobe Server provides a
comprehensive set of web services for publishing, storing, managing and streaming your 3D spatial data.
TE4W Published Project
The following elements from the TerraExplorer project are generally supported in TE4W:
Feature layers
Raster layers
Mesh layers
CPT layers
Locations
80
TerraExplorer User Guide
Presentations
When using default TE4W settings, the following elements are not supported:
Some layers (e.g., CPT without default location).
Some advanced styling and configurations for feature layers.
Any coordinates besides Lat-Long coordinates.
Note: Some of these elements may be supported in the TE4W project by having Cesium load the
project KML. Cesium loading of the project is enabled in the SkylineGlobe Server Manager
Settings>TerraExplorer for Web Settings. See the SkylineGlobe Server user guide for more
information.
Supported Feature Styles in TE4W
Point Feature Layer
Supported Properties:
Altitude Line to Ground Line to Ground Length
Altitude Method Line to Ground Color Message (Text, HTML/Image,
Attributes, Links)
Tooltip
If the layer includes image labels, the following additional properties are supported:
Image Color Image Opacity Min Viewing Height
Image File Limit Growth Scale
Image URL
If the layer includes text labels, the following additional properties are supported:
Background Color Text Color Scale
Background Opacity Text Size Text
Font Bold Italic
If the layer includes models, the following additional properties are supported:
File Name Roll Yaw
Pitch Scale X
Note: Only Image Label and Text Label are supported for Symbol Type.
81
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Polyline Feature Layer
Supported Properties:
Line Color Line Opacity Width (Values must
be in pixels, and < 5
Message (Text, HTML/Image, Max/Min VisibilityDistance (on terrain pixels)
Attributes, Links) polyline)
Extend to Ground
Tooltip Altitude Method
Note: The following properties have not yet been implemented: Extend to Ground, Fill Color/Opacity, Line
Back Color/Opacity, and Line Pattern.
Polygon Feature Layer
Supported Properties:
Extend to Ground Fill Opacity Line Opacity
Fill Color Line Color Message (Text, HTML/Image,
Attributes, Links)
Tooltip Line Width
Altitude Method
Note: The following properties have not yet been implemented: Line Pattern and Line Width.
How to Publish a Project to SGS
To publish a project to SkylineGlobe Server:
1. On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Publish to SG.
2. If you aren’t already connected to a SkylineGlobe Server, the Login to SkylineGlobe Server dialog
box is first displayed to enable you to log in. See “Logging In to a SkylineGlobe Server” in the
“Working with SkylineGlobe Server” chapter for information. After logging in, the Publish to
SkylineGlobe dialog box is displayed.
82
TerraExplorer User Guide
Publish to SkylineGlobe Dialog Box
3. Set the View Access for the project:
Only me – Only for user publishing the project
My group – Everyone in the user’s group
Everyone – Viewable by everyone
Note: Users with View access can view and load the project from the Layers page.
4. Set the Edit Access for the project:
None – No Edit access is granted even to the user publishing the project
Only me – Only for user publishing the project
My group – Everyone in the user’s group
Everyone – Editable by everyone
Note: Users with Edit access can also load, edit and save changes to the project from
TerraExplorer and the browser.
5. If you want to set unique permissions for specific project layers, click the View / Edit Access link for
the required layer, and in the Set Permissions dialog box, select the required permissions for that
layer.
6. Set Tags (Key words or terms associated with the project file) for advanced searches. The default
value for this field is the project name. If adding multiple tags, they should be semicolon delimited.
83
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
7. If you want to create a unified, stream optimized 3D Mesh Layer (3DML) database from a point
shapefile with individually referenced 3D model files, select the Convert model layers to 3DML
check box.
8. Before uploading a layer, TerraExplorer compares its file size, checksum, and metadata to all files
currently on the server, to determine if a duplicate of this layer was already published to the server. If
a duplicate is found, the existing copy can be used instead of expending resources on re-publishing
this layer. TerraExplorer’s default action depends on how close a matc h is found: When a perfect
match is found, the default action is to use the existing layer; when no match or only a similar (but not
perfect) match is found, the default action is to upload the new layer. If you want to perform the
default action, click Publish.
9. If you want to view similar layers on the server for all project layers, click the Show existing layers
link. The Publish to SkylineGlobe Server – Layer Duplication dialog box is displayed, showing all the
layers for which there is already a close or identical copy on the SkylineGlobe Server. If you want to
view similar layers on the server for a specific layer for which a similar or perfect match was found,
click the link in the layer’s Status field. The Publish to SkylineGlobe Server – Layer Duplication dialog
box is displayed, showing all duplicates on the server for the specific layer. Do the following:
a. If you want to republish layer(s) for which matches were found instead of using the existing layers
on the server, clear the Use Existing checkbox for each of the layers, and click Apply.
b. If you want to use existing layers on the server for layers for which a similar but not exact match
was found, select their check boxes, and click Apply.
c. Click Publish.
84
TerraExplorer User Guide
Publish Project to SkylineGlobe Server – Layer Duplication Dialog Box
10. After the publishing process is complete, a dialog box is displayed with the URLs of the Desktop, TE
Web, and Mobile projects asking if you want to open the published project from SkylineGlobe Server.
Click Yes to open the published project.
Open Published Project Dialog Box
85
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 6 WORKING WITH SKYLINEGLOBE SERVER
About Working with SkylineGlobe Server
SkylineGlobe Server (SGS) is a private cloud solution that provides a comprehensive set of web services
for publishing, storing, managing and streaming 3D spatial data. Remote TerraExplorer clients can
access all spatial data types including terrain (MPT/TBP), map (raster-WMS/WMTS), feature (WFS/WFS-
T), 3D Mesh (3DML, OGC 3D Tiles), and point cloud (CPT, OGC 3D Tiles) using SkylineGlobe Server’s
streaming services. All data on your server is cataloged and referenced so you can easily find the specific
published layer required.
Individual geospatial layers and complete projects can be directly uploaded and published to the cloud
server from TerraExplorer or other Skyline client applications, thus streamlining your workflow and
eliminating the need for any server-side login after initial installation. Through a single publishing
operation, data is made ready for consumption by all TerraExplorer clients: Desktop, Mobile, and TE for
Web, as well as standard geospatial applications. Server-side geospatial layers that are stored in existing
data stores on the server can also be published by scanning their data stores and publishing selected
layers.
SkylineGlobe Server is compliant with the following OpenGIS Implementation Specifications:
OpenGIS ® Web Feature Service (WFS) Implementation Specification
OpenGIS ® Web Feature Service Transactions (WFS-T) Implementation Specification
OpenGIS ® Web Map Service (WMS) Implementation Specification
OpenGIS ® Web Map Tiling Service (WMTS) Implementation Specification
For more information about SkylineGlobe Server, see the SkylineGlobe Server User Manual.
Logging In to a SkylineGlobe Server
To log in to a SkylineGlobe Server:
1. On the top right of the application ribbon, click Log in. The Login to SkylineGlobe Server dialog box is
displayed.
Note: If you are already logged in to a server and want to log in to a different one, first log out of
the first server: on the top right of the application ribbon, click the arrow next to the User
Name of the logged in user, and select Log out. Then log in to the required server with the
required login information.
86
TerraExplorer User Guide
Login to SkylineGlobe Server Dialog Box
2. Enter the login information and click Log in:
Parameter Activity
Server The Server Host Name, which is the URL link of the server. All recent
servers are included in the drop-down list.
Note: If you want to log in to a specific server site, use the following
format: [server]/sg/[NameOfSite], e.g.,
http://www.skylineglobe.com/sg/SiteOne
User Name User name to access the server (mandatory).
Password Enter the password.
Remember Password Select this option to save the password. The password will be saved
and will be displayed using asterisks the next time the SkylineGlobe
Server dialog box is displayed.
The values that you enter for Server and User Name are saved. The next time you load this window,
this information is automatically filled in.
Changing Your SkylineGlobe Account Password
You can change your SkylineGlobe account password directly from TerraExplorer.
To change your SkylineGlobe account password:
1. On the top right of the application ribbon, click the arrow next to the User Name of the logged in user,
and select My Account. The SkylineGlobe Account dialog box is displayed.
87
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
SkylineGlobe Account Dialog Box
2. Type your old password.
3. Type your new password and confirm it, and then click Change.
Loading a Project from SkylineGlobe Server
To load an existing project from SkylineGlobe Server:
1. From the File menu , point to Open and select Open Project from SkylineGlobe .
2. If you aren’t already logged in to a SkylineGlobe Server, the Login to SkylineGlobe Server dialog box
is first displayed. Click Log in to log in to a server. See “Logging In to a SkylineGlobe Server” in this
chapter for more information.
3. The SkylineGlobe Layer dialog box is displayed showing all projects on your SkylineGlobe server.
88
TerraExplorer User Guide
SkylineGlobe Layers Dialog Box
4. Search for the required project. See “Searching for SkylineGlobe Layers” in the “Working with
SkylineGlobe Server” chapter.
5. Select the required project and click Open.
Loading SkylineGlobe Layers
To add a layer from a SkylineGlobe server:
1. On the Layers tab, in the SGS group, click Load SGS Layers. The SkylineGlobe Layers dialog box
is displayed, showing all layer types.
89
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
SkylineGlobe Layers Dialog Box
2. If you aren’t already logged in to a SkylineGlobe Server, the Login to SkylineGlobe Server dialog box
is first displayed. Click Log in to log in to a server. See “Logging In to a SkylineGlobe Server” in this
chapter for more information. After logging in, the SkylineGlobe Layers dialog box is displayed
showing all layer types.
3. Search for the required layer. See “Searching for SkylineGlobe Layers” in the “Working with
SkylineGlobe Server” chapter.
4. Select the layer you want to load, and click Load Layer. Use CTRL-click or SHIFT-click to multi-
select layers.
Note: When loading a feature layer, the Select Layer dialog box opens with the selected layer(s)
listed in the Select a Layer section. See “Select Layer Dialog Box” in the “Feature Layers”
chapter for information.
Searching for SkylineGlobe Layers
To search for a layer in the SkylineGlobe Layers dialog box:
1. If you want to search for layers whose property information contains a specific string (e.g., ID, Name,
Data Source), do the following:
a. In the Search String field, type a search string or enter an attribute, condition, and value and click
Insert String . The search expression is displayed in the Search string field.
b. If you want to include additional strings in your search expression, select a connector:
and OR or, and repeat step a for the next condition.
2. If you want to search according to geographic location, do the following:
90
TerraExplorer User Guide
a. Click Set Bounding Box, and select the required region by drawing a rectangle on the map on the
right side of the page around the area to which the search is confined
b. From the Map field, select one of the following:
Do Not Use – To ignore the bounding box.
Contained – If you want to search only for layers whose entire geometry fall within the
bounding box.
Intersect – If you want to search for all layers whose geometry intersect at any point with the
bounding box.
c. If you want to clear the bounding box, click Clear.
3. Click Search. Your search results are displayed in the search results list at the bottom of the page.
Managing Your Own SkylineGlobe Layers
To manage your own layers on a SkylineGlobe server:
1. On the top right of the application ribbon, click the arrow next to the User Name of the logged in user,
and select My Layers. The SkylineGlobe Layers dialog box is displayed, showing all layers of which
you are the owner.
Note: You must be logged in to a SkylineGlobe server to manage your layers. See “Logging In to
a SkylineGlobe Server” in this chapter for information.
SkylineGlobe Layers Dialog Box
2. If you aren’t already logged in to a SkylineGlobe Server, the Login to SkylineGlobe Server dialog box
is first displayed. Click Log in to log in to a server. See “Logging In to a SkylineGlobe Server” in this
chapter for more information. After logging in, the SkylineGlobe Layers dialog box is displayed
showing all layers for which you are the owner.
3. Search for the required layer. See “Searching for SkylineGlobe Layers” in this chapter.
4. If you want to view or modify layer properties, select the required layer and click Properties. The
Layer Properties dialog box is displayed.
91
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: The layers displayed vary depending on the type of layer selected.
5. Edit the properties as required:
Property Description
General
ID Layer ID.
Name Name of the layer.
Description Additional text about the layer.
Tags Key words or terms associated with the layer. If adding multiple
tags, they should be semicolon delimited.
Type Layer type (e.g., TerraExplorer Project Web, TerraExplorer
Project Mobile, Feature Complex, Feature Polygon, Raster
Complex).
Data Source Name of the data source that defines connection information to
the layer’s data store, i.e., the physical place where the data is
stored. Click View to view or modify the data source
properties. See the SkylineGlobe Server usual manual for
more information about editing data sources.
Layer Path Location of the layer file (Read-only). The path is relative to the
layer’s data folder.
File Size Size (Read-only).
Layer Published Date and time (UTC +0) the layer was added to SkylineGlobe
Server (Read-only).
Layer Modified Date and time (UTC +0) the SGS layer was last modified
(Read-only).
File Created Date and time file was created.
File Modified Date and time file was last modified
Coordinate Reference Layer coordinate system in WKT format. The equivalent EPSG
System code, if available, is shown below the WKT.
Bounding Box The coordinates of a fixed rectangular area within which the
loaded feature or imagery layer area is bounded.
The coordinate parameters are as follows:
Top Left X and Top Left Y: The coordinates of the top left
corner of the required bounding box.
Bottom Right X and Bottom Right Y: The coordinates of
the bottom right corner of the required bounding box.
Recommended Block Recommended geographic block width of the stream requests
Width that are sent from TerraExplorer to SkylineGlobe Server.
Select the block width in meters or kilometers. This field can
have a large impact on the performance of both the clients and
SkylineGlobe Server.
Maximum Block Width The maximum size of a client request (larger requests will be
rejected by SkylineGlobe Server). Setting this property
92
TerraExplorer User Guide
appropriately prevents an excessively long wait for a client’s
request to complete.
Encrypt Data Select the check box to encrypt saved cache files and blocks
transmitted to the client. Only TerraExplorer can decipher this
encryption, so no layers that are to be accessed by clients
other than TerraExplorer should be encrypted.
Permissions
Owner Your user name. If you want to modify user properties, click
View. Then modify the following properties as required, and
click Save:
Note: The Show User link is only available to administrator
users.
User Name – User name by which you log in to
SkylineGlobe Server (Read-only).
Display Name – The name to display in the SkylineGlobe
Server user login. This is only the name displayed. To
actually log in, the User Name must be entered
Active – Select whether user should be active.
Expiration Date – Expiration date for the user account
(Read-only).
Role – User role (Read-only):
Viewer – Can list, load and edit, from the client side,
all layers for which the user has valid view/edit access.
Publisher – In addition to all Viewer permissions, a
Publisher can also publish layers to SkylineGlobe
Server and manage these layers from supporting
clients, e.g., TerraExplorer Pro.
Site Administrator – In addition to all Publisher
permissions, a Site Administrator can also log in to
SGS Manager of a specific site to perform SGS
management and configuration activities. This
includes management of all the site’s services, data
sources, layers, groups/users and some site settings.
Super Administrator – A Super Administrator is the
only user who can add, delete, and edit properties of
server sites. In addition to all Site Administrator
permissions, a Super Administrator can also log in to
SGS Manager to any of the server’s sites to perform
SGS management and configuration activities. This
includes management of all the server’s data sources,
layers, groups/users, and settings.
Site – Server site for your user (Read-only).
Group – User group. Users can view / edit layers
published by other users in the same user group if the
respective view / edit permission for the layer was set to
“My Group” or “Everyone”.
Password – Type a new password, or click Generate to
93
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
generate a random one. If you want the user to be required
to change the password upon logging in to SkylineGlobe
Server, select Change Required.
Storage Used – Click Calculate to calculate the amount of
data (in GB) you have already uploaded.
Max Storage – Select the check box to set a limit on
storage for your user, and then enter the storage limit in
GB.
Max Active Sessions – Select the check box to set a limit
on the number of concurrent clients for your user, and then
enter the number.
Allow Notifications – Select the check box to display a
notifications dialog box when your user logs in to SGS
Manager with information about entities (sites, groups, and
users) that have already expired or will be expiring within
the next five days.
SG Cloud User – Reserved.
View Access The view permission level for this layer, i.e., the users that
have been granted view access (None, Only Me, My Group, or
Everyone).
Users with valid view access for a layer can list, view and load
the layer (opened from TerraExplorer Pro, TerraExplorer for
Web and any WFS/WMS client).
Edit Access The edit permission level for this layer, i.e., the users that have
been granted edit access (None, Only Me, My Group, or
Everyone). In addition to loading the layer, users with edit
access can also perform layer transactions from TerraExplorer
Pro and any WFS-T client.
Note: Only the user that added the layer and the
administrator can modify layer properties.
Cache
Note: If you want to clear cache for a layer, click Clear Cache.
No Cache Select the check box to delete any existing cache file and to
prevent any creation of a new cache file. Each request from
TerraExplorer will stream data directly from the data source.
Note: This property is only displayed for feature layers.
Cache Path Location of the layer’s hard disk cache (Read-only).
Note: If No Cache was selected, this property is not
displayed.
Cache Creation Date Date cache was created (Read-only).
Note: If No Cache was selected, this property is not
displayed.
Meta Tags
View Style Metadata style format.
94
TerraExplorer User Guide
Upload If you want to upload metatags, browse to the required file, and
click Upload.
6. If you want to remove a layer from SkylineGlobe Server, select the layer, and click Remove.
7. If you want to add/edit an alias, select the layer, and click Edit Alias. The Edit Alias dialog box is
displayed.
a. Type an Alias 1 and/or Alias 2.
b. Click OK. The alias is displayed in the Layer Name field in the SkylineGlobe Layers dialog box,
and layers can be searched according to their aliases.
Uploading Layers to SkylineGlobe Server
You can upload your layers to SkylineGlobe Server directly from TerraExplorer.
Note: TerraExplorer is the only client that can serve layers, which are missing their EPSG code
indicating the projection in the data should be served.
Note: An entire project and all its layers, resources, and styling can also be published to SkylineGlobe
Server. See “Publishing a Project to SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Publishing TerraExplorer
Projects” chapter for information.
To upload a layer:
1. In the Project Tree, right-click the required layer, and select Upload to SkylineGlobe from the
shortcut menu. Use CTRL-click or SHIFT-click to multi-select layers.
2. If you aren’t already connected to the required SkylineGlobe Server, the Login to SkylineGlobe Server
dialog box is first displayed to enable you to log in. See “Logging In to a SkylineGlobe Server” in this
chapter for information.
After logging in, the Publish to SkylineGlobe dialog box is displayed.
95
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Publish to SkylineGlobe Dialog Box
3. Set the View Access for the layer:
Only me – Only for user publishing the project
My group – Everyone in the user’s group
Everyone – Viewable by everyone
4. Set the Edit Access for the layer:
None – No edit access is granted even to the user publishing the layer
Only me – Only for user publishing the layer
My group – Everyone in the user’s group
Everyone – Editable by everyone
5. Set Tags for advanced searches. The default value for this field is the layer name. If adding multiple
tags, they should be semicolon delimited.
6. If you are uploading a point shapefile with individually referenced 3D model files and you want to
convert it to a unified, stream optimized 3D Mesh Layer (3DML) database, select the Convert model
layers to 3DML check box.
7. Before uploading a layer, TerraExplorer compares its file size, checksum, and metadata to all files
currently on the server, to determine if a duplicate of this layer was already published to the server. If
a duplicate is found, the existing copy can be used instead of expending resources on re-publishing
this layer. TerraExplorer’s default action depends on how close a match is found: When a perfect
96
TerraExplorer User Guide
match is found, the default action is to use the existing layer; when no match or only a similar (but not
perfect) match is found, the default action is to upload the new layer. If you want to perform the
default action, click Publish.
8. If you want to view similar layers on the server for all uploaded layers, click the Show existing layers
link. The Publish to SkylineGlobe Server – Layer Duplication dialog box is displayed, showing all the
layers for which there is already a close or identical copy on the SkylineGlobe Server. If you want to
view similar layers on the server for a specific layer for which a similar or perfect match was found,
click the link in the layer’s Status field. The Publish to SkylineGlobe Server – Layer Duplication dialog
box is displayed, showing all duplicates on the server for the specific layer. Do the following:
a. If you want to republish layer(s) for which matches were found instead of using the existing layers
on the server, clear the Use Existing checkbox for each of the layers, and click Apply.
b. If you want to use existing layers on the server for layers for which a similar but not exact match
was found, select their check boxes, and click Apply.
c. Click Publish.
Publish Layer to SkylineGlobe Server – Layer Duplication Dialog Box
9. After the publishing process is complete, a dialog box is displayed asking if you want to replace the
local layer with the layer published to SkylineGlobe server. Click Yes to open the published layer.
97
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 7 NAVIGATING IN THE 3D WORLD
About Navigating
There are several ways to navigate in the 3D environment:
In the 3D Window, use the mouse, keyboard, Ribbon commands, navigation controls, and joystick to
navigate freely in the 3D World.
Use the Project Tree to fly to predefined locations or objects, or to play a presentation.
Use the Navigation Map to jump to and view locations in the 3D World.
Use the TerraExplorer Pro COM interface to develop unique and customized navigation tools. See
TerraExplorer Programmer’s Guide.
Camera and Plane
The entity that views the 3D World and displays it on the 3D Window is called the “camera”. The camera
can be controlled manually by the user (free flight) or can be attached to other elements or automatic
flight routes. When the camera is controlled manually, it is assigned to the "plane”. The plane is the
vehicle the user controls and uses to fly throughout the terrain.
The camera and plane always have the same location but they can have different tilt angles. By setting
an offset between the plane and the camera angles, you can fly at the same altitude but look down.
By default, the keyboard arrows as well as the mouse turning-mode control the camera tilt and the plane’s
direction. When you turn to the sides the plane turns, and the camera always looks in the direction of
flight. Changing the tilt angle affects the camera’s viewing angle (in the tilt axis) but the plane always
stays level.
Plane and Camera
Direction, Tilt and Roll Angles
TerraExplorer Pro provides six degrees of freedom in the 3D World by enabling you to control the location
of the camera (x, y and altitude) and the viewing angles (direction, tilt and roll).
Direction, Tilt and Roll Angles
98
TerraExplorer User Guide
Direction values:
Range from 0 to 360 where 0=North, 90=East, 180=South and 270=West. TerraExplorer Pro adjusts
illegal values to this range by modulating the illegal number.
Direction Angle
Tilt values:
Range from -90 to +90 where 0 = Horizon, +90 = straight up and -90 = straight down. TerraExplorer Pro
adjusts illegal values to this range by modulating the illegal number.
Tilt Angles
Roll values:
Range from -180 to +180 where 0 means the plane is aligned with the horizon, +180 = Full roll right and -
180 = Full roll left.
In both cases, when the roll is 180 and -180, the plane is flipped on its back. TerraExplorer Pro adjusts
illegal values to this range by modulating the illegal number.
Roll Angle
Searching for an Address or Location
You can search for a specific address or location or obtain address information for any point on the
terrain. The search provider is dependent on the SkylineGlobe Server that TerraExplorer is currently
connected to. If you aren’t already logged in to the required SkylineGlobe Server, log in to the server. See
“Logging In to a SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Working with SkylineGlobe Server” chapter for information.
To search:
In the Project Tree, Search here field, type a search term. See “Search Tool” in the “Using the
Project Tree” chapter for information on additional search options.
99
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
To fly to a specific coordinate:
In the Project Tree, Search here field, type the coordinates using the following syntax:
Coord: Lon, Lat or X, Y - Fly to coordinate.
MGRS: MGRS coordinate - Fly to MGRS coordinate
Obtaining Address Details
To obtain address details for a specific location:
1. On the Navigation tab, in the Navigation Aid group, click Point to Address. The Point to Address
panel is displayed.
2. Navigate to the desired location on the terrain and click. The location address is displayed in the Point
to Address panel.
3. While the Point to Address panel is open, you can click again on any point on the terrain to find its
address. Repeat for as many points as you require.
4. If you want to close the Point to Address tool, click the x on the upper right corner of the panel.
Navigating to Locations
A location defines the geographical coordinates of a point on the terrain and the position from which the
point is to be viewed. You can perform the following flight actions on locations:
Fly to Location
Jump to Location
Pre-Defined Flight Patterns
To perform a location flight action, do either of the following:
In the Project Tree, double-click the location. The specific activation action set in the location’s
property sheet is performed.
or
In the Project Tree, right-click the location, and select one of the following options:
Menu Option Description
Fly to Location Flies from the current location directly to the selected location.
Jump to Location Jumps directly to the location’s position.
View Location This option’s sub-menu contains a list of pre-defined flight patterns
that compass about the location.
Note: When you play a flight pattern, the default flight time of the
camera for one round trip around the point of interest is 15
seconds.
Circle Pattern Performs a circle flight around the location. The
camera always faces the specified location.
Oval Pattern Performs an oval flight pattern around the location.
The camera always faces the specified location.
The first radius is set to the distance parameter
100
TerraExplorer User Guide
and the second radius is set to one-half of the
distance parameter.
Line Pattern Performs a tight oval flight pattern around the
location. The camera always faces the specified
location. The first radius is set to the distance
parameter and the second radius is set to one-
tenth of the distance parameter.
Arc Pattern Performs a vertical arc flight above the location.
The camera always faces the specified location.
The radius is set according to the distance
parameter.
Stopping a Flight to or Around a Location
To stop a flight to or around a location, do any of the following:
Click anywhere in the 3D Window
Right-click anywhere in the 3D Window, and from the shortcut menu select Stop.
In the Project Tree, right-click the location’s name, and from the shortcut menu select Stop.
See the “Locations” chapter for further information on creating and editing Locations.
Navigating to Objects
You can perform the following flight actions on objects:
Fly to Object
Jump to Object
Pre-Defined Flight Patterns
To perform an object’s activation action, do either of the following:
In the Project Tree, double-click the required object. The specific activation action set in the object’s
property sheet is performed.
In the Project Tree, right-click the required object, and then select one of the options from the
shortcut menu.
Menu Option Description
Fly to Object Flies from the current location directly to the selected object. The
camera stops at the object’s “Viewing Distance”.
For static objects, the camera flies directly to the object, by the
shortest flight path, and stops.
For dynamic objects, the camera continues to follow the object.
Jump to Object Jumps directly to the object. The camera stops at the object’s
“Viewing Distance”.
View Object This option’s sub-menu contains a list of pre-defined flight patterns
that compass about the object. When you play a flight pattern, the
101
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
default flight time of the camera for a one round trip around the point
of interest is 15 seconds.
Circle Pattern Performs a circle flight pattern around the
object. The camera always faces the specified
object.
Oval Pattern Performs an oval flight pattern around the
object. The camera always faces the specified
object. The first radius is set to the distance
parameter and the second radius is set to one-
half of the distance parameter.
Line Pattern Performs a tight oval flight pattern around the
object/location. The camera always faces the
specified object. The first radius is set to the
distance parameter and the second radius is
set to one-tenth of the distance parameter.
Arc Pattern Performs a vertical arc flight above the
object/location. The camera always faces the
specified object. The radius is set according to
the distance parameter.
For objects, the View submenu also contains a set of pre-defined
view angles around the object. The camera stops at the object’s
“Viewing Distance” from the object’s location.
For dynamic objects, the camera continues to follow the object until
the user stops it or performs another action.
Behind Object To view the object from behind
Above Object To view the object from above
From Below To view the object from below
From Right To view the object from the right-
hand side
From Left To view the object from the left-
hand side
From Behind and Above To view the object from behind
and above (45 degrees)
Cockpit View To view the world from the
object’s pivot point. The camera
is set to the object’s roll, tilt and
direction angles. In this mode,
the dynamic object is hidden.
Projector View Available for Video On Terrain
objects only. This is for viewing
the world from the video
projector’s position. The camera
is set to the projector’s roll, tilt
and direction angles.
From Ground Point To view the object from the
ground. After selecting this
option, select a ground point on
102
TerraExplorer User Guide
the terrain from which you want
to view the object.
Note: The “View From Ground
Point” action cannot be
defined as the activation
action for the object
because it requires a
reference point on the
terrain.
Stopping a Flight to or Around an Object
To stop a flight to or around an object, do any of the following:
Click anywhere in the 3D Window and then press the spacebar.
Right-click anywhere in the 3D Window, and from the shortcut menu select Stop.
In the Project Tree, right-click the object’s name, and from the shortcut menu select Stop.
Free Flight
You can navigate freely in the 3D World using the mouse, keyboard, navigation controls and the joystick.
Navigating Using the Mouse
The mouse is the main tool for controlling the free flight in the 3D World. With the mouse on the 3D
Window, you can control the direction and tilt angle of the camera, slide to the sides, zoom in and out ,
and fly around points of interest on the terrain.
You can set the preferred navigation mode in the TerraExplorer options. See “Navigation” in the “Using
TerraExplorer Options” chapter for further information.
From the Ribbon’s Navigation tab, you can switch between Drag (default) and Slide modes. The Turn and
tilt mode is not available from the Ribbon.
Mouse Cursor Description
Navigation Mode
Drag mode The mouse controls the movement of the terrain.
Slide mode The mouse controls the movement of the camera.
Turn and tilt mode The mouse controls the movement of the tilt of the camera and
direction of the plane.
Navigating in the Drag Mode
To navigate in the drag mode:
1. Click and hold the mouse button on a location in the terrain.
2. Drag the mouse to the sides forward, and backward. The terrain location on which you clicked is
dragged along with the cursor.
3. Change the following drag mode flight parameters using your mouse as described below:
103
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Parameter Description
West - East - North - South Drag forward, backward, and to the sides of the 3D Window while
pressing the mouse button. The terrain location on which you
clicked is dragged along with the cursor.
Altitude Rotate the wheel button and press CTRL to change the plane and
camera altitude.
Zoom Rotate the wheel button to zoom in or out, in relation to the center
point.
You can also double-click on the terrain to zoom in to the selected
point.
Terrain Tilt Angle While pressing CTRL or the wheel button, drag the mouse along a
vertical axis of the 3D Window. The terrain tilts around the terrain
center point in the direction of the drag.
Terrain Rotation While pressing CTRL or the wheel button, drag the mouse along a
horizontal axis of the 3D Window. The terrain turns around the
terrain center point in the direction of the drag.
Navigating in the Slide Mode
To navigate in the slide mode:
1. Click and hold the mouse button on a location in the terrain.
2. Drag the mouse to slide forward, backward and to the sides.
The altitude of the plane and the tilt angle determines the speed of the slide. The closer you are to the
ground the slower the movement is. When looking to the horiz on, the forward and backward
movement is accelerated to allow an easier navigation in the world.
3. Change the following slide mode flight parameters, by using your mouse as described below:
Parameter Description
West-East-North-South Slide up, down, and to the sides of the terrain. The plane and
camera follow the direction of the cursor.
Altitude Rotate the wheel button and press CTRL to change the plane and
camera altitude.
Zoom Rotate the wheel button to zoom in or out, in relation to the center
point. You can also double-click on the terrain to zoom in to the
selected point.
Speed To increase the speed of the plane and camera, drag the cursor
farther away from the 3D Window center in the direction of your
terrain destination.
To decrease the speed of the plane and camera drag the cursor
closer to the 3D Window center while staying in the direction of
your terrain destination.
Turn and Tilt Click CTRL or press the wheel button while flying to switch to turn
and tilt movements while in the slide mode.
See “Navigating in the Turn and Tilt Mode” in this chapter for
further information.
104
TerraExplorer User Guide
Navigating in the Turn and Tilt Mode
To navigate in the turn and tilt mode:
1. Click on the 3D Window to change the plane or the camera direction and tilt angles.
The inner area of the 3D Window is a “dead zone”. Clicking in this area does not affect the direction
or tilt angles. The outer area is divided into eight zones (See illustration below). The further the
mouse is from the center point the faster the direction or tilt change.
2. Click and drag the mouse to other areas and even outside the 3D Window to change the mouse
operations.
3. Change the following turn and tilt mode flight parameters, using your mouse as described below:
Parameter Method
Tilt angle and turning While pressing the mouse button, drag the pointer to the following
direction 3D Window zones to perform the following:
Altitude Rotate the wheel button and press CTRL to change the plane and
camera altitude.
Zoom Rotate the wheel button to zoom in or out, in relation to the center
point. You can also double-click on the terrain to zoom in to the
selected point.
Speed To increase the tilt and turning speed of the plane and camera
drag the cursor farther away from the 3D Window center in the
direction of your tilting and turning. To decrease the tilt and turning
speed of the plane and camera drag the cursor closer to the 3D
Window center while staying in the direction of your tilting and
turning.
Slide Click CTRL or the wheel button while flying to switch to slide
movements while in the turn and tilt mode. See “Navigating in the
Slide Mode” in this chapter for further information.
Navigating Using On-Screen Navigation Controls
Two options are available for displaying Navigation Controls:
Advanced navigation control
Simplified navigation control
105
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
The type of navigation controls is selected in the Screen Overlay tab of the Options menu. See "Screen
Overlay" in the "Using TerraExplorer Options" chapter for information.
Advanced Navigation Control and Simplified Navigation Control
To navigate in the 3D Window using the advanced navigation control:
Click the navigation controls to rotate, tilt or zoom in or out of the terrain.
Navigation Control Description
Tilt Slider Move the Tilt slider to change the plane tilt.
North Indicator Click the N indicator in the compass ring to turn the plane to
face north.
Compass Ring Click and turn the compass ring to change the plane direction.
Joystick The virtual joystick enables you to free-fly in the 3D World in an
intuitive manner, similar to real-life flying.
With the virtual joystick, you can fly backward, forward and
sideways. You can also perform the same action by using the
up/down and left/right arrows around the joystick.
Zoom Slider Click and drag the elevation slider to zoom in and out. You can
also click the globe, country, state, city and street levels.
To navigate in the 3D Window using the simplified navigation control:
Click the navigation controls to turn North or zoom in or out of the terrain.
Navigation Description
Control
Turn the plane to face north.
Zoom in.
Zoom out.
106
TerraExplorer User Guide
Jump to Location Panel
Using the Jump to Location panel, you can jump to a location using its longitude, latitude, altitude,
direction, and MGRS values.
Jump to Location
To use the Jump to Location panel:
1. Click on the coordinates section of the Status Bar to display the panel, and enter the required values.
Note: The Status Bar must be showing in order to open the Jump to Location panel. See “Using
Screen Overlay” and “Status Bar” in the “Basic Concepts” chapter for more information.
Field Description
Longitude Enter the new location’s East-West values.
Latitude Enter the new location’s North-South values.
Altitude Enter the required altitude value.
Note: The altitude is limited to the minimum value defined in the
Altitude settings in TerraExplorer Settings. See
"Navigation" in the "Setting the Project" chapter for more
information.
Direction Enter the required direction angles of the plane and the camera.
MGRS The required location’s Military Grid Reference System (MGRS)
coordinates. This field is only available if Show MGRS
Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog box. See “View” in
the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for more information.
Note: The Jump to Location Panel displays the altitude and location values in the system’s units.
See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for further information on how to
change the display units.
2. Click OK.
Navigating Using the 3D Window Shortcut Menu
To navigate using the 3D Window shortcut menu:
Right-click any location in the 3D Window to open the 3D Window shortcut menu.
107
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: You can open the 3D Window shortcut menu even when the camera is in a pre-defined
flight or while playing a presentation.
When the mouse pointer is placed over the terrain or over the sky, the 3D Window shortcut menu is
opened. When the pointer is placed over an object, additional entries are added to the menu allowing you
to perform flight patterns around the selected object.
3D Window Shortcut Menu
Command Description
Fly In Fly closer and centered to the selected point.
To stop the flight:
Click the terrain or right-click again and select Stop.
Fly Out Fly away and centered from the selected point.
To stop the flight:
Click the terrain or right-click again and select Stop.
Jump In Jumps to the selected point while keeping it centered.
Jump Out Jumps away from the selected point while keeping it centered.
Fly Around Starts a circle pattern flight around the selected point.
To stop the flight:
Either right-click again and select Stop, or press the SPACE
key.
Viewpoint Starts the selected pattern flight around the selected point.
To stop the flight:
Either right-click again and select Stop, or press the SPACE
key.
Stop Stop the movement of the plane.
108
TerraExplorer User Guide
Navigating Using Ribbon Controls
To navigate using Ribbon controls:
On the Navigation tab, click the required command:
Navigation Menu Activity
Command
Zoom Zooms in or out from the center of the view to a distance according
to the following presets in the sub-menu: House, Street, City,
State, Country, Globe.
North Turn the plane to face north.
Rotate Flies in a circle pattern around the terrain coordinate at the center
of the 3D Window.
Follow Click and select a navigation pattern. If an object is selected, you
can also select a predefined view angle.
Navigating Using the Keyboard
The keyboard is another device with which you can control the plane and camera positions in the world.
You can use the keyboard in a free flight mode (alone or together with other control devices, such as the
mouse and joystick).
You can also use the keyboard while performing a pattern flight around a location or object, or even while
playing a presentation.
Keyboard Command Activity
Speed Use the speed keys to accelerate and decelerate the plane.
A: Increases speed until you reach maximum forward speed.
<SHIFT> A: Doubles the rate at which the speed increases.
Z: Reduces speed until you reach maximum reverse speed.
<SHIFT> Z: Doubles the rate at which the speed decreases.
<SPACE>: Stops the flight (set the speed to zero).
Altitude Use the altitude keys to move up and down.
S: Moves up.
<SHIFT> S: Moves up at a higher rate.
X: Moves down.
<SHIFT> X: Moves down at a higher rate.
Tilt The keyboard Up and Down arrows control the camera tilt.
Up Arrow: Changes the camera or plane angle upwards.
Down Arrow: Changes the camera or plane angle
downwards.
Direction The keyboard Left and Right arrows control the plane direction.
109
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Left Arrow: Changes the plane or camera direction to the left.
Right Arrow: Changes the plane or camera direction to the
right.
Slide and Zoom Use the slide keys to move the plane to the left or right during a
free flight session.
When performing a flight pattern, or an attachment to an object, a
location or a point of interest on the terrain, you can use these keys
to zoom in and out from the center point or object.
Q: Slides to the left/zoom out.
<SHIFT> Q: Slides to the left/zoom out, at a faster rate.
W: Slides to the right/zoom in.
<SHIFT> W: Slides to the right/zoom in, at a faster rate.
Navigating Using the Joystick
In addition to the other navigation modes, TerraExplorer Pro supports a game device (joy stick) as unique
navigation mode.
Using a joystick, you can simulate a more realistic plane movement in the 3D World. In the same way as
a real plane behaves, you can use a joystick to roll to the sides, change direction and tilt up and down to
change the altitude.
Note: The joystick movements always affect the plane’s tilt and direction angles even when the mouse
and keyboard are set to affect the camera angles. TerraExplorer Pro supports different types of
joysticks. From a regular 2-axis 2-buttons to a complex Point of View (POV) control. If the
connected joystick does not support all the features necessary to perform a free-flight you can
use it together with other flight controls such as the keyboard, the mouse and the Navigation
Controls. TerraExplorer also supports use of 3D navigation devices, including 3DConnexion
SpaceNavigator™, SpaceExplorer™, SpaceTraveler™ and SpacePilot™, which enable you to
perform adjustments on your model with greater ease, speed and precision.
Joystick Configuration
110
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: Joystick configuration may vary between computers. Please refer to the joystick or Game
Controllers settings under the Window’s Control Panel dialog box for further information on
joystick configuration on your computer.
Joystick Configuration Description
Plane Tilt Moving the joystick downwards and upwards affects the plane’s tilt
angle and results in the altitude change of the plane.
Move the stick forwards to change the flight angle downwards.
Move the stick backwards to change the flight angle upwards.
Plane Roll Moving the joystick to the left and right affects the plane’s roll angle
and changes the direction of the plane.
Move the stick left to roll to the left.
Move the stick right to roll to the right.
Speed The plane’s speed is controlled from the joystick’s main buttons.
Press Button 1 to increase the speed (until you reach
maximum speed).
Press Button 2 to reduce the speed (until you reach minimum
speed).
The joystick’s speed is defined in the Navigation tab of the Project
Settings dialog box. See “Navigation” in the “Setting the Project”
chapter for further information.
If your joystick has a Point of View (POV) button, additional controls are available:
Control Activity
Camera Tilt Moving the POV button downwards and upwards affects the
camera’s tilt offset from the plane’s tilt angle.
Move the POV stick up to angle the camera upwards.
Move the POV stick down to angle the camera downwards.
Camera Direction Moving the POV button to the left and right affects the camera’s
direction offset from the plane’s direction angle.
Move the POV stick to the left to angle the camera to the left.
Move the POV stick to the right to angle the camera to the
right.
Note: When navigating using the joystick, it is recommended to open the Jump to Location panel or
display a compact or full navigation controls. In many cases, there is a discrepancy between the
camera and plane angles, in the tilt axis and the direction axis. This discrepancy may cause
strange and unpredictable movement. By viewing the Jump to Location panel or navigation
control displays, you can detect these cases and prevent them.
111
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Using Touch Screens
Navigating Using Touch Gestures
TerraExplorer Pro supports several gestures for 3D Window navigation:
One finger drag - Move the terrain
Two finger drag - Rotate the terrain
Two finger pinch - Zoom in/out
Double tap - Fly in
Long tap - Open shortcut menu
Navigation Controls
Simplified navigation controls offer basic controls while conserving screen real estate:
- Turn the plane to face north.
- Zoom in.
- Zoom out.
See “Navigating Using On-Screen Navigation Controls” in this chapter for more information.
3D Modes
3D Modes determine how the terrain should be displayed in the 3D Window, as a 3D model, a flat 2D
surface, or as a 2D model facing North.
To set the 3D mode:
On the Navigation tab, in the 3D Mode group, click one of the following commands:
Mode Icon Description
3D Mode Allows full 3D navigation.
2D Mode Forces the camera to always look straight down.
2D Mode Face North Forces the camera to always look straight down and North.
Underground Navigation
The underground navigation mode allows you to explore the subsurface of the terrain. You can navigate
under the terrain’s surface and through buildings. A subsurface grid navigation aid appears when you
navigate below the terrain, allowing you to navigate the same way as above ground.
112
TerraExplorer User Guide
Navigating in Underground Mode
To fly in underground mode:
1. On the Home tab, in the Navigation group, click Underground Mode.
2. Use any of the techniques mentioned above to navigate in the 3D environment. You can freely go
through the terrain surface in any direction.
GPS Tracking
The GPS Tracking tool creates 2D or 3D objects and moves them according to position information, in
NMEA format that it reads directly from a GPS or communication device through a USB or COM port or
from a local or remote file.
The GPS tool supports multiple entities in a single device and allows fast forwarding capabilities when
reading the information from files.
You can display the GPS-moving objects in a variety of 2D or 3D graphic representations, and add trace
lines trailing the object routes.
113
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
GPS Tracking Tool
Using the GPS Tracking Tool
To use the GPS Tracking tool:
1. On the Navigation tab, in the Navigation Aid group, click the arrow under GPS and select GPS
Tracking.
2. Enter the following information:
Field Description
Read stream from Select the location of the positioning stream.
Stream File Select File and type the file name or click the Browse button to set
the NMEA file. Select COM1, COM2, COM3 or COM4 to define the
COM port where the GPS, or communication device, is connected.
Note: The GPS Tracking tool supports GPS and communication
devices connected to a USB port that simulate COM
communication. You should select the COM port the USB
driver selected when it logged in to the system.
Format Select the format of the communication stream. The GPS Tracking
currently supports only NMEA-0183 format.
Use private command Select whether you want to use a Private command to identify the
names of the different entities in a single stream.
114
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: If the private command tag is not set, all entities in the
stream are treated as the same object.
Command Name If you selected Yes in the Use private command field, type the
name of the NMEA tag (e.g., &Pxxx) that contains the identifier of
each entity.
Stream Rate If a File was selected as the source of the stream, you can
accelerate the playing of the object movements by selecting a
Stream rate larger than x1.
The GPS Tracking tool reads the time stamp on each entity
location. When the fast playing option is selected, the time delay
between two locations, as defined in each location block Time tag,
is divided by the Stream rate parameter.
Display Objects As Select the Display Object As parameter to define the graphic
representation of the GPS entities.
The next parameters that display vary depending on the selected
Display Object As type.
Color Set the color for the trace line and for objects, when selecting 2D
or 3D primitives.
Click the Color button and select a color from the color
palette.
Draw Trace Line Select Yes to add a trace line trailing the object.
Trace Length (points) Set the Trace Length parameter to define the length of the line.
The Trace Length defines the number of locations, preceding the
current location, connected by the trace line.
Save Option Set the Save options.
Select Delete At Disconnect to delete the objects and trace
lines when the stream is finished or disconnected.
Select Keep Alive While in Project to keep the objects and
trace lines in your projects until you close the FLY file.
Select Save in FLY Project to save the objects and trace lines
in your FLY file.
3. Click Connect to connect to the GPS stream. If you want to disconnect, click Disconnect.
GPX Reader
GPX is an XML schema designed as a common GPS data format to describe waypoints, tracks, and
routes. The GPX Reader reads GPX files and displays their waypoint and track data in the 3D Window,
storing the GPX data in the project either as groups of point objects or as feature layers.
To load GPX data:
1. On the Navigation tab, in the Navigation Aid group, click the arrow under GPS, and select GPX
Reader. The GPX Reader is displayed.
115
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
GPX Reader
2. Browse to the required GPX file.
3. Select the check boxes of the data you want to import:
Waypoints – The route's waypoints.
Tracks – The waypoints for each of the route's tracks.
4. If you want to ignore the elevation values in the GPX file, select Relative to Terrain. All waypoints
and route/track polyline are displayed directly on the terrain.
5. Select one of the Create As options:
Option Description
Layer
If Waypoints are selected for import, a feature layer is created for all the route's waypoints. If
Tracks are selected for import, then for each track in the route the following are created:
A polyline object with the track's path
A point shapefile with the waypoints of that track
Layer (Streaming) Create streaming point shapefile layers with the route's
waypoints under the application AppData.
Layer (Entire) Create point shapefile layers with the route's waypoints under
the application AppData.
Group Create a group with waypoint objects.
If Waypoints are selected for import, image label objects are
created for each of the waypoints. If Tracks are selected for
import, then for each track in the route the following are
created:
A polyline object with the track's path
Image label objects for each of the track's waypoints
116
TerraExplorer User Guide
6. Click Load. The GPX data is displayed in the 3D Window and a group of layers/objects is created in
the Project Tree.
Walk Mode
The Walk Mode Navigation controls enable easier navigation within confined spaces, x-ray vision and
collision detection. Direction control buttons provide for greater control and finer adjustments to movement.
Navigating in Walk Mode
To navigate in Walk Mode:
1. On the Home tab, in the Navigation group, click Walk Mode. The Walk Mode Navigation dialog box
is displayed.
Walk Mode Navigation
2. If you want to navigate outdoors, click Start.
3. If you want to navigate indoors, click the building you want to enter. This building can be any 3D
model (e.g., 3dml, .x, .xpl, .dae or .flt) and include interior modeling of the different floors and rooms.
4. After clicking on the building entry location or the dialog box link, navigation controls are displayed.
Note: Collision detection is automatically turned on and navigation mode automatically switches
to Slide mode. Collision detection can be switched off from the Walk Mode Navigation
panel, while Slide mode can be switched off from the Navigation tab.
Walk Mode Navigation Controls
5. Navigate using the navigation controls:
Control Description Control Description
Turn counter Toggle collision detection on and off.
clockwise When collision detection is on, any
collision with a solid structure, while
Forward navigating within the 3D model, will stop
movement.
Turn clockwise Toggle x-ray vision on and off. When x-
ray vision is on, the model becomes semi-
Up transparent, enabling you to see through
all model walls.
Left Adjusts the field of view.
117
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Backward
Right Exit from walk mode
Down
6. If you want to exit from walk mode, on the Home tab toggle off the Walk Mode command or click the
x in the Walk Mode Navigation control panel.
Target
The Target tool continuously tracks the distance and direction to a specific target.
To use the Target tool:
1. On the Navigation tab, in the Navigation Aid group, click Target. The Target dialog box opens.
Target Dialog Box
2. Enter the following information:
118
TerraExplorer User Guide
Field Description
Target Location Select either:
Numeric Entry
Manual Selection
If you select Numeric Entry, enter the X, Y, and H values.
Target Scale Select the type of target marking object.
Display Units Select the display units to be used for distance/height information.
Show Direction Arrow Select Yes if you want to display the direction-to-target arrow.
Target X, Target Y, Target H If you selected Numeric Entry, enter the target's X, Y and height
coordinates.
3. Click Set Target.
4. If you are using Manual Selection as the Target-Set-Mode, click on the terrain or on any object in the
3D Window.
5. The tool displays the Camera Location, Cursor Location, Target Location and Distance from Target
values according to the selected units.
6. To reset this tool, click Reset.
7. To fly to the target location, click Fly to.
Look Around Tool
The Look Around tool serves as a virtual stationary observation deck, enabling you to analyze the view
from a specific position. Using the controls, you can easily adjust your direction and tilt and zoom in and
out.
To use the Look Around tool:
1. On the Navigation tab, in the Navigation Aid group, click Look Around. The Look Around controls
are displayed.
Look Around Controls
2. Move the slider to adjust the zoom. The distance between the viewer position and the center of the
screen is displayed in the bottom right corner.
Note: When the Look Around tool is opened, the navigation mode is automatically switched to
Turn and Tilt. See “Navigating in the Turn and Tilt Mode” in the “Navigating in the 3D
World” chapter. You can change the mode as required.
Locations
A location defines the geographical coordinates of a point on the terrain as well as the position from which
the point is to be viewed. By double-clicking on a location name in the Project Tree the camera can
perform a flight, jump to the location or play one of the predefined patterns (circle, oval, line or arc).
119
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Viewing a Location
To view a location, do either of the following:
In the Project Tree, double-click a location to perform the location’s activation action. The specific
activation action set in the location’s property sheet is performed.
Note: When you play a flight pattern, the default flight time of the camera for one round trip
around the point of interest is 15 seconds.
In the Project Tree, right-click and select one of the following options from the shortcut menu:
Location Shortcut Menu
Option Activity
Fly to Location Flies from the current location directly to the selected location
Jump to location Jumps directly to the location’s position
View Location This option’s sub-menu contains a list of pre-defined flight patterns
that compass about the location.
Circle Pattern: Performs a circle flight around the location.
The camera always faces the specified location. The radius is
set according to the distance parameter.
Oval Pattern: Performs an oval flight pattern around the
location. The camera always faces the specified location. The
first radius is set to the distance parameter and the second
radius is set to half of the distance parameter.
Line Pattern: Performs a tight oval flight pattern around the
location. The camera always faces the specified location. The
first radius is set to the distance parameter and the second
radius is set to one-tenth of the distance parameter.
Arc Pattern: Performs a vertical arc flight above the location.
The camera always faces the specified location. The radius is
set according to the distance parameter.
120
TerraExplorer User Guide
Stopping a Flight to or Around a Location
To stop a flight to or around a location:
Right-click anywhere in the 3D Window, and from the shortcut menu select Stop.
or
In the Project Tree, right-click the location’s name, and from the shortcut menu select Stop.
Creating Locations
To create a new location in the current camera position:
1. In the Project Tree, select the required group or click in the root area if you want to create the
location in the root folder.
2. On the Home tab, in the Add group, click Location.
3. Type a name for the location or accept the default and press ENTER.
Note: When you create a location, by default, the activation action is Fly to and no message is
displayed. If you want to change the activation action or add a message, open the property sheet
and make the required modifications. See “Editing Locations” in this chapter for more information.
The location of interest is set to the terrain coordinate at the center of the 3D Window. If there is no terrain
at the center of the view (the camera is facing the sky), the location of interest is set to a distance of two
times the current altitude of the camera above the terrain.
Note: When you create a location, the point of interest is set only to the terrain coordinate of the center
of the 3D Window and is not affected by any 2D or 3D models in front of the terrain.
Editing Locations
To edit a location:
1. In the Project Tree, right-click the required location, and select Properties from the shortcut menu.
The Location property sheet opens.
2. Modify the Location property sheet parameters as required.
Location Parameter Activity
General
Name Type the description or name of the location.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the location.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the location from the
Project Tree.
Message The message associated with the location. The number displayed
is the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Location
Altitude Method Sets the altitude method to be used by the location:
Select Relative to Terrain to place the location of interest at a
specified altitude above the ground.
121
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Select Absolute to place the location of interest at a specified
altitude above the terrain database vertical datum base
ellipsoid.
Altitude Enter the altitude above the ground for the specified location.
X Enter the X-coordinate of the location of interest.
Y Enter the Y-coordinate of the location of interest.
MGRS The coordinates of the location of interest in Military Grid
Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available
if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog
box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for
more information.
Direction Enter the horizontal angle of the camera when viewing the
location.
Tilt Enter the vertical angle of the camera when viewing the location.
Viewing Distance Enter the distance between the camera and the specified location.
This parameter also affects the radius of the flight patterns.
Set Location Click the Capture button to define the current camera position as
the selected location. The updated coordinates for the location
appear in the Location property sheet.
View Location Click this button to jump to the set location.
Updating Locations to the Current Camera Position
You can update a location according to the current camera position.
To update a location according to the current camera position, do either of the following:
In the Project Tree, right-click the required location, and select Update location position from the
shortcut menu.
or
In the location’s property sheet, in the Set Location parameter, click Capture.
Setting Locations for Auto-Start
You can assign a location for the Auto-Start procedure of the project. In this case, the project starts with
the camera viewing the location or performing the location’s activation action.
See “Setting the Auto-Start Procedure” in the “Setting the Project” chapter for further information on how
to set locations for the Auto-Start procedure.
Multiple Coordinate Systems
The Multiple Coordinate Systems tool projects the current camera/cursor coordinates to a user-selectable
coordinate system. The tool always displays the Lat-Long and MGRS coordinate systems.
122
TerraExplorer User Guide
Multiple Coordinate Systems Tool
Using the Multiple Coordinate Systems Tool
To use the Multiple Coordinate Systems tool:
1. On the Navigation tab, in the Navigation Aid group, click Multiple Coord Sys. The Multiple Coord
Sys dialog box opens.
2. In the Lat Long section, select the Latitude display mode:
Decimal Degrees
Degrees, Decimal Minutes
Degrees, Minutes, Seconds
3. If you want to add another coordinate system, in one of the Not Assigned sections, click Choose
CS. The Coordinate System dialog box opens. Enter the required information. See “Coordinate
System Dialog Box” in the “Basic Concepts” chapter for information.
123
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
4. If you want to view to a location based on the assigned coordinate system, in the Lat-Long section,
type the X and Y coordinates of the desired location and click View Point.
Note: The camera itself is not positioned at the XY coordinates that are entered but rather it is
positioned to view the XY coordinates from a certain distance and angle.
124
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 8 EFFECTS
About Effects
in the Load and Save group, click three categories of visualization effects to enhance realism of the 3D
visualization.
Weather Effects – Simulation of meteorological phenomena such as clouds, wind, sky, sun, rain,
snow, and fog.
Animation Effects - Simulation of natural phenomena such as fire, smoke, and explosions, or
fireworks, by modeling the underlying physical processes of these phenomena.
Water Effects – Simulation of naturally or artificially flowing water such as rivers, oceans, waterfalls,
and pools.
The latter two categories are rendered in TerraExplorer using a powerful and robust particle system.
Particle system effects are based on very small graphic objects that fade out quickly and are then re-
emitted from the effect's source to simulate certain kinds of "fuzzy" phenomena, such as fire, explosions,
smoke, moving water, fog, and snow. Each particle effect is composed of one or more emitters (each of
which can use a distinct graphic object with distinct emitter properties).
When selecting an animation effect, you can use the default properties that are specific to the particular
effect, or you can modify these properties using the Particle Editor. This editor gives you the ability to
customize nearly all particle properties including: base image, color, size, rotation, speed, and lifetime.
Changes made in the editor take effect immediately.
Effects Tab
Weather Effects
You can simulate different meteorological phenomena such as clouds, wind, sky, sun, rain, snow, and fog
to enhance the realism of the 3D visualization.
Sky Color
To select a sky color:
1. On the Effects tab, in the Weather group, from the Sky Color drop-down list, select a color.
2. If you want to create your own sky color, select Custom from the drop-down list. The Settings dialog
is displayed. See "Environment" in the "Setting the Project" chapter for more information.
Texture
To select a sky texture:
1. On the Effects tab, in the Weather group, from the Sky Texture drop-down list, select a sky texture.
2. If you want to create your own sky color, select Custom from the drop-down list. The Settings dialog
is displayed. See "Environment" in the "Setting the Project" chapter for more information.
125
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Dynamic Clouds
To select dynamic cloud covering:
1. On the Effects tab, in the Weather group, from the Dynamic Clouds drop-down list, select a cloud
cover option.
2. If you want to create your own cloud cover, select Custom from the drop-down list. The Settings
dialog is displayed. See "Environment" in the "Setting the Project" chapter for more information.
Wind Direction
To set a wind direction:
On the Effects tab, in the Weather group, in the Wind Direction field, select a direction.
Wind Speed
To set a wind speed:
On the Effects tab, in the Weather group, in the Wind Speed field, select a speed.
Fog
To set a fog covering:
On the Effects tab, in the Weather group, select the Fog check box, and then drag the Fog slider to
adjust the intensity of the fog cover.
Rain
To set a rain covering:
On the Effects tab, in the Weather group, select the Rain check box, and then drag the Rain slider
to adjust the intensity of the rainfall.
Snow
To set a snow covering:
On the Effects tab, in the Weather group, select the Snow check box, and then drag the Snow slider
to adjust the intensity of the snowfall.
Animation Effects
Using particle system animations, TerraExplorer simulates natural phenomena such as fire, smoke, and
explosions, or fireworks, by modeling the underlying physical processes of these phenomena.
TerraExplorer uses a versatile, powerful particle system that captures important elements of each effect
with realistic colors and intensity to effectively simulate different phenomena.
When selecting an animation effect, you can use the default properties that are specific to the particular
effect, or you can modify these properties using the Particle Editor. This editor gives you the ability to
customize nearly all particle properties including: base image, color, size, rotation, speed, and lifetime.
Changes made in the editor take effect immediately
126
TerraExplorer User Guide
Creating an Animation Effect Object
To create an animated effect object:
1. On the Effects tab, in the Animation group, click the required effect, and then from the drop-down
menu, select the required shape. The Effect property sheet opens.
2. In the Effect property sheet, set the effect's parameters. If you want to modify particle properties such
as base image, color, size, rotation, speed, and lifetime, then in the property sheet's Effect Setting
field, click Set. The Particle Editor is displayed. See "Particle Editor Parameters" in this chapter for
information.
3. Place the effect object in the 3D Window by clicking in the desired location. The effect object is
added to the Project Tree.
4. Continue to edit the effect's parameters, or close the property sheet to finish the operation.
Effect Property Sheet Parameters
Object Parameter Activity
Appearance
Name Type the description or name of the effect. This text appears in the
Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the object from the
Project Tree.
Line to Ground Adds a line from the effect's pivot point either to the ground or to a
custom length towards the ground.
Note: A line to ground is displayed while the effect is being
edited (i.e., as long as its property sheet is open),
regardless of this property value. This property only
determines whether a line to ground will continue to
display even after the effect’s property sheet is closed.
Line Length Determines the length of the line to the ground.
This parameter is available only when the “Line to Ground”
parameter is set to “Custom Length”.
Line Color Sets the color of the effect object's line to ground.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff). This
parameter is available only when the “Line to Ground” option is set
to “To Ground” or “Custom Length”.
Effect
Effect Setting Click Set to open the Particle Editor to modify particle parameters,
such as base image, color, size, rotation, speed, and lifetime.
Timespan
Start Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the effect object
should first become visible.
End Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the effect object
should stop being visible.
Position
127
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Altitude Method Sets the altitude method to be used by the effect object:
Select Relative to Terrain to place each point of the effect
object at a specified altitude above the ground, defined by its
“Point Altitude.”
Select Absolute to place each point at a specified altitude
above the terrain database vertical datum base ellipsoid. You
can use this feature to create effect objects of known absolute
altitude values that are not dependent on the terrain elevation
values.
Select Relative to 3DML to place each point of the effect
object at a specified altitude above the 3DML layer.
Altitude Enter the altitude, as defined in the Altitude Method, for the pivot
point.
The pivot’s altitude is the average altitude of all the points. This
value is used as the initial altitude of the points when you create a
new effect object. Changing the pivot altitude to an existing effect
adjusts all the points according to the offset from the previous
value.
X Enter the X-coordinate for the effect object's pivot point.
The pivot is located at the center of the effect object. Change this
value to move the entire effect object.
Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the effect object's pivot point.
The pivot is located at the center of the effect object. Change this
value to move the entire effect object.
MGRS The coordinates of the effect object’s pivot point in Military Grid
Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available
if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog
box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for
more information.
Yaw Determines the direction angle of the effect object along the
vertical axis relative to north.
Pitch Determines the tilt angle of the effect object along its lateral axis
relative to the horizon.
Roll Determines the roll angle of the effect object along its longitudinal
(front-to-back) axis.
Geometry
Scale Determines the dimensions, in meters per pixel, of the effect
object.
Limit Growth If this parameter is set to Yes, the effect object keeps its original
size in pixels (Text Size). It does not grow as you fly closer.
Min. Viewing Height Determines the minimum viewing height at which the effect object
is visible.
The effect object disappears when flying lower than the “Min
Viewing Height”.
Smallest Visible Size Determines the minimum size in pixels, below which the effect
object disappears as you fly away from it.
128
TerraExplorer User Guide
General
Show in Viewer Determines if the effect object appears in the 3D Window when the
file is viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic viewer.
Message The message associated with the object. The number displayed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a tooltip text to appear when the mouse cursor is placed over
the effect object in the 3D Window.
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the effect
object.
This distance is used as a stop mark for any “Fly -to” or “View
Object” operation. It is also used when selecting to edit the object
from the Project Tree.
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance for the effect object based on
its size.
Particle Editor Parameters
To set particle parameters for each particle emitter:
Select the tab of the emitter whose parameters you want to set, and then set the required
parameters.
Note: Selecting an emitter check box turns that emitter on while selecting the emitter’s tab
allows you to set its parameters.
129
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Particle Editor
Effect Parameter Activity
Image Particle's base image.
Color Particle's surface color.
130
TerraExplorer User Guide
Blend mode Controls whether the particle blends the color
designated in the Color parameter and the
particle’s image color.
Clear this check box to ignore the color
designated in the Color parameter.
Emitter Shape Shape of the particle emitter. The choice of
shape affects the region from which particles can
be launched and the initial direction of the
particles. For example, a sphere throws particles
outward in all directions while, a cone produces a
diverging stream of particles.
Select one of the following: Cone, sphere,
shellcone, shellsphere, ring, disc, cube, one.
Emitter Scale Controls the size of the Emitter Shape.
Drag the X, Y, and Z sliders (0-10) to adjust the
scale factor in each dimension.
Speed Direction Shape Shape of the volume that the particles are
emitted into.
Select one of the following: Cone, sphere,
shellcone, shellsphere, ring, disc, cube, one.
Speed Factor Controls the factor of the Speed Direction Shape.
Drag the slider (0-14.06) to adjust the scale
factor.
Drag the X, Y, and Z sliders (-1 - 1) to adjust
the ratio on each axis of the shape.
Particle Size Size of the particle. The number entered is a
factor of the size of the particle image. Enter 1 in
this field to create a particle the same size as the
image selected.
Size Ratio (X/Y) Drag the slider (1:5-5:1) to set the particle's
aspect ratio.
Rotation Speed – Drag the slider to set the maximum
rotational speed in radians (0-20)
Time – Drag the slider to set the duration in
seconds of the particle rotation (0-10K). 10k
will rotate infinitely.
Random start angle – Select the check box
to randomize the initial rotation of the
particles. Otherwise, the angle is zero.
Render How the rendered image is produced from the
graphic image:
Billboard - Particle always faces the camera
Horizontal - Particle plane is parallel to the
XZ “floor” plane
131
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Vertical - Particle is upright on the world Y
axis but turns to face the camera
Gravity Force of acceleration on particles after they are
created.
Drag the sliders (0-10) to set the X, Y, and Z
gravity values.
Force(Wind) Wind force – Drag the slider (0-1) to set the
degree in which the wind affects the
particles.
Affect rotation – Select this check box to
have the wind’s direction and speed affect
the rotation of the particles.
See “Wind Direction” and “Wind Speed” in this
chapter for more information on wind settings.
Drag Drag the slider (0-10) to set the amount of drag
operating against a particle's motion.
Rate Drag the slider (0-1000) to set the number of
particles emitted per second.
Max Particles Maximum number of particles that can exist at
one time. A high number of particles may incur
some performance penalty especially on low-end
hardware configurations.
Lifetime Amount of time, in seconds, that a particle exists
before it disappears.
Drag the slider (0-6.25) to control how long each
individual particle is onscreen.
Fade Fade In % and Fade Out % define the
amount of time spent fading in and fading
out. For example, if Fade In is set to 50%
and Fade Out is set to 0% then the particle
will spend half its life fading in, the other half
it will be fully visible, and then it will just
disappear without fading out at all.
Max Opacity – Maximum particle opacity that
is reached once particle has fully faded in.
Drag the Fade In and Fade Out sliders (0-100%)
to adjust the fade in and fade out time.
Drag the Max Opacity slider (0-100%) to adjust
maximum particle opacity.
Water Effects
You can simulate naturally or artificially flowing water such as rivers, oceans, waterfalls, and pools.
132
TerraExplorer User Guide
Water Animation
To create a water object, such as a waterfall, fountain, or water pipe, which realistically simulates the
particular object’s water flow, color, and other attributes:
1. On the Effects tab, in the Water group, click Water Animation, and select the required effect. The
Effect property sheet opens.
2. If you want to change the default water animation parameters, in the Polygon property sheet, set the
required parameters. See “Effect Property Sheet Parameters” in this chapter for information.
3. If you want to modify particle properties such as base image, color, size, rotation, speed, and lifetime,
then in the property sheet's Effect Setting field, click Set. The Particle Editor is displayed. See
"Particle Editor Parameters" in this chapter for information.
4. Place the effect object in the 3D Window by clicking in the desired location. The effect object is
added to the Project Tree.
5. Continue to edit the effect's parameters, or close the property sheet to finish the operation.
Water Body
To simulate flowing water effect in a water body:
1. On the Effects tab, in the Water group, click Water Body, and select the required body of water. The
Polygon property sheet opens.
2. If you want to change the default water body parameters, in the Polygon property sheet, set the
required parameters. See “Polygon Property Sheet Parameters” in the "Objects and Labels" chapter
for information.
Note: The default water body parameters vary depending on the water body that was selected.
The primary differences are in the values set for the Texture File.
3. If you want to modify particle properties such as water and reflection color and opacity or bump scale,
then in the property sheet's Water Setting field, click Set. The Particle Editor is displayed. See
"Water Particle Editor Parameters" in this chapter for information.
4. Place the polygon points in the 3D Window by clicking in the desired locations. You must place at
least three points.
Note: When creating a filled polygon, the lines of the polygon should not overlap each other. This
may result in an irregular fill pattern.
5. Finish the polygon creation by right-clicking.
6. Edit the polygon’s parameters in the 3D Window or using the property sheet. See “Editing Objects in
the 3D Window” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for information. Close the property sheet to
finish the operation.
133
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Water Particle Editor Parameters
Water Animation Particle Editor
Effect Parameter Activity
Opacity Controls the opacity of the water, where 100% is
opaque and 0% is transparent. Drag the slider (0-
100) to adjust the opacity.
Bump Scale Controls how bumpy the water texture appears.
Drag the slider (0-100) to adjust the scale.
Texture Repeat Drag the slider to adjust the repeats of the texture
file:
X – Number of repeats of the water texture
file in the X-axis (0-1024).
Y - Number of repeats of the water texture
file in the Y-axis (0-1024).
134
TerraExplorer User Guide
Bump Speed Speed - Drag the slider to adjust the speed
(0-20).
Direction - Drag the slider to adjust the
direction (0-360).
Fresnel Bias and exponent values for Fresnel calculation.
HDR Multiplier Multiply HDR values in background cube map.
Deep Color Color of deep water.
Shallow Color Color of shallow water.
Reflection Tint Reflection color.
Kr Strength of reflection.
KWater Strength of water color.
Use Light Display the sun’s reflection on the water. The
sun’s position is based on the system’s current
date and time. The reflection dynamically
updates when the system date and time is
changed.
Oceans
You can display animated water on all sea and ocean terrain.
To toggle the display of the animated water on sea and ocean terrain:
On the Effects tab, in the Water group, click Oceans.
135
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 9 SETTING THE PROJECT
About the Project Settings
Settings for your current .FLY file can be viewed and edited from the Project Settings dialog box. These
settings include general project and startup information, terrain database properties, application layout,
and specifications for startup date/time and environment effects. The settings are saved in the .FLY file
and applied each time this file is used.
To open the Project Settings dialog box:
On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Project Settings (Shortcut – F8).
General
The General settings define basic properties of the .FLY file including: project information, minimum
required version of TerraExplorer, and startup message parameters.
136
TerraExplorer User Guide
To implement any setting changes, you need to save, and then reopen the project.
Project Settings - General Tab
Parameter Description
Project Information
Name Name of the project.
Description Enter a text string.
137
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Tags Key words or terms associated with the project file. If adding
multiple tags, they should be semicolon delimited.
Minimum Required Version When TerraExplorer or TerraExplorer Pro opens a .FLY project,
they compare this number to their own version number. If the
minimum supported version is higher than the version of
TerraExplorer currently trying to open the project, TerraExplorer
forces an upgrade in order to open it.
Startup
Set As Home Click to set the current camera location as the default startup
position for this .FLY file.
Startup Message Determines the message to be shown when the project is opened.
Click Add Message to open the Create Message dialog box.
See “Messages and Tooltips” in the “Working with Objects” chapter
for further information on creating messages.
Wait Set the number of seconds TerraExplorer waits at the beginning of
the session before starting the Auto-Start procedure or allowing
manual flight. It is recommended to use this feature for Internet
applications where you want to freeze camera movement for
several seconds at the beginning of the session. This freeze allows
TerraExplorer to stream objects and features and sharpen the
image before the session starts. The user can override the wait
period by selecting elements from the Project Tree.
See “Setting the Auto-Start Procedure” in this chapter for further
information on assigning elements for Auto-Start.
Performance and Quality Setting
Generate Levels of Detail for Automatically optimize all loaded models by conversion to XPL2
3D Models upon loading. When a model file is converted to XPL, a set of XPL
files is created from a single model file where each file contains
data for one Level of Detail (LOD) only. TerraExplorer displays the
best LOD file based on the viewer position in relation to the object.
This results in an improvement in overall model display
performance.
Note: Generating Level of Detail is recommended for projects
that have dense model layers, with non-optimized models
(e.g., KML with DAE models). While objects may take
slightly longer to load the first time, memory usage will be
optimized.
Double sided rendering of Select this check box to render the faces of 3D models from two
3D models sides. You should only use this option if you have 3D models in the
project with single-side faces or non-unified normal, and you want
to display them as double-sided.
Setting the Auto-Start Procedure
You can assign only one element for the Auto-Start procedure. The last element you assign is used. You
must save the project for this setting to take effect.
You can assign any of the following elements for Auto-Start:
The camera’s current position.
138
TerraExplorer User Guide
Any location, presentation, or object.
At the beginning of the project, the camera starts at a specific location or performs a unique flight pattern
according to the selected Auto-Start element.
Auto-Start Element Description
Start Position The project starts with the camera in the Start Position coordinates.
Location The auto-start procedure depends on the selected location’s
Activation Action :
If the location’s Activation Action parameter is set to “Fly To”,
the project begins with the camera viewing the selected
location.
If the location’s Activation Action parameter is set to one of the
pattern flights, the project begins by flying in the selected
pattern around the selected location.
Presentation The project starts by playing the selected presentation.
Object The auto-start procedure depends on the type of object and its
Activation Action :
Static object with Activation Action parameter set to “Fly To” or
one of the “View” actions - The project starts by flying from the
Start Position to the selected object. If a specific “View” action
is selected for the object, the camera stops at that view.
Static object with Activation Action parameter set to one of the
pattern flights - The project starts by playing the pattern around
the selected object.
Dynamic object with Activation Action parameter set to “Fly To”
or one of the “View” actions - The project starts by flying from
the Start Position to the selected object. If a specific “View”
action was selected for the object, the camera stops at that
view. If the “Fly To” action is selected then the camera stops
behind and above the object. After the camera reaches the
object, it starts to follow it.
Dynamic object with Activation Action parameter set to one of
the pattern flights - The project starts by playing the pattern
around the selected object, while the object is moving.
How to Assign an Element for Auto-Start
To set the camera’s current position as the Start Position of the project (shortcut - F2):
1. On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Project Settings.
2. In the General tab, in the Startup section, click Set As Home.
3. If another location, object, or presentation had previously been set for Auto Start, a dialog box
displays confirming that you want to replace the previous element with the current location. Click Yes
to replace it, or No to cancel.
To assign an element (location, presentation, or object) as the Start Position of the project:
In the Project Tree, right-click the element and from the shortcut menu select: Set Location For Auto-
Start, Set Presentation For Auto-Start or Set Object For Auto-Start.
139
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: The name of the Auto Start element in the Project Tree is underlined in red. For example,
an “Auto-Start” location is marked:
To set a waiting time at the beginning of the session before the system performs the Auto-Start
procedure:
1. On the Home tab, in the Project group, click Project Settings.
2. In the Startup section, in the Wait field, type the number of seconds the system should wait before
the Auto-Start.
140
TerraExplorer User Guide
Date and Light Effects
The Date and Light tab enables you to control the sun and shadow display and the range of the Date and
Time slider.
Project Settings - Date and Light Tab
Parameter Description
Light Source
141
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
No light effect Select this option to light all sides of the 3D Window evenly.
Use sunlight Select this option if you want the sun to serve as the light source
for the project. This results in parts of the 3D World being brighter
than others based on the time, date and time zone set.
Use sunlight and shadow Select this option if you want the sun to serve as the light source
for the project and you want shadows cast for all buildings and 3D
models in the 3D Window. The lighting and shadows dynamically
update when the system date and time is changed.
Startup Time Zone
My computer Select this option to use your local time zone.
UTC (Coordinated Universal Select this option to use UTC time.
Time)
Specific Select this option to use a specific time zone, and then select it
from the drop-down list.
Startup Date and Time Slider Range
Project time range Select this option to display a time/date slider whose range
corresponds to the project’s range.
Always use <> at viewer Select this option to display a time slider with a 24 hour range,
position which is set at a specified time.
One year range (two sliders) Select this option to display two sliders, a time slider whose range
is 24 hours and a date slider whose range is one year.
Automatically adjust range to Select this option to display a time/date slider whose range varies
selected item depending on the range of the selected item. When no item is
selected, the slider’s date and time correspond to the date and
time option selected above.
Layout
In the Layout tab, you can set:
Window size and layout of the containers after TerraExplorer reopens the project.
Contents for the left, right, top, bottom, and main view containers and floating window. Containers
with more than one panel are given tabs to allow you to switch between the options.
142
TerraExplorer User Guide
Project Settings - Layout Tab
To establish a particular size and layout for the project:
1. Restore down the TerraExplorer Pro application and set it to the required size.
2. Reposition and resize the panels as required. See “Application Layout” in the “Basic Concepts”
chapter for information.
3. In the Project Settings dialog box, click the Layout tab.
4. Select the Fly Project Determines Initial Layout check box.
5. Click Capture & Set Layout. The project settings are set to the current sizes.
143
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: You can click the Reset to Default button to reset the TerraExplorer default settings.
Resetting will cancel your configured settings.
6. Click OK.
Note: If you do not want to establish any particular size and layout for this project, clear the Fly Project
Determines Initial Layout check box, and save the .FLY project. Doing so restores standard
TerraExplorer size and layout when the user reopens the project.
To create new panels:
1. In the Layout tab of the Project Settings dialog box, in the Container Settings section, click Add.
Note: If you already created a new panel and now want to modify its parameters, select the
panel, and click Edit.
The Panel Properties dialog box is displayed.
Tab Properties Dialog Box
2. Do the following:
a. In the Panel Name field, enter/modify the name you want to appear on the panel caption or on
the tab.
b. In the URL field, enter or browse to the required URL.
c. In the Position field, select one of the following options from the drop-down list:
Dock Left
Dock Right
Dock Top
Dock bottom
Float
Main View
Note: If you want to remove a panel, in the Container Settings section, select it and click Remove.
Note: Only the position of new panels can be set in the Tab Properties dialog box. TerraExplorer’s
standard panels are repositioned by dragging them to the required positions on the screen. You
can reposition any panel on the screen except for the 3D Window.
Terrain Database
The Terrain Database tab determines the terrain source and settings, and sets and restores the terrain
coordinate system.
144
TerraExplorer User Guide
By default, the terrain coordinate system is read from the terrain database. However, in rare cases where
you know the coordinate system does not exist in the terrain database, or is incorrect, you can define it
manually.
Project Settings - Terrain Database Tab
145
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Enter the following information:
Parameter Activity
Terrain Source
Terrain Database The name of the local or remote MPT database currently used by
this project.
To change the project’s MPT database:
Click the Browse button and select a different MPT database.
Make sure that the new MPT has the same coordinate system
and covers the same area as the original MPT, or the content
of the project will be unusable.
Number of Terrain Imaginary Enter the number of imaginary resolution levels that are used to
Levels enhance the visual quality when the camera is close to the ground.
Legal Values: 0 to 6 (inclusive). When the camera is very close to
the ground and no actual terrain resolution is available in the MPT
database, the terrain appears smoother as more imaginary levels
are added.
Reproject Elevation Values Determines the default Reproject Elevation setting for 3DML and
feature layers when they are initially loaded into the project. When
this setting is selected, TerraExplorer reprojects the layer’s
elevation values to the terrain’s coordinate system, if the layer
includes vertical datum or is a 3DML created in TerraExplorer 7.1
or PhotoMesh 7.4 or higher. Geocentric layers are always
reprojected, even if this setting is not selected.
Terrain Coordinate System
Description Free text field (Read-only).
Change Click to open the Coordinate System dialog box. This high-level
dialog box allows you to select, view, edit and create a new
coordinate system. See “Coordinate System Dialog Box” in the
“Basic Concepts” chapter for information.
Restore from Terrain DB Restores the coordinate system that is available from the MPT file.
146
TerraExplorer User Guide
Screen Overlay
The Screen Overlay settings allow you to set the copyright text and image that appear on the 3D Window.
Project Settings -Screen Overlay Tab
Enter the following information:
147
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Parameter Activity
Copyright Text
Copyright Text Enter an alphanumeric string for the owner of the copyright for the
data. This information appears on the bottom of the 3D Window
and on the About TerraExplorer screen accessed from the
Resources menu.
Remove Skyline copyright Check this option if you do not want to display the Skyline
notice copyright notice.
Screen Overlay Image
Image Type or browse a path to a BMP, JPEG, or GIF to load as the
overlay image. If no image is selected, no screen overlay image
will be displayed.
Animated GIF files are supported.
Link Enter the link URL.
If a link exists, TerraExplorer Pro launches an external web
browser with the selected URL when the user clicks on the image.
Screen Alignment Select the position on the screen for the screen overlay:
Bottom left
Bottom center
Bottom right
Top center
Classification Text
Level Select a project classification level:
Note: The classification level selected for the project is displayed
prominently in the 3D Window.
None
Unclassified (Green)
Secret (Red)
Top Secret (Yellow)
If you want to set your own classification level text and color, select
Custom.
Custom text and color Type the text and color for the custom classification level.
Environment
From the Environment tab, you can set the appearance of the atmosphere in the 3D Window:
Horizon distance, fog starting distance
Sky and fog color
Sky and cloud textures
Water effect.
148
TerraExplorer User Guide
Project Settings - Environment Tab
Parameter Activity
Sky Color
Fog Click this arrow and select the required fog color from the drop-
down list of fill colors or click Other, and select the required color
from the Colors dialog box. See “Colors Dialog Box” in this chapter
149
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
for information. The actual fog color is a gradient of colors from the
Fog color at the horizon to the Sky color at the middle of the sky.
Sky Click this arrow and select the required sky color from the drop-
down list of fill colors or click Other, and select the required color
from the Colors dialog box. See “Colors Dialog Box” in this chapter
for information.
Sky Texture
Sky texture If you want a sky texture to be displayed, select the check box, and
select one of the texture options, or select Custom, and browse to
the required texture file.
Clouds
Custom map If you want a cloud cover to be displayed, select the check box,
and select the Cloud cover option, or select Custom, and browse
to the required Cloud map file.
Base altitude Enter a number between 10000 and 20000 as a base altitude for
the cloud cover.
Colors Dialog Box
Colors Dialog Box
To select a color:
1. Use one of the following methods:
In the Standard tab, click one of the displayed Colors.
In the Custom tab, create Custom colors using the color matrix and luminosity slider or by typing
exact parameters in the value-boxes. Click OK.
Click Select, drag the eye dropper to any area on the screen with the required color and click.
150
TerraExplorer User Guide
2. Click OK.
Navigation
The Navigation settings allow you to define the free flight envelope. Navigation settings determine the
characteristics and limits of the free flight but do not affect pre-determined fly-through such as fly-to object
or fly-to location. The free flight is controlled with one or more of the following methods:
Mouse
Keyboard
Joystick
Control panel.
151
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Project Settings - Navigation Tab
Parameter Activity
Altitude
Minimum Altitude Type the minimum altitude allowed for the plane in meters or feet
above ground level.
Underground Surface Type the altitude above the terrain database vertical datum base
ellipsoid.
152
TerraExplorer User Guide
Keyboard & Mouse
Navigation Speed Slide the slider to set navigation speed when using the keyboard
controls. See “Navigating Using the Keyboard” in the “Navigating in
the 3D World” chapter for information about keyboard controls.
Joystick
Navigation Speed Slide the slider to set the joystick’s speed.
153
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 10 USING THE PROJECT TREE
About the Project Tree
The Project Tree provides quick access to TerraExplorer Pro elements , enabling you to control the
appearance of information in the 3D Window. Project Tree elements can be arranged in groups,
according to function, type of information, or location.
The Project Tree
Note: Clicking once on a Project Tree item selects the item, whereas double-clicking performs its
activation action.
The Project Tree contains the following elements:
Element Icon Description
Group A folder containing a collection of objects.
Double-click the group name or the
154
TerraExplorer User Guide
Expand/Collapse icon to show or hide the
group’s object in the Project Tree.
Note: A locked group whose folder is always in
collapse mode and cannot be opened by the
TerraExplorer Basic viewer user has no
Expand/Collapse icon
Feature Layer - A polygon feature layer is a group containing visual
Polygons representation of a geographic data using geographic
polygon objects.
Feature Layer - A polyline feature layer is a group containing visual
Polylines representation of a geographic data using geographic
polyline objects.
Feature Layer - A point feature layer is a group containing visual
Points representation of a geographic data using geographic
points.
Location Pre-defined location on the 3D Window.
Double-click on the location icon to fly to the location
or to perform a flight pattern around it.
Presentation Recorded flight path and view of terrain.
Click on the presentation icon to play the
presentation.
Label Text or image label.
Double-click on the label icon to fly to the label,
perform a flight pattern around it or view the label
from a different direction.
Static Object 2D or 3D static object.
Double-click on the object icon to fly to the object,
perform a flight pattern around it or view the object
from a different direction.
Imagery, Imagery or Elevation layer
Elevation Layers
Dynamic Object 2D or 3D dynamic object.
Message Project Tree message.
Contour Map Contour map of a selected area or the entire terrain.
Double-click on the Contour Map icon to fly to it,
perform a flight pattern around it or view it from a
different direction.
Slope Map Slope map of a selected area or the entire terrain.
Line of Sight Line of Sight marker.
Double-click on the Line of Sight icon to fly to the
marker, perform a flight pattern around it or view it
from a different direction.
155
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Best Path Best Path calculation object.
Double-click on the Best Path icon to fly to the
calculation object, perform a flight pattern around it
or view it from a different direction.
Modify Terrain Modify Terrain object.
Click on the Modify Terrain icon to fly to it, perform a
flight pattern around it or view it from a different
direction.
Hole on Terrain Hole on Terrain object.
Double-click on the Hole on Terrain icon to fly to it,
perform a flight pattern around it or view it from a
different direction.
Video On Terrain The Video On Terrain feature plays a video file onto any
selected area of the terrain.
Double-click on the video icon to fly to fly to it,
perform a flight pattern around it or view it from a
different direction.
Showing and Hiding Objects
Click on the group’s show/hide icon to display or hide all of the group’s children on the 3D Window.
The show/hide feature is also available for each child on the group. Groups with some children in show
mode and others in hide mode display the following icon.
The show/hide feature is relevant for labels, and static and dynamic objects. It has no effect on locations,
presentations or Project Tree messages.
Showing Objects in the TerraExplorer Viewer Project Tree
All locations, presentations and Project Tree messages always appear in the Project Tree when a
TerraExplorer Basic Viewer opens the .FLY project. Objects, by default, also display in the Project Tree
when TerraExplorer Basic viewer opens a .FLY project, but their display settings can be changed using
their “Show in Viewer” parameter.
To change display settings, do either of the following:
Open the property sheet for a single object or group of objects and change the Show in Viewer
parameter to Yes to display the objects in the TerraExplorer Viewer Project Tree or No to hide it.
or
In the Project Tree, right-click the required object, and then toggle the Show in Viewer Project Tree
option on the shortcut menu.
Note: If all the children in a group are not shown on the Basic Viewer Project Tree, the group itsel f is
removed.
The Root
The blank area of the Project Tree is called the “root area”. The leftmost area on the side of the Project
Tree is called the “root folder”
156
TerraExplorer User Guide
You can place elements or groups directly in the root (as described below), or as part of other groups.
Root
Search Tool
Using the TerraExplorer search tool located at the top of the Project Tree, you can search for any of the
following:
Items in your project tree, including locations, layers, groups and objects.
Addresses and points of interest on your SkylineGlobe Server.
Layers and projects on your SkylineGlobe Server, including feature, 3D Mesh Layer, raster, and point
cloud.
TerraExplorer ribbon commands, e.g., Publish, Viewshed, or Animation. (The search results will
include all commands with the search term and the related tooltip).
Feature attributes in a selected feature layer.
Specific coordinates.
For more efficient and effective searches, search filters can be used to narrow the scope of your search,
using the syntax ‘Filter: search term.
157
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
To search:
1. In the Project Tree, Search here field, type a search term.
2. If you want to filter your search, use the syntax Filter: search term. See “Search Filters” in this chapter
for information about available filters.
3. If you want to search for feature attributes in a selected feature layer, do the following:
a. In the Project Tree, right-click the feature layer and click "Search". The layer’s name is inserted
in the search bar.
b. Add your search term after the colon that follows the layer name, i.e. [World Data\OSM
Roads\OSM Roads Level 3]: Search Term.
4. When clicking on a search result, the operation that TE performs depends on the result type selected:
Commands: - Activates the command.
Project: - Selects the item on the project tree and flies to its location.
Addresses: - Flies to the address location.
SkylineGlobe: - Loads the layer.
[Feature Layer]: - Flies to the feature location.
To fly to a specific coordinate:
In the Project Tree, Search here field, type the coordinates using the following syntax:
Coord: Lon, Lat or X, Y - Fly to coordinate.
MGRS: MGRS coordinate - Fly to MGRS coordinate
Search Filters
The following filters enable you to search for items from a specific source:
'project:’ (or ‘p:’) search term - Searches only items in the project tree.
'command:’ (or ‘c:’) search term - Searches only TerraExplorer ribbon commands.
'address:’ (or ‘a:’) search term - Searches only addresses in your SkylineGlobe Server.
'skylineglobe:’ (or ‘sg:’) search term - Searches only layers and projects in your SkylineGlobe
Server
The following filters restrict the search results to items of a specific type:
'Group:’ search term - Searches the project tree only for groups
'Layer:’ search term - Searches only for feature/raster/3D mesh layer 3DML/point cloud layers
'3DML:’ search term - Searches only for 3D (3DML) layers
'Raster:’ search term - Searches only for imagery/elevation layers
'Imagery:’ search term - Searches only for imagery layers
'Elevation:’ search term - Searches only for elevation layers
158
TerraExplorer User Guide
'Feature:’ search term - Searches only for feature layers
'CPT:’ search term - Searches only for point cloud (cpt)
Selecting Items from the Project Tree
The Project Tree provides a set of tools for selecting single or multiple items from the tree. A new
selection of single or multiple items deselects the previous selection on the tree.
Selecting a Single Item
To select a single item:
In the Project Tree, click the required item.
Note: If you double-click the item, you automatically perform the item’s action.
Selecting Sequential Tree Items
You can select a set of sequential items from the tree. The items can be part of a single group or from
several different groups.
To select sequential items:
1. In the Project Tree, click the required item.
2. Press and hold the SHIFT key.
3. Move the cursor to the last object you want to select and click it. All objects between the first and last
objects are selected.
Note: If there is a group between the selected objects, the group, and all of its children (including other
groups) are automatically selected. If a group name is selected, all its components are also
selected, even though the components (children) are not highlighted on the tree.
Selecting Non-Sequential Tree Items
To select a set of items from the Project Tree that are not arranged sequentially:
1. In the Project Tree, click the required item.
2. Press and hold the CTRL key.
3. Move the cursor to the next item you would like to select and click it.
You can repeat this operation as many times as you like, selecting multiple items from the same or
different groups.
Note: If you want to deselect an item, click a previously selected item while the CTRL key is still
pressed. The item becomes deselected in the same manner as it was selected.
You can combine sequential and non-sequential selections.
If you select a group, you automatically select all the children in that group. If you have selected a group,
but then you wish to select only certain children from that group, first deselect the group, and then select
the specific children that you require.
159
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Multiple Non-Sequential Selections
Reordering Items in the Project Tree
You can reorder items in the Project Tree
To move an item to a new position in the Project Tree:
1. Click and drag the item to the required position on the Project Tree.
Note: All groups, and feature and 3DML layers and 3DML always appear at the top of the Project
Tree. Items such as objects and imagery layers cannot be placed above them.
2. If you want to move an item to the highest position in the Project Tree that it can be moved, drag it to
the root folder, i.e., the leftmost area on the side of the Project Tree. When an item is dragged to the
root folder, a blue line appears on the left side of the Project Tree.
Working with Groups
The Project Tree contains all project elements, organized in a hierarchy of groups. You can add any
number of groups, either in the root area or folder, or under another group.
160
TerraExplorer User Guide
Creating New Groups
To create a new group under the root:
1. Right-click in the root area of the Project Tree, and then from the shortcut menu, select Create
Group.
or
On the Home tab, in the Add group, click the arrow next to Project Tree and select Create Group
from the drop-down menu.
2. Type the name of the new group and press ENTER.
To create a new group under an existing group:
1. Right-click the parent group, and then from the shortcut menu, select Create Group.
2. Type the name of the new group and press ENTER.
or
1. Select the parent group.
2. On the Home tab, in the Add group, click Project Tree. From the drop-down menu, select Create
Group.
3. Type the name of the new group and press ENTER.
Locking Groups
A locked group is a folder always shown in collapsed mode; it cannot be expanded by the TerraExplorer
Basic Viewer user. This feature is used to combine a number of objects into one virtual entity.
To lock a group:
Right-click the parent group, and then from the shortcut menu, select Lock Group.
To unlock a group:
Right-click the parent group, and then from the shortcut menu, select Unlock Group.
Setting Group Properties
You can assign properties to a group, including the group’s name, activation action, timespan, and
location. Most of the properties apply only when the group is locked, and determine the group’s look and
behavior. You can also set a Project Tree group as a radio group. All items in the group are then mutually
exclusive, i.e., only one item can be selected at any time.
To set the group’s properties:
1. Right-click the parent group, and then from the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Multi-Edit
property sheet is displayed.
2. Click the Group tab and set the following parameters:
Parameter Activity
General
Name Type the description or name of the group. This text appears in the
Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the locked group from
the Project Tree.
Status Select the group’s status - locked or unlocked
161
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Radio Group Sets the Project Tree group as a radio group, whose items are
mutually exclusive, i.e., only one item can be selected at any time.
Select Yes to create a radio group.
Message The message associated with the object. The number display ed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
The message property applies only when the group is locked.
Location
Altitude Method Sets the altitude method to be used for the specified location:
Select Relative to Terrain to place the location point at a
specified altitude above the ground.
Select Absolute to place the location point at a specified
altitude above the terrain database vertical datum base
ellipsoid.
Altitude Enter the altitude above the ground for the specified location.
X Enter the X-coordinate of the location of interest.
Y Enter the Y-coordinate of the location of interest.
MGRS The coordinates of the group in Military Grid Reference System
(MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available if Show MGRS
Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog box. See “View” in
the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for more information.
Direction Enter the horizontal angle of the camera when viewing the
location.
Tilt Enter the vertical angle of the camera when viewing the location.
Viewing Distance Enter the distance between the camera and the specified location.
This parameter also affects the radius of the flight patterns.
Set Viewpoint Click this button to capture the current camera position and set as
the camera parameters for this location.
Jump To Viewpoint Click this button to make the 3D Window reflect the changes made
to the location’s fields.
Timespan
Start Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the group should first
become visible.
End Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the group should
stop being visible.
Organizing Items in Groups
You can move items and groups in the Project Tree into new groups or out of groups into the root folder.
162
TerraExplorer User Guide
To reorganize the Project Tree:
1. Select a single or multiple items. See “Selecting Items from the Project Tree” in this chapter for
information.
2. If you want to move an item into a new group, click and drag it onto the group folder.
3. If you wish to move an item out of a group, drag it to any part of the root folder. When an object is
dragged to the root folder a blue line appears on the left side of the Project Tree.
Converting Groups to Layers
Groups can be saved to the following file formats:
TerraExplorer FLY project
Esri shapefile
OGC KML/KMZ file
GDB file
To save a group as a layer:
1. In the Project Tree, right-click the required group and select the Save As Layer(s) from the shortcut
menu. The Save As dialog box opens.
2. Browse to the required directory in which you want to save the layer file, and type a file name.
3. Click Save.
Note: If you select this option from a group, you recursively save this group and all its s ub-
groups. If you select this option from the root, you save all the groups in the Project Tree.
4. If saving a group as a shapefile or GDB, the Export dialog box is displayed. Enter the required
parameters and click Export. See “Export to Shapefile and GDB Dialog Box” in this chapter for
information.
163
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Export to Shapefile and GDB Dialog Box
Export Dialog Box
To use the Export to Shapefile and GDB dialog box:
1. Enter the required parameters:
Parameter Description
Save in Displays the path of the shapefile(s) to be saved.
Geometry Types The elements are divided into three types:
Polylines (including arcs)
Polygons (including circles, rectangles, regular polygons and
3D polygons) and buildings.
164
TerraExplorer User Guide
Points objects: text and image labels, 2D and 3D arrows,
ellipses, 3D models, boxes, cylinders, spheres, cones,
pyramids and locations.
Select the check box next each one of the types you want to save.
Note: Even if you save more than one group, all elements of the
same type are saved in one shapefile.
Select Attribute Fields to Save
Add attributes fields information to the shapefile (*.dbf file).
Original attributes Save any attribute fields that were originally loaded with the layer.
General Attributes: TE_TYPE: The type of the element (Rectangle, Circle, Label,
etc.)
TE_DESC: The description in the Project Tree
3D Polygon & Building TE_HEIGHT: The height of the 3D Polygon.
Attributes
TE_ROOF_ST: The style of the roof. 0 for flat, 1 for angular.
TE_ROOF_DE: The delta height between rooftop and roof
base.
Point Attributes TE_TEXT: The text of a text label.
TE_FNAME: The name of an image label file or a 3D model
file.
TE_YAW: The direction of the element.
TE_PITCH: The pitch of the element.
TE_ROLL: The roll of the element.
TE_WIDTH: The width of the element.
TE_LENGTH: The length of the element.
TE_HEIGHT: The height of the element.
TE_SCALE: The scale of the object, if applicable.
TE_FRAME: The name of the image label frame file.
Reprojection
Reproject Select the Reproject check box to save the shapefile with a
coordinate system different from the coordinate system of the
terrain.
Click the Set Coordinate System button to open the Coordinate
System dialog box and specify the coordinate system of the layer.
See “Coordinate System Dialog Box” in the “Basic Concepts”
chapter for information.
Save Hidden Objects Select the check box to save all the elements, hidden or not.
Saving the Elements Altitude Select from one of the following options:
Save altitude values relative to terrain: Save the elements in
165
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
a 3D shapefile, altitude values are relative to terrain.
Save altitude values absolute: Save the elements in a 3D
shapefile, altitude values are absolute.
Do not save altitude values: Save the elements in a 2D
shapefile.
2. Click Export.
Adding Elements to the Project Tree
Any new element you add to the system is placed either in the root area or under one of the groups. You
add elements in the following ways:
From the right-click menu - To add locations, presentations, and messages.
From the Objects tab -To add objects.
From the Home tab (Add group) - To add locations, presentations, and messages.
Note: If you want to add an object to a specific group, make sure the group or one of its children is
selected before you create the object.
If you want to add an element under the root, make sure to deselect the current element by
selecting the root area. Then, create the new element.
To add an element to a specific group:
1. Right-click the group to which you want to add a new element.
2. Point to New, and select Location, Presentation, or Tree Message.
To add an element under the root area:
1. Right-click in the root area.
2. Point to New, and select Location, Presentation, or Tree Message.
Sorting the Project Tree
You can sort specific groups or elements in the Project Tree. The groups remain sorted when you add,
remove or move objects.
There are three sort orders:
Order Description
Alphabetically (A>Z) Sorts the objects from left to right, character by character, in
ascending order.
The order of the characters is according to their ASCII value.
Alphabetically (Z>A) Sorts the objects from left to right, character by character, in
descending order.
The order of the characters is according to their ASCII value.
By Type Sort by TerraExplorer type.
Objects of the same type are sorted alphabetically (A>Z).
166
TerraExplorer User Guide
Sorting the Entire Project Tree
When you sort the entire Project Tree, groups and feature and 3DML layers always appear first, arranged
according to the selected type of sort, followed by the sorted root area items.
The elements of each group are also sorted using the same sort type.
To sort the Project Tree:
1. Right-click the root area.
2. In the shortcut menu, point to Sort and select the sort order.
Sorting a Particular Group
You can sort all the items in a specific group. If the group contains other groups, these sub-groups are
rearranged according to the selected sort type, followed by the items in the sorted group.
The elements in each of the sub-groups are also sorted according to the same sort type.
To sort a particular group:
1. In the Project Tree, right-click the group name.
2. In the shortcut menu, point to Sort and select the sort order.
Stop Sorting
You can stop the objects in the Project Tree or a Group from maintaining a sorted order.
If other groups are contained within, these sub-groups stop rearranging according to the selected sort
type.
To stop sorting:
1. In the Project Tree, right-click the root area or a specific group.
2. In the shortcut menu, point to Sort and toggle off the previously selected sort order.
Capturing the Tree State
When this option is selected, TerraExplorer Pro remembers the Project Tree folder configuration (i.e.,
which folders are open or closed and which object is shown in the 3D Window) and the show/hide status
of each item. This information is saved the next time the .FLY file is saved.
Note: The information that is being saved describes the configuration at the moment you select the
“Save Tree Configuration” option, and not the last tree configuration before you perform the save
command.
To capture the tree state:
On the Home tab, in the Add group, click Project Tree, and then select Capture Tree State.
Shortcut Menus
In addition to the default operation of each Project Tree element, as described at the beginning of this
chapter, each element type displays a unique menu of options when you right -click the element.
Root Area Menu
To open the Root Area’s shortcut menu:
Right-click a blank area in the Project Tree:
167
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Root Area Menu
The root area menu has the following options:
Option Description
Create Group Adds a new, empty group under the root area
Layer Opens the Layer sub-menu with the following options:
Load Feature Layer: Adds the loaded feature layers under the
root area.
See the “Feature Layers” chapter for further information.
Load Imagery Layer: Adds the loaded imagery layers under
the root area.
See the “Imagery and Elevation Layers” chapter for further
information.
Load Elevation Layer: Adds the loaded elevation layers
under the root area.
See the “Imagery and Elevation Layers” chapter for further
information.
Load KML/KMZ Layer: Adds the loaded KML/KMZ files under
the root area. See the “Complex Layers” chapter for further
information.
Load 3D Mesh Layer: Adds the 3DML file under the root area.
See the “3D Mesh Layers” chapter for further information.
Load Point Cloud Model: Adds a pre-processed point cloud
model at any point in the 3D Terrain. See the “Point Cloud
Layers” chapter for further information.
Create New Feature Layer: Opens the Create Feature Layer
dialog box to create a new feature layer directly from TEP.
New Opens the New sub-menu with the following options:
Location: Adds a new location, at the current camera position
in the 3D Window, under the root area.
Presentation: Adds a new empty presentation under the root
area.
Tree Message: Adds a new message under the root area.
This command opens the Create Message dialog box.
Sort Opens the Sort sub-menu.
168
TerraExplorer User Guide
You can sort the tree objects in ascending or descending
alphabetical order, or by object type.
Capture Tree State When this option is selected, TerraExplorer Pro remembers the
Project Tree folder configuration (i.e., which folders are open or
closed and which object is shown in the 3D Window) and the
show/hide status of each item.
This information is saved the next time the .FLY file is saved.
Note: The information that is being saved describes the
configuration at the moment you select the “Save Tree
Configuration” option, and not the last tree configuration
before you perform the save command.
Group Menu
To open a Group’s shortcut menu:
In the Project Tree, right-click the required group.
Group Shortcut Menu
The Group menu has the following options:
Option Description
Fly to Group Flies from the current location directly to the location defined in the
Group tab for the group.
Note: This location is initialized from the first item included in the
group, but can also be set using the Set Viewpoint option
in the Group tab. See “Setting Group Properties” in this
chapter for more information.
Jump to Group Jumps directly to the location defined in the Group tab for the
group.
169
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: This location is initialized from the first item included in the
group, but can also be set using the Set Viewpoint option
in the Group tab. See “Setting Group Properties” in this
chapter for more information.
Display Message Displays the TerraExplorer message set for this group.
Create Group Adds a new, empty group under the selected group.
Layer Opens the Layer sub-menu with the following options:
Load Feature Layer - Adds the loaded feature layers under
the selected group.
See the “Feature Layers” chapter for further information.
Load Imagery Layer - Adds the loaded imagery layers under
the selected group.
See the “Imagery and Elevation Layers” chapter for further
information.
Load Elevation Layer - Adds the loaded elevation layers
under the selected group.
See the “Imagery and Elevation Layers” chapter for further
information.
Load KML/KMZ Layer – Adds the loaded OGC KML/KMZ
layers unders the selected group. See the “Complex Layers”
chapter for further information.
Load 3D Mesh Layer – Adds the loaded mesh layers under
the selected group.
See the “3D Mesh Layers” chapter for further information.
Load Point Cloud Model - Adds the loaded point cloud
models under the selected group.
See the “Point Cloud Layers” chapter for further information.
Create New Feature Layer - Opens the Create New Feature
Layer dialog box to create a new layer under the selected
group. See “Creating New Layers” in the “Feature Layers”
chapter for further information.
Save As Layer(s) Opens the Save As dialog box.
You can save all the objects in the .FLY file to any available save
type.
New Opens the New sub-menu with the following options:
Location - Adds a new location, at the current camera position
in the 3D Window, under the selected group.
Presentation - Adds a new empty presentation under the
selected group.
Tree Message - Adds a new message under the selected
group. This command opens the Create Message dialog box.
Sort Opens the Sort sub-menu.
You can sort the group’s objects in ascending or descending
alphabetical order, or sort by object type.
170
TerraExplorer User Guide
Lock/Unlock Group Changes the mode of the group to Collapsed or Regular group.
A Locked group is always in collapsed mode and cannot be
opened by the TerraExplorer Basic Viewer user.
Delete Deletes the selected group and all of its children.
Rename Changes the name of the selected group.
Enter the new name and press ENTER.
Properties Opens the group's property sheet for editing.
Polygons, Polylines and Points Feature Layer Menu
To open a native feature layer’s shortcut menu:
In the Project Tree, right-click the required feature layer.
Feature Layer Menu
The native feature layer menu has the following options:
Option Description
Fly to Layer Flies from the current location directly to the selected layer.
Jump to Layer Jumps directly to the selected layer.
Display Message Displays the TerraExplorer message set for this feature layer. See
“What is a TerraExplorer Message?” in the “Working with Objects”
chapter for more information.
Copy Layer Style Copies the layer style.
Paste Layer Style Pastes the copied layer style to the selected layer.
171
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Refresh Layer Reloads the layer.
Note: You can also reload a layer by clicking Refresh Layer on
the Feature Layer tab.
Attribute Table… Opens the Attribute Table for the selected layer.
Search Searches the selected feature layer for feature attributes. See
“Search Tool” in the “Using the Project Tree” for more information.
Export Layer Opens a sub-menu with the following options:
Save As - Opens the Save As dialog box to save the layer to a
new file.
Convert to Group - Convert layer to group.
Upload to SkylineGlobe Uploads layer to SkylineGlobe Server. See “Uploading Layers to
SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Working with SkylineGlobe Server”
chapter for information.
Pause Layer Streaming Stop loading new objects for this layer (apply only for streaming
layers).
Save Layer Saves layer to data source.
Delete Deletes the selected layer and all of its children
Rename Changes the name of the selected layer.
Enter the new name and press ENTER.
Properties Opens the layer’s property sheet for editing.
KML/KMZ Layer Menu
To open a KML/KMZ layer’s shortcut menu:
In the Project Tree, right-click the required layer.
172
TerraExplorer User Guide
KML/KMZ Layer Menu
The KML/KMZ layer menu has the following options:
Option Description
Fly to Layer Flies from the current location directly to the selected layer.
Jump to Layer Jumps directly to the selected layer.
Display Message Displays the TerraExplorer message set for this layer. See “What
is a TerraExplorer Message?” in the “Working with Objects”
chapter for more information.
Create Group Adds a new, empty group in the Project Tree.
Refresh Reloads the layer.
Export Layer Opens a sub-menu with the following options:
Save As - Opens the Save As dialog box to save the layer to a
new file.
Convert to Group - Convert layer to group.
Save Layer Saves layer to data source.
Note: The Save Layer command is only available for KML/KMZ
files that were created by TerraExplorer (by exporting a
layer or project to KML/KMZ).
Upload to SkylineGlobe Uploads layer to SkylineGlobe Server. See “Uploading Layers to
SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Working with SkylineGlobe Server”
chapter for information.
New Opens the New sub-menu with the following options:
Location: Adds a new location, at the current camera position
173
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
in the 3D Window, under the root area.
Presentation: Adds a new empty presentation under the root
area.
Tree Message: Adds a new message under the root area.
This command opens the Create Message dialog box.
Sort Opens the Sort sub-menu.
You can sort the tree objects in ascending or descending
alphabetical order, or by object type under the layer.
Lock Group Changes the mode of the group to Collapsed or Regular group.
A Locked group is always in collapsed mode and cannot be
opened by the TerraExplorer Basic Viewer user.
Delete Deletes the selected layer and all of its children
Rename Changes the name of the selected layer.
Enter the new name and press ENTER.
Properties Opens the layer’s property sheet for editing.
3DML Layer Menu
To open a 3DML layer’s shortcut menu:
In the Project Tree, right-click the required layer.
3DML Layer Menu
The 3DML layer menu has the following options:
Option Description
Fly to Layer Flies from the current location directly to the selected layer.
Jump to Layer Jumps directly to the selected layer.
174
TerraExplorer User Guide
Display Message Displays the TerraExplorer message set for this layer. See “What
is a TerraExplorer Message?” in the “Working with Objects”
chapter for more information.
Refresh Layer Reload the layer.
Upload to SkylineGlobe Uploads layer to SkylineGlobe Server. See “Uploading Layers to
SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Working with SkylineGlobe Server”
chapter for information.
Sort Opens the Sort sub-menu.
You can sort the tree objects in ascending or descending
alphabetical order, or by object type under the layer.
Delete Deletes the selected layer and all of its children
Rename Changes the name of the selected layer.
Enter the new name and press ENTER.
Properties Opens the layer’s property sheet for editing.
Location Menu
To open a Location’s shortcut menu:
In the Project Tree, right-click the required Location.
Location Menu
The Location menu has the following options:
Option Description
Fly to Location Flies from the current location directly to the selected location.
Jump to Location Jumps directly to the selected location.
View Location This option’s sub-menu contains a list of pre-defined flight patterns
around the location. See “Flying to Locations” in the “Navigating in
the 3D World” chapter for information.
Stop Stops the flight.
175
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Update Location Position Sets the current camera position as the location position.
Set Location for Auto-Start Sets the selected location as the Auto-Start location for the current
project. The project starts with this location.
Delete Deletes the selected location.
Rename Changes the name of the selected location.
Enter the new name and press ENTER.
Properties Opens the location’s property sheet for editing.
See the “Locations” chapter for further information.
Presentation Menu
To open a Presentation’s shortcut menu:
In the Project Tree, right-click the required Presentation.
Presentation Menu
The Presentation menu has the following options:
Option Description
Play Plays the presentation
Stop Jumps directly to the selected location. This option is enabled
when a presentation is currently playing.
Previous Rewind to the previous step in the presentation. This option is
enabled when a presentation is currently playing.
Next Advance to the next step in the presentation. This option is
enabled when a presentation is currently playing,
Set presentation for auto- Sets the selected presentation as the Auto-Start for the current
start project. The project starts with this presentation.
Delete Deletes the selected presentation.
Rename Changes the name of the selected presentation.
Enter the new name and press ENTER.
Properties Opens the presentation’s property sheet for editing.
176
TerraExplorer User Guide
See the “Presentations” chapter for further information.
Object Menu
To open this shortcut menu:
In the Project Tree, right-click any of the following: label, static or dynamic object, imagery or
elevation layer, Video on Terrain, Best Path, Line of Sight, Threat Dome, Slope map, or Contour map.
Object Shortcut Menu
The Object menu has the following options:
Menu Option Description
Fly to Object Flies from the current location directly to the selected object. The
camera stops at the object’s “Viewing Distance”.
For static objects, the camera flies directly to the object, by the
shortest flight path, and stops.
For dynamic objects, the camera continues to follow the object.
Jump to Object Jumps directly to the object. The camera stops at the object’s
“Viewing Distance”.
View Object This option’s sub-menu contains a list of pre-defined flight patterns
that compass about the object. When you play a flight pattern, the
default flight time of the camera for a one round trip around the point
of interest is 15 seconds.
Circle Pattern Performs a circle flight pattern around the object.
The camera always faces the specified object.
177
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Oval Pattern Performs an oval flight pattern around the object.
The camera always faces the specified object.
The first radius is set to the distance parameter
and the second radius is set to one-half of the
distance parameter.
Line Pattern Performs a tight oval flight pattern around the
object/location. The camera always faces the
specified object. The first radius is set to the
distance parameter and the second radius is set
to one-tenth of the distance parameter.
Arc Pattern Performs a vertical arc flight above the
object/location. The camera always faces the
specified object. The radius is set according to
the distance parameter.
For objects, the View submenu also contains a set of pre-defined
view angles around the object. The camera stops at the object’s
“Viewing Distance” from the object’s location.
For dynamic objects, the camera continues to follow the object until
the user stops it or performs another action.
Behind Object To view the object from behind
Above Object To view the object from above
From Below To view the object from below
From Right To view the object from the right-hand side
From Left To view the object from the left-hand side
From Behind and To view the object from behind and above (45
Above degrees)
Cockpit View To view the world from the object’s pivot point.
The camera is set to the object’s roll, tilt and
direction angles. In this mode, the dynamic object
is hidden.
From Projector Available for Video on Terrain objects only. This
is for viewing the world from the video projector’s
position. The camera is set to the projector’s roll,
tilt and direction angles.
From Ground To view the object from the ground. After
Point selecting this option, select a ground point on the
terrain from which you want to view the object.
Note: The “View From Ground Point” action
cannot be defined as the activation
action for the object because it requires a
reference point on the terrain.
Stop Stops the flight to the object, the flight pattern around the object or
the attachment to the object.
Display Message Open the link to a website or file (unavailable if the object has no hot
link).
Attach Object to Object Allows you to attach the selected object to another object from the
Project Tree.
178
TerraExplorer User Guide
Selects the target object by left-clicking on it, or aborts the operation
by right-clicking. If the object is already in attach mode this entry
displays “Detach from object” allowing you to remove the attachment.
Edit Attach Parameters Opens the attachment editing dialog box.
This option is only available to attached objects.
Set Object for Auto-Start Sets the selected object as the Auto-Start location for the current
project. The project starts with viewing this object.
Show in Viewer Project Determine if the object appears in the Project Tree when the FLY file
Tree is opened with TerraExplorer Basic Viewer.
Delete Deletes the selected object.
Rename Changes the name of the selected object.
Enter the new name and press ENTER.
Properties Opens the object property sheet for editing
Start/Restart Route For dynamic objects, starts/restarts the object’s route.
See the “Working with Objects” chapter for further information.
Message Menu
To open a Message shortcut menu:
In the Project Tree, right-click the required Message.
Message Menu
The Message menu has the following options:
Option Activity
Display Message Displays the TerraExplorer message set. See “What is a
TerraExplorer Message?” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for
more information.
Delete Deletes the selected message.
Rename Changes the name of the selected message.
Enter the new name and press ENTER.
Properties Opens the message’s property sheet for editing
See “Messages and Tooltips” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for further information about
TerraExplorer messages.
179
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 11 USING TERRAEXPLORER OPTIONS
About TerraExplorer Options
The TerraExplorer Options determine your working environment. Any changes in these options are saved
and used in your future sessions. You can view and edit these options with the Options dialog box.
To open the Options dialog box:
1. On the File menu , click the TerraExplorer Options button (F9).
2. Click the tabs and define TerraExplorer options as required:
General
Graphics
Navigation
View
Screen Overlay
Add-ons
Language
General
The General tab determines the basic parameters for your TerraExplorer. You can manage disc cache
size, define KML/KMZ settings, select raster pyramid formats, and set the currently running TerraExplorer
as the default TerraExplorer.
180
TerraExplorer User Guide
Options - General Tab
Parameter Description
Cache Size
Terrain Cache Size Enter the size in MB to be allocated on your hard disk for terrain
caching.
When you use a terrain from a SkylineGlobe server, data for the
area you fly is cached on your local disk. This allows you to fly
around this area, without downloading it again. In addition, if you
close TerraExplorer and later resume operation using the same
internet terrain, information in the cache can be used.
181
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Models Cache Size Enter the size in MB to be allocated on your hard disk for 3D
models’ automatically generated levels of detail.
This option only applies when the Generate levels of detail for 3D
models option is selected in the Project Settings General tab. See
“General” in the “Setting the Project” chapter for more information.
KML/KMZ
Default Terrain Database The default terrain database to use when directly opening a KML
or KMZ file.
KMZ temp folder A temporary folder used to extract compressed KMZ files.
SkylineGlobe Server
Server Address The SkylineGlobe Server that TerraExplorer is currently connected
to, or the address of the last server that TerraExplorer was
connected to, if you are logged out from the server. This server is
used for all SkylineGlobe services including the publishing and
reading of layers from server, search functionality and SGS base
layers (Read-only).
Note: See “Logging In to a SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Working
with SkylineGlobe Server” chapter for information on
logging in to a server.
Default TerraExplorer
Set as Default TerraExplorer Sets the current running instance of TerraExplorer as the default
that is associated with the .FLY extension.
Raster Layer
Image pyramid format Select the required format:
MPT JPEG v3 – For standard imagery.
MPT PNG 24 – For high quality images.
Elevation pyramid format Select the required format:
MPT JPEG v3 – For standard resolution.
MPT PNG 16.8 – For high resolution data.
Open Create Resolution Select the check box to automatically open a Create Resolution
Pyramid when adding layers Pyramid dialog box when loading an imagery layer with an
with insufficient resolution insufficient resolution pyramid.
pyramids
Security
Do not save layer passwords Select this option to provide increased security, by omitting all
in FLY file password information for external sources (e.g., remote servers)
from the FLY file. When this option is selected, users will be
prompted for password information each time they open the FLY
and access the data.
182
TerraExplorer User Guide
Graphics
The Graphics tab enables you to select the quality of the terrain model and add visual effects.
Options – Graphics Tab
183
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Parameter Description
Graphics
Enable ambient occlusion Enabling Screen Space Ambient Occlusion (SSAO) adds realism
to 3D elements by approximating the way light radiates in real life,
especially off of surfaces that are normally considered non-
reflective. It operates on all models, shapes, and the terrain.
Note: Enabling this feature requires a DirectX 10 supporting
video card. Some performance penalty may be noticed,
especially on low-end hardware configurations.
Use Terrain and 3DML Fade Select Use Terrain and 3DML Fade Effect option to produce a
Effect smoother transition between terrain and 3DML imagery resolutions
in Globe projects.
When you open a Globe project, if this option is enabled,
TerraExplorer activates a morphing effect that switches resolution.
This effect is activated when zooming in or out.
When terrain fade is disabled, a new block is displayed on the
terrain instantaneously, with no fade.
Terrain and 3DML Quality Select the resolution of the polygonal terrain model and 3DML
models.
Select Normal for best performances.
Select High to quadruple the number of polygons used to
create the terrain model for the area close to the camera, and
to display a higher Level of Detail (LOD) for 3DML.
Select Best to quadruple the number of polygons that create
the terrain model for the entire visible terrain, and to display
the highest LOD for 3DML. This setting uses the most
memory.
Enhance color saturation Enhancing color saturation adds visual effect to make colors more
vibrant in a 3D scene. The color saturation enhancement affects
the terrain and all 2D and 3D objects. Dragging the slider all the
way to the right maximizes color saturation.
Shadows
Global Shadow Color Select the shadow color and opacity that should be applied when a
shadow is created for all buildings and 3D models in the 3D
Window. See “Global Shadow” in the “Analysis Tools” chapter for
more information.
Selection Shadow Color Select the shadow color and opacity that should be applied when
creating a shadow for selected objects. See “Selection Shadow” in
the “Analysis Tools” chapter for more information.
Optimize Shadow and 3D This option should be cleared if shadow and 3D viewshed are not
Viewshed displaying properly with the latest video card driver installed.
This option is unavailable when the video card does not support
3D viewshed and shadow calculation.
184
TerraExplorer User Guide
Navigation
The navigation settings allow you to change the settings for navigating the camera on the 3D Window.
See the “Navigating in the 3D World” chapter for more information on flying using the keyboard, joystick
and navigation controls.
Options - Navigation Tab
185
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Parameter Description
Navigation Mode
Select the navigation mode:
Drag
Slide
Turn and Tilt
See “Navigating Using the Mouse” in the “Navigating in the 3D
World” chapter for further information.
Tilt Axis
Tilt Affects Altitude When selected, the keyboard, mouse and Navigation Controls
change the tilt of the plane. The camera points in the same
direction as the plane.
When not selected, the controls change the tilt of the camera, the
plane’s tilt is set to 0 degrees.
Joystick
Enable Joystick Enable use of external joystick for navigation.
Camera Field of View
Camera Field of View The field of view is the size of the camera’s viewing angle, or the
zoom level of the camera. TerraExplorer Pro’s field of view ranges
from 15 to 90 degrees, with 53 degrees set as the default.
A wider field of view (larger angle) allows you to see more, with a
decreased zoom level. A narrower field of view (smaller angle)
allows you to see less, with an increased zoom level. In some
cases, you also experience reduced performance of the
TerraExplorer Pro application with a field of view less than 53
degrees.
To set the camera’s field of view:
Select one of the available values.
View
You can define the units used throughout TerraExplorer Pro for elevation, speed, distance and more.
Changing the units significantly affects TerraExplorer Pro’s visual input and output.
186
TerraExplorer User Guide
Options-View Tab
Parameter Description
Speed
187
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Units Select the display units for speed.
Altitude and Distance
Units Units system to use for display of all distance and altitude values:
meters (metric) or feet (imperial).
Measurement
Units Sets the display units for distance and area measurements. Only
Units options that are consistent with the Altitude and Distance
Units (system) selected are displayed. If you want TerraExplorer to
automatically use the most appropriate metric or imperial (feet)
units for each measurement based on size, select the Auto option.
Decimal Places Sets the number of decimal places for the display of distance and
area measurements (0-6).
Font Size Sets the font size for display of distance and area measurements
in the 3D Window.
Show segment lengths while Select the check box to display the length of each polygon/polyline
editing a polygon/polyline segment while editing. The units, decimal places and font size
settings are also applied to the segment lengths display.
Altitude Type
Units Select the display units for altitude.
Relative/Absolute Select the altitude type:
Above Ground Level (AGL) – Displays altitude values as
meters or feet above the ground level in the selected
coordinate.
Absolute Value – Displays altitude values as meters or feet
above the terrain database vertical datum base ellipsoid.
Decimal Places Sets the number of decimal places for the display of altitude (0-6).
Coordinates
Display Format Select the format for displaying coordinate values:
Decimal Degrees – e.g., -71.12595
Degrees-Minutes-Seconds – e.g., -71° 7’ 33.425”
Degrees and Decimal Minutes – e.g., -71° 7.557’
Show MGRS Coordinates Select the check box to display Military Grid Reference System
(MGRS) coordinates in the status bar, all property sheets, and
Information Query results.
Screen Overlay
The Screen Overlay is a graphic and textual display that projects flight and camera information onto the
terrain view. This allows you to monitor the flight, without taking your eyes off the terrain.
188
TerraExplorer User Guide
Options - Screen Overlay Tab
Parameter Description
Show
189
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Navigation Controls Displays the navigation controls. Select any of the following:
Full navigation control with level indicator – More extensive
navigation controls provide a joystick for free flight, and control
over plane tilt and direction, as well as zoom adjustment and
turning North.
Simplified navigation control – Optimized for touch screens,
simplified navigation controls offer basic controls (zoom
adjustment and turning North) while conserving screen real
estate.
Compass – Only display a small turn North control at the
bottom of the 3D Window to maximize screen real estate.
See “Navigating Using On-Screen Navigation Controls” in the
“Navigating in the 3D World” chapter for further information.
Center Sign Displays the 3D Window center point.
Status Bar Displays the speed, altitude and direction as text lines on the
bottom of the 3D Window.
Scale Bar Displays the ratio of a distance in the virtual 3D World to the
corresponding distance in the actual world.
Time Slider Enables you to adjust current date and time.
Overlay
Overlay Color Click and select a color for the screen overlay.
Presentation Caption Font Select the font size, in pixels, from the drop-down list for
Size presentation captions.
Add-ons
The Add-ons tab provides an easy means of managing your TerraExplorer extensions. TEZ zip files
containing new tools or an alternative Start page can be installed from this tab, or alternatively removed
from the application. See “Distributing Add-Ons” in the “Programmer’s Guide” for more information on
TEZ files.
To add a tool:
1. On the Add-ons tab, click Add and browse to the location of the tool or alternative Start page.
2. Click OK.
To remove a tool:
1. Select the required tool, and click Remove.
2. Click OK.
190
TerraExplorer User Guide
Options-Add-ons Tab
Language
You can set the user interface language, and define Unicode settings.
191
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Options - Language Tab
Parameter Description
User Interface Language
192
TerraExplorer User Guide
Language Select a language from the drop-down list.
Create new shapefiles with Enables Unicode support in shapefiles.
Unicode encoding
193
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 12 PRESENTATIONS
About Presentations
TerraExplorer enables you to record a presentation in which you navigate through the 3D World, showing
or hiding objects on the terrain, following dynamic objects, displaying messages and performing different
operations. For each step in the presentation, you display the map in the state you want:
Current camera position and extent.
Visibility of raster layers.
Visibility of feature layers.
Visibility of map items (objects, groups).
Popup messages and captions.
Set environment variables such as underground mode and system time.
You can also convert a presentation to a movie.
The Presentation tab displays on the Ribbon when you select a presentation from the Project Tree or
when you click Presentation on the Home tab. This tab includes all of the controls necessary to create,
edit, and play a presentation.
Creating and Editing a Presentation
TerraExplorer’s presentation tools enable you to create a presentation, in which you communicate a
specific view of the 3D World, by combining a customized flight rout e with a particular display of the
project.
Create a flight route by combining any number of the following methods:
Creating a list of locations.
Recording a navigation through the terrain using any of the navigation methods.
Following a dynamic object.
Loading a KML file with a tour element.
For each step of the presentation you determine what displays in the 3D World, as well as its timing and
the transition to the next step. The presentation advances from step to step based on the continue trigger
setting.
Note: When you record a step, you do not capture screen overlay, field of view, sky color, or clouds
coverage. These depend on the settings that are set before the presentation is played, and will
vary each time the presentation is played based on the settings at the time.
Opening and Closing the Presentation Tab
To open the presentation tab:
If you want to open the Presentation tab to create a new presentation, on the Home tab, in the Add
group, click Presentation.
If you want to open the Presentation tab to edit an existing presentation, in the Project Tree, click the
194
TerraExplorer User Guide
Presentation name.
The Presentation tab is displayed.
Presentation Tab
Creating a Locations Route
You can generate a route manually by creating a list of locations. Each location contains full flight
information. If you define a route using individual locations, TerraExplorer Pro generates the route by
computing a line that passes through each location.
To create a route using locations you can:
Fly to the required location and click Add Location on the Presentation tab
Or
1. Open the Add Location sub-menu and click Select Location.
2. Select a location from the Select Location list. This list displays all the locations available in the
project.
Note: If you want to add a location at a specific point, not at the end of the current list, in the
Presentation Editor, right-click the location after which you want to add a location, and
select Add Location or Select Location from the shortcut menu.
Modifying Location Properties
After creating a location step, you can modify certain properties:
Activation Action - The action to perform on the location. See “Flying to Locations” in the
“Navigating in the 3D World” chapter.
Spline Speed – Speed of the location step.
To modify location properties:
1. In the Presentation Editor, right-click the required Location step, and select Properties.
2. Select an Activation Action from the drop-down list. See “Flying to Locations” in the “Navigating in
the 3D World” chapter for information on activation actions.
3. If you selected “Fly To” as the activation action, type the number of seconds for the flight between the
two locations.
4. From the Spline Speed drop-down list, select one of the following options to define how the spline
speed should be implemented:
Automatic - Speed is calculated automatically.
Manual (ignore play speed) - The Spline Speed property exclusively determines the speed of
the spline of this location, overriding speed factors set by a Flight Speed operation or the Play
Speed. See “Change Flight Speed” and “Setting Presentation Options” in this chapter for
information.
195
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Manual (with play speed) - The speed set in the Spline Speed property is accelerated or
decelerated based on the speed factors set by a Flight Speed operation or the Play Speed. See
“Change Flight Speed” and “Setting Presentation Options” in this chapter for information.
5. If you selected one of the Manual options, type a speed in km/h.
Creating a Recorded Route
The recorded route allows you to fly through the terrain and record the exact route you traveled.
TerraExplorer adds locations each time you adjust your position on the terrain with an interval of one
second between each location.
To record a flight:
1. On the Presentation tab, in the Locations group, click Record Flight. The Presentation Editor is
displayed.
2. Navigate in the 3D Window, setting your desired route. Fly freely through the terrain (using the
mouse, keyboard, navigation controls, Ribbon controls, joyst ick or Jump to Location panel), fly to a
specific object or fly to a location. You can control the direction and tilt angle of the camera, slide to
the sides, and zoom in and out. See the “Navigating in the 3D World” chapter for more information.
Note: If you select another presentation from the Project Tree while recording a presentation, the
recording stops.
3. When you complete the flight path, on the Presentation tab, in the Locations group, click Stop
Record.
Following an Object
You can follow a dynamic object in your presentation.
To follow a dynamic object, do one of the following:
If you want to follow an object from its current position when the presentation is played, do the
following:
a. On the Presentation tab, in the Locations group, click Add Location, and select Select Object
to Follow. The Select Object to Follow dialog box is displayed.
b. Select the required object, and click OK. The “Follow Object” step is added at the end of the
presentation. When the presentation is played, the object is displayed in its current position at the
time.
Note: If you want to start following an object in the beginning or middle of the presentation steps
you already created, in the Presentation Editor, right-click the step after which you want to
follow an object, and select Select Object to Follow from the shortcut menu.
If you want to follow an object from the beginning of its route, create a Reset Dynamic Object
operation before the Following an Object step. On the Presentation tab, in the Operations group,
click Add Operation, and select Restart Dynamic Object.
Loading a KML with a Tour Element
A KML with a tour element that is loaded into a TerraExplorer project will open as a TerraExplorer
presentation that can be edited (modify the route, add captions and operations, etc.) and played just like
any natively-created one.
To load a KML layer:
On the Layers tab, in the Complex Layer group, click the required layer type. Then in the Browse for
196
TerraExplorer User Guide
feature layer dialog box that is displayed, browse to the required file and click Open.
The following KML Tour tags are supported:
<gx:Tour> <gx:Document>
<gx:PlayList> <gx:Tour>
<gx:FlyTo> <gx:PlayList>
<gx:duration> <gx:FlyTo>
<gx:flyToMode> <gx:FlyTo>
<Camera> <gx:FlyTo>
<gx:AnimationUpdate> <gx:Tour>
Modifying a Route
You can modify a route that you previously created, adding new locations or changing the geographical
position of a location.
To add additional locations to a route:
In the Presentation Editor, right-click the step after which you want to add a location, and select Add
Location or Select Location from the shortcut menu.
Each location is listed as a Location in the Presentation Editor.
To change the position of a location to the camera’s current position:
In the Presentation Editor, right-click the location whose position you want to modify, and select
Update Location. A dialog box is displayed confirming that you want to change the location to the
current location. Click Yes to change the location or No to cancel.
You can also add an additional flight session after an already recorded one.
To record an additional flight session:
1. On the Presentation tab, in the Locations group, click Record Flight. The Presentation Editor is
displayed.
2. Navigate in the 3D Window, setting your desired route, and then click Stop Record. See “Creating a
Recorded Route” in this chapter for more information. The newly recorded flight is added at the end of
the presentation.
3. If you want to play the added flight session at a different point during the presentation, click Edit
Presentation, and use the Move Up and Move Down commands to move the locations to the
required position in the list of steps.
Adding Captions
You can add a caption to a presentation.
To add a caption to a presentation:
1. Do one of the following:
197
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
If you want to add the caption after the steps already created in the presentation, on the
Presentation tab, in the Operations group, click Add Caption. The Set Caption dialog box is
displayed.
If you want to display the caption after a specific step, click Edit Presentation to open the
Presentation Editor, and right-click the step after which you want the caption added. From the
shortcut menu, select Add Caption.
2. Type the caption text. If you want to display the caption at a different point during the route, click Edit
Presentation, and use the Move Up and Move Down commands to move the caption to the required
position in the list of steps.
3. If you want the caption to disappear after a set amount of time while the presentation continues to
run, select the Clear caption after [] seconds check box, and type the required number of seconds.
4. Set the caption position on the screen:
On the Presentation tab, in the Play group, click Caption Position and select the required
position on the screen for your captions.
5. If you want to hide the last added caption select Clear Caption from the Add Caption sub-menu in
the Operations panel in the Ribbon. To hide the caption after a specific step in the presentation open
the Presentation Editor, right-click the mouse on the step you wish to select and select Clear
Caption.
Creating Key Steps
Presentation key steps provide increased flexibility for displaying a presentation by enabli ng you to
quickly jump in a presentation from one chapter of the presentation to another. “Chapter” headings can be
marked in the Presentation Editor as “key” steps. Viewers of the presentation can then use the Previous
and Next buttons on the Playback panel to jump from key step to key step, skipping over other
presentation steps.
To create a key step:
1. On the Presentation tab, in the Operations group, click Edit Presentation. The Presentation Editor
is displayed.
198
TerraExplorer User Guide
Setting Key Steps in Presentation Editor
2. Right-click the step you want to set as a key step, and from the shortcut menu, toggle on the Key
step command. In the Presentation Editor, key steps are distinguished from all other steps by a blue
text color and a key indicator in the Editor’s Key column.
Note: If you want to set multiple steps as key steps, use CTRL-click or SHIFT-click to multi-select
the steps, and then right-click and select Properties from the shortcut menu. In the Multi-
edit property sheet that is displayed, set the Key property to Yes.
Note: Locations added by “Add Location” (and not by Record Flight), are by default set as key
steps, whereas all other operations are set, by default, as non-key steps.
Note: If you want the Prev/Next button to jump to a key step when play ing a presentation, Key
step must be selected in the Prev/Next drop-down list on the Presentation tab.
Setting Step Timings, Transitions and Sequence
At any point after creating your presentation, you can open the Presentation Editor to edit the order and
properties of the presentation’s steps. You can reorder steps and delete unnecessary ones. You can also
set for each step the mode for advancing to the next step, whether automatic or manual, and the length of
time for which each automatically advancing step should display.
Note: While a presentation is playing, you cannot reorder or delete steps or modify transition settings in
the Presentation Editor.
To edit step transitions and order:
1. On the Presentation tab, in the Operations group, click Edit Presentation. The Presentation Editor
is displayed.
2. Use the Move Up and Move Down commands to reorder steps as required.
3. If you want to delete a step, select it and click Delete. Use CTRL-click or SHIFT-click to multi-select
steps for deletion.
4. In the Continue trigger column of each step, select one of the following methods of advancing to the
next step when viewing the presentation:
199
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Immediate - To advance to the next step immediately.
Click Button - To advance to the next step using the Next command on the Ribbon.
Wait - To advance to the next step automatically after waiting the number of seconds set in the
Seconds column.
Note: If you want to set the same Continue trigger for multiple steps, use CTRL-click or SHIFT-
click to multi-select the steps, and then right-click and select Properties from the shortcut
menu. In the Multi-edit property sheet that is displayed, set the Continue trigger. If you
set the Continue trigger to Wait, you can also set the Seconds in the Multi-edit property
sheet.
Note: When the Play Mode (in the Play group) is set to Auto-Play all Click Button triggers
automatically changed to wait 3 seconds. This change is not reflected in the Presentation
Editor. At any point you can change the Play Mode setting back to Standard and all your
Click Button events are treated as defined.
Displaying Required Content on Application Screen
For each step of the presentation you determine what displays on the terrain and on the entire application
screen. You can set the visibility of groups, objects, and messages during different points in the
presentation, open TerraExplorer tools and adjust time settings.
All of these operations can be performed either:
From the Operations group on the Presentation tab.
or
From the right-click menu of any step in the Presentation Editor.
The operation performed in both these options is identical; the only difference between them is at what
point in the presentation the operation is added. When performed from the Presentation tab, the operation
is added after all the presentation steps that were already created. When performed from the
Presentation Editor, the operation is added immediately after whichever step was right -clicked.
The following operations are available:
Show or Hide Objects or Groups
Open TerraExplorer Tool
Close TerraExplorer Tool
Display Messages
Restart Dynamic Objects
Set Time
Adjust Time Slider Range to Group
Play Time Animation
Underground Mode On or Off
Change Flight Speed
Play Another Presentation
200
TerraExplorer User Guide
Show or Hide Objects or Groups
To hide/show an object or group:
1. From the Add Operation menu, select Show Group or Object or Hide Group or Object.
Select Group or Object Dialog Box
2. In the dialog box displayed, select the group or object you want to show or hide and click OK.
Open TerraExplorer Tool
To set a TerraExplorer tool to open during a presentation:
1. From the Add Operation menu, click Add Operation, and select Open Tool. The Choose tool dialog
box is displayed.
201
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Choose Tool Dialog Box
2. Select the tool you want to open and click OK.
Note: The tool stays open for the rest of the presentation.
Close TerraExplorer Tool
To set a TerraExplorer tool to close during a presentation:
1. From the Add Operation menu, click Add Operation, and select Close Tool. The Choose tool
dialog box is displayed.
Choose Tool Dialog Box
202
TerraExplorer User Guide
2. Select the tool you want to close and click OK.
Note: The tool stays closed for the rest of the presentation.
Display Messages
To display a message:
1. From the Add Operation menu, select Activate message. The Create Message dialog box is
displayed.
Create Message Dialog Box
2. Create the required message. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the “Working with
Objects” chapter for information.
Note: The message remains displayed for the rest of the presentation.
Note: After creating this message step, the message can be modified by right -clicking the step,
and selecting Properties.
Restart Dynamic Objects
To restart a dynamic object:
1. From the Add Operation menu, select Restart dynamic object. A dialog is displayed with all
dynamic objects in the project.
203
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Dynamic Objects Dialog Box
2. Select the dynamic object you want to restart and click OK.
Set Time
The TerraExplorer time settings affect the visibility of objects and groups with set timespans.
To set the TerraExplorer date and time:
1. From the Add Operation menu, select Set Time. A dialog is displayed with Date and Time input
fields
2. Select the date and time you want and click OK.
Note: After creating this operation step, the step’s time can be reset by right -clicking the step, and
selecting Properties.
Adjust Time Slider Range to Group
You can add a presentation step that will adjust the date/time slider range so that it corresponds to the
timespan of a specific group.
To adjust the Date/Time slider range based on a specific group’s timespan:
1. From the Add Operation menu, select Adjust Time Slider Range to Group. A dialog is displayed
with a list of all groups in the project.
2. Select the required group and click OK.
Play Time Animation
You can add a presentation step that lets you visualize time-based data over time, so that you can see a
pattern or trend emerge (e.g., flood progression or city growth).
To play a TerraExplorer date and time animation:
1. From the Add Operation menu, select Play Time Animation. A dialog is displayed with different
options for selecting the time range.
204
TerraExplorer User Guide
2. Set the Animation length in seconds.
3. Select one of the Time range options. When this presentation step is played, the data visible on the
terrain will be displayed as it appears over the course of this time range.
Project range - The time range of the animation corresponds to the project’s entire time range.
Custom range – Select a Start and End date and time for the animation’s range.
Group range – Select the group whose timespan should determine the time range of the
animation.
Note: After creating this operation step, the time animation can be modified by right-clicking the step,
and selecting Properties.
Play Time Anim ation Dialog Box
Turn Underground Mode On or Off
To set underground mode on:
From the Add Operation menu, select Set underground mode on or Set underground mode off.
Note: Underground mode is automatically turned off when a presentation is played. You can add
a “Set Underground Mode On” step to turn it on when needed.
Underground mode is also turned off at the end of a presentation. You can add a “Set
Underground Mode On” step as the last step to keep it turned on.
205
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Change Flight Speed
This operation can be added in a presentation to accelerate or decelerate certain portions of the flight.
This operation should not be confused with the Play Speed setting in the Play ribbon panel which is used
when playing a presentation to set a flight speed for the entire presentation.
To change the flight speed:
1. From the Add Operation menu, select Flight Speed.
2. Select the new flight speed.
Note The flight speed is relative to the presentation flight speed. If the presentation flight speed
is fast and you also set the speed to fast the actual flight speed will be even faster.
Note: After creating this operation step, the flight-speed can be modified by right-clicking the
step, and selecting Properties.
Play Another Presentation
You can launch another presentation from the current presentation.
To play another presentation within the current presentation:
1. From the Add Operation menu, select Play Another Presentation. The Select Presentation dialog
box is displayed with a list of all presentations in the project.
Select Presentation Dialog Box
2. Select the required presentation, and click OK.
Note: When the Play Another Presentation step is reached in the presentation, if the
Presentation Editor is displayed, its caption changes to: “Playing Presentation [secondary
presentation name] from Presentation [primary presentation name].”
Note: The secondary presentation’s properties are independent of the primary presentation’s
properties. So for example, the position of the captions or the play speed set in the primary
presentation do not affect caption positioning or play speed in the secondary presentation.
206
TerraExplorer User Guide
Viewing a Presentation
Set Presentation Options
Play a Presentation
Setting Presentation Options
Presentation options are controlled from the Presentation tab, in the Play group.
To set presentation options:
1. Set up the presentation to either play automatically or manually:
On the Presentation tab, in the Play group, from the Play Mode drop-down list, select Auto-
Play or Standard. “Auto-Play” mode replaces Click Button triggers with Wait 3 seconds.
2. Set up flight speed:
In the Play Speed drop-down list, select the required speed. You can select Normal to play the
presentation according to the timings recorded and set in the Present ation Editor or one of the
speed factors. Select Slow to slow down the flight speed by a factor of 2 and Very Slow to slow
it down by a factor of 4. Select Fast and Very Fast to accelerate the speed by the factors of 2
and 4, respectively.
Note: You can also accelerate or decelerate the flight speed by adding a Flight Speed operation.
Note: The Flight Speed accelerates or decelerates the speed on top of the Play Speed factor.
3. Set the flight algorithm:
On the Presentation tab, in the Play group, from the Play Algorithm drop-down list, select Fly
To to use the TerraExplorer fly to location algorithm. Select Spline to move the camera in a
curve based path between the waypoints. The Spline mode is similar to the flight mode used by
the Route object in previous TerraExplorer versions.
Note: If a presentation does not include any recorded flight, the presentation is by default set to
Fly To algorithm. If the presentation includes recorded flight, the default Play Algorithm
changes to Spline.
4. Set flight loop:
If you want to connect the last location to the first location to create a closed flight route, on the
Presentation tab, in the Play group, select Loop Presentation. Playing this route repeats the
flight continuously, until you stop playing the route.
5. Set Prev/Next functionality:
If you want the Prev/Next buttons to jump to presentation key steps, on the Presentation tab, in
the Play group, from the Prev/Next drop-down list, select Key step. See “Creating Key Steps” in
this chapter for information about key steps. Select One step to jump to the immediately
preceding or following step in the presentation when clicking the Prev/Next buttons.
Playing a Presentation
A presentation’s Play Mode can be set to Auto-Play or Standard. In Standard mode, the presenter uses
the Continue commands on the On Screen Controls to advance all steps that are set to Click Button. In
Auto-Play mode, each Click Button trigger is replaced with Wait 3 seconds.
During a presentation, it is possible to interact normally with the application, including navigating, closing
any open popups, opening tools, etc. When the presenter clicks Continue, the presentation will play as
set up.
207
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
To play a presentation:
1. If you want to play a presentation from the beginning, do one of the following:
In the Project Tree, double-click the required presentation.
In the Project Tree, right-click the required presentation, and select Play from the shortcut menu.
In the Project Tree, select the required presentation, and then on the Presentation tab, in the
Play Route group, click Play.
2. If you want to begin playing a presentation from a particular step, in the Presentation Editor, right-
click the step from which you want to play. Then from the shortcut menu, select Play from Here.
The presentation begins and the on-screen presentation control is displayed.
On-Screen Presentation Control
Play Route Toolbar Description
Command/Project Tree button
Shortcut Menu
Stop Stops the flight. When you click Play again, the
presentation restarts from the beginning.
Previous Jumps to the previous step in the presentation.
Pause
Pauses the flight. Click on the button to resume the
flight.
Continue Continues the presentation. This button appears when you
reach a waypoint with Click Button continue trigger.
Note: If the play mode is set to Auto-Play all Click Button
triggers are replaced by Wait 3 seconds and the
Continue button does not appear.
Next Jumps to the next step in the presentation.
Note: You can also press the space bar to jump to the
next step.
Creating Movies
You can create a movie in AVI format, using any presentation in your project. You can play the recorded
movie using standard AVI Viewer or any product that supports AVI format. You can even display your
movies on a TV screen.
Creating a Movie from a Presentation
To create a movie from a presentation:
1. Create a presentation. See “Creating and Editing a Presentation” in this chapter for information.
2. On the Presentation tab, in the Movie group, set the following settings:
208
TerraExplorer User Guide
Parameter Activity
Frames Select the number of movie frames per second.
Frame Size Select the size of each frame or file in the movie. Select “Current
Size” to use the current width and height of the 3D Window as the
dimensions of the frame or choose from one of the other standards
(including the industry standards for PAL and NTSC).
Hide Screen Overlays Select this check box to hide screen overlay when playing the
presentation. See “Using Screen Overlay” in the “Basic Concepts”
chapter.
3. On the Presentation tab, in the Movie group, click Create Movie. The Save As dialog box is
displayed.
4. Browse to where you want to save the movie, type a File Name, and click Save. The Video
Compression dialog box is displayed.
Video Compression Dialog Box
5. Select a compressor. The options available depend on the configuration of your computer. For some
compression types, you can determine the compression quality using the Quality bar. For other
compression types, you can click the Configure button to get an advanced configuration dialog box.
If you select an invalid compression type for your system configuration, TerraExplorer Pro notifies you
to select a different compression.
6. Adjust the Compression Quality slider as required.
7. If you want to configure the compressor, click Configure, adjust the Temporal Quality Ratio as
required, and click OK.
The Creating Movie dialog box is displayed.
Note: A progress bar is shown in a Status box. This box includes a Stop button. If you stop the
process before it is completed, the movie is created up to the moment you pressed the
Stop button.
The creation of the flight movie can take a few minutes.
209
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 13 FEATURE LAYERS
Working with Feature Layers
A feature layer is a visual representation of a geographic data set like roads, national parks, political
boundaries, and rivers using geographic objects such as points, lines, and polygons (features). When a
feature layer is loaded, a layer object containing all the layer’s features is created in the Project Tree.
This layer object enables you to perform layer level operations by using the property sheet page to set the
appearance and behaviors of the features contained within the layer. All the features i n a layer share the
same properties (except for position), resulting in lighter files (since only limited property sheets are
required for each individual feature. You can set the symbol type to use when rendering the individual
features within a feature layer. TerraExplorer Pro can create at the center of each feature a
corresponding annotation object, which can be used to convey information, textually or graphically,
relating to the feature.
Most feature layer data sources include a homogenous set of features of the same geometry type. DGN
and DXF may have more than one type of geometry.
If your feature layer is loaded with a set of attributes that contain object level data, you can display
advanced layer information in the 3D Window. As an example, take a feature layer that overlays the
terrain with country boundaries. In such a layer, we could use the layer's property sheet to represent the
number of people living in a country by the line color of the country boundary. You can also use the
Attribute Table Tool to display layer features that have a specific set of characteristic. For example, you
can show in the 3D Window only countries that their GNP per capita surpasses $15,000.
When a feature layer is loaded into TerraExplorer, the Feature Layer contextual tab is displayed. From
this tab, you can perform various spatial operations on the layer’s features, including merging features
into a single feature, clipping one polygon from another, exploding a multi-part feature into its individual
component features, and exporting selected features to a new file.
Using the Attribute Table Tool, you can search and filter the data in a map layer to obtain and display only
the features and information you require. You can then display only the filtered data on the m ap or create
a new layer that includes only this data. The original layer is not modified.
You can perform spatial queries on the layer, selecting features within a particular geographical area. If,
for example, a chemical leak occurred in a particular location, and the wind is spreading the chemical
odor across a 150 km radius, you can mark the area, and then determine which surrounding towns need
to be evacuated.
TerraExplorer Pro enables you to load feature layers from remote or local databases. Various file formats
are supported through a set of external plug-ins. Since you are always connected to the data source
(local or remote), you can easily get the latest source updates by refreshing the layer. For shapefiles and
WFS-T (A WFS service with read-write access by enabling transactions), all changes can be saved
directly to the original source file.
TerraExplorer Pro handles differently layers that are loaded from FLY and KML files. TerraExplorer
cannot read these layers as feature layers, and is therefore not able to perform layer level operations on
their features.
For FLY layers, geographic objects are read and put in the TerraExplorer Project Tree as a Group,
whereas for KML files, a layer object containing the geographic objects is created in the Project Tree.
KML layers loaded into a project are always read directly from the local or remote data source, instead of
being imported and stored in the FLY file.
210
TerraExplorer User Guide
Home Tab Add Group
Loading Feature Layers
TerraExplorer Pro constructs a feature layer as a layer object, which is then displayed in the Project Tree.
A layer object enables you to perform layer level operations by using the property sheet page to set the
appearance and behaviors of the geographic objects contained within the layer.
First, you load the layers from feature files or servers and then you set the layer appearance and
parameters in the property sheet page and the Feature Layer tab on the Ribbon.
To load native feature layers from files and servers, see “Loading Layers from Feature Files”,
“Loading Layers from SkylineGlobe Server” and “Loading Layers from Other Feature Servers” in this
chapter for further information.
To set the parameters of native feature layers, see “Setting and Editing Feature Layer Properties ” in
this chapter for further information.
Loading Layers from Feature Files
You can load layers from the following feature file types:
Feature File Description
Esri Shapefile A shapefile is a simple, non-topological file format used for storing the
geographic location and attribute information of geographic features. This
file format, developed by the Environmental Systems Research Institute
(ESRI), was designed for the Esri GIS and mapping system and consists of
the following files:
.shp: The main file that stores records of shapes, geometry and
vertices.
.dbf: The dBASE file type that stores attributes data for each
geographic object (points, lines and polygons).
.shx: The index file that stores the offset of the related .shp file.
.qix: A spatial index file created by TerraExplorer Pro when adding a
shapefile as a streaming layer for the first time.
Excel File A spreadsheet file that contains data for analysis and manipulation using
tables and formulas.
Note: Both *.xls and *.xlsx files are supported.
TerraExplorer can read geographic location elements (points) from an
Excel file, which is made possible by the user identifying the geographic
fields.
Excel Files Basic Rules:
Each sheet in the file represents a single geographic layer.
211
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Each row in a sheet represents a single geographic location.
Each row in the file should contain, at least: an X and Y coordinate
(column).
Coordinate columns should be in a Number Data Type and Double Field
Size.
Note: Opening *.xlsx files on computers running a 64-bit version of
Windows requires either Office 32-bit or ACE 32.
Text File A Text file is a free format file describing geographic locations of elements
(points). Text files can be generated manually using a common text editor
or loaded from other data forms (e.g., exported files from Microsoft Excel or
from a Rational database).
Note: Both *.txt and *.csv files are supported.
Text Files Basic Rules:
Each line in the file represents a single geographic location.
Each line in the file contains, at least, an X and Y coordinate, and
content data.
Every line must have the same number of columns. Corresponding
columns must have the same data types (although optional parameters
are allowed).
Optional parameters may be represented by empty spaces when using
a TAB, comma or semi-colon as separators. For example, if the column
format is "X, Y, H, P" where only "X" and "Y" are mandatory
parameters, "X, Y" is sufficient to set the X and Y values only, but “X, Y,
P” is required to set the P value.
When using SPACE as a separator, the number of spaces in between
columns is irrelevant. Therefore, empty parameters are not allowed in
this type of file.
It is mandatory that the chosen separator from the Select Text File
dialog box is exactly the same as the separator used in the file.
For custom separators, it is required that the characters used are not in
conflict with the data. For example, if the data contains a URL in the form
“http://<URL>,” using a colon as a custom separator, TerraExplorer
distinguishes “http” as one column, and “//<URL>” as another.
Esri File A File Geodatabase stores as a folder of files that hold geographic data,
Geodatabase attribute data, index files, lock files, and a signature file as well as other
(*.gdb) files. Each feature class or table in the geodatabase is stored in two or
more files.
MapInfo file (Tab, A MapInfo file is a two-dimensional format that stores both feature
Mif, Mid) geometry and attribute information. This file format was developed and
regulated by MapInfo.
There are two types of MapInfo files:
TAB - MapInfo native format
MIF/MID
The TAB format consists of the following files:
212
TerraExplorer User Guide
.tab: The ASCII file which is the link between all other files and holds
information about the type of data file.
.dat: Stores the attribute data.
.id: Stores information linking graphic data to the database information.
This file contains an index to the MAP file for each feature.
.map: Stores the graphic and geographic information needed to display
a map.
.ind: Optional index files for tabular data. Which are present if any
fields are indexed.
These files must be kept together in the same directory.
The MIF/MID format consists of the following files:
.mif: Stores the geometric data.
.mid: Stores the attribute data.
These files must be kept together in the same directory.
Microstation DGN Microstation DGN files can contain points, lines, areas, text, and other
object types. Features all have the following generic attributes:
Type - The integer type code as listed below in supported elements.
Level - The DGN level number (0-63).
GraphicGroup - The graphic group number.
ColorIndex - The color index from the dgn palette.
Weight - The drawing weight (thickness) for the element.
Style - The style value for the element.
Note: TerraExplorer supports v7 or lower of the DGN format.
Autodesk DXF File A Data Interchange File or *.dxf is an ASCII file format used to exchange
vector based graphics files. This format was developed, and is maintained,
by AutoDesk for the AutoCAD system. It is one of the most widely
supported vector formats in PC-based CAD products.
A DXF file is composed of graphic entities such as 2D primitives, 3D
primitives and blocks (which are groups of entities).
Feature layers based on DXF files are read-only. Layers can contain more
than one type of geometry.
TerraExplorer Pro supports the following graphical objects and features in
DXF files:
Point: An entity with single X, Y, Z coordinates. It can be represented
by the “Points Layer Parameters” as listed later in this document.
Arc: Any smooth curve joining two points.
Circle: A set of points equidistant from a given point.
Line: A single line segment.
Polyline: A connected sequence of line segments created as a single
213
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
object.
3D Solid: A solid object with free-form surface support.
3D Face: 3D triangular or quadrilateral plane section.
Text: A single line of alphanumeric characters.
Attrib: An object containing text that links to a block.
Layers: Any drawing entity can be assigned to any layer of the
drawing, allowing separation of portions of the drawing.
SQLite (*.sqlite, Spatial enabled SQLite databases stored in SQLite 3.x database files.
*.db) Note: Although non-spatial tables are also supported, they are not
recommended for optimal performance.
GDAL Virtual A VRT file is an XML file that transforms features read from other GDAL
Datasource (VRT) feature sources based on criteria specified in the file. The XML control file is
essentially a metadata XML file describing various properties of the actual
raster/vector file, like pixel dimensions, geolocation, etc. It is primarily used
to derive spatial layers from flat tables with spatial information in attribute
columns. It can also be used to associate coordinate system information
with a datasource, merge layers from different datasources into a single
data source, or even just to provide an anchor file for access to non-file
oriented datasources. See http://www.gdal.org/drv_vrt.html for more
information.
GeoPackage An Open Geospatial Consortium (OGC) standard that at its core, is simply
an SQLite database schema. It provides the performance of a spatial
database along with the convenience of a file-based data set.
Geospatial PDF A set of geospatial extensions to the Portable Document Format (PDF) that
relate a region in the document page to a region in physical space.
S-57 Vector interchange format used for maritime charts. Base files normally
have the extension .000 while the update files have extensions like .001,
.002 etc. The S-57 reader will normally read and apply all updates files to
the in memory version of the base file on the fly. The feature data provided
to the application therefore includes all the updates.
GeoJson GeoJSON is a format for encoding a variety of geographic data structures.
GeoJSON is an open standard format designed for representing simple
geographical features, along with their non-spatial attributes, based on
JavaScript Object Notation. The features include points, line strings,
polygons, and multi-part collections of these types.
To load a feature file:
1. On the Home tab, in the Add group, click Feature Layer. The Browse for Feature Layer dialog box is
displayed.
2. Browse to the required file and click Open. The Select Layer dialog box opens with the selected
layer(s) listed in the Select a Layer section. See “Select Layer Dialog Box” in this chapter for
information.
Note: For text files and Excel spreadsheets, select a layer and click Next. Then select the layer’s
Coordinate Fields in the Select Fields dialog box and click Next. See “Select Fields Dialog
Box” in this chapter for information.
3. Click Import to directly load with default settings or click Next to set the layer’s general settings.
214
TerraExplorer User Guide
4. Set the layer’s General Settings and click Next. See “Selecting General Layer Settings” in this
chapter for more information. The Layer Settings dialog box is displayed.
5. Select the attribute fields to load, set layer and layer object parameters, and apply different properties
such as line color or cylinder height, based on the attribute field values of the objects. See “Loading
Layer Attribute Fields”, and “About Basing Native Feature Layer Properties on Layer Attribute Fields ”
in this chapter for information.
Loading Layers from SkylineGlobe Server (SGS)
SkylineGlobe Server is a private cloud solution that supports the client -server data delivery requirement s
of Skyline's 3D technology. TerraExplorer clients can load point cloud, KML, feature, elevation, imagery,
3DML, raster complex, TerraBuilder projects, and TerraExplorer projects loaded from SkylineGlobe Server.
Feature layers can also be edited and changes saved to the data source. For more information on loading
layers from SGS, see “Loading SkylineGlobe Layers” in the “Working with SkylineGlobe Server” chapter.
To add a layer from a SkylineGlobe server:
SkylineGlobe Layers Dialog Box
1. On the Home tab, in the Add group, click the arrow next to 3D Layer, and select SkylineGlobe
Server. The SkylineGlobe Layers dialog box is displayed.
2. If you aren’t already logged in to the required SkylineGlobe Server, log in to the server. See “Logging
In to a SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Working with SkylineGlobe Server” chapter for information.
3. Search for the required layer. See “Searching for SkylineGlobe Layers” in the “Working with
SkylineGlobe Server” chapter.
215
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
4. Select the layer you want to load, and click Load Layer. The Select Layer dialog box opens with the
selected layer(s) listed in the Select a Layer section. See “Select Layer Dialog Box” in this chapter for
information.
5. After the layer has been placed on the terrain, you can change its properties using its property sheet.
See “Setting and Editing Feature Layer Properties” in this chapter for further information.
Loading Layers from Other Feature Servers
In addition to SkylineGlobe Server, you can also load feature layers from the following servers:
Server Description
Web Feature Server (WFS, WFS is a standard protocol published by the Open Geospatial
WFS-T) Consortium (OGC) for serving geographical features over the
Internet. TerraExplorer supports WFS 1.0.0, 1.1.0, 1.1.1, and
2.0.0. A WFS service with transactions (WFS-T) allows WFS
clients to apply edits (inserts, deletes and updates) to the data
in the source database through the WFS service.
TerraGate SFS (WFS) Skyline’s TerraGate SFS Server efficiently streams feature
layers (Legacy support).
Esri ArcSDE The Spatial Database Engine (SDE) is a client/server
application that enables feature layers to be stored, managed
and retrieved from database management systems like Oracle,
Microsoft SQL Server, Sybase, IBM DB2 and Informix. Loading
of layers from ArcSDE is only supported through ArcSDE 10.2
(Esri deprecated the application server connection method after
this version). From ArcSDE 10.3 and above, layers can be
loaded using the WFS/REST services.
Oracle Spatial Oracle Spatial (formerly called SDO, and before that
MultiDimension), provides a way to store and retrieve multi-
dimensional data in Oracle. It is primarily used for Geographical
Information Systems to implement geo-reference and solve
queries such as how is something related to a specific location.
Note: In order to load an Oracle Spatial layer you must have
an Oracle Client installed on your computer.
SQL Spatial Microsoft SQL Server Spatial Database provides support for
access to spatial tables in Microsoft SQL Server 2008+ which
contains the geometry and geography data types to represent
the geometry columns.
PostgreSQL with PostGIS Postgre SQL is an object-relational database management
system (ORDBMS). It is released under an MIT-style license
and is thus free and open source software.
It supports a large part of the SQL standard and offers many
features:
Complex queries
Foreign keys
Triggers
Views
Transactional integrity
216
TerraExplorer User Guide
Multiversion concurrency control
PostGIS adds support for geographic objects to the
PostgreSQLobject-relational database. In effect, PostGIS
"spatially enables" the PostgreSQL server, allowing it to be
used as a backend spatial database for geographic information
systems (GIS). PostGIS follows the OpenGIS "Simple Features
Specification for SQL" and has been certified as compliant with
the "Types and Functions" profile.
Note: TerraExplorer currently supports PostGIS 1.5.
ArcGIS GeoServices REST Esri’s ArcGIS GeoServices REST (Representational State
Server Transfer) Server relies on a stateless (generally HTTP), client-
server, cacheable communications protocol. This allows fast
performance, reliability, and the ability to grow, by re-using
components that can be managed and updated without
affecting the system as a whole, even while it is running.
To load a feature layer from a server:
1. On the Home tab, in the Add group, click Feature Layer. The Browse for Feature Layer dialog box is
displayed.
Browsing for the Feature Layer Dialog Box
2. In the From Server section, select the server type. A connection parameters dialog box is displayed.
217
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
3. Enter the required connection parameters for the specific server or database, and click Connect. See
“Connection Parameters” in this chapter for information.
4. Select a layer from the Select Layer dialog box and click Next. See “Select Layer Dialog Box” in this
chapter for information. For SkylineGlobe Server layers, see “Loading Layers from SkylineGlobe
Server” in this chapter for information.
Note: For ArcGIS GeoServices REST Server layers, the layers are selected directly in the
connection parameters dialog box, and loaded into the project.
5. Set the Layer’s General Settings and click Next. See “Selecting General Layer Settings” in this
chapter for more information. The Layer Settings dialog box is displayed.
6. Select the attribute fields to load, set layer and layer object parameters, and apply different properties
such as line color or cylinder height, based on the attribute field values of the objects. See “Loading
Layer Attribute Fields”, “About Basing Native Feature Layer Properties on Layer Attribute Fields ”, and
“Setting and Editing Feature Layer Properties ” in this chapter for information.
Connection Parameters
Logging In to a SkylineGlobe Server
Connecting to a Web Feature Server or a Skyline Feature Server
Connecting to the ArcSDE Server
Connecting to an Oracle Spatial Server
Connecting to an SQL Spatial Server
Connecting to a PostgreSQL Database
Connecting to an ArcGIS GeoServices REST Server
Logging In to a SkylineGlobe Server
Logging In to SkylineGlobe Server Dialog Box
218
TerraExplorer User Guide
To log in to a SkylineGlobe Server:
Note: If you are already logged in to a server and want to log in to a different one, first log out of the first
server: on the top right of the application ribbon, click the arrow next to the User Name of the
logged in user, and select Log out. Then log in to the required server with the required login
information.
1. Enter the login information and click Log In:
Parameter Activity
Server The Server Host Name, which is the IP address of the server.
User Name User name to access the server (mandatory).
Password Enter the password.
Remember Password Select this option to save the password. The password will be
remembered and will be displayed in asterisks the next time the
SkylineGlobe Server dialog box is displayed.
The values that you enter for Server and User Name are saved. The next time you load this window,
this information is automatically filled in.
2. If the connection to the server is successful, the SkylineGlobe Layers dialog box opens from which
you can load a layer into the project. See the “Working with SkylineGlobe Server” chapter for more
information.
219
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Connecting to a Web Feature Server or a Skyline Feature Server
Select WFS Provider Dialog Box
To connect to a Web Feature Service Server or a legacy TerraGate SFS Feature Server:
1. Enter the connection information:
Connection Information Description
Previous Connections Displays information from any previous connection you made in
the past.
WFS Server Enter the current URL link if not provided in the Previous
Connections field.
WFS Version Select the WFS version.
WFS 1.0.0, 1.1.0, 1.1.1, and 2.0.0 are the currently supported
versions.
User Enter your WFS Server user name.
Password Enter your WFS Server password.
220
TerraExplorer User Guide
Remember Password Select this option to save the password. The password will be
remembered and will be displayed in asterisks the next time the
Select WFS Provider dialog box is displayed.
The values that you enter are saved. The next time you load this window, all the information is
automatically filled in.
2. If the connection to the server is successful, click Next. The Select Layer dialog box opens in which
you set the layer properties and parameters. See “Select Layer Dialog Box” in this chapter for more
information.
Connecting to the ArcSDE Server
Connect to ArcSDE Server Dialog Box
To access data from ArcSDE server, TerraExplorer requires access to specific ArcSDE components
(dynamic link library files): sde.dll, pe.dll and sg.dll, of versions 10.0, 9.3 or 9.2. For versions 9.2 and 9.3,
msvcr71.dll is also required. These files are installed with various Esri components, including ArcGIS
Desktop and ArcSDE SDK, as well as the free viewers, ArcGIS Explorer Desktop and ArcReader. See
http://www.esri.com/products/index.html#free_viewers_panel
To allow TerraExplorer to access these files, do any of the following:
Make sure an ARCGISHOME or AGSDESKTOPJAVA environment variable is defined on your
221
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
system and includes a reference to a folder under which a bin folder exists with the above mentioned
files.
Make sure a PATH environment variable is defined on your system and includes a reference to a
folder under which a bin folder exists with the above mentioned files.
Copy the DLL’s to the main TerraExplorer folder.
To connect to an ArcSDE Server:
Note: If you are already connected to a server and want to connect to a different one, first click the
Disconnect button, then fill in the new server connection information. You can now connect to the
new server.
1. Enter the connection information:
Connection Information Description
Previous Connections Displays information from any previous connection you made in
the past.
Server Server name (mandatory).
Instance Instance name.
Port Port number.
You must fill in either the instance name or the port number.
Database Database name (optional).
ArcSDE 8.x, 9.x Select the ArcSDE 8.x check box to indicate connection to an
ArcSDE 8 or an ArcSDE 9 database.
User User name to access the server (mandatory).
Password Enter the password.
Remember Password Select this option to save the password. The password will be
remembered and will be displayed in asterisks the next time the
Connect to ArcSDE Server dialog box is displayed.
The values that you enter are saved. The next time you load this window, all the information is
automatically filled in.
2. If the connection to the server is successful, click Next. The Select Layer dialog box opens in which
you set the layer properties and parameters. See “Select Layer Dialog Box” in this chapter for more
information.
Note: After a connection with ArcSDE Server has been established the connection to the
database remains open as long as you do not exit TerraExplorer, or click the Disconnect
button.
222
TerraExplorer User Guide
Connecting to an Oracle Spatial Server
Connect to Oracle Spatial Server Dialog Box
To connect to an Oracle Spatial Server:
Note: If you are already connected to a server and want to connect to a different one, first click the
Disconnect button, then fill in the new server connection information. You can now connect to
the new server.
1. Enter the connection information:
Parameter Activity
Previous Connections Displays information from any previous connection you made in
the past.
User Enter the user name.
Password Enter the password.
Remember Password Select this option to save the password. The password is
remembered and displayed in asterisks the next time the Oracle
Spatial Server dialog box is displayed.
Service The Net Service name.
The values that you enter are saved. The next time you load this window, all the information is
automatically filled in.
2. If the connection to the server is successful, click Next. The Select Layer dialog box opens in which
you set the layer properties and parameters. See “Select Layer Dialog Box” in this chapter for more
information.
Note: After a connection with Oracle Spatial Server has been established, the connection to the
database remains open as long as you do not exit TerraExplorer, or click the Disconnect button.
Local Naming: Local naming is a method used to resolve a simple name, a net service name, to a
connect descriptor that the client uses to connect to a database or service. Local naming stores net
223
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
service names and their connect descriptors in a local tnsnames.ora file.
In order to connect to a Service it must be configured in the tnsnames.ora file.
Connecting to an SQL Spatial Server
Connect SQL Server Dialog Box
To connect to an SQL Spatial Server:
1. Enter the connection information:
Parameter Activity
Previous Connections Displays information from any previous connection you made in the
past.
Server The Server Host Name, which is the IP address of the server.
Database Database name (optional).
Use Windows When the Use Windows Authentication check box is selected, the
Authentication SQL Server OLE DB provider will request a secure (or trusted)
connection to a SQL Server running on Microsoft platform. The SQL
Server will use integrated login security to establish connections
using this data source, regardless of the current login security mode
at the server. Any login ID or password supplied is ignored. The SQL
224
TerraExplorer User Guide
Server system administrator must associate your login with a SQL
Server login ID.
When cleared, the SQL Server will use standard login security to
establish connections using this data source. You must specify a
login ID and password for all connection requests.
User User name to access the server.
Note: If the Use Windows Authentication check box is selected, the
User name field is unavailable
Password Enter the password.
Note: If the Use Windows Authentication check box is selected, the
User name field is unavailable
Remember Password Select this option to save the password. The password will be
remembered and will be displayed in asterisks the next time the SQL
Server dialog box is displayed.
The values that you enter are saved. The next time you load this window, all the information is
automatically filled in.
2. If the connection to the server is successful, click OK. The Select Layer dialog box opens in which
you set the layer properties and parameters. See “Select Layer Dialog Box” in this chapter for more
information.
225
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Connecting to a PostgreSQL Database
Connect to PostgreSQL Database Dialog Box
To connect to a PostgreSQL Server:
Note: If you are already connected to a server and want to connect to a different one, first click the
Disconnect button, then fill in the new server connection information. You can now connect to
the new server.
Note: TerraExplorer currently supports PostGIS 1.5.
1. Enter the connection information:
Parameter Activity
Previous Connections Displays information from any previous connection you made in the
past.
Host The Server Host Name, which is the IP address of the server.
Database Database name (optional).
Port Port number.
User User name to access the server (mandatory).
Password Enter the password.
226
TerraExplorer User Guide
The values that you enter are saved. The next time you load this window, all the information is
automatically filled in.
2. If the connection to the server is successful, click Next. The Select Layer dialog box opens in which
you set the layer properties and parameters. See “Select Layer Dialog Box” in this chapter for more
information.
Connecting to an ArcGIS GeoServices REST Server
Connect to ArcGIS GeoServices REST Server Dialog Box
To connect to an ArcGIS GeoServices REST Server:
1. Enter the server’s URL.
2. Click Connect.
3. Select a layer, and click Import.
227
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Select Layer Dialog Box
Select Layer Dialog Box
To use the Select Layer dialog box:
1. In the Select a Layer section, select the required layer. Use CTRL-click or SHIFT-click to multi-select
layers.
Note: When multi-selecting layers, they are imported with default settings.
2. Define a filter for the layer; the filter is any valid SQL WHERE clause. Click the Preview button to
display the filtered information.
228
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: The WHERE statement is an OGR SQL dialect. See http://www.gdal.org/ogr_sql.html for
more information.
3. Select the First row is column name header check box if you want the first row of data shown in the
Sample Records area to be the header.
Note: This check box is only displayed when an Excel file is loaded.
4. Click Load to use the default general layer settings.
5. If you want to set non-default general layer settings, click Next. If you are loading a layer from a text
file or Excel file, the Select Fields dialog box opens. Otherwise, the General Settings dialog box
opens.
Note: When multi-selecting layers, they can only be imported with default settings, so the Next
button is not available.
Select Fields Dialog Box
Select Fields Dialog Box
To use the Select Fields dialog box:
1. Select the Layer’s X, Y and Altitude coordinate fields.
2. Click Next. The General Settings dialog box opens.
229
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Selecting General Layer Settings
General Settings Dialog Box
Setting General Layer Settings
To set general layer settings:
1. In the General Settings dialog box, define the following parameters:
Parameter Description
Reprojection
Reproject If the coordinate system of the layer is different from the coordinate
system of the terrain, do the following:
1. Select the Reproject check box. See “Coordinate System
Dialog Box” in the “Basic Concepts” chapter for information.
230
TerraExplorer User Guide
2. Click the Set Coordinate System button to open the
Coordinate System dialog to specify the coordinate system of
the layer.
Note: If TerraExplorer automatically recognized the layer's
coordinate system, the Reproject check box is
automatically selected and the Layer Coordinate System
section is populated.
Options
Load Option Select the required option:
Stream - Information from the remote layer file is retrieved,
added to the terrain, and then removed dynamically based on
the camera's position. This option enables you to fly without
waiting for the entire layer to load.
Entire Layer - The entire layer is loaded from the server when
the FLY file opens.
Create Annotations Select the Create Annotations check box to automatically add a
point annotation object in the center of each layer feature, which
can be used to convey information, textually or graphically, relating
to the feature. The center point is determined according to the type
of feature layer:
Point – Same point.
Polygon – Center of polygon (center of gravity, normally
inside).
Polyline – Center along the line.
Advanced Click to set advanced streaming parameters. See “Setting
Advanced Streaming Parameters” in this chapter for further
information.
Predefined Visibility
Globe/ Continent/ Country/ Select the viewer altitude from which visibility distance and scale is
State/ City/ House set to optimum.
3. Click Next to define layer settings. See “Loading Layer Attribute Fields” in this chapter for further
information. If you don’t want to define any layer settings, click Load to load the layer directly.
231
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Setting Advanced Streaming Parameters
Advanced Streaming Setting Dialog Box
To set Advanced Streaming settings:
1. In the Advanced Setting dialog box, define the following parameters:
Advanced Streaming Description
Property
Bounding Box The loaded feature layer area is bounded within the coordinates of
a fixed rectangular area.
These coordinates are retrieved from the source file or the source
server. You can change the coordinates of the layer bounding box
only if the Load Layer parameters are set to Streaming.
The coordinates parameters are as follows:
Upper Left X and Upper Left Y: The coordinates of the upper
left corner of the required bounding box.
Lower Right X and Lower Right Y: The coordinates of the
lower right corner of the required bounding box.
Optimization
This option is available only for streaming layers.
Block Width You can change the geographic block width of the stream requests
that are sent from TerraExplorer to the remote server.
232
TerraExplorer User Guide
Changing the block width can improve performance, For example,
a block width that is about double the average line feature size, or
covers about 50 point features, can improve streaming behavior.
This field is enabled when the Load option in the Options section
of the General Settings dialog box is set to Streaming.
Select one of the following options:
Auto: TerraExplorer Pro calculates dynamically the request
block width according to performance related criteria.
Predefined Set of Block Width Suggestions: Select the
block width in meters or kilometers.
Label Annotation for Polylines
This option is available only for streaming layers, when you are creating a polyline and an
annotation symbol.
Dynamic Placement When the Dynamic Placement option is selected, annotations are
dynamically moved along the polyline object to which they are
assigned, to a visible area in the 3D Window.
This applies only to polyline objects whose altitude method field
value is set to On Terrain.
Minimize Duplications When the Minimize Duplications option is selected, repeating
labels, with the same text or image, are removed from the view.
Loading Layers from the Data Library
You can load layers from the SkylineGlobe Data Library.
To load a feature layer from the Data Library:
1. On the Layers tab, in the Feature group, click Data Library. The Data Library dialog box is
displayed.
233
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Load Layer from Data Library
2. Click the layer you want to add and it is automatically added to the project and displayed in the
Project Tree.
Loading SGS Base Layers
You can load base layers into the project from the SkylineGlobe Server TerraExplorer is currently
connected to.
To load an SGS base layer:
1. If you aren’t already logged in to the required SkylineGlobe Server, log in to the server. See “Logging
In to a SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Working with SkylineGlobe Server” chapter for information.
2. On the Layers tab, in the Feature group, click the arrow next to SGS Base Layers, and select one of
the feature layer types (Borders and Places, Points of Interest, Streets and Roads , Buildings). The
layer is added to the project and displayed in the Project Tree.
Setting and Editing Feature Layer Properties
The Layer property sheet includes up to three tabs for standard layers:
The Feature tab (Polygon, Polyline, or Point)
The Annotation tab
The Layer tab
234
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: Most data sources include a homogenous set of features of the same geometry type, for which
you can add attributes. Other types (e.g., DGN, DXF) may have more than one type of geometry.
Their property sheets have five tabs: Polygon, Polyline, Point, Text, and Layer.
The Feature and Layer tabs are always included in the property sheet. For standard layers, the inclusion
of the Annotation tab depends on your selection in the Options section in the General Settings dialog
box at the time of loading. See “Selecting General Layer Settings” in this chapter to learn about the
Create Annotations check box.
Layer properties can be set when a feature layer is loaded. If properties were not set or you want to
modify properties, you can open the layer’s property sheet and do so.
To set layer properties when loading a feature layer:
In the Layer Settings dialog box, in the property sheet, select the required tab and set the parameter
values.
Tab Description
Features (Polygons or Polyline This tab contains the properties related to the objects (the
or Points) tab features) contained within the layer.
Note: Most data sources include a homogenous set of
features of the same geometry type, for which you
can add attributes, so they will have one feature tab.
Other types (e.g., DGN, DXF) may have more than
one type of geometry, and will therefore have multiple
feature tabs, one for each geometry type.
Depending on the type of features that the layer contains, the
Feature tab displays one of the following:
Points: The Points properties displayed in the property
sheet depend on the symbol type selected in the Symbol
field located at the top of the Points tab. Symbol types
can be Text Label, Image Label, Shape, Regular polygon,
Circle, Ellipse, Arc, 2D Arrow, Box, Pyramid, Cone,
Cylinder, Sphere, 3D Arrow, or 3D Model. See the
relevant properties specification for each type of symbol
in the guide section dedicated for it.
Polylines - See “Creating a New Polyline” in the “Objects
and Labels” chapter for more information.
Polygons: The Polygon properties displayed in the
property sheet depend on the symbol type selected in the
Symbol field located at the top of the Polygon tab.
Polygon symbol types can be Polygon, 3D Polygon or
Building. See the relevant properties specification for
each type of symbol in the guide section dedicated for it.
See the relevant properties specification for each type of
symbol in the guide section dedicated for it.
Note: You can copy a layer style and paste it on to another
layer with features of the same geometry type. All
feature and annotation properties, i.e., properties
included on the Feature (Polygon, Polyline or Point)
and Annotation tabs are copied and pasted. See
“Copying and Pasting Layer Styles” in this chapter for
more information.
235
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Annotations tab The Annotation properties displayed in the property sheet
depend on the symbol type selected in the Symbol field
located at the top of the Annotation tab.
Annotation symbol types can be Text Label, Image Label,
Rectangle, Regular Polygon, Circle, Ellipse, Arc, 2D Arrow,
Box, Pyramid, Cone, Cylinder, Sphere, 3D Arrow or 3DModel.
See the relevant properties specification for each type of
symbol in the guide section dedicated for it.
Layer tab See “Layer Tab” in this chapter for further information.
Layer Tab
The layer tab includes the following groups and fields:
Field Activity
General
Name Type the description or name of the layer.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the locked layer from
the Project Tree.
The action is also applied on the annotation symbols group and the
features group, if the groups are included in the layer.
Location
Defines the initial location of the camera when a locked layer is selected from the Project Tree.
The location parameters also apply to the Features group, and to the Annotations Group if it was
created.
Altitude Method Sets the altitude method to be used for the specified location:
Select Relative to Terrain to place the location point at a
specified altitude above the ground.
Select Absolute to place the location point at a specified
altitude above the terrain database vertical datum base
ellipsoid.
Altitude Enter the altitude above the ground for the specified location.
X Enter the X-coordinate of the location of interest.
Y Enter the Y-coordinate of the location of interest.
MGRS The coordinates of the location of interest in Military Grid
Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available
if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog
box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for
more information.
Direction Enter the horizontal angle of the camera when viewing the
location.
Tilt Enter the vertical angle of the camera when viewing the location.
Viewing Distance Enter the distance between the camera and the specified location.
This parameter also affects the radius of the flight patterns.
236
TerraExplorer User Guide
Set Viewpoint Click Capture to capture the current camera position and set as
the camera parameters for this location.
Jump To Viewpoint Click Jump to make the 3D Window reflect the changes made to
the location’s fields.
Visibility Conditions
Minimum Streaming Altitude As you zoom in on a layer, information may become too coarse.
You can set the minimum streaming altitude below which the layer
objects and annotations in the layer stop streaming in.
When flying lower than the “Minimum Streaming Altitude” the
objects disappear and the streaming of layer data pauses (If the
Load Option was set to “Streaming” at the General Settings page,
see “Selecting General Layer Settings” in this chapter for further
information).
Maximum Streaming Altitude As you zoom out, it may be difficult to see more detailed
information. You can set the maximum streaming altitude above
which the layer objects and annotations in the layer are no longer
visible.
When flying higher than the “Maximum Streaming Altitude”, the
objects disappear and the streaming of layer data pauses (If the
Load Option was set to “Streaming” at the General Settings page,
see “Selecting General Layer Settings” in this chapter for further
information).
Connection
The Connection section displays layer connection parameters based on the layer file sources.
If the layer source is a local file, the file name is displayed in the From File field, see "Loading
Layers from Feature Files" in this chapter for further information.
If the layer source is a remote server, see “Loading Layers from SkylineGlobe Server” and
“Loading Layers from Other Feature Servers” in this chapter for further information.
Layer Name The name of the layer selected from the server (Read-only).
File Name The name of the layer file (Read-only).
Import Layer
The import layer section enables you to select the load mode and specify which areas to load
within the layer.
Import Option Select one of the following load modes:
Streaming: the layer features are streamed from the server
according to the plane location during the flight.
All Features: all layer features are loaded at once.
Filter Define a filter for the layer; the filter is any valid SQL WHERE
clause. Click the Preview button to display the filtered information.
Note: The WHERE statement is an OGR SQL dialect. See
http://www.gdal.org/ogr_sql.html for more information.
Suggested Block Width Sets the block width of the stream requests sent from
TerraExplorer to the remote server.
Changing the block width can improve performance. For example,
a block width that is about double the average line feature size, or
covers about 50 point features, can improve streaming behavior.
237
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
This field is enabled when the Load option field of the Load Layer
section is set to Streaming. Select one of the following block width
setting methods:
Auto: TerraExplorer Pro calculates dynamically the request
block width according to performance related criteria.
Predefined block width suggestions: Select the block width
in kilometers.
Ignore Geometry Z Value Select whether to ignore the layer’s z-coordinate value. This field is
only displayed for data sources that support Z values.
Z Value Units Select the desired units of measurement for z-coordinates: meters,
feet, centimeters, decimeters, inches or yards. This field is only
displayed for data sources that support Z values.
Refresh Layer Click the Apply button to reload the layer from a server or file
according to your load settings. Any changes made to specific
objects are overwritten. Changes that were applied to the entire
group using the Layer Properties, are applied again to the reloaded
layer.
Projection
Reproject Source Determines if the layer’s geographic information is reprojected
from the source coordinate system to the terrain coordinate
system.
Reproject Elevation Select the check box to reproject the layer’s elevation values to the
terrain’s coordinate system. This option only applies when Altitude
Method is set to Absolute. Geocentric layers are always
reprojected.
Layer Coord Sys Displays the layer’s coordinate system.
Coordinate System Click Set to open the Coordinate System dialog box.
Import Attribute Fields
The Import Attribute section enables you to select which attribute fields to load with the layer. You
can add attributes that were not selected for loading when the layer was initially added to the
terrain, (See “Selecting Layer Attributes Fields” in this chapter for further information) or you can
clear field attributes that were initially selected.
Note: Field attributes on which property field values were based (See “About Basing Native
Feature Layer Properties on Layer Attribute Fields” in this chapter for further information.)
cannot be cleared and their check boxes are unavailable.
Layer Bounding Box
The loaded feature layer area is bounded within the coordinates of a fixed rectangular area.
These coordinates are retrieved from the source file or the source server. You can change the
coordinates of the layer bounding box only if the Load Layer parameters are set to Streaming.
Reset Click to reset the coordinate information to its original values.
Upper Left X Click to modify the X coordinate of the upper left corner of the
layer.
Upper Left Y Click to modify the Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the
layer.
238
TerraExplorer User Guide
Lower Right X Click to modify the X coordinate of the lower right corner of the
layer.
Lower Right Y Click to modify the Y coordinate of the lower right corner of the
layer.
Copying and Pasting Layer Styles
Layers are easily styled by copying the styles from one layer and pasting them onto another layer with
features of the same geometry type. All feature and annotation properties, i.e., properties included on the
Feature (Polygon, Polyline or Point) and Annotation tabs are copied and pasted.
Note: Layer styles cannot be pasted if the source of the layer being copied was deleted.
To copy and paste a layer’s styles:
1. In the Project Tree, right-click the layer whose style you want to copy, and select Copy Layer Style.
2. In the Project Tree, right-click the layer to which you want to apply the copied layer style, and select
Paste Layer Style.
Using Attribute Fields
Most feature layers can store attribute field values for each of their features. This information can be used
to:
Display attribute field information in the Information Query Tool results. See “Information Query Tool”
in the “Analysis Tools” chapter for further information.
Control the appearance and behavior of layer features based on field attribute values. For example,
you can represent the number of people living in a country attribute by the line color of the country's
boundary. See “About Basing Native Feature Layer Properties on Layer Attribute Fields ” in this
chapter for further information.
Perform actions on sets of layer features matching a specific set of attribute field values. For
example, you can show in the 3D Window or export to a new layer only countries whose GNP per
capita surpasses $15,000. This capability is enabled by the Attribute Table Tool. See “Searching and
Performing Operations by Attribute (Attribute Table Tool)” in this chapter for further information.
Loading Layer Attribute Fields
Feature layers can be loaded with their attribute fields and values. If attribute fields were not loaded with a
layer or you want to modify which fields are loaded, you can select or clear field attributes in the layer’s
property sheet. However, if you base a property sheet field on an attribute field, the attribute field's check
box is automatically selected and disabled.
To select attribute fields to load when loading a layer:
1. In the Layer Settings dialog box, in the Select Attribute Fields to Load section, select the check
boxes of the attributes you want to load. Attributes are listed here only if the chosen layer has
attribute field information.
Note: If you want to load all the attribute fields, click Select All. If you want to load no attribute
fields, click Clear All.
239
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Layer Settings Dialog Box
2. If you want to view samples of an attribute field, highlight it in the Select Attribute Fields to Load
section. A sample is displayed in the Highlight a field to view value samples section.
3. In the Layer Settings dialog box, in the property sheet panel, set layer and layer object parameters.
See “Setting and Editing Feature Layer Properties ” in this chapter for further information.
To load attribute fields after a layer was loaded.
1. On the Layer tab of the layer’s property sheet, in the Load Attribute Fields section, select the
check boxes of the attribute fields you want to load, and clear the check boxes of the attribute fields
you want unloaded.
Note: Attribute fields that were already loaded display with their check boxes selected.
2. A dialog is displayed reminding you that you need to refresh (reload) the layer before the new
attribute fields are loaded. Click OK, and continue selecting or clearing check boxes as required.
3. When you close the property sheet, a dialog box is displayed asking if you want to refresh the layer.
Click OK to refresh.
Modifying Layer Attribute Data
After loading a native feature layer with attribute fields, you can view and edit the attribute field values of
the objects.
240
TerraExplorer User Guide
The attribute values appear in the Attributes group in the object’s property sheet. Any change you make
to the attribute fields values is saved in the FLY file.
To edit layer attribute data:
1. Select a single object for editing.
2. On the Feature Layer tab, in the Selection group, click Select Feature.
3. In the 3D Window, select the object. A yellow frame surrounds the feature object and the feature’s
property sheet opens.
4. In the layer’s property sheet, in the Attributes section, click the parameter name to edit. The Help
text at the bottom of the property sheet displays the field’s data type (e.g., “String. Character
Length:13”, “Double”, etc.).
Note: Each attribute field that was loaded from the feature layer has a Parameter Name in the
Attributes group. The value in the parameter’s value is the appropriate value for the
selected object.
5. Click the parameter value field and enter the new value.
Note: Only valid inputs according to the field’s data type are updated and saved.
About Basing Native Feature Layer Properties on Layer Attribute Fields
After loading a feature layer with attribute fields, you can apply different properties such as line color or
cylinder height, based on the attribute field values of the objects.
Let's take as an example a polygon’s layer that covers the terrain with country boundaries. With the help
of this feature, it is possible for TerraExplorer to color in red only the boundaries of countries with a
population of more than 10 million people.
Note that you can base properties on field attributes, only if the feature layers are loaded with attribute
fields, such as "Country Population". If the layer does not contain attribute fields, or in the loading phase,
you did not select any attribute field to load, you cannot take advantage of this feature.
See “Loading Layer Attribute Fields” in this chapter to learn how to add the attribute field information in
the loading phase.
When basing a property field on an attribute field, you have to establish the property you want to set, and
the attribute field on which to base your setting. In our example, the property is the country boundary's
Line Color and the attribute field is "Country Population".
Attribute Fields
Properties can be based on three types of attribute fields:
Description Type of Storage /Example
Textual attribute field types e.g., Country Name.
Integer attribute field types Stores whole numbers without any decimals. e.g., State
Population.
Double attribute field types Stores real numbers having a double precision floating point. e.g.,
Average Income.
The field attribute type determines how the property is based on the value of the field attribute.
When the attribute field is numeric - integer of double - it is possible to group attribute field values in
ranges. For example, you can set the boundary line color to red for countries with a population
between 1,000,000 and 2,000,000 and to green for countries with a population between 2,000,001
241
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
and 3,000,000.
When a property is based on a numeric field attribute, it is also possible to use the >< =><=
operators. For example, you can set the boundary line color to orange for all countries with a
population larger (>) than 1,000,000.
Properties
There are four types of properties that can be set based on attribute fields:
Color properties such as line color and fill color.
See “Basing Color Properties on Attribute Fields” in this chapter for further information.
Numeric properties such as cylinder height or text label altitude.
See “Basing Numeric Style Properties on Attribute Fields” in this chapter for further information.
The text content of text labels, tooltips and other text elements.
See “Basing Text Content on Attribute Fields” in this chapter for further information.
Drop-down lists properties such as font size or text underline.
See “Basing Drop-Down List Properties on Attribute Fields” in this chapter for further information.
Basing Color Properties on Attribute Fields
To base color properties on attribute fields:
1. In the layer property sheet, click the color property box, and then click the Field by Attribute button
.
2. From the Use Attribute drop-down list, select the field attribute on which to base the color property.
3. Select one of the following color property setting modes:
Expression: See “Applying the Color Expression Mode” in this chapter for further information.
User Defined: See “Applying the Color User Defined Mode” in this chapter for further
information.
Default Palette: See “Applying the Color Default Palette Mode” in this chapter for further
information.
Gradient: See “Applying the Color Gradient Mode” in this chapter for further information.
Applying the Color Expression Mode
The Expression mode lets you set the color property to the color values of the field attribute you selected
in the Use Attribute drop-down list. Use this option only when the selected field attribute contains color
values in a hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel 00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red
channel 00-ff).
You can also set the color property to an expression based on a field attribute value.
242
TerraExplorer User Guide
Field by Attribute Dialog Box – Color Expression Mode
To apply the color Expression mode:
1. In the Field by Attribute dialog box, select the Expression option.
2. In the Expression field, build an expression that contains the attribute as a variable.
3. Click Apply.
243
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Applying the Color User Defined Mode
The User Defined mode enables you to assign a specific color to a specific attribute field value. In this
field, for example, you can set the line color for all country boundaries in Europe to Purple. You assign the
Purple color to the 'Europe' value, provided that you select the 'Continent' field attribute in the Use
Attribute drop-down list.
Field by Attribute Dialog Box – Color User Defined Mode
244
TerraExplorer User Guide
To apply the User Defined mode:
1. In the Field by Attribute dialog box, select the User Defined option.
2. In the Value from [Attribute] section, in the first empty row of the left hand side column, click
and select a value from the Choose Attribute Value dialog box.
3. If the attribute type is numeric, you can use the >< =><= operators.
4. Click the Color column in the same row, and select a color from the Color dialog box.
5. Repeat steps 2-4 above to assign colors to additional field attribute values.
6. Click Apply.
Applying the Color Default Palette Mode
The default palette mode assigns automatically a different color to each unique attribute field value or to
each range of numeric values.
Value Activity
Unique Assigning automatically a different color to each attribute field
value. For example, you can use this mode to color country
boundaries of the same continent with the same color. In this case,
all unique values of the 'Continent' field attribute are assigned a
different color automatically.
Class Breaks Assigning automatically a different color to each range of numeric
values. This option is only relevant for numeric attribute types. For
example, you can use this mode to have all countries within a
certain population range have the same color. In this case, the
numeric values of the 'Country Population' field are divided into
ranges (class breaks) where each range is assigned a different
color automatically.
245
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Field by Attribute Dialog Box – Default Palette Unique Value
To assign a unique color to each unique attribute field value:
1. In the Field by Attribute dialog box, in the Classification section, select the Default Palette option.
2. From the Class break drop-down list, select Full range.
Note: For textual attribute types, this option is automatically selected.
3. Click Apply. A unique color is applied in the 3D Window to each unique attribute field value for a max
of 256 values.
246
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: These values are not listed in the dialog box. If you want to change the color assigned to a
specific attribute field value, in the Value from [Attribute] section, in the left column, click
, enter that attribute value and select the required color from the Color dialog box.
Field by Attribute Dialog Box – Default Palette with Class Breaks
247
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
To assign a unique color to each class break:
1. In the Field by Attribute dialog box, select the Default Palette option.
2. From the Class break drop-down list, select the required division mode of the attribute field values
range:
Linear: The range of the attribute field values is divided equally between the classes.
Logarithmic: The range of the attribute field values is divided in a logarithmic way between the
classes.
3. In the Classes field, enter the number of class breaks.
4. In the Min box, type the minimal attribute field value of the first class in the range.
5. In the Max box, type the maximal attribute field value of the last class in the range.
6. Click Apply.
Note: If you want to change the color assigned to a specific class break, click the color you want to
change and select a different color from the Color dialog box.
Applying the Color Gradient Mode
The Gradient Mode assigns automatically a different color from a predefined color spectrum to each
unique value of the attribute field or to each range of numeric values.
The colors are assigned according to their location in the color spectrum. Adjacent values or ranges of
values in the field attribute database column are assigned to adjacent colors in the color spectrum.
The gradient mode is applicable in two ways:
Value Activity
Unique Assigning automatically a different color from a predefined color
spectrum to each unique value of the attribute field. For example,
you can use this mode to have all country boundaries of the same
continent to have the same color. In this case, all unique values of
the 'Continent' field attribute are assigned different adjacent colors
from a predefined color spectrum.
Class Breaks Assigning automatically a different color from a predefined color
spectrum to each range of numeric values.
This option is only relevant for numeric attribute types. For
example, you can use this mode to have all countries within a
certain population range have the same color. The numeric values
of the 'Country Population' field are divided into ranges (class
breaks) where each range is assigned a different adjacent color
from a predefined color spectrum.
248
TerraExplorer User Guide
Field by Attribute Dialog Box – Gradient Unique Value
To apply a unique gradient color to each attribute field value:
1. In the Field by Attribute dialog box, select the Gradient option.
2. Click the Start button, and select from the Color dialog box the first color of the color spectrum range.
3. Click the End button, and select from the Color dialog box the last color of the color spectrum range.
4. From the Class break drop-down list, select Full range.
Note: For textual attribute types, this option is automatically selected.
249
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
5. Click Apply. A unique gradient color is applied in the 3D Window to each unique attribute field value
for a max of 256 values.
Field by Attribute Dialog Box – Gradient Class Break
To apply a unique gradient color to each class break:
1. In the Field by Attribute dialog box, select the Gradient option.
250
TerraExplorer User Guide
2. Click the Start button, and select from the Color Palette dialog box the first color of the color
spectrum range.
3. Click the End button, and select from the Color Palette dialog box the last color of the color spectrum
range.
4. From the Class break drop-down list, select the required division mode of the attribute field values
range:
Linear: The range of the attribute field values is divided equally between the classes.
Logarithmic: The range of the attribute field values is divided in a logarithmic way between the
classes.
5. In the Classes field, enter the number of class breaks.
6. In the Min box, type the minimal attribute field value of the first class in the range.
7. In the Max box, type the maximal attribute field value of the last class in the range.
8. Click Apply.
Note: If you want to change the color assigned to a specific class break, click the color you want to
change and select a different color from the Color dialog box.
Basing Numeric Style Properties on Attribute Fields
To base numeric style properties on attribute fields:
1. In the layer property sheet, click the numeric property box, and then click the Field by Attribute
button .
2. In the Use Attribute drop-down list, select the field attribute on which to base the numeric property.
3. Select one of the following numeric property setting modes:
Expression mode: See “Applying the Numeric Expression Mode” in this chapter for further
information.
User Defined mode: See “Applying the Numeric User Defined Mode” in this chapter for further
information.
Use Range mode: See “Applying the Numeric Use Range Mode” in this chapter for further
information.
Applying the Numeric Expression Mode
The Expression mode sets the numeric property to the numeric value contained in the selected field
attribute. Using this option, for example, you can represent the population size of all countries by the
height of their annotation cylinder or box. The numeric property, in this case is the cylinder height, which
is determined by the numeric value of the Country Population attribute field.
You can also set the numeric property to an expression based on a field att ribute numeric value.
251
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Field by Attribute Dialog Box – Expression Mode
To apply the numeric Expression mode:
1. In the Field by Attribute dialog box, select the Expression option.
2. In the Expression field, build an expression that contains the attribute as a variable.
Attribute Value: Attribute name in brackets e.g., [ATTRIB]
Textual expression: Attrib name in brackets with other text, e.g., Text Before [ATTRIB] Text
After.
252
TerraExplorer User Guide
VBScript expression: Bounded by <> e.g., <[ATTRIB]*5 + 3>.
3. Click Apply.
Applying the Numeric User Defined Mode
The User Defined mode enables you to assign a numeric value to a specific value of an attribute field.
In this mode, for example, you can set the cylinder height of all countries with a population larger the
2,000,000 people to a specific numeric value, and then set the cylinder height for all other countries to
zero. First, however, you have to select the 'Country Population' field attribute in the Use Attribute drop-
down list.
253
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Field by Attribute Dialog Box – User Defined
To apply the User Defined mode:
1. In the Field by Attribute dialog box, select the User Defined option.
2. In the Value from [Attribute] section, in the first empty row of the left hand side column, click
and select a value from the Choose Attribute Value dialog box.
3. If the attribute type is numeric, you can use the >< =><= operators.
4. Click the right column in the same row, and type the value of the numeric property.
254
TerraExplorer User Guide
5. Repeat steps 2-4 above to assign numeric values to additional field attribute values.
6. Click Apply.
Applying the Numeric Use Range Mode
The Use Range mode is applicable in two ways:
Value Application
Unique Values A different numeric property value is automatically assigned to
each attribute field value. For example, you can set different
cylinder heights for each value of the Country Population attribute
field.
Class Breaks Divides the range of attribute field values to a number of classes,
with a different numeric property value assigned to each class. For
example, you can set a certain cylinder height to all countries in the
1,000,000 to 2,000,000 population range and a different cylinder
height to all countries in the 2,000,001 to 3,000,000 population
range.
255
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Field by Attribute Dialog Box – Numeric Use Range Mode Unique Value
To apply the unique numeric values option:
1. In the Field by Attribute dialog box, select the Use Range option.
2. In the Start field, type the minimal numeric property value to be assigned to a field attribute.
3. In the End field, type the maximal numeric property value to be assigned to a field attribute.
4. From the Class break drop-down list, select Full range.
5. Click Apply. A unique numeric value is applied in the 3D Window to each unique attribute field value.
256
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: These values are not listed in the dialog box. If you want to change the numeric value
assigned to a specific attribute field value, in the Unique Value from [Attribute] section, in
the left column, click , enter that attribute value and enter the required numeric value.
Field by Attribute Dialog Box – Use Range Mode with Class Breaks
To apply the Class Break option:
1. In the Field by Attribute dialog box, select the Use Range option.
257
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
2. In the Start field, type the minimal numeric property value to be assigned to a field attribute.
3. In the End field, type the maximal numeric property value to be assigned to a field attribute.
4. In the Min box, type the minimal attribute field value of the first class in the range.
5. In the Max box, type the maximal attribute field value of the last class in the range.
6. From the Class break drop-down list, select the required division mode of the attribute field values
range:
Linear: The range of the attribute field values is divided equally between the classes.
Logarithmic: The range of the attribute field values is divided in a logarithmic way between the
classes.
7. In the Classes field, enter the number of class breaks.
8. Click Apply.
Note: You can change a specific numeric property value assigned to a specific attribute field value.
Click the value you want to change, and substitute it with another value.
Basing Text Content on Attribute Fields
To base text label content on attribute fields:
1. In the layer property sheet, click on the Text property box, and then click the Field by Attribute
button
2. In the Use Attribute drop-down, select the field attribute on which to base the text label content.
3. Select one of the following text label content setting modes:
Expression mode: See “Applying the Text Expression Mode” in this chapter for further
information.
User Defined mode: See “Applying the Text User Defined Mode” in this chapter for further
information.
Applying the Text Expression Mode
The Expression mode sets the text label content to the values of the attribute field you selected in the
Use Attribute drop-down list. Use this mode only when the attribute field contains text values.
You can also set the text property to an expression based on a field attribute textual value.
To set the text property to an expression based on a field attribute textual value:
Build an expression that contains the text field attribute as a variable.
Using this option, for example, you can append the text values of the attribute field by a fixed text. For
example, you can add an "St." to each street name.
258
TerraExplorer User Guide
Field by Attribute Dialog Box – Text Expression Mode
To apply the Expression mode:
1. In the Field by Attribute dialog box, select the Expression option.
2. In the Expression field, build an expression that contains the attribute as a variable.
Attribute Value: Attribute name in brackets, e.g., [ATTRIB]
Textual expression: Attrib name in brackets with other text, e.g., Text Before [ATTRIB] Text
After
VBScript expression: Bounded by <>, e.g., <LCase(“[ATTRIB]”) & “Text”>.
3. Click Apply.
Applying the Text User Defined Mode
The User Defined mode enables you to substitute specific text with a specific attribute field text value.
In this option, you can substitute text derived from a specific field attribute value with your typed text
content.
259
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Field by Attribute Dialog Box – Text User Defined Mode
To apply the User Defined mode:
1. In the Field by Attribute dialog box, select the User Defined option.
2. In the Value from [Attribute] section, in the first empty row of the left hand side column, click
and select a value from the Choose Attribute Value dialog box.
3. Click the Text column in the same row, and type the text you want displayed instead of the field
attribute text.
4. Repeat steps 2-3 above to substitute other field attribute values.
5. Click Apply.
Basing Drop-Down List Properties on Attribute Fields
Some properties are determined by a selection from a drop-down list. For example, Font Size is a
property that accepts only predefined set of values, such as 8, 12 and 14 points. Another example is the
Bold style property that accepts only Yes or No values.
To base such properties on attribute fields, follow the steps below.
260
TerraExplorer User Guide
Field by Attribute Dialog Box
To base properties with fixed values on attribute fields:
1. In the layer property sheet, click on the fixed values property box, and then click on the Field by
Attribute button .
2. In the Use Attribute drop-down list, select the field attribute on which to base the property.
3. In the Value from [Attribute] section, in the first empty row of the left hand side column, click
and select a value from the Choose Attribute Value dialog box.
4. Click the right column in the same row, and select the fixed value from the drop-down list.
5. Repeat steps 3-5 above to assign another field attribute value with a property value.
6. Click Apply.
Working with Features
To work with features, you select the required feature/features by:
Selecting Features from the 3D Window
Spatial Queries
Searching and Performing Operations by Attribute (Attribute Table Tool)
You can then edit feature attributes or perform feature layer operations.
Selecting Features from the 3D Window
To select a feature:
1. On the Feature Layer tab, in the Selection group, click Select Feature.
2. In the 3D Window, select the required feature. The feature’s property sheet opens.
261
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: If you want to select multiple features, press and hold the CTRL key, while you select each
of the required features.
Note: If you want to deselect an item, place the cursor over or click a previously selected item
while the CTRL key is still pressed. The item becomes deselected in the same manner as
it was selected.
Spatial Queries
You can select features based on their spatial relationship with a polygon, line or point that you draw, or
with an existing object. You choose whether to include only features that entirely overlap with your
selected or drawn geometry, or whether to include also those that partially intersect. You also can define
a buffer zone to include features within a certain radius of the selection. So if, for example, a chemical
leak occurred in a particular location, and the wind is spreading the chemical odor across a 150 km
radius, you can perform a spatial query to determine which surrounding towns need to be evacuated by
drawing a polygon around the contaminated area, and then setting a buffer of 150 km. Alternatively, if, for
example, you want to find all schools that intersect with a specific road, you can select the road as the
object selection, and perform a spatial query based on it, without needing to draw a selection area.
To perform a spatial query :
1. On the Feature Layer tab, in the Selection group, click Spatial Query and then select one of the
following from the drop-down list:
Area– Select all features that are spatially related to the polygon that will be drawn.
Line - Select all features that are spatially related to the line that will be drawn.
Point– Select all features that are spatially related to the point that will be drawn.
Object selection – Select all features that are spatially related to the object that will be selected.
From clipboard - Select all features that are spatially related to the objects in the clipboard.
Note: This option allows you to perform a spatial query using another feature or object, thus
eliminating the need to manually draw the selection area.
Note: The selection of any objects that are defined around a point, (e.g., all 2D Shapes, but not
Polyline or Polygon) selects an individual point and not the entire object.
Note: The precise spatial relationship is defined in the next step.
2. On the Feature Layer tab, in the Selection group, define the spatial relationship to the drawn
geometry:
Parameter Description
Buffer If you want to include features within a certain radius outside the
selection, select the required distance.
Units Select the desired units of measurement: meters, feet, kilometers,
or miles.
Intersect/Completely Within Select Intersect if you want to select all features whose
geometry intersect at any point with the selection geometry.
Select Completely Within if you want to select only features
whose entire geometry fall within or overlap the selection
geometry.
3. In the 3D Window, do one of the following depending on the type of spatial query:
262
TerraExplorer User Guide
Area selection – Place the polygon points in the 3D Window by clicking in the desired locations.
You must place at least three points. Finish the polygon creation by right -clicking.
Line selection - Place the line points in the 3D Window by clicking in the desired locations. You
must place at least two points. Finish the line insertion by right -clicking.
Point selection – Place a single point in the 3D Window by clicking in the desired location.
Feature selection – Select any object by clicking it.
The selection area (including the buffer if there is one) is framed with a red border. All layer features
within the selection area are marked with yellow selection frames.
Note: If you want to turn off the Select Area mode, on the Feature Layer tab, in the Selection group,
toggle off the Spatial Query command.
Searching and Performing Operations by Attribute (Attribute Table Tool)
Attribute Table
The Attribute Table enables you to search the layer attribute database files and display the results in the
3D Window. You can use this table to fine-tune the information that is displayed on the terrain or to create
a new project layer or file based on the filtered layer. For example, you can display all towns in Western
Europe, which have a population of 20,000.
Using the Attribute Table, you can easily edit the attribute values of multiple features without opening
separate property sheets for each feature.
263
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Search expressions are comprised of one or more conditions. A condition consists of an attribute, an
operator and an attribute value.
There are three types of attributes:
String
Integer
Double
Each attribute type has its corresponding operators.
A search expression can consist of more than one condition. In this case, you need to insert a connector
between the conditions to specify their relations. In addition to AND, you can use the OR, NOT and []
connectors to define the relations between conditions.
To search and perform operations by attribute:
1. In the Project Tree, select the required layer.
2. On the Feature Layer tab, in the Attributes group, click Attribute Table.
3. If you want to search for a previously-searched-for search expression, select one from the Search
String drop-down list, and skip to step 6.
4. In the Query builder section, enter an attribute, condition, and value and click Insert String . The
search expression is displayed in the Search String field.
Note: All attribute values are listed in the value drop-down list.
Note: If you want to clear the Search String field, click Clear.
5. If you want to include additional strings in your search expression, click one of the connector buttons:
and repeat step 4 for the next condition.
6. Click Search. Your search results are displayed in the search results list at the bottom of the page.
7. For each attribute value that you want to modify, double-click and type the required value.
8. Do any of the following:
To select a feature: in the Feature ID column, select the required Feature ID. Use CTRL-click or
SHIFT-click to multi-select. This feature will remain selected even when the Attribute Table is
closed.
To fly to a feature, right-click the feature’s row in the attribute table, and select Fly to selected
item.
To delete a feature, right-click the feature’s row in the attribute table, and select Remove items
from layer.
To create a new layer composed only of the features which matched the search criteria: click the
Operation button and select Add as New Layer Entry. The new layer is added to the Project
Tree
To modify attribute properties: double-click the attribute value and modify as required. In the 3D
Window, the plane flies from the current location directly to the selected feature.
To set the visibility of features based on their attribute values using the search expression
entered in steps 3-5: click the Operation button and select Set Visibility by Attribute. The
features matching the search criteria and their annotations are displayed on the terrain, and the
264
TerraExplorer User Guide
Visibility property is saved in the project. If you want to redisplay all features, click the Operation
button and select Clear Visibility by Attribute.
Note: All visibility by attribute settings are saved to Visibility property in the layer’s property
sheet under both the Annotation and Feature tabs. You can also set visibility by attribute
directly from the layer’s property sheet. See the Visibility property in “Polyline Property
Sheet Parameters” and “Polygon Property Sheet Parameters” in the “Objects and Labels”
chapter.
To save the filtered layer to a file: do the following:
i. Click the Operation button and select Save As.
ii. In the Save As dialog box that is displayed, select the file type (.sqlite, .gdb, .gpkg, .shp, or
.pdf).
iii. Browse to the required file directory, and type a file name.
iv. If you are saving the layer as an .sqlite, .gdb, .gpkg, or .pdf file, type a Layer name.
v. Click Save.
Editing Features
You can edit feature attributes or position on the terrain.
Editing an Individual Feature in the 3D Window
To edit a feature:
1. Select the feature. See “Selecting Features from the 3D Window” in this chapter for information.
2. In the feature’s property sheet, set its feature attributes.
Note: Features have field attributes, only if the feature layers are loaded with attribute fields, such
as "Country Population". If the layer does not contain attribute fields, or in the loading
phase, you did not select any attribute field to load, no field attributes are listed in the
property sheet.
3. Edit the polyline, polygon or point object. See “Editing Objects in the 3D Window” in the “Working with
Objects” chapter.
Editing Multiple Features' Attributes
To edit selected features’ attributes:
1. Select the required features either by selecting them in the 3D Window or by spatial query. See
“Selecting Features from the 3D Window” and “Spatial Queries” in this chapter for information.
2. On the Feature Layer tab, in the Edit group, click Editing and select Attributes. The Attribute Table
for the selected layer opens with the selected features and their attributes displayed in the Search
Results section.
Note: You can also click Attribute Table on the Feature Layer tab.
3. For each attribute value that you want to modify, double-click and type the required value.
Feature Layer Operations
The following feature layer operations are available:
Exporting Selected Features to a New File
Adding a Feature to a Layer
265
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Deleting Selected Features
Merging Features
Clipping Features
Intersecting Features
Exploding Features
Moving Features from the 3D Window
Exporting Selected Features to a New File
To export selected features to a new layer:
1. Select the required features either by selecting them in the 3D Window or by spatial query. See
“Selecting Features from the 3D Window” and “Spatial Queries” in this chapter for information.
2. On the Feature Layer tab, in the Load and Save group, click the arrow next to Save Layer and
select Save Selected Features As. The Save As dialog box is displayed.
3. Type a File name.
4. Select a file type (.sqlite, .gdb, .gpkg, .shp, or .pdf).
5. If you are saving the layer as an .sqlite, .gdb, .gpkg, or .pdf file, type a Layer name.
6. Browse to the required Save location and click Save.
Adding a Feature to a Layer
To add a feature to a layer:
1. Select the layer.
2. On the Feature Layer tab, in the Edit group, click Add [Polyline, Point, or Polygon]. The [Polyline,
Point or Text Label] property sheet opens. The geographic features that can be added depend on the
type of feature layer.
3. Set the parameters of the geographic feature [polyline, point, or polygon].
4. In the 3D Window, place the object’s points by clicking in the desired location. You must place at
least two points for a polyline and three points for a polygon.
5. Finish the object insertion by right-clicking.
6. Continue to edit the object’s parameters, or close the property sheet to finish the operation.
Deleting Selected Features
To delete selected features:
1. Select the required features either by selecting them in the 3D Window, by spatial query, or by using
the Attribute table. See “Selecting Features from the 3D Window”, “Spatial Queries”, and “Using the
Attribute Table Tool” in this chapter for information.
2. On the Feature Layer tab, in the Edit group, click Editing and select Delete.
Merging Features
The Merge command combines features lying on the same plane from a single polyline or polygon layer
into one feature. When merging overlapping polygons, a single part feature is created that is the union of
the merged features. When non-overlapping polygons or polylines are merged, a multipart feature is
created with one set of attributes.
266
TerraExplorer User Guide
To merge selected features:
1. Select the required features either by selecting them in the 3D Window or by spatial query. See
“Selecting Features from the 3D Window” and “Spatial Queries” in this chapter for information.
Note: Only polylines and polygons can be merged.
2. On the Feature Layer tab, in the Edit group, click Editing and select Merge.
3. In the 3D Window, select the feature whose attributes should be used for the merged object by
clicking it.
Clipping Features
The Clip command creates a new feature by clipping away from a specified polygon or polygons the area
that overlaps with the clip polygon. The polygons must all be from a single layer and lie on the same
plane.
To clip a polygon:
1. Select the required polygons either by selecting them in the 3D Window or by spatial query. See
“Selecting Features from the 3D Window” and “Spatial Queries” in this chapter for information.
2. On the Feature Layer tab, in the Edit group, click Editing and select Clip.
3. In the 3D Window, select the polygon to clip from the other polygons by clicking it.
Intersecting Features
The Intersect command creates a new feature from the common areas of any two polygons. You choose
which feature's attributes will be preserved during the operation. The polygons must all be from a single
layer and lie on the same plane.
To create a polygon from the intersection of other polygons:
1. Select the required polygons either by selecting them in the 3D Window or by spatial query. See
“Selecting Features from the 3D Window” and “Spatial Queries” in this chapter for information.
2. On the Feature Layer tab, in the Edit group, click Editing and select Intersect.
3. In the 3D Window, select the polygon that determines the attributes by clicking it.
Exploding Features
A selected multi-part feature can be separated into its individual, component features using the Explode
command.
To explode a multi-part feature:
1. Select the required multi-part feature. See “Selecting Features from the 3D Window” in this chapter
for information.
2. If you want to separate all the features, on the Feature Layer tab, in the Edit group, click Editing and
select Explode All.
3. If you want to separate out only specific features, do the following:
a. On the Feature Layer tab, in the Edit group, click Editing and select Explode.
b. In the 3D Window, select a feature from within the selected area that you want to separate out.
c. Repeat steps a and b for each object you want to separate.
Moving Features from the 3D Window
A single feature or multiple features can be moved in the 3D Window.
267
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
To move a feature(s):
1. Select the required features either by selecting them in the 3D Window or by spatial query. See
“Selecting Features from the 3D Window” and “Spatial Queries” in this chapter for information.
2. If you selected a single feature, on the top bar of the object’s property sheet, click the XY Plane icon
.
3. If you selected multiple features, right-click and select Move from the shortcut menu. The multi-edit
property sheet opens.
4. In the 3D Window, place the cursor over the feature or the selection frame. The cursor changes to
Move mode .
5. Click the feature(s), and drag it to the required location in the XY Plane. Release the left mouse
button to set the feature(s) at the current location.
Note: You can also move the feature(s) by modifying the coordinate information in the property
sheet.
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Objects
You can copy or cut one or more objects in the 3D Window and paste them in another location. All
cut/copied objects are placed in a buffer for future pasting, until new objects are copied/cut. Objects
pasted from the Feature Layer Clipboard are pasted as new features in the selected layer. If you want to
generate new objects, rather than features, you can instead paste the objects from the Home tab
Clipboard.
Using advanced clipboard mechanisms, you can generate any 2D or 3D object based on the geometry of
the objects in the clipboard (e.g., generate buildings according to properties of selected polygons). These
objects can be saved either as a TerraExplorer group of objects or as a new feature layer (shapefile).
Feature Layer Clipboard Group
Copying and Pasting Features
To copy and paste features:
1. Select the required feature/s either by selecting them in the 3D Window or by spatial query. A yellow
frame surrounds each object. See “Selecting Features from the 3D Window” and “Spatial Queries” in
this chapter for information.
2. On the Feature Layer tab, in the Clipboard group, click Copy (CTRL+C).
Note: You can also right-click the feature, and select Copy from the shortcut menu.
3. In the 3D Window, place the cursor in the new location.
4. If you want to paste the object, click Paste, and select one of the following:
268
TerraExplorer User Guide
o Paste in Center of Screen - To paste in the center of the screen.
Note: You can also right-click and select Paste from the shortcut menu.
o Paste in Original Place - To paste in the object’s original place.
Note: The copy paste function produces different results when the clipboard is accessed from the Home
tab rather than the Feature Layer tab. See “Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Objects” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information about copying and pasting objects from the
Home tab. Note that copying can be performed from one tab and pasting from the other, but that
certain information will not be retained in the process, e.g., if you copy objects using the Home
tab clipboard and paste them from the Feature Layer tab as features into a layer, only the
geometry of the objects will be applied. Likewise, if you copy features from the Feature Layer tab
and then paste them from the Home tab clipboard, they will be pasted as standard TerraExplorer
objects that are not part of the copied layer and therefore do not include layer and attribute data.
5. If you want to generate a 2D or 3D object based on the geometry of the features in the clipboard, do
the following:
a. Click the bottom half of the Paste button, and then click Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog
box is displayed.
Paste Special Dialog Box
b. Select the Destination Object that you want to generate, and then modify its properties as
required in the Property sheet.
269
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
c. Select whether to paste the object as an object or layer:
Paste as Objects – Create a group that contains an object for each copied feature object.
Paste as Layer – Create a new feature layer that contains a feature for each copied object.
d. Click Paste.
Cutting and Deleting Features
You can cut or delete one or more features.
Note: When you “cut” a feature in the 3D Window, the object is stored in the copy/cut buffer until a new
copy or cut command is performed, so you can still restore it by performing the paste function.
When you “delete” a feature, however, you cannot restore it.
To delete a feature object or objects:
1. Select the required feature/s either by selecting them in the 3D Window or by spatial query. A yellow
frame surrounds each feature object. See “Selecting Features from the 3D Window” and “Spatial
Queries” in this chapter for information.
2. On the Feature Layer tab, in the Clipboard group, click Delete.
OR
On the Feature Layer tab, in the Edit group, click Editing and select Delete.
To cut a feature:
1. Select the required feature/s either by selecting them in the 3D Window or by spatial query. A yellow
frame surrounds each feature object. See “Selecting Features from the 3D Window” and “Spatial
Queries” in this chapter for information.
2. On the Feature Layer tab, in the Clipboard group, click Cut.
Creating New Layers
To create a new layer:
1. On the Layers tab, in the Feature group, click New Layer.
2. Browse to the required save location, and type a File name.
3. If you are saving the layer as an .sqlite, .gdb, or .gpkg file, type a Layer name.
4. In the Save as type field, select a file type (.sqlite, .gdb, .gpkg, or .shp).
5. Click Save. The Create New Feature Layer dialog box opens.
270
TerraExplorer User Guide
Create New Feature Layer Dialog Box
6. Select a Geometry Type: Polygon, Polyline, or Point.
7. For each attribute, enter the following information:
Attribute Name
Attribute Type (text, integer, double)
Character Length
Note: When the “double” Attribute Type is selected, the “Decimal Places” field is displayed
enabling you to set the precision level.
8. Click OK.
Streaming 3D Models Using Feature Layers
The way to load many 3D models, e.g. a city, is by streaming a point feature layer with a model file
attribute field, where each point represents a model’s pivot and the feature attribute designates which
model to place at each point.
You can optimize model streaming by converting the models point feature layer to a unified 3D Mesh
Layer (3DML). See “Converting Models to 3DML” in the “3D Mesh Layers” chapter for more information.
If your model data is subject to frequent updates or modifications , you can instead optimize by converting
the models to XPL format using the Convert Models to XPL tool. See “Converting Models to XPL” in this
chapter.
To stream a 3D model using a point feature layer:
1. Create a point feature layer where each point represents a model’s pivot. The layer should contain
the model’s name as an attribute.
2. Load the point layer as a streaming layer. See “Loading Feature Layers” in this chapter.
3. In the property sheet panel, click the Point tab. Then from the Symbol Type drop-down list, select
3D Model.
271
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
4. In the Model section of the property sheet, in the File Name field, use the Field by Attribute dialog
to set the model’s path followed by the model name from the attribute value, e.g.,
c:\mymodels\[MODEL_NAME].
5. If using XPL2 models, set an appropriate LOD size. If possible, you should set the LOD for each
model separately, using Field by Attribute.
Loading Models Using a Feature Layer
Converting Models to XPL
The Convert Models to XPL tool converts 3D model files to the Skyline proprietary XPL2 file format,
creating a set of XPL files where each file contains data for one Level of Detail (LOD). When displaying
an XPL model, TerraExplorer dynamically selects and displays the best LOD file based on the viewer
position in relation to the object. When downloaded from a web server, each file is also downloaded
independently. This results in an improvement in overall model display performance as well as download
rate.
The Convert Models to XPL tool offers the option to accelerate loading speed and consume less memory
by using multi-resolution geometries in addition to multi-resolution textures. Performance can be further
enhanced by combining models into streaming optimized groups and/or by using unified textures to
dramatically reduce computer and graphic resource usage.
XPL files are optimized for TEP and Internet environments.
272
TerraExplorer User Guide
Geometry Level 1 Geometry Level 2 Geometry Level 3
The Convert Models to XPL tool supports the following formats:
COLLADA (DAE)
Direct X (X) and its compressed version (XPC)
XPL – old format
3DS - 3D studio format for exchanging 3D data models
OpenFlight (FLT) – Multigen format for exchanging 3D data models and its compressed version
(FPC)
273
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Models to XPL Tool
To use the Models to XPL tool:
1. On the Layers tab, in the 3D Mesh group, click Models to XPL. The Convert Models to XPL dialog
box is displayed.
2. If you want to process a single file, browse to the required Source directory and select the required
file.
3. If you want to process an entire source directory, select the Process entire directory check box.
Then browse to the required Source directory and click OK.
274
TerraExplorer User Guide
Select the Search in subfolders, if you also want to search in the directory’s subfolders.
4. Browse to the required Output directory. All created XPL2 files will be saved to this directory.
5. Select or clear the check boxes of the following options:
Option Description
Skip bad textures If selected, Convert Models to XPL ignores any texture files
that cannot be converted (e.g., unsupported formats). If this
check box is cleared, the Convert Models to XPL process will
abort processing if a bad texture is encountered.
Skip bad models If selected, Convert Models to XPL ignores any models that
cannot be converted (e.g., unsupported formats). If this check
box is cleared, the Convert Models to XPL process aborts
processing if a bad model is encountered.
Compress best level texture Compression reduces storage space and improves
performance.
Center down object pivot If all the models share the same pivot and also need to be
centered down, select the check box and type the real
geographic coordinates of the shared pivot point in the X, Y,
and Altitude offset fields.
Pack textures to a single texture Merge texture information into a single file. The sub-textures
file are rendered by modifying the texture coordinates of the
object's UV map, essentially telling it which part of the image
its texture is in. When textures are packed in a single file,
they are treated as a single unit by the graphics hardware,
resulting in faster model rendering.
Create LOD for geometry When this option is selected, multi-resolution geometries will
also be created (in addition to multi-resolution textures).
Using multi-resolution geometries will generally accelerate
loading speed and consume less memory.
6. A single XPL file can be created for the lower resolution levels of multiple models that are in close
proximity. This is particularly useful for small models. If you want to Group close models of XPL
model files, select the check box, and enter the following information:
Field Description
Input shapefile Browse to the file that contains the models’ positioning
information.
File name attribute Select the shapefile attribute that contains the model file
name for each feature. (The symbol for each shapefile point
feature is based on this attribute, so that each model is
positioned in the correct position on the terrain.)
Output shapefile Type the path of a shapefile that will store the models’
modified referencing and grouping information.
Use UTF-8 for shape attributes Use UTF-8 for international language support.
UTF-8 is a variable-length character encoding for Unicode
that is able to represent any universal character in the
Unicode standard.
Create bounding boxes for If selected, Convert Models to XPL creates a simple bounding
models box element around each model object. The color of the
275
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
bounding box is based on the dominant color among the
model’s textures. The bounding boxes are included in the
modified shapefile attribute and can display a general outline
of the model while the model is being rendered in the 3D
Window.
Maximum group size TerraExplorer will group together XPL files of models that are
located in the same area without exceeding the designated
grouped model size. When the maximum group size is
reached, a new group is created from remaining elements in
the same area.
7. Click Go.
Saving Feature Layers
Changes made to groups and layers can be saved in the following file formats:
Esri shapefile
TerraExplorer project file (*.fly)
Note: When saving to a FLY, the files used by the FLY are not collected (as they are when
publishing a TerraExplorer project), and the paths remain the same as the original FLY.
Use this option if you intend to use the exported FLY in the same location as the current
FLY file you are using.
KML/KMZ file
Modifications to a layer can be made to the original source file or to a new file.
Saving Layer Changes to the Original Data Source
To save layer changes to the original source file:
Note: These commands are only available for shapefiles, GeoDatabase files, KML/KMZ files that were
created by TerraExplorer (by exporting a layer or project to KML/KMZ), and WFS-T. A WFS
service with transactions (WFS-T) allows WFS clients to apply edits (inserts, deletes and
updates) to the data in the source database through the WFS service. See “Export to KML/KMZ”
in the “Basic Concepts” chapter for more information on exporting to KML/KMZ.
In the Project Tree, right-click the required layer and select the Save Layer from the shortcut menu.
or
On the Feature Layer tab, in the Load and Save group, click Save Layer.
A warning dialog box is displayed cautioning you that you are about to modify the original source file.
Click Yes to continue or No to cancel.
Saving Layer Changes to a New File
You can save a layer to a new local file. This can be particularly useful if a layer is located on a slow
accessed remote server; by saving to a local file, you speed up access.
Note: A layer can be saved to a new file when the Entire Layer was loaded (fully or partially), as well as
when a layer was streamed.
276
TerraExplorer User Guide
You can save to the following file formats:
SQLite (.sqlite)
Geodatabase (.gdb)
GeoPackage (.gpkg)
Shapefile (.shp)
Geospatial PDF (.pdf)
Microsoft Excel (.xlsx)
Note: Only point layers can be saved to Microsoft Excel.
Note: Layers saved as Geospatial PDF or Microsoft Excel files are read-only when loaded back into
TerraExplorer (i.e., their Save command is unavailable).
To save a layer to a new file:
1. Do either of the following:
In the Project Tree, right-click the required layer, point to Export Layer, and select the Save as
option from the shortcut menu.
On the Feature Layer tab, in the Load and Save group, click the arrow next to Save Layer, and
select Save as.
The Save As dialog box is displayed.
2. Browse to the required Save location and in the File name field, enter the file name.
3. From the Save as type drop-down list, select a file type (.sqlite, .gdb, .gpkg, .shp, .pdf, or .xlsx).
4. If you are saving the layer as an .sqlite, .gdb, .gpkg, or .pdf file, type a Layer name.
5. Click Save.
Converting Layers to Groups
Layers can only be converted to a group if the entire layer was loaded from the server. See “Setting
General Layer Settings” in the “Feature Layers” chapter for information.
To convert a native feature layer to a group:
In the Project Tree, right-click the required layer, point to Export Layer, and select Convert to
Group from the shortcut menu.
Uploading Feature Layers to SkylineGlobe Server
You can upload your layers to SkylineGlobe Server.
To upload a layer:
In the Project Tree, right-click the required layer, and select Upload to SkylineGlobe from the
shortcut menu. See “Uploading Layers to SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Working with SkylineGlobe
Server” chapter for information.
277
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 14 COMPLEX LAYERS
About Complex Layers
In addition to feature layer data sources which are composed entirely of homogeneous or heterogeneous
geometries (points, lines, and polygons ) representing geographic features, TerraExplorer Pro also
supports the loading of several types of complex feature layers, which combine different data types in one
layer. These include:
FLY –Skyline's proprietary compressed binary file that includes pointers to feature and raster data,
objects, and models.
OGC KML/KMZ - OGC standard, publicly defined layer, which can be composed of feature and raster
elements. For more information, see http://www.opengeospatial.org/standards/kml)
Loading FLY and KML/KMZ Files
When loading an OGC KML/KMZ file, TerraExplorer preserves KML object properties as accurately as
possible by translating KML objects to their equivalent TerraExplorer geometries. If there is no
TerraExplorer element that precisely represents a KML object, TerraExplorer uses the closest match. See
“Export to KML/KMZ” in the “Basic Concepts” chapter for a list of the TerraExplorer – KML translations.
If a KML with a tour element is loaded into a TerraExplorer project will open as a TerraExplorer
presentation that can be edited (modify the route, add captions and operations, etc.) and played just like
any natively-created one. See “Loading a KML with a Tour Element” in the “Presentations” chapter for
more information and a list of the supported KML Tour tags.
To load FLY or KML/KMZ layers from file:
On the Layers tab, in the Complex Layer group, click the required layer type. Then in the Browse
for feature layer dialog box that is displayed, browse to the required file and click Open.
Note: When a KML with a tour element is loaded into a TerraExplorer project , it opens as a
TerraExplorer presentation that can be edited and played just like any natively -created
one. See “Loading a KML with a Tour Element” in the “Presentations” chapter for
information.
Loading FLY and KML Layers from SkylineGlobe Server
SkylineGlobe Server is a private cloud solution that supports the client -server data delivery requirements
of Skyline's 3D technology. TerraExplorer can read streamed point cloud, KML, feature, elevation,
imagery, 3DML, raster complex, TerraBuilder projects, and TerraExplorer projects. For more information
on loading layers from SGS, see “Loading SkylineGlobe Layers” in the “Working with SkylineGlobe
Server” chapter.
To load a FLY or KML layer from a SkylineGlobe Server:
1. On the Home tab, in the Add group, click the arrow next to 3D Layer, and select SkylineGlobe
Server. The SkylineGlobe Layers dialog box is displayed.
2. If you aren’t already logged in to the required SkylineGlobe Server, log in to the server. See “Logging
In to a SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Working with SkylineGlobe Server” chapter for information.
3. Search for the required layer. See “Searching for SkylineGlobe Layers” in the “Working with
SkylineGlobe Server” chapter.
4. Select the layer you want to load, and click Load Layer.
278
TerraExplorer User Guide
5. After the layer has been placed on the terrain, you can change its properties using its property sheet.
See “Setting and Editing Complex Layer Properties” in this chapter for further information.
Setting and Editing Complex Layer Properties
Basic layer and feature properties can be modified from the layer’s property sheet.
See “Multi-Editing” in the “Working with Objects” chapter and “Setting Group Properties” in the “Using the
Project Tree” chapter for information on the layer’s property sheet.
If a KML/KMZ file with refresh tags is added, the layer’s property sheet includes a special Network Link
tab instead of the Group tab that includes two additional properties: Auto Refresh Interval and After Stop
Interval.
Note: KML’s with network links can only be saved to a new file. They cannot be saved to the original
source file or uploaded to SkylineGlobe Server. See “Saving FLY and KML/KMZ Layers” in the
“Complex Layers” chapter for more information.
Network Link Tab
The Network Link tab includes the following groups and fields:
Field Activity
General
Name Type the description or name of the layer.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the layer from the
Project Tree.
Status
Location
Defines the initial location of the camera when a layer is selected from the Project Tree.
Altitude Method Sets the altitude method to be used for the specified location:
Select Relative to Terrain to place the location point at a
specified altitude above the ground.
Select Absolute to place the location point at a specified
altitude above the terrain database vertical datum base
ellipsoid.
Altitude Enter the altitude above the ground for the specified location.
X Enter the X-coordinate of the location of interest.
Y Enter the Y-coordinate of the location of interest.
MGRS The coordinates of the location’s pivot point converted to Military
Grid Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only
available if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options
dialog box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options”
chapter for more information.
Direction Enter the horizontal angle of the camera when viewing the
location.
Tilt Enter the vertical angle of the camera when viewing the location.
Viewing Distance Enter the distance between the camera and the specified location.
279
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
This parameter also affects the radius of the flight patterns.
Set Viewpoint Click Capture to capture the current camera position and set as
the camera parameters for this location.
Jump To Viewpoint Click Jump to make the 3D Window reflect the changes made to
the location’s fields.
Timespan
Start Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the layer should first
become visible.
End Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the layer should stop
being visible.
Refresh Conditions
Auto Refresh Interval The length of the interval in seconds between auto-refreshing of
the layer. This value is based on the layer’s refreshInterval tag.
After Stop Interval The length of the interval in seconds after stopping the flight until
the layer is refreshed. This value is based on the layer’s
viewRefreshTime tag.
Saving FLY and KML/KMZ Layers
FLY files are loaded as groups and like all other groups can be saved to a shapefile, FLY, or KML/KMZ
file. See “Converting Groups to Layers” in the “Using the Project Tree” chapter.
KML/KMZ files can be saved to these same formats, i.e., shapefile, FLY, or KML/KMZ or converted to a
group.
To save layer changes to the original source file:
Note: Only KML/KMZ files that were created by TerraExplorer (by exporting a layer or project to
KML/KMZ) can be saved to the original file.
In the Project Tree, right-click the required layer and select the Save Layer from the shortcut menu.
To save a KML/KMZ layer to a new file:
1. In the Project Tree, right-click the required group or layer, point to Export Layer and select Save as
from the shortcut menu. The Save As dialog box is displayed.
2. Browse to the required Save location and in the File name field, enter the file name.
3. From the Save as type drop-down list, select the file type.
4. Click Save.
5. If saving to a shapefile, the Export dialog box is displayed. Enter the required parameters and click
Export. See “Export to Shapefile Dialog Box” in the “Feature Layers” chapter for information.
To convert a KML/KMZ layer to a group:
1. In the Project Tree, right-click the required group or layer, point to Export Layer and select Convert
to Group from the shortcut menu. A dialog box is displayed warning that all layer settings will be lost
if the layer is converted to a group.
2. Click Yes to convert the layer to a group, or No to cancel.
280
TerraExplorer User Guide
Uploading KML Layers to SkylineGlobe Server
You can upload KML layers to SkylineGlobe Server.
Note: Only KML/KMZ files that don’t have network links can be can be uploaded to SGS.
To upload a layer:
In the Project Tree, right-click the required layer, and select Upload to SkylineGlobe from the
shortcut menu. See “Uploading Layers to SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Working with SkylineGlobe
Server” chapter for information.
281
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 15 POINT CLOUD LAYERS
Loading a Point Cloud Model
The point cloud model allows you to add a pre-processed point cloud model at any point in the 3D terrain.
These models are created from a list of points in a 3D area that are collected by various sources including
3D scanners. The load point cloud feature support Skyline’s proprietary Point Cloud files (CPT).
Converting Point Cloud Data to CPT
The Convert Point Cloud to CPT tool converts point cloud data from various formats to a unified,
visualization and stream-optimized Skyline-proprietary Point Cloud file (CPT) format. Supported input
formats include all of the following:
LAS files containing Lidar point cloud data and their compressed version (LAZ)
PTS files
Point cloud text files (.txt, .xyz)
E57 files
Text point cloud files must be in space delimited format and in the order X Y Z R G B I or X Y Z I, where
X, Y, and Z are coordinate data, R, G, and B are color values between 0 and 255, and I is the intensity
value between 0 and 255.
The following is an example of XYZ RGBI formatted data:
1.0 1.0 1.0 0 0 255 0
2.0 2.0 2.0 0 255 0 100
3.0 3.0 3.0 255 0 0 255
282
TerraExplorer User Guide
Convert Point Cloud to CPT Tool
To use the Convert Point Cloud to CPT tool:
1. On the Layers tab, in the Point Cloud group, click the arrow under Point Cloud and select Convert
Point Cloud. The Convert Point Cloud to CPT dialog box is displayed.
2. To add source files to be converted, click Add Files, and browse to the required source files.
3. To remove a source file from the output, in the Files list, select the source, and click Remove Files.
4. Select Combine all sources into single output file to generate all the source data as one CPT
model.
5. In the property sheet, set the parameters for all of the sources:
Parameter Description
General
Output Folder Set the folder for the generated file.
Note: The output file name will be set to the same as the
input file with a CPT extension. When the option to
Combine all sources to single output file is
selected, the combined file name is the same as the
first input.
283
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Input Coordinates Select the type of coordinate system: Planar, Local Lat-Long
or Global Lat-Long based on the coordinate system of your
data. For Lat-Long data, it is generally preferable to use Local
Lat-Long except when the project covers a large geographic
area (e.g., an entire US state).
Adjust Globe Curvature Select Yes to increase accuracy for Lat-Long CPT that will
only be used with Globe terrain databases.
Clip by Bounding Box (LAS) Select Yes to clip the CPT by the bounding box (BBox)
information included in the LAS file. This property only applies
to LAS files.
Switch X/Y Columns (Text Transpose the X Y columns. This property only applies to text
Files) files.
Note: Text point cloud files need to be in space delimited
format and in the order X Y Z R G B I or X Y Z I.
Coordinate System (for LAS Files)
Description Free text describing the coordinate system.
Coordinate System Click Set to open the Coordinate System dialog box, and set
the required coordinate system. See “Coordinate System
Dialog Box” in the “Basic Concepts” chapter for information.
Compression
Use Compression Select Yes or No.
Maximum Error (Meters) Maximum allowed error.
Import Attribute Fields
Select the check boxes of the attribute fields you want to load with the layer.
6. Click Convert to convert the files to a CPT model. When conversion is complete, you can load the
converted CPT using the CPT from File command. See “Loading a Point Cloud Model from File” in
this chapter for information.
Loading a Point Cloud Model from File
To load a point cloud model from file:
1. On the Layers tab, in the Point Cloud group, click the arrow next to Point Cloud, and select CPT
from file. The Browse for Point Cloud Model dialog box is displayed.
2. Browse to the required .cpt file to load as the point cloud model. The point cloud model is displayed in
the 3D Window and its property sheet is opened.
3. If the point cloud model is geo-referenced it is located accordingly on the terrain. Otherwise, it is
placed at the center of the 3D Window. You can then manually edit its position, or reproject it.
With the cursor in the 3D Window, click the mouse to define the position of the point cloud
model’s center point on the terrain.
Note: The center point of a point cloud model is automatically calculated as the center of the
bounding box holding all the points in the file.
4. Using the property sheet, set the parameters of the point cloud object. See “Setting and Editing Point
Cloud Properties” in this chapter for information.
284
TerraExplorer User Guide
Example of a Point Cloud Model Object
Loading a Point Cloud Model from SkylineGlobe Server
SkylineGlobe Server is a private cloud solution that supports the client -server data delivery requirements
of Skyline's 3D technology. TerraExplorer can read streamed point cloud, KML, feature, elevation,
imagery, 3DML, raster complex, TerraBuilder projects, and TerraExplorer projects. For more information
on loading layers from SGS, see “Loading SkylineGlobe Layers” in the “Working with SkylineGlobe
Server” chapter.
To load a point cloud model from a SkylineGlobe Server:
1. On the Layers tab, in the Point Cloud group, click the arrow next to Point Cloud, and select
SkylineGlobe Server. The SkylineGlobe Layers dialog box is displayed.
2. If you aren’t already logged in to the required SkylineGlobe Server, the Login to SkylineGlobe Server
dialog box is first displayed so you can log in to the server. See “Logging In to a SkylineGlobe Server”
in the “Working with SkylineGlobe Server” chapter for information.
3. Search for the required layer. See “Searching for SkylineGlobe Layers” in the “Working with
SkylineGlobe Server” chapter.
4. Select the layer you want to load, and click Load Layer.
5. After the layer has been placed on the terrain, you can change its properties using its property sheet.
See “Setting and Editing Point Cloud Properties” in this chapter for further information.
Setting and Editing Point Cloud Properties
Point cloud properties can be modified from the layer’s property sheet.
Note: You can apply a point cloud layer’s properties (e.g., point size, point color, intensity blend) to
another point cloud by copying and pasting the layer’s styles. See “Copying and Pasting Layer
Styles” in this chapter for information.
Object Parameter Activity
Appearance
Name Type the description or name of the point cloud model.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the point cloud model
from the Project Tree.
285
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Style
Point Size Size, in pixels, of each of the point cloud’s points. If you want to
base the point size on attribute fields, click the Field by Attribute
button . See “Basing Numeric Style Properties on Attribute
Fields” in the “Feature Layers” chapter for more information.
Point Color Color of the point cloud points. This can be set to any of the
following:
[RGB] – To color each point of the point cloud according to the
CPT’s RGB values.
[Intensity] - To color each point of the point cloud according to
the CPT’s intensity values.
A set color value for all the points. To select a color, click Edit
and select a color.
Attribute field - To base each point of the point cloud’s color on
a specific attribute field’s value, click the Field by Attribute
button . See “Basing Color Properties on Attribute Fields”
in the “Feature Layers” chapter for more information.
Point Visibility Determines if the point cloud’s points are visible. To set the
visibility of points based on their attribute values, click the Field by
Attribute button . In the Field by Attribute dialog that opens,
select the attribute on which to base visibility. Then for each
attribute value, type the value and the corresponding visibility
setting.
Intensity Blend Determines how much the point cloud’s intensity value is factored
in colorizing the point cloud, where 0% colorizes the point cloud
model by point color only, and 100% colorizes by intensity only.
Oversampling The point cloud’s Level of Detail (LOD). When set to Normal,
TerraExplorer determines the optimal quality to performance
balance based on the current view. The “High” and “Best” settings
will load more detailed models but are also more resource-
intensive.
Flatten Underlying Terrain Determines if the terrain under the model is leveled to the model’s
elevation value.
This option is enabled only if the Altitude Method property in the
point cloud property sheet is set to Absolute.
Hide Underlying Terrain Hides the terrain texture under the point cloud model (the terrain
appears as a black image).
Model
File Name Type or browse a path to a .cpt file to load as the point cloud
model.
Position
Altitude Method Sets the altitude method to be used by the point cloud model:
Select Relative to Terrain to place the point cloud model’s
286
TerraExplorer User Guide
pivot point at a specified altitude above the ground.
Select Absolute to place the point cloud model’s pivot point at
a specified altitude above the terrain database vertical datum
base ellipsoid.
Altitude Enter the altitude, as defined in Altitude Method, for the point cloud
model’s pivot point.
X Enter the X-coordinate for the point cloud model’s pivot point.
Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the point cloud model’s pivot point.
MGRS The coordinates of the point cloud model’s center point in Military
Grid Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only
available if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options
dialog box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options”
chapter for more information.
Yaw Determines the direction angle of the point cloud model along the
vertical axis relative to north.
Pitch Determines the tilt angle of the point cloud model along its lateral
axis relative to the horizon.
Roll Determines the roll angle of the point cloud model along its
longitudinal (front-to-back) axis.
Default Location Brings you to the default location of the object.
This option is active only if an object was assigned a default
location during its configuration stage.
Geometry
Scale Determines the dimensions, of the point cloud model.
The actual size of the model in the 3D World is the size of the
model in its internal coordinate system times the Scale value, (i.e.,
if the model has a width of 5 units and the scale is set to 10, the
width of the object in the 3D World is 50 meters.)
Data Slice Click on the Data Slice button to open the Data Slice Control dialog
box.
Timespan
Start Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the point cloud model
should first become visible.
End Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the point cloud model
should stop being visible.
General
Show in Viewer Determines if the point cloud model appears in the Project Tree
when the file is viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic viewer.
Message The message associated with the object. The number displayed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
287
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Tooltip Type a tooltip text to appear when the mouse cursor is placed over
the point cloud model in the 3D Window.
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the point
cloud model.
This distance is used as a stop mark for any “Fly -to” or “View
Object” operation. It is also used when selecting to edit the object
from the Project Tree.
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance for the model based on its size.
Max. Visibility Distance Sets the distance from the camera above which the point cloud
model disappears.
Min. Visibility Distance Sets the minimal distance from the camera below which the point
cloud model disappears.
Ground Object Determines if the object is calculated as part of the terrain’s
elevation.
Copying and Pasting Layer Styles
Point cloud layers are easily styled by copying and pasting styles from one point cloud to another. When
the Copy/Paste layer style functions are performed, all layer properties are copied and pasted except for
Name and the properties listed in the Model and Position sections of the point cloud property sheet.
Note: Layer styles cannot be pasted if the source of the layer being copied was deleted.
To copy and paste a point cloud’s styles:
1. In the Project Tree, right-click the point cloud whose style you want to copy, and select Copy Layer
Style.
2. In the Project Tree, right-click the point cloud to which you want to apply the copied layer style, and
select Paste Layer Style.
Using the Data Slice Control
After creating a point cloud model, you can designate which section(s) of it to include using the Data Slice
Control. This control enables you to define either exclusion or inclusion bounding boxes.
Inclusion box – Only points inside the box are displayed.
Exclusion box - Only points outside the box are displayed.
When the point cloud model is selected for editing, a yellow frame and a red frame surround it. The yellow
frame represents the total area of the point cloud model. The red frame represents the area t hat will be
displayed. When you use the sliders on the Data Slice Control, the red frame is updated to show the
selected area.
288
TerraExplorer User Guide
Point Cloud - Data Slice Control Settings
To define a bounding exclusion or inclusion box:
1. In the point cloud property sheet, in the Data Slice field, click Set. The Point Cloud – Data Slice
Control is displayed.
2. For the X-Direction, Y-Direction, and Altitude controls, adjust the Start and End sliders to
designate the limits of the bounding box. The values displayed are the distance in meters from the
center point of the point cloud model.
3. Enter the rotation of the bounding box on the horizontal plane by adjusting the Rotation slider or
typing the rotation value in the text box. The rotation value is converted to an equivalent value
between -180º and 180º.
4. If you want the bounding box to function as an exclusion box, select the Exclusion Box check box.
5. If you want to create multiple bounding boxes, select Add New Box, and repeat steps 2-4.
Note: You can use multiple Exclusion boxes but only one Inclusion box.
6. If you want to remove a box, select the required box in the Box drop-down list , and
select Remove Box.
7. If you want to remove all boxes, select Remove All Boxes.
8. Click OK.
Uploading Point Cloud Layers to SkylineGlobe Server
You can upload your layers to SkylineGlobe Server.
289
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
To upload a layer:
In the Project Tree, right-click the required layer, and select Upload to SkylineGlobe from the
shortcut menu. See “Uploading Layers to SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Working with SkylineGlobe
Server” chapter for information.
290
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 16 3D MESH LAYERS
Working with 3D Mesh Layers
Mesh layers are multi-resolution, textured mesh models that may include classification layers, as well as
polygons from BIM datasets. They are created through automatic reconstruction methods, manual
modeling, or building information modeling (BIM). Mesh layers can be loaded into TerraExplorer from files
or from SkylineGlobe or 3D Tile servers, and displayed on the terrain, as well as measured and analyzed.
If a mesh layer is classified, you can also access its attribute data and perform feature layer operations on
the layer, including spatial and attribute queries.
The following mesh layers are supported in TerraExplorer. Most mesh layers are converted to Skyline’s
proprietary, stream-optimized 3DML format, upon import.
Mesh models – Automatically generated from standard 2D photographs in PhotoMesh.
Mesh + Classification (Polygon feature layers used to classify areas of the mesh) – Mesh layers are
classified in TerraExplorer using the Classify Mesh Layer tool.
Models (Point feature layers that reference individual models) – Model layers are converted to 3DML
in TerraExplorer using the Models to 3DML tool.
Building Information Modeling (BIM) – BIM layers are converted to 3DML upon import to
TerraExplorer using the Import BIM tool.
DAE – DAE layers are converted to 3DML upon import to TerraExplorer using the Import and
Convert tools.
OSGB – OSGB layers are converted to 3DML upon import to TerraExplorer using the Import and
Convert tools.
3D Tiles (tileset.json) – 3D Tiles layers are converted to 3DML upon import to TerraExplorer using
the Import and Convert tools.
Mesh + Classification + Models – These are merged in the legacy CityBuilder application into a
3DML.
When a mesh layer is loaded into TerraExplorer, the 3D Mesh Layer contextual tab is displayed. From
this tab you can perform both mesh layer operations on the mesh layer itself, as well as feature layer
commands on the mesh layer’s feature layers (e.g., attribute and spatial queries). Most of the mesh layer
operations are available only for mesh layers in 3DML format.
The following mesh layer operations are supported:
Set Display Style - Select a mesh model display style, e.g., texture, wireframe, or x -ray.
Classify - Associate different areas of a 3DML with the respective polygon features from polygon
classification layers, to enable you to access attribute data and perform feature layer operations on
the 3DML, including spatial and attribute queries
Modify - Modify the elevation values in a designated area of a 3DML using a modify mesh layer
object.
Export to Models - Export polygonal areas of a 3DML, e.g., buildings, to individual OBJ models.
Export to Mesh – Export 3DML to 3D Tiles – B3DM (tileset.json) or I3S formats.
291
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Most of the feature layer commands available for standard feature layers are also available for 3DML’s
feature layers, including:
Spatial Queries - Select features based on their spatial relationship with a polygon, line or point that
you draw, or with an existing object.
Search by Attribute - Search the layer attribute database files to easily edit the attribute values of
multiple features and to create a new shapefile based on the filtered data.
See “Working with 3DML’s Feature Layers” in this chapter for more information.
Loading 3D Mesh Layers
TerraExplorer Pro loads a 3D mesh layer as a layer object, which is then displayed in the Project Tree.
After loading the layer from file or server, you can set its appearance and parameters in the layer’s
property sheet.
You can load 3D mesh layers in 3DML or in OGC 3D Tiles formats:
3DML from File
3DML from SkylineGlobe Server
3DML from TerraGate SFS (Legacy support)
OGC 3D Tiles (B3DM) from SGS
You can also import the following formats and convert to 3DML:
Building Information Modeling (BIM)
DAE (LODTreeExport.xml)
OpenScene Graph (OSGB)
3D Tiles (tileset.json)
Loading 3D Mesh Layers from File
You can load 3D mesh layers in 3DML format from a file.
To load a 3DML mesh layer from a file:
1. On the Home tab, in the Add group, click the arrow next to 3D Layer, and select 3D Mesh Layer
from File. The Load 3D Mesh Layer (3DML) dialog box is displayed.
2. Browse to the required file, and click Open.
3. After the layer has been placed on the terrain, you can change its properties using the property sheet.
See “Setting and Editing 3D Mesh Layer Properties” in this chapter for further information.
Loading 3D Mesh Layers from SkylineGlobe Server
SkylineGlobe Server is a private cloud solution that supports the client -server data delivery requirements
of Skyline's 3D technology. TerraExplorer can read streamed point cloud, KML, feature, elevation,
imagery, 3DML, raster complex, TerraBuilder projects, and TerraExplorer projects. For more information
on loading layers from SGS, see “Loading SkylineGlobe Layers” in the “Working with SkylineGlobe
Server” chapter.
292
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: For legacy support, TerraExplorer also offers the option to load 3DML layers from TerraGate
SFS.
To load a 3DML from a SkylineGlobe Server:
1. On the Home tab, in the Add group, click the arrow next to 3D Layer, and select SkylineGlobe
Server. The SkylineGlobe Layers dialog box is displayed.
2. If you aren’t already logged in to the required SkylineGlobe Server, log in to the server. See “Logging
In to a SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Working with SkylineGlobe Server” chapter for information.
3. Search for the required layer. See “Searching for SkylineGlobe Layers” in the “Working with
SkylineGlobe Server” chapter.
4. Select the layer you want to load, and click Load Layer.
5. After the layer has been placed on the terrain, you can change its properties using its property sheet.
See “3D Mesh Layer Parameters” in this chapter for further information.
Loading 3D Mesh Layers from TerraGate SFS
For legacy support, TerraExplorer supports loading of 3D mesh layers in 3DML format from TerraGate
SFS.
To load a 3DML from SFS:
1. On the Layers tab, in the 3D Mesh group, click the arrow next to Load 3D Mesh, and select
TerraGate/SFS v6. The Select 3D Mesh Layer Provider dialog box is displayed.
Select 3D Mesh Layer Provider Dialog Box
2. Select a Previous connection or type the server’s URL, e.g.,
http://www.skylineglobe.com/sfs/streamer.ashx.
3. Click Connect. The 3D Mesh Layer List is displayed.
4. Select the layer you want to load, and click Load.
5. After the layer has been placed on the terrain, you can change its properties using its property sheet.
See “Setting and Editing 3D Mesh Layer Properties” in this chapter for further information.
Loading OGC 3D Tiles (B3DM) from a Server
TerraExplorer can also load mesh layers in OGC 3D Tiles (B3DM) format from a server.
293
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
To load 3D mesh layers in OGC 3D Tiles format:
1. On the Home tab, in the Add group, click the arrow next to 3D Layer, and select 3D Tile from URL.
The Load 3D Tile – B3DM dialog box is displayed.
Load 3D Tile – B3DM Dialog Box
2. Select a Previous connection or type the URL to the 3D Tile’s root file, e.g.,
3. Click Load. The 3D Tile is loaded into the project and listed in the Project Tree, e.g.,
http://www.skylineglobe.com/SG/b3dm/Auburn_4TE DF/tileset.json.
Importing and Converting 3D Mesh Layers
The following formats can be imported and converted to 3DML:
BIM
DAE
OpenScene Graph (OSGB)
Cesium 3D Tiles
Importing and Converting BIM Layers
Building Information Modeling (BIM) layers store the geographic location and attribute data of models.
When these files are imported into TerraExplorer, they are automatically converted to high-resolution,
textured, 3DML models that have been compressed and stream-optimized to accelerate loading speed
and efficiently handle memory. Currently, TerraExplorer supports IFC 2X3 and Autodesk Revit FBX
versions 7.5, 7.4, 7.3, 7.2, 7.1, 7.0, 6.1, and 6.0 BIM files. IFC (Industry Foundation Classes) is an
openly documented standard for the exchange of data It is a platform neutral, open file format
specification that is not controlled by a single vendor or group of vendors . FBX is an Autodesk proprietary
format designed for interoperability between 3D content creation applications.
To import BIM layers:
1. On the Layers tab, in the 3D Mesh group, click BIM. The Import BIM and Convert to 3DML dialog
box is displayed.
294
TerraExplorer User Guide
Import BIM and Convert to 3DML Dialog Box
2. Click Add Files. The Open dialog box is displayed.
3. Browse to the required files, and click Open. All files added to the project are listed in the File section
of the dialog box.
Note: Only IFC 2X3 and Autodesk Revit FBX versions 7.5, 7.4, 7.3, 7.2, 7.1, 7.0, 6.1, and 6.0
files are supported. The loading process can take some time since the files are analyzed
before they are loaded.
4. From the File section of the dialog box, select the file whose properties you want to modify. Use
CTRL-click or SHIFT-click to multi-select. Using the property sheet, set the BIM layer properties as
required. See “Setting and Editing BIM Layer Properties” in this chapter for information.
5. Click Import. If any of the selected files were already converted to 3DML, a dialog box is displayed
asking if you want to rebuild models for the files. Click Yes to rebuild. The tool converts the IFC or
FBX file to a 3DML. When conversion is complete, a dialog box is displayed informing you of the
successful conversion, and the 3DML model is added to the Project Tree.
BIM Import Settings
General
Custom Palette File An XML file that assigns different colors to different
materials.
To modify these color assignments, use the
BimAttributes.xml file located under the TE
application files (.\Program
Files\Skyline\TerraExplorer Pro\Resources) as your
template and edit as required. This field is
295
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
unavailable for IFC models, which already include
color representation information.
Input Path Full path of the BIM file.
Output Path Full path of the model file that will be created when
the BIM is converted to 3DML.
Scale Scale of the model. This property is usually used to
scale a model to the metric units used in
TerraExplorer, if the model uses a different
measurement system or units. If you select the
units of your model, the suggested scale is
automatically displayed.
Title 3DML layer name as it will appear in the Project
Tree.
Position
Altitude Absolute altitude of the BIM model.
Altitude Units The z-coordinate units of measurement in which the
model was created.
Coordinate System Determines the coordinate system of the X and Y
coordinates. Click Set to open the Coordinate
System dialog box.
X X-coordinate of the pivot of the BIM model.
Y Y-coordinate of the pivot of the BIM model.
MGRS The coordinates of the pivot of the BIM model in
Military Grid Reference System (MGRS)
coordinates. This field is only available if Show
MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options
dialog box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer
Options” chapter for more information.
Importing and Converting DAE Mesh Layers
You can import a mesh layer in DAE (LODTreeExport.xml) format from older versions of PhotoMesh and
other software, merge it with classification layers, and convert it to a stream-optimized 3DML.
To import and convert a DAE mesh layer:
1. On the Layers tab, in the 3D Mesh group, click the arrow next to Load 3D Mesh, and select Import
DAE Layer.
The Import Mesh and Convert to 3DML dialog box is displayed.
296
TerraExplorer User Guide
Import DAE Mesh and Convert to 3DML
2. Browse to the 3D Mesh Model you want to import, and click Open. The dialog box shows a list of the
polygon feature layers that were loaded into the project.
3. The mesh model’s coordinate system is automatically read from the imported file. If you want to
change the model’s coordinate system, click Change. See “Coordinate System Dialog Box” in the
“Basic Concepts” chapter for information.
4. Browse to the required Output Folder. The converted mesh model will be saved to this folder.
5. Select the polygon feature layers you want to use to classify areas of the mesh model.
Importing and Converting OpenScene Graph (OSGB) Layers
OSGB mesh layers are the native format of the open source - OpenSceneGraph library
http://www.openscenegraph.org/. OSGB layers created in an external application can be imported and
converted to the stream optimized, 3DML mesh layer format. Converting layers to the 3DML format
enables them to be streamed with SkylineGlobe Server and merged with classification information so that
you can access attribute data and perform feature layer operations on the mesh layer. See “Classifying a
3DML” in this chapter and “Uploading Layers to SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Working with SkylineGlobe
Server” chapter.
The *.filelist.txt file format is supported for the import and conversion of multiple OSGB tiles into a single
3DML. To use this format, a [FileName].filelist.txt text file s hould be created that references each of the
OSGB tiles to be included in the 3DML. This file must adhere to the following rules:
One tile should be referenced per line with the relative path to that tile’s root file in the folder, e.g.,
./Tile_485_494/georef/georef.os gb
The path is relative to the filelist.txt file
For example, if you have four OSGB tile folders:
Tile_485_494
297
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Tile_485_495
Tile_486_494
Tile_486_495
All of these folders should be placed in a directory next to the *.filelist.txt file, and then referenced as
follows in the Example.filelist.txt file:
./Tile_485_494/georef/georef.os gb
./Tile_485_495/georef/georef.os gb
./Tile_486_494/georef/georef.os gb
./Tile_486_495/georef/georef.os gb
To import and convert an OSGB mesh layer:
1. On the Layers tab, in the 3D Mesh group, click the arrow next to Load 3D Mesh, and select Import
OpenScene Graph Layer.
The Import Mesh and Convert to 3DML dialog box is displayed.
2. Browse to the OSGB layer you want to import, and click Open. The Import Mesh and Convert to
3DML dialog box is displayed.
Import Mesh and Convert to 3DML
298
TerraExplorer User Guide
3. The Input Mesh Layer is automatically populated based on the OSGB layer selected in the previous
step.
4. The mesh model’s coordinate system is automatically read from the imported file. If you want to
change the model’s coordinate system, in the Input Coordinate System field, click Change. See
“Coordinate System Dialog Box” in the “Basic Concepts” chapter for information.
5. Browse to the required Output Folder. The converted mesh model will be saved to this folder.
6. In the Output Coordinate System, set the output mesh model’s coordinate system. This is by default
set to the project’s terrain coordinate system. If you want to change the model’s coordinate system, in
the Output CS field, click Change. See “Coordinate System Dialog Box” in the “Basic Concepts”
chapter for information.
7. If you want to reproject the input layer’s elevation values to the output coordinate system, select the
Reproject Elevation check box.
8. If you want to import sections of the mesh layer using clip polygons on the clipboard, select the check
box. The clip polygons are saved to a shape file containing a single multi-polygon with all the
geometries.
9. Click Create. The created 3DML is added to the project and displayed in the Project Tree.
Importing and Converting Cesium 3D Tiles (tileset.json) Layers
3D Tiles mesh layers can be imported and converted to the stream optimized, 3DML mesh layer format.
Converting layers to the 3DML format enables them to be streamed with SkylineGlobe Server and merged
with classification information so that you can access attribute data and perform feature layer operations
on the mesh layer. See “Classifying a 3DML” in this chapter and “Uploading Layers to SkylineGlobe Server”
in the “Working with SkylineGlobe Server” chapter.
To import and convert a 3D Tiles mesh layer:
1. On the Layers tab, in the 3D Mesh group, click the arrow next to Load 3D Mesh, and select Import
3D Tiles Layer.
The Import Mesh and Convert to 3DML dialog box is displayed.
2. Browse to the 3D Tiles layer you want to import, and click Open. The Import Mesh and Convert to
3DML dialog box is displayed.
299
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Import Mesh and Convert to 3DML
3. The Input Mesh Layer is populated based on the 3D Tiles layer selected in the previous step and the
mesh model’s Input and Output Coordinate Systems are automatically set to ECEF.
4. Browse to the required Output Folder. The converted mesh model will be saved to this folder.
5. If you want to reproject the input layer’s elevation values to the output coordinate system, select the
Reproject Elevation check box. Most 3D Tiles use ellipsoid elevation as required by the Cesium 3D
Tiles standard, so it is recommended to reproject them to the vertical coordinate system of the terrain.
Note: Some 3D Tiles are created by reprojecting geoid elevation values declared as ellipsoid,
into Earth-Centered, Earth-Fixed (ECEF). These 3D Tiles do not adhere to the 3D Tiles
standard of the ellipsoidal WGS 84 ECEF reference frame (EPSG 4978) coordinate system
and will only match other resources, e.g., data from terrain providers that use such
ellipsoid-declared geoid values. To convert such 3D Tiles to ellipsoid-declared 3DML with
correct geoid values, select WGS84 Lat-Long ellipsoid (4326) as the output, and select
the Reproject Elevation check box. After the import process is complete, open these
3DML’s property sheets and clear their Reproject Elevation check boxes, so their geoid
values are not reprojected.
After completing the import process, you can further convert the 3DML to geoid-declared
mesh layers (with geoid values): by exporting the 3DML to 3DML format using the Export
to Mesh tool. Set both the Input and Output Coordinate Systems to WGS84 Coordinate
System + EGM96 geoid height, and select Reproject Elevation, to override the elevation
coordinate system that was previously declared incorrectly.
6. If you want to import sections of the mesh layer using clip polygons on the clipboard, select the check
box. The clip polygons are saved to a shape file containing a single multi-polygon with all the
geometries.
300
TerraExplorer User Guide
7. A correction factor sometimes must be applied to a layer’s geometric error value so that the 3DML will
display properly in TerraExplorer. Geometric error together with other properties allow the viewer to
determine the optimal balance between quality and performance so that the best Level of Detail
(LOD) for the current view can be used. Select Auto to automatically calculate the factor for optimal
display in TerraExplorer.
8. Click Create. The created 3DML is added to the project and displayed in the Project Tree.
Setting and Editing 3D Mesh Layer Properties
Layer properties can be set when a mesh layer is loaded. If properties were not set or you want to modify
properties, you can open the layer’s property sheet and do so.
To edit 3D mesh layer properties:
1. In the Project Tree, select the required mesh layer.
2. On the 3D Mesh Layer tab, in the General group, click 3DML Properties. The 3D Mesh Layer
property sheet is displayed.
301
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
3D Mesh Layer Properties
Parameter Activity
General
Name Type the description or name of the layer.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the layer.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the layer from the
Project Tree.
Max. Visibility Distance Sets the maximal distance from the camera above which the layer
disappears.
Ground Object Determines if the layer is calculated as part of the terrain’s
elevation.
Replace Terrain With Determines whether terrain imagery and elevation in mesh area is
replaced with the 3DML’s ground layer (created in 3DML from
302
TerraExplorer User Guide
PhotoMesh) or with the mesh’s lower resolution data (Simplified
Mesh), or not replaced at all.
Mesh Ground Offset Offset from the mesh ground for drawing and placement of “on
terrain” and “relative to terrain“ objects.
Oversampling The mesh layer’s Level of Detail (LOD). When set to Normal,
TerraExplorer determines the optimal quality to performance
balance based on the current view. The “High” and “Best” settings
will load higher quality blocks but are also more resource-intensive.
Display Style Select a mesh model display style. The mesh model can include a
wireframe and be textured, solid color, or semi-transparent (x-ray).
Texture
Texture + wireframe
Solid color
Solid color + wireframe
X-ray - Semi-transparent model, enabling you to see through
all model walls
Note: The Display Style can also be selected from the 3D Mesh
Layer contextual tab.
Position
Altitude Method The altitude method used by the 3DML. For 3DML’s, this property
is read-only, always set to Absolute.
Absolute places the 3DML’s pivot point at a specified altitude
above the terrain database vertical datum base ellipsoid.
Altitude The altitude, as defined in Altitude Method, for the 3DML’s pivot
point.
X The X-coordinate for the 3DML pivot point.
Y The Y-coordinate for the 3DML pivot point.
MGRS The coordinates for the 3DML pivot point in Military Grid Reference
System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available if Show
MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog box. See
“View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for more
information.
Yaw The direction angle of the 3DML along the vertical axis relative to
north.
Pitch The tilt angle of the 3D model along its lateral axis relative to the
horizon.
Roll The roll angle of the 3DML along its longitudinal (front-to-back)
axis.
Default Location Repositions the 3DML in its default location (according to the file’s
geo-referencing information).
Geometry
Maintain Aspect Ratio Maintain the 3DML’s proportional relationship between the width,
length, and height.
303
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
If Yes is selected, when the scale factor in one axis is modified, the
scale factor in the other two axes is automatically adjusted to
maintain the original width:length:height ratio.
If No is selected, the scale factor in each axis can be modified
independently of the other axis scale factors.
Scale X Determines the length on the X axis of the 3DML.
The actual X value of the 3DML in the 3D World is the x value of
the 3DML in its internal coordinate system times the Scale X value.
(i.e., if the 3DML has an X value of 5 units and the Scale X is set to
10 meters per pixel, the X value of the 3DML in the 3D World is 50
meters.)
Scale Y Determines the length on the Y axis of the 3DML.
The actual Y value of the 3DML in the 3D World is the Y value of
the 3DML in its internal coordinate system times the Scale Y value.
(i.e., if the 3DML has a Y value of 10 units and the Scale Y is set to
10 meters per pixel, the Y value of the 3DML in the 3D World is
100 meters.)
Scale Z Determines the height (Z value) of the 3DML.
The actual height of the 3DML in the 3D World is the height of the
3DML in its internal coordinate system times the Scale Z value.
(i.e., if the 3DML has a height of 5 units and the Scale Z is set to
10 meters per pixel, the height of the 3DML in the 3D World is 50
meters.)
Connection
File Name Path to the 3DML file.
Mesh Layer Name Name of the 3DML file (Read-only).
Projection
Reproject Elevation Select the check box to reproject the layer’s elevation values to the
terrain’s coordinate system. This option only applies when Altitude
Method is set to Absolute. Geocentric layers are always
reprojected.
Layer Coord Sys The layer’s coordinate system (Read-only).
Layer Bounding Box
Upper Left X The X coordinate of the upper left corner of the layer (Read-only).
Upper Left Y The Y coordinate of the upper left corner of the layer (Read-only).
Upper Left MGRS The coordinates for the upper left corner of the layer in Military
Grid Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only
available if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options
dialog box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options”
chapter for more information (read-only).
Lower Right X The X coordinate of the lower right corner of the layer (Read-only).
Lower Right Y The Y coordinate of the lower right corner of the layer (Read-only).
Lower Right MGRS The coordinates for the lower right corner of the layer in Military
Grid Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only
available if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options
304
TerraExplorer User Guide
dialog box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options”
chapter for more information (Read-only).
Working with 3DML’s Feature Layers
Mesh layers created through the Classify Mesh Layer, Models to 3DML, and Import BIM Layer tools
include feature layers, which support many of the editing, analysis, and querying capabilities available for
standard feature layers. These include:
Spatial queries to select features within a particular geographical area.
Use of the attribute information included in a 3DML’s feature layers to display only selected areas of
the mesh model that match a specific attribute value.
Basing of feature properties such as tint and tooltip on the feature’s attribute values.
Data searches using the Attribute Table Tool to easily edit the attribute values of multiple features or
create a new shapefile based on the filtered data.
Modification of basic layer and feature properties (a limited subset of a standard feature layer’s
properties) from the layer’s property sheet.
Selecting Features from the 3D Window
To select a feature:
1. On the 3D Mesh Layer tab, in the Selection group, click Select Feature.
2. In the 3D Window, select the required feature. The feature’s property sheet opens.
Note: If you want to select multiple features, press and hold the CTRL key, while you select each
of the required features.
Note: If you want to deselect an item, place the cursor over or click a previously selected item
while the CTRL key is still pressed. The item becomes deselected in the same manner as
it was selected.
Spatial Queries
You can select features based on their spatial relationship with a polygon, line or point that you draw, or
with an existing object. You choose whether to include only features that entirely overlap with your
selected or drawn geometry, or whether to include also those that partially intersect. You also can define
a buffer zone to include features within a certain radius of the selection.
To perform a spatial query :
1. On the 3D Mesh Layer tab, in the Selection group, click Spatial Query and then select one of the
following from the drop-down list:
Area– Select all features spatially related to the polygon that will be drawn.
Line - Select all features spatially related to the line that will be drawn.
Point– Select all features spatially related to the point that will be drawn.
Object selection – Select all features that are spatially related to the object that will be selected.
From clipboard - Select all features that are spatially related to the objects in the clipboard.
Note: This option allows you to perform a spatial query using another feature or object, thus
eliminating the need to manually draw the selection area.
305
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: The selection of any objects that are defined around a point, (e.g., all 2D Shapes, but not
Polyline or Polygon) selects an individual point and not the entire object.
Note: The precise spatial relationship is defined in the next step.
2. On the 3D Mesh Layer tab, in the Selection group, define the spatial relationship to the drawn
geometry:
Parameter Description
Buffer If you want to include features within a certain radius outside the
selection, select the required distance.
Units Select the desired units of measurement: meters, feet, kilometers,
or miles.
Intersect/Completely Within Select Intersect if you want to select all features whose
geometry intersect at any point with the selection geometry.
Select Completely Within if you want to select only features
whose entire geometry fall within or overlap the selection
geometry.
3. In the 3D Window, do one of the following depending on the type of spatial query:
Area selection – Place the polygon points in the 3D Window by clicking in the desired locations.
You must place at least three points. Finish the polygon creation by right -clicking.
Line selection - Place the line points in the 3D Window by clicking in the desired locations. You
must place at least two points. Finish the line insertion by right-clicking.
Point selection – Place a single point in the 3D Window by clicking in the desired location.
Feature selection – Select any object by clicking it.
The selection area (including the buffer if there is one) is framed with a red border. All layer features
within the selection area are marked with yellow selection frames.
Note: If you want to turn off the Select Area mode, on the 3D Mesh Layer tab, in the Selection group,
toggle off the Spatial Query command.
306
TerraExplorer User Guide
Searching and Performing Operations by Attribute (Attribute Table Tool)
Attribute Table
The Attribute Table enables you to search the layer attribute database files and set visibility in the 3D
Window based on attribute value. You can also search the layer attribute database files to easily edit the
attribute values of multiple features and to create a new shapefile based on the filtered data.
Search expressions are comprised of one or more conditions. A condition consists of an attribute, an
operator and an attribute value.
There are three types of attributes:
String
Integer
Double
Each Attribute type has its corresponding operators.
A search expression can consist of more the one condition. In this case, you need to insert a connector
between the conditions to specify their relations. In addition to AND, you can use the OR, NOT and []
connectors to define the relations between conditions.
To search and perform operations by attribute:
1. In the Project Tree, select the required layer.
307
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
2. On the 3D Mesh Layer tab, in the Attributes group, click Attribute Table.
3. If you want to search for a previously-searched-for search expression, select one from the Search
String drop-down list, and skip to step 6.
4. In the Query builder section, enter an attribute, condition, and value and click Insert String . The
search expression is displayed in the Search String field.
Note: All attribute values are listed in the value drop-down list.
Note: If you want to clear the Search String field, click Clear.
5. If you want to include additional strings in your search expression, click one of the connector buttons:
and repeat step 4 for the next condition.
6. Click Search. Your search results are displayed in the search results list at the bottom of the page.
7. To fly to a feature, right-click the feature’s row in the attribute table, and select Fly to selected item.
8. For each attribute value that you want to modify, double-click and type the required value.
9. Do any of the following:
To select a feature: in the Feature ID column, select the required Feature ID. Use CTRL-click or
SHIFT-click to multi-select. This feature will remain selected even when the Attribute Table is
closed.
To fly to a feature, right-click the feature’s row in the attribute table, and select Fly to selected
item.
To modify attribute properties: double-click the attribute value and modify as required. In the 3D
Window, the plane flies from the current location directly to the selected feature.
To set the visibility of features based on their attribute values using the search expression
entered in steps 3-5: click the Operation button and select Set Visibility by Attribute. The
features matching the search criteria and their annotations are displayed on the terrain, and the
Visibility property is saved in the project. If you want to redisplay all features, click the Operation
button and select Clear Visibility by Attribute.
Note: All visibility by attribute settings are saved to Visibility property in the layer’s property
sheet under both the Annotation and Feature tabs. You can also set visibility by attribute
directly from the layer’s property sheet. See the Visibility property in “Polyline Property
Sheet Parameters” and “Polygon Property Sheet Parameters” in the “Objects and Labels”
chapter.
10. If you want to save the filtered layer to a file, do the following:
a. Click the Operation button and select Save As.
b. In the Save As dialog box that is displayed, select the file type (.fly or .shp).
c. Browse to the required file directory, and type a file name.
d. Click Save.
Editing Feature Attributes
To edit selected features’ attributes:
1. Select the required features by selecting them in the 3D Window or by spatial query. See “Selecting
Features from the 3D Window” and “Spatial Queries” in this chapter for information.
308
TerraExplorer User Guide
2. On the 3D Mesh Layer tab, in the Attributes group, select Attribute Table. The Attribute Table for
the selected layer opens with the selected features and their attributes displayed in the Search
Results section.
3. For each attribute value that you want to modify, double-click and type the required value.
Editing Feature Layer Properties
Layer and feature properties can be modified from the layer’s property sheet. If a 3DML was loaded with
feature layers (see “About 3D Mesh Layers” in this chapter) with attribute fields, you can apply different
properties based on the attribute field values of the feature layers. See “About Basing Native Feature
Layer Properties on Layer Attribute Fields” in the “Feature Layers” chapter for information.
Layer Tab
The layer tab includes the following groups and fields:
Field Activity
General
Name Type the description or name of the layer.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the layer from the
Project Tree.
Location
Defines the initial location of the camera when a layer is selected from the Project Tree.
Altitude Method Sets the altitude method to be used for the specified location:
Select Relative to Terrain to place the location point at a
specified altitude above the ground.
Select Absolute to place the location point at a specified
altitude above the terrain database vertical datum base
ellipsoid.
Altitude Enter the altitude above the ground for the specified location.
X Enter the X-coordinate of the location of interest.
Y Enter the Y-coordinate of the location of interest.
Direction Enter the horizontal angle of the camera when viewing the
location.
Tilt Enter the vertical angle of the camera when viewing the location.
Viewing Distance Enter the distance between the camera and the specified location.
This parameter also affects the radius of the flight patterns.
Set Viewpoint Click Capture to capture the current camera position and set as
the camera parameters for this location.
Jump To Viewpoint Click Jump to make the 3D Window reflect the changes made to
the location’s fields.
Layer Bounding Box
The loaded feature layer area is bounded within the coordinates of a fixed rectangular area. These
coordinates are retrieved from the source file or the source server.
309
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Upper Left X Read-only.
Upper Left Y Read-only.
Lower Right X Read-only.
Lower Right Y Read-only.
Feature Tab
The feature tab includes the following groups and fields:
Note: You can apply different properties such as tint color or visibility, based on the attribute field values
of the features. See “Using Attribute Fields” in the “Feature Layers” chapter for more information.
Field Activity
Appearance
Tint Color The color used to highlight each feature.
Tint Opacity The opacity of the tint color.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
General
Message The message associated with the object. The number displayed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a Tooltip text to appear when the mouse cursor is placed
over the layer in the 3D Window.
Using Attribute Fields
Most feature layers can store attribute field values for each of their features. This information can be used
to:
Display attribute field information in the Information Query Tool results. See “Information Query Tool”
in the “Analysis Tools” chapter for further information.
Control the appearance and behavior of layer features based on field attribute values. See “About
Basing Native Feature Layer Properties on Layer Attribute Fields ” in the “Feature Layers” and
“Attributes Messages” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for further information.
Modifying Layer Attribute Data
You can view and edit the attribute field values of the feature objects in the 3DML feature layers.
The attribute values appear in the Attributes group in the object’s property sheet. Any change you make
to the attribute fields values is saved in the FLY file.
310
TerraExplorer User Guide
To edit layer attribute data:
1. Select a single object for editing.
2. On the Feature Layer tab, in the Selection group, click Select Feature.
3. In the 3D Window, select the object. A yellow frame surrounds the feature object and the feature’s
property sheet opens.
4. In the layer’s property sheet, in the Attributes section, click the parameter name to edit. The Help
text at the bottom of the property sheet displays the field’s data type (e.g., “String. Character
Length:13”, “Double”, etc.).
Note: Each attribute field that was loaded from the feature layer has a Parameter Name in the
Attributes group. The value in the parameter’s value is the appropriate value for the
selected object.
5. Click the parameter value field and enter the new value.
Note: Only valid inputs according to the field’s data type are updated and saved.
Saving Feature Layers
Layer changes can be saved in the following ways:
Save Layer Changes to the Original Data Source
Save Layer Changes to a New File
Export Selected Features to a New File
Saving Layer Changes to the Original Data Source
Modifications to a 3DML feature layer can be made to the original source file.
To save 3DML feature layer changes to the original source file:
1. In the Project Tree, select the 3DML feature layer.
2. On the 3D Mesh Layer tab, in the Classification Layer group, click the arrow next to Save Layer,
and select Save.
Saving Layer Changes to a New File
You can save a 3DML feature layer to a new local file. This can be particularly useful if a layer is located
on a slow accessed remote server; by saving to a local file, you speed up access.
Note: A layer can be saved to a new file when the Entire Layer was loaded (fully or partially), as well as
when a layer was streamed.
You can save to the following file formats:
SQLite (.sqlite)
GeoDatabase (.gdb)
GeoPackage (.gpkg)
Shapefile (.shp)
Geospatial PDF (.pdf)
Note: Layers saved as Geospatial PDF are read-only when loaded back into TerraExplorer (i.e., their
Save command is unavailable).
311
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
To save a layer to a new file:
1. In the Project Tree, select the layer.
2. On the 3D Mesh Layer tab, in the Classification Layer group, click the arrow next to Save Layer,
and select Save as. The Save As dialog box is displayed.
3. Browse to the required Save location and in the File name field, enter the file name.
4. From the Save as type drop-down list, select a file type (.sqlite, .gdb, .gpkg, .shp, or .pdf).
5. If you are saving the layer as an .sqlite, .gdb, .gpkg, or .pdf file, type a Layer name.
6. Click Save.
Exporting Selected Features to a New File
To export selected features to a new layer:
1. Select the required features either by selecting them in the 3D Window or by spatial query. See
“Selecting Features from the 3D Window” and “Spatial Queries” in this chapter for information.
2. On the 3D Mesh Layer tab, in the Classification Layer group, click the arrow next to Save Layer
and select Save Selected Features As. The Save As dialog box is displayed.
3. Type a File name.
4. Select a file type (.sqlite, .gdb, .gpkg, .shp, or .pdf).
5. If you are saving the layer as an .sqlite, .gdb, .gpkg, or .pdf file, type a Layer name.
6. Browse to the required Save location and click Save.
Display Tools
The following display tools are available:
Swipe Display Style
Display by Attribute
Colorize by Attribute
Swipe Display Style
The Swipe Display Style tool enables you to dynamically swipe between a 3DML’s styles to view the
interior of buildings or expose obscured sections of the 3D View.
To swipe between a model’ display styles:
1. In the Project Tree, select the required layer.
2. On the 3D Mesh Layer tab, in the General group, click the arrow next to Display Tools, and select
Swipe Display Style. The Swipe Display Style controls are displayed.
Swipe Display Style Dialog Box
312
TerraExplorer User Guide
3. Select the two display styles you want to swipe between.
4. Toggle between Up-Down and Sides to swipe horizontally and vertically.
5. Slide the slider all the way to the right to completely show the layer in the display style selected from
the left display style list, and all the way to the left to completely show the layer in the display style
selected from the right display style list. As the slider moves between these extremes, the first display
style is gradually clipped to reveal the second one.
6. Click Auto-Repeat to automatically loop the slider value between 0-100%.
Display by Attribute
The attribute information included in a BIM or any 3DML with feature layers can be used to display only
selected areas of the mesh model that match a specific attribute value. The tool scans all feature layers
under the 3DML, and for each layer all attribute fields.
To display by attribute:
1. In the Project Tree, select the required layer.
2. On the 3D Mesh Layer tab, in the General group, click the arrow next to Display Tools, and select
Display by Attribute. The Display by Attribute dialog box is displayed.
Display by Attribute Dialog Box
3. Select the attribute according to whose values you want to determine what parts of the mesh layer
are displayed. If the number of unique values for this attribute exceeds 200, a warning message is
displayed asking you to select a different attribute. Then select the check boxes of the values you
want to display. If you want to display all, select All.
4. If you want the mesh layer to continue to display by attribute value after closing the di alog box, and
save the attribute display setting in the mesh layer’s classification layer, click Save. If after closing the
dialog you want to remove the display by attribute setting, reopen the dialog and select All. You can
313
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
also open the property sheet of the mesh layer’s classification layer, and under the [feature] tab,
delete the value from the Visibility property.
Note: All visibility by attribute settings are saved to the Visibility property in the layer’s property
sheet under the Feature tab. You can also set visibility by attribute directly from the layer’s
property sheet. See the Visibility property in “Polyline Property Sheet Parameters” and
“Polygon Property Sheet Parameters” in the “Objects and Labels” chapter.
5. Click X at the top right of the dialog box to close the dialog.
Colorize by Attribute
The attribute information included in a BIM or any 3DML with feature layers can be used to colorize the
mesh model based on attribute value, with a different color assigned to each attribute value. The tool
scans all feature layers under the 3DML, and for each layer all attribute fields.
To colorize by attribute:
1. In the Project Tree, select the required layer.
2. On the 3D Mesh Layer tab, in the General group, click the arrow next to Display Tools, and select
Colorize by Attribute. The Colorize by Attribute dialog box is displayed.
Colorize by Attribute Dialog Box
314
TerraExplorer User Guide
3. Select the attribute according to whose values you want to colorize the mesh layer. If the number of
unique values for this attribute exceeds 200, a warning message is displayed asking you to select a
different attribute.
4. Set the opacity of the colorization.
5. If you want to change the color of an attribute value, click the color and then select a color from the
color palette.
6. If you want to set all attribute values to the same color, click Set all to, select a color from the color
palette, and then click Set.
7. If you want to assign different random colors, click Reshuffle. You can repeatedly reshuffle until you
get the desired color combination.
8. If you want the colorization to display after closing the dialog box, and save the attribute colorization
setting in the mesh layer’s classification layer, click Save. If after closing the dialog you want to
remove the attribute colorization, open the property sheet of the mesh layer’s classification layer, and
under the [feature] tab, delete the value from the Tint Color property.
9. Click X at the top right of the dialog box to close the dialog.
Classifying a 3DML
You can classify areas of the 3DML by associating different areas of the mesh model with the respective
polygon features from polygon classification layers. This enables you to access attribute data and perform
feature layer operations on the mesh layer, including spatial and attribute queries. At the end of the
classification process, the classified 3DML is added to the Project Tree.
Note: Classification is supported for all mesh layers except imported OGC 3D Tiles (B3DM) and 3DML
from SGS.
To classify a 3DML:
1. In the Project Tree, select the required layer.
2. On the 3D Mesh Layer tab, in the Mesh Layer group, click Classify Mesh Layer. The Classify
3DML dialog box is displayed showing the selected 3DML in the 3D Mesh Layer field and a list of the
project’s polygon feature layers.
315
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Classify 3DML
3. The 3DML’s coordinate system is automatically read from the layer. If you want to change the
model’s coordinate system, click Change. See “Coordinate System Dialog Box” in the “Basic
Concepts” chapter for information.
4. Browse to the required Output Folder. The classified mesh model will be saved to this folder.
5. Select the polygon feature layers you want to use to classify areas of the mesh model. If you want to
set a buffer for the each of the features in a layer, select the buffer field, and enter the required value.
A buffer can sometimes be used to achieve a more exact fit between the feature layer polygons and
the areas they are classifying, e.g., if the polygons are too small, you can measure the horizontal
distance between the polygon and the perimeter of the required mesh area, and then set the buffer
based on this distance.
6. If you want to replace the original mesh layer in the Project Tree with the classified one, select the
Replace 3DML in project check box.
7. Click Create. A dialog box is displayed notifying you when classification is complete, and t he
classified 3DML is added to the project and displayed in the Project Tree.
Uploading 3D Mesh Layers to SkylineGlobe Server
You can upload 3D mesh layers in 3DML format to SkylineGlobe Server.
To upload a layer:
In the Project Tree, right-click the required layer, and select Upload to SkylineGlobe from the
shortcut menu. See “Uploading Layers to SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Working with SkylineGlobe
316
TerraExplorer User Guide
Server” chapter for information.
Modifying a 3D Mesh Layer
Elevation values in an area of a 3DML are modified using a modify mesh object. The surface of the 3DML
is raised or lowered according to the elevation values of the modify mesh polygon's points. Different
elevation behaviors allow replacing, cropping above or cropping below the original values of the terrain.
The interior of the polygon can be flat or irregular in shape.
Note: Modify mesh objects are supported for all mesh layers except imported OGC 3D Tiles (B3DM).
To modify a 3D mesh layer:
1. In the Project Tree, select the required layer.
On the 3D Mesh Layer tab, in the General group, click Modify Mesh Layer. The Modify Terrain
property sheet is displayed.
2. In the 3D Window, left-click to place the modify mesh polygon’s waypoints, and right-click to
complete.
3. In the property sheet, set the modify mesh polygon’s properties. See “Modifying the Terrain” in the
“Objects and Labels” chapter for more information.
Exporting Mesh Layers to Models
TerraExplorer offers a wide range of options for exporting polygonal areas of a mesh layer, e.g.,
buildings, to individual OBJ models to enable you to easily extract precisely the areas that you need. A
point feature layer is also created in the export process that contains the models’ positioning information.
Export is supported for all mesh layers except for imported 3D Tiles and BIM, 3DML created from models
feature layers, and 3DML from SGS that do not have edit permission.
The areas for export can be defined in any of the following ways:
Based on all classification features in all mesh classification layers
Based on selected classification layer features
Based on external feature layers
By drawing a polygon around a single model
To export a mesh layer to individual models:
1. Select the mesh layer, and then in the Mesh Layer group, click the arrow next to Export to Models
and select one of the following:
If you want to export all areas, e.g. buildings, defined by the features in all 3DML classification
layers, to individual OBJ models, select Export by All Classification Features.
If you want to export the areas, e.g. buildings, defined by the selected classification layer
features, to individual OBJ models, select Export by Selected Features. Then select the
required features in one of the classification layers, either manually or using spatial or attribute
queries. See “Working with 3DML’s Feature Layers” in this chapter for information.
If you want to export the areas, e.g. buildings, defined by external feature layers (previously
loaded into the project), to individual OBJ models, select Export by External Feature Layers. -
If you want to select a model for export to an individual OBJ model, by drawing a polygon around
it, select Draw and Export Single Model. Then draw a polygon around the required model.
2. The Export to Models dialog box is displayed.
317
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Export to Models Dialog Box
3. If you selected Export by External Feature Layers, select the required feature layers.
4. Browse to an Output Folder, and click Create.
Exporting Mesh Layers to Other Formats
3DML can be exported to Cesium 3D Tiles and I3S formats. Export is supported for all mesh layers
except for imported OGC 3D Tiles (B3DM) and 3DML created from models feature layers.
To export a mesh layer to other formats:
1. Select the mesh layer, and then in the Mesh Layer group, select Export to Mesh. The Export to
Mesh Layer dialog box is displayed.
318
TerraExplorer User Guide
Export to Mesh Layer
2. The Input Mesh Layer is automatically populated based on the layer selected in the previous step.
3. The mesh layer’s coordinate system is automatically read from the layer. If you want to change the
model’s coordinate system, in the Input Coordinate System field, click Change. See “Coordinate
System Dialog Box” in the “Basic Concepts” chapter for information.
4. Select an Output Format: Skyline 3DML, Cesium 3D Tiles or Esri I3S.
5. Browse to the required Output Folder. The exported mesh layer will be saved to this folder.
6. In the Output Coordinate System, set the output mesh model’s coordinate system. This is by default
set to the project’s terrain coordinate system. If you want to change the model’s coordinate system, in
the Output CS field, click Change. See “Coordinate System Dialog Box” in the “Basic Concepts”
chapter for information. 3D Tiles output is always produced in ECEF coordinate system.
7. If you want to reproject the input layer’s elevation values to the output coordinate system, select the
Reproject Elevation check box. When exporting to 3D Tiles, it is recommended to select the
Reproject Elevation option in order to reproject the elevation values to ellipsoid, and then to ECEF as
required by the Cesium 3D Tiles standard for compatibility with other standard Cesium resources,
e.g., data from terrain providers, that use ellipsoid elevation.
Note: Some Cesium resources, e.g., data from terrain providers, use geoid elevation value that
were declared as ellipsoid. This data does not adhere to the Cesium standard of the
ellipsoidal WGS 84 Earth-Centered, Earth-Fixed (ECEF) reference frame (EPSG 4978)
coordinate system and would only match other resources, e.g., 3D Tiles, that also use
such ellipsoid-declared geoid values. To export a mesh layer that is compatible with these
319
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
resources, the elevation values should not be reprojected to ellipsoid, so the check box
should be cleared.
8. If you want to export sections of the mesh layer using clip polygons on the clipboard, select the check
box. The clip polygons are saved to a shape file containing a single multi-polygon with all the
geometries.
9. Click Create. The created 3DML is added to the project and displayed in the Project Tree.
Converting Models to 3DML
The Convert Models to 3DML tool enables you to create a unified, stream optimized 3D Mesh Layer
(3DML) database from a point feature layer with individually referenced 3D model files. See “Streaming
3D Models Using Feature Layers” in the “Feature Layers” chapter and “About 3D Mesh Layers” in the “3D
Mesh Layers” chapter for information.
To create a 3DML dataset:
1. On the Layers tab, in the 3D Mesh group, click Models to 3DML. The Convert Models Layer to
3DML dialog box is displayed, showing a list of all shapefile, sqlite, and GeoPackage point feature
layers in the project with individually referenced 3D model files.
Note: It may take a short while for the list of layers to be displayed.
Convert Models Layer to 3DML
2. Select the files for which you want to create 3DML layers, and click Create.
Note: You can click Abort at any point to cancel 3DML creation.
3. If you want to combine all sources into a single 3DML, select the check box.
4. When the 3DML layers have been created, a dialog box is displayed informing you that the 3DML
layers will now be loaded into the project, and asking you if you want to remove the corresponding
320
TerraExplorer User Guide
feature layers that they were based on. Click Yes to remove them, or click No to leave them in the
project.
321
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 17 IMAGERY AND ELEVATION LAYERS
About Raster Layers
Raster data is made up of pixels, each of which has its own value. TerraExplorer supports two types of
raster data: geo-referenced, satellite or aerial images that overlay the terrain imagery and geo-referenced
elevation raster that replaces the elevation data of the terrain database.
All new layers must use the project's coordinate system. If a new layer is based on a source that uses a
different coordinate system, you can reproject the layer, converting the layer's data to match the project's
coordinate system. If a source does not include coordinate system information or TerraExplorer is unable
to read this information, you must supply the coordinate system information so that TerraExplorer can
reproject the layer.
A file can be of better resolution than the area on which it is placed. Automatic morphing between the
terrain imagery and the imagery layer is performed on computers with Microsoft DirectX version 9.0
installed.
Loading Raster Layers
You can create new imagery and elevation layers by referencing imagery and elevation data from:
Files on your own computer or on your local network.
A database that is served over a network by one of the supported GIS servers. See “Loading Raster
Layers from Raster Servers” in this chapter for information.
Loading Raster Layers from File
The following file formats are supported:
Windows Bitmap (*.bmp)
ER-Mapper (*.ecw)
ER-Mapper Jpeg2000 (*.jp2, *.j2k, *.jpc))
ER-Mapper Server (*.ecwp)
Gdal (*.gif, *.ntf, *.jpg, *.jp2, *.j2k, *.jpc, *.tif, *.img, *.gpkg, *.webp, *.*, *.vrt, *.pdf, *.wcs)
HTC Raster file (*.htc)
Web Map server (*.wms)
Erdas Imagine (*.img)
Mip Terrain (*.mpt)
SkylineGlobe Server (*.tglobe)
Image MPU (*.li.mpu)
NGA formats (CIB, CADRG, ADRG)
No Stream formats (Bitmap, Jpeg, Gif)
ArcSDE Raster Server (*.sde)
322
TerraExplorer User Guide
MrSid (*.sid)
Tiff Format (*.tif, *.itiff)
Tile Text File (*.tlt)
Triangle elevation as color (*.tri)
Projection Text File (*.prj)
To add a raster source from file to a project:
1. On the Home tab, in the Add group, click the arrow next to Raster Layer, and select the required
format or “More Formats and Servers”/ ”Other Elevation Formats”. The Load Imagery/Elevation Layer
dialog box is displayed.
2. Browse to the required file, and click Open.
Note: If you inserted a RAW, IMG (Erdas Imagine), or NGA format files, a dialog box is displayed
in which you can define properties for the relevant file type. If you inserted a GeoPackage
format file, a dialog box is displayed in which you can select the required layer.
Note: If you want to restrict your Browse list to files of a specific format, in the Files of type field,
select the required format.
If the source file is geo-referenced it is located accordingly on the terrain. Otherwise, it is placed at the
center of the 3D Window. You can then manually edit its position, or reproject it.
3. If the source file does not include coordinate system information or TerraExplorer cannot read it from
the file, the Coordinate System dialog box opens. Specify the coordinate system of the layer. See
“Coordinate System Dialog Box” in the “Basic Concepts” chapter for information.
4. After the layer has been placed on the terrain, you can change its properties using the property sheet.
See “Imagery and Elevation Layer Parameters” in this chapter for further information.
Loading Raster Layers from Raster Servers
You can load raster layers from the following servers:
Server Description
SkylineGlobe Server SkylineGlobe Server is a private cloud solution that supports the
client-server data delivery requirements of Skyline's 3D
technology. TerraExplorer can read streamed imagery and
elevation layers (Imagery, Elevation, RasterComplex) and TBP
projects. For more information on loading layers from SGS, see
“Loading SkylineGlobe Layers” in the “Working with
SkylineGlobe Server” chapter.
Web Map Server / WMS/WMTS are standard protocols published by the Open
Web Map Tile Service Geospatial Consortium (OGC) for serving georeferenced map
images and pre-rendered georeferenced map tiles over the
Internet. TerraExplorer supports WMS 1.1.1 and 1.3.0 and
WMTS 1.0.0.
Web Coverage Service (WCS) WCS is a standard protocol published by the Open Geospatial
Consortium (OGC) for serving geospatial information, in forms
that can be used as input for analysis and modeling.
TerraExplorer allows use of coverage in a WCS server as a
raster dataset and supports version 1.0.0
323
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraGate Server Skyline’s TerraGate Server efficiently streams Skyline terrain
databases (MPT files) created by TerraBuilder and TerraBuilder
projects (TBP) (Legacy support).
Oracle Spatial Database Oracle Spatial (formerly called SDO, and before that
MultiDimension), provides a way to store and retrieve multi-
dimensional data in Oracle. It is primarily used for Geographical
Information Systems to implement, geo-reference and solve
queries such as how is something related to a specific location.
Note: In order to load an Oracle Spatial layer you must have
an Oracle Client installed on your computer.
ECW Image Web Server ECW Image Web Server serves over the Internet large images
(greater than a Terabyte in size) with fine alternating contrast
while retaining their visual quality.
Esri ArcSDE Raster Server The Spatial Database Engine (SDE) is a client/server
application that enables spatial data to be stored, managed and
retrieved from database management systems like Oracle,
Microsoft SQL Server, Sybase, IBM DB2 and Informix. Loading
of layers from ArcSDE is only supported through ArcSDE 10.2
(Esri deprecated the application server connection method after
this version). From ArcSDE 10.3 and above, layers can be
loaded using the WMS/REST services.
Google Earth Enterprise (GEE) Allows opening imagery from Google Earth Enterprise Server.
Server GEE Server provides a way of hosting private versions of
Google Earth and Google Maps.
To load a raster layer from a server:
1. On the Home tab, in the Add group, click the arrow next to Raster Layer, and select the required
server. The Browse for Imagery Layer/Elevation Layer dialog box opens.
324
TerraExplorer User Guide
Browse for Imagery Layer Dialog Box
2. In the Browse for Imagery Layer or Browse for Elevation Layer dialog box, in the From Server
section, select the server type. A dialog box is displayed corresponding to the server selected.
3. Enter the information required for the selected server:
SkylineGlobe Server
Web Map Service (WMS)
Web Map Tile Service (WMTS)
Oracle Spatial Database
ECW Image Web Server
TerraGate Server
ArcSDE Raster Server
Google Earth Enterprise Server
SkylineGlobe Server
SkylineGlobe Server (SGS) is a private cloud solution that provides a comprehensive set of web services
for publishing, storing, managing and streaming 3D spatial data. SkylineGlobe Server provides streaming
services for all your spatial data types including terrain (MPT/TBP), map (raster-WMS/WMTS), feature
(WFS/WFS-T), 3D Mesh (3DML, OGC 3D Tiles), and point cloud (CPT, OGC 3D Tiles). SkylineGlobe
Server includes the Maps Service that streams most TerraExplorer supported raster layer formats to
325
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
remote TerraExplorer clients and any application that reads the standard OGC WMS/WMTS protocol. The
layers are streamed as WMS/WMTS tiles in JPEG and PNG formats.
To add a layer from a SkylineGlobe server:
SkylineGlobe Layers Dialog Box
1. If you aren’t already logged in to the required SkylineGlobe Server, log in to the server. See “Logging
In to a SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Feature Layers” chapter for information.
2. Search for the required layer. See “Searching for SkylineGlobe Layers” in the “Working with
SkylineGlobe Server” chapter.
3. Select the layer you want to load, and click Load Layer.
Web Map Service/Web Map Tile Service
To load a layer from a Web Map server (WMS/WMTS):
Note: TerraExplorer supports WMS versions 1.1.1 and 1.3.0, and WMTS 1.0.0.
Note: The following is the copyright information for server address:
“http://maps.opengeo.org/geowebc ache/service/wms?” that is pre-configured in the server
addresses list: “Map data © OpenStreetMap contributors, CC-BY-SA”.
326
TerraExplorer User Guide
Web Map Server Browser Dialog Box
1. If you want to modify the Server Address list, do any of the following:
a. If you want to add a new address, click Add. The Add Web Map Server dialog box opens.
i. Add a new address.
ii. If you want to add extra parameters (e.g., Token information) to the GetMap request, append
the parameter at the end of the address using the following format:
SLGetMapExtraParam={"<extra_param>"}
where <extra_param> is the extra parameter for the GetMap request.
e.g.,
http://www.skylineglobe.com/SFS/streamer.ashx?service=WMS&SLGetMapExtraParam={"key=1
2345"}
This will add key=12345 to the GetMap request.
iii. Select the required service type.
iv. If you want to use RESTful request encoding, select Use RESTful requests for WMTS.
Note: Some servers may require the ArcGIS compatibility check box to be selected.
327
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: Some servers may require the NASG (National Administration of Surveying, Mapping
and Geoinformation of China) compatibility check box to be selected (e.g., used by
Tianditu).
v. Click OK.
b. If you want to edit an address, select the address from the drop-down list, and click Edit. The Edit
Web Map Server dialog box opens. Edit the address and click OK.
c. If you want to remove an address, click Remove. A message is displayed asking you to confirm
the deletion. Click Yes to delete.
2. From the Server Address list, select a server address.
3. In the Layers box, browse to the required data. The window on the right shows a preview of the data
(when available).
4. In the Layer Details Sheet, set the properties according to the data supplier’s stipulations.
Property Sheet
Property Description
SRS Spatial Reference System - Select the EPSG projection code
indicating the projection in which the WMS/WMTS server is
able to serve data.
Lat-Long Units Per Pixel The best resolution level in degrees per pixel that is
requested from the server. This field is only available when
requesting a layer in SRS 4326 - geographic Lat-Long
WGS84.
Units Per Pixel The units per pixel (UPP) of the layer.
Abstract A description of the layer (Read-only).
Monochrome Add the layer as a black and white source.
Image Format The format of the loaded layer –e.g., png or gif.
Style Some layers can be displayed in more than one style (e.g.,
Points, Contours or Points and Contours)
Transparent Select True to use WMS/WMTS layer as an overlay or False
to use the WMS/WMTS layer as a base image.
328
TerraExplorer User Guide
Background Color The layer’s background color.
Name in Project The layer’s name in the Project Tree.
Request Size The image size in pixels.
Extra Parameters Extra parameters that are appended to any GetMap request,
(e.g., Token information for requests to a token-secured
WMS service).
Layer Names The names of the selected WMS/WMTS layers (Read-only).
Style Names Select the required style from the list of styles (if available)
(Read-only).
5. Click Open. The selected layer is added to the project and displayed in the Project Tree.
Oracle Spatial Database
To load a layer from an Oracle Spatial database:
Oracle GeoRaster Browser
1. From the Connection list, select a connection.
Note: You can remove a connection from the list by selecting it and clicking Remove.
2. If you want to add a connection, click Add, and enter the parameters in the Oracle Connection
Parameters dialog box. See “Adding an Oracle Connection” in this chapter for more information.
3. Select the required layer file in the files hierarchy tree. The selected layer is added to the project and
displayed in the Project Tree.
329
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Adding an Oracle Connection
To add an Oracle Server connection:
1. In the Oracle GeoRaster Browser dialog box, click Add. The Oracle Connection Parameters dialog
box is displayed.
Oracle Connection Parameters Dialog Box
2. Define the following parameters:
Field Description
Oracle service name The Net Service name
User Name User name to access the server (mandatory)
Password Enter the password
3. Click OK. The new connection is added to the list.
ECW Image Web Server
To add a layer from ECW Image Web Server:
Add ECW Data Dialog Box
Enter the New Image Web Server address and click OK. The selected layer is added to the project
and displayed in the Project Tree.
330
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraGate Server
Skyline offers legacy support for TerraGate.
To add a layer from a TerraGate server:
Add TerraGate Data Dialog Box
1. If you want to add a TerraGate connection, click Add, and enter the parameters in the Database
Connection dialog box. See “Adding a TerraGate Connection” in this chapter for more information.
2. From the Map Name list, select a connection.
Note: You can remove a connection from the list by selecting it and clicking Remove.
3. Select one of the layer options and click Open. The selected layer is added to the project and
displayed in the Project Tree.
Adding a TerraGate Connection
To add a TerraGate connection:
1. In the Add TerraGate data dialog box, click Add. The Add TerraGate Source dialog box opens.
331
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Add TerraGate Source Dialog Box
2. Enter the map name of the TerraGate Server (i.e., <map name>.tbp (or .mpt)@<name of the
TerraGate server or IP address.
3. If a port other than the default of 80 is used, enter the Port Number.
4. If you want to open a file from TerraGate over a secure connection (SSL), select the Use SSL check
box.
The selected layer is added to the project and displayed in the Project Tree.
332
TerraExplorer User Guide
ArcSDE Raster Server
To add a layer from an ArcSDE Raster Server:
ArcSDE Server Browser Dialog Box
1. If you want to add an ArcSDE Server connection, click Add, and enter the parameters in the
Database Connection dialog box. See “Adding an ArcSDE Server Connection” in this chapter for
more information.
2. From the Connection list, select a connection.
Note: You can remove a connection from the list by selecting it and clicking Remove.
3. Select one of the layer options and click Open. The selected layer is added to the project and
displayed in the Project Tree.
Adding an ArcSDE Server Connection
To access data from ArcSDE server, TerraExplorer requires access to specific ArcSDE components
(dynamic link library files): sde.dll, pe.dll and sg.dll, of versions 10.0, 9.3 or 9.2. For versions 9.2 and 9.3,
msvcr71.dll is also required. These files are installed with various Esri components, including ArcGIS
Desktop and ArcSDE SDK, as well as the free viewers, ArcGIS Explorer Desktop and ArcReader. See
http://www.esri.com/products/index.html#free_viewers_panel
To allow TerraExplorer to access these files, do any of the following:
333
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Make sure an ARCGISHOME or AGSDESKTOPJAVA environment variable is defined on your
system and includes a reference to a folder under which a bin folder exists with the above mentioned
files.
Make sure a PATH environment variable is defined on your system and includes a reference to a
folder under which a bin folder exists with the above mentioned files.
Copy the DLL’s to the main TerraExplorer folder.
To add an ArcSDE Server connection:
1. In the ArcSDE Server Browser dialog box, click Add. The Database Connection dialog box is
displayed.
Database Connection Dialog Box
2. Define the following parameters:
Field Description
Server Server name (mandatory)
Service/Instance Service or Instance name
Database Database name
User Name User name to access the server (mandatory)
Password Enter the password
3. Click OK to connect to the server.
334
TerraExplorer User Guide
Google Earth Enterprise Server
To load a layer from Google Earth Enterprise Server:
Connect to Google Earth Enterprise Server Dialog Box
Enter the server’s URL and click Connect.
SGS Base Layers
You can load any of the SGS base layers configured for the SkylineGlobe Server that TerraExplorer is
currently connected to.
To load:
1. If you aren’t already logged in to the required SkylineGlobe Server, log in to the server. See “Logging
In to a SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Working with SkylineGlobe Server” chapter for information.
2. On the Layers tab, in the Raster group, click SGS Base Layer and select any of the available layers.
Moving and Clipping a Layer
An imagery or elevation layer is located on the terrain based on the geographic information it has,
whether contained in the file, a reprojected value, or a manual input. You can modify the geographical
location of a layer as well as clip a particular section of the layer, to display a subset of the image.
To change the geographical location of a layer:
After creating the imagery or elevation Layer, in the layer’s property sheet, in the “Imagery” or
“Elevation” section respectively, update the Upper Left X, Upper Left Y, Lower Right X, and Lower
Right Y values as required. See “Imagery and Elevation Layer Parameters” in this chapter for
information.
To clip a layer:
If you want to draw a polygon around the required subsection of the raster, do the following:
a. In the layer’s property sheet, in the Imagery section click Draw.
b. In the 3D Window, place the polygon points by clicking in the desired location. You must place at
least three points.
c. Finish the polygon creation by right-clicking.
Note: When creating a filled polygon, the lines of the polygon should not overlap each other. This
may result in an irregular fill pattern.
If you want to load a shapefile which contains the clip polygon you want to use, do the following:
335
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
d. In the layer’s property sheet, in the Imagery section click Load.
e. Browse to the required shapefile, and click Open.
Note: If you want to undo the clip or draw polygon action and restore the original raster, click Restore.
Imagery and Elevation Layer Parameters
Parameter Activity
Appearance
Name Type the description or name of the layer.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the layer.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the layer from the
Project Tree.
Line Color Select the outline color for the layer.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Line Opacity Enter the opacity for the layer’s outline.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Fill Opacity Enter the opacity for the layer data.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Line Style
Line Width Enter the layer's line width.
The width is measured in meters.
Line Back Color Sets the layer's line back color.
The layer's line back color is visible when the line pattern is set to
non-solid patterns such as a dotted pattern.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Line Back Opacity Enter the layer's line back opacity.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Line Pattern Select the layer's line pattern. You can choose between different
line patterns, e.g., solid, dashed, dotted or a combination thereof
Timespan
Start Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the layer should first
become visible.
End Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the layer should stop
being visible.
Points Position
The parameters in this group are enabled only when the Edit Nodes icon , on the top bar of the
property sheet, is selected.
336
TerraExplorer User Guide
Selected Point Select the point to edit.
The selected point is highlighted in the 3D Window.
When you edit this point, the corresponding point on the bas e or
the top of the polygon changes accordingly.
Point X Enter the X-coordinate for the selected point.
Point Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the selected point.
Point MGRS The coordinates of the selected point in Military Grid Reference
System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available if Show
MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog box. See
“View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for more
information.
Imagery/Elevation
Imagery/Elevation File Type the full path of the file, or use the Edit button to browse to a
supported imagery/elevation file or to open the Web map server
browser dialog if loading a layer from a Web Map Server (WMS).
Upper Left X Enter the X-coordinate of the layer top-left corner.
Upper Left Y Enter the Y-coordinate of the layer top-left corner.
Upper Left MGRS The coordinates of the layer top-left corner in Military Grid
Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available
if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog
box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for
more information.
Lower Right X Enter the X-coordinate of the layer bottom-right corner.
Lower Right Y Enter the Y-coordinate of the layer bottom-right corner.
Lower Right MGRS The coordinates of the layer bottom-right corner in Military Grid
Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available
if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog
box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for
more information.
Auto Refresh Interval The time interval, in seconds, for auto-refreshing the layer. The
minimum interval is 10 seconds.
Elevation Scale Change the elevation data to a new value.
This feature enables you to adjust several elevation sources that
are defined with reference to different baselines, such as different
sea levels. The elevation data in the source file is changed to a
new value where: New Value = Old Value * Scale Factor + Offset
Value
Elevation Offset Change the elevation data to a new value.
This feature enables you to adjust several elevation sources that
are defined with reference to different baselines, such as different
sea levels. The elevation data in the source file is changed to a
new value where: New Value = Old Value * Scale Factor + Offset
Value
Remove Null Value Select Yes to display the color or elevation data whose value is
nullified. Select No to keep the selected value nullified.
337
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Null Value Nullify a color value in an imagery layer or an elevation value in an
elevation layer:
Imagery Layer - Nullify a color value to make the underlying
terrain visible in places that are colored with the nullified color
value.
Elevation Layer - Nullify an elevation value to cancel the
value's elevation effect.
Null Tolerance Enter the permissible deviation from the specified Null value when
the color value is irregular.
Draw Polygon Click the Draw button to clip a subsection of the raster.
Place the polygon points in the 3D Window by clicking in the
desired location. You must place at least three points. Finish the
polygon creation by right-clicking.
Note: When creating a filled polygon, the lines of the polygon
should not overlap each other. This may result in an
irregular fill pattern.
Reset Polygon Click to restore the original raster.
Import Polygon Click to import a shapefile which contains the clip polygon you
want to use.
Projection
Reproject Source If you want to reproject the source’s geographic information from
the source coordinate system to the terrain coordinate system,
select Yes.
Description Free text describing the coordinate system.
Coordinate System Click Set to open the Coordinate System dialog box, and set the
required coordinate system. See “Coordinate System Dialog Box”
in the “Basic Concepts” chapter for information.
General
Show in Viewer Determines if the layer appears in the Project Tree when the file is
viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic viewer.
Message The message associated with the object. The number displayed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a Tooltip text to appear when the mouse cursor is placed
over the layer in the 3D Window.
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the layer.
This distance is used as a stop mark for any “Fly-to” or “View
object” operation. It is also used when selecting to edit the object
from the Project Tree.
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance for the layer based on its size.
338
TerraExplorer User Guide
Max. Visibility Distance Sets the maximal distance from the camera above which the layer
disappears.
Min. Visibility Distance Sets the minimal distance from the camera below which the layer
disappears.
Order Determines the order of terrain objects from back to front.
Objects with higher values are displayed on top of objects with
lower values.
Converting Raster to MPT with Resolution Pyramid
Convert selected raster files, which do not include resolution levels or have an insufficient number of
them, to stream-optimized MPT files with resolution pyramids.
To display a layer in different altitudes, TerraExplorer Pro requires a number of resolution levels per layer,
which are also known as a resolution pyramid or a multi-resolution file. Without a resolution pyramid, the
layer will not be displayed when attempting to zoom out from the original resolution level.
A layer source file may or may not include resolution levels or may have an insufficient number of them.
In that case, TerraExplorer can generate a resolution pyramid for such sources. The resulting MPT file
replaces the original layer source file and does not point to it.
Note: It is a good practice to convert all layers in the project to MPT with a resolution pyramid.
Convert Raster to MPT with Resolution Pyramid Dialog Box
To convert a raster layer to an MPT with a resolution pyramid:
1. In the Project Tree, select the layers that require a resolution pyramid.
2. On the Layers tab, in the Raster group, click Raster to MPT. The Convert Raster to MPT with
Resolution Pyramid dialog box is displayed.
339
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
3. Select the check boxes of the layers for which to create a resolution pyramid.
4. Click Convert. When the creation process is finished, the Pyramid Status column changes to “Done”.
Note: If you want to cancel the resolution pyramid creation in the middle of the process, click
Abort.
Uploading Raster Layers to SkylineGlobe Server
Raster layers can be uploaded to SkylineGlobe Server either by publishing the entire TerraExplorer
project in which they are included (see “Publishing a Project to SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Working with
SkylineGlobe Server” chapter) or by uploading individual layers.
To upload a layer:
In the Project Tree, right-click the required layer, and select Upload to SkylineGlobe from the
shortcut menu. See “Uploading Layers to SkylineGlobe Server” in the “Working with SkylineGlobe
Server” chapter for information.
340
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 18 WORKING WITH OBJECTS
Creating New Objects
You can add 2D, 3D and dynamic objects to the project.
Objects Tab
To create a new object:
1. On the Objects tab, in the 2D Objects, 3D Objects and Dynamic Objects groups, click the object
you want to create:
Icon Activity
Label
Text Create a new text label in the 3D Window.
Image Create a new text image in the 3D Window.
Video
Video on Terrain Play a video file onto any selected area of the terrain. You can also
use a telemetry file to move the projected video based on recorded
readings.
Supported video file formats are determined by the codecs that are
installed and registered on your computer. Most files that Windows
Media Player can play (e.g., *.avi, *.mpg, etc.), including streaming
Microsoft Media Server (MMS) content, can be draped on the
terrain.
Video Billboard Play a video file on a floating billboard.
2D Objects
Polyline Create a new polyline object in the 3D Window.
Polygon Create a new polygon object in the 3D Window.
2D Shape Click the arrow, and then click the required 2D shape to create in
the 3D Window: rectangle, circle, ellipse, arrow, arc, or pentagon.
3D Objects
3D Model Click and then browse to the desired 3D model.
3D Shape Click the arrow, and then click the required 3D shape to create in
the 3D Window: cylinder, sphere, 3D arrow, 3D polygon, box,
pyramid, cone.
Building Create a new building object in the 3D Window.
Terrain Objects
341
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Modify Terrain Modify the elevation values in an area of the terrain by drawing a
polygon in the 3D Window and then setting the Modify Terrain
object’s properties in its property sheet. The surface of the terrain
is raised or lowered according to the elevation values of the
polygon's points. Different elevation behaviors allow replacing,
cropping above or cropping below the original values of the terrain.
The interior of the polygon can be flat or irregular in shape.
Hole on Terrain Select this icon to cut a hole in the terrain based on a polygon that
exposes the other side of the terrain through the opening.
Dynamic Objects
Ground Object Create a new ground vehicle object in the 3D Window and load its
route from external file.
Aerial Object Create a new air vehicle object in the 3D Window.
Move by Time Create a dynamic object’s route that begins and ends at specific
times.
Libraries
Data Library Set of graphic elements you can add to your project. See “Loading
Objects from the Data Library” in this chapter for information. The
Data Library has both local and online objects. Note that online
models require an Internet connection.
Sketchup Warehouse An online repository of 3D models you can add to your project. See
“Loading Objects from Sketchup Warehouse” in this chapter for
information.
Selecting Objects for Editing
You can select a single object or multiple objects for editing from the Project Tree and the 3D Window.
Selecting a Single Object from the Project Tree
To select a single object from the Project Tree:
In the Project Tree, right-click the object, and then from the object’s shortcut menu, select
Properties.
The object’s property sheet opens.
Selecting a Single Object from the 3D Window
To select a single object from the 3D Window:
1. On the Home tab, in the Selection group, click Select.
2. In the 3D Window, select the object. A yellow frame surrounds the object and the object’s property
sheet opens.
To turn off the select mode:
On the Home tab, in the Selection group, toggle off the Select command, or close the property
sheet.
342
TerraExplorer User Guide
Selecting Multiple Objects from the Project Tree
To select multiple objects from the Project Tree:
1. In the Project Tree, select the required objects. See “Selecting Sequential Tree Items” and “Selecting
Non-Sequential Tree Items” in the “Using the Project Tree” chapter for more information. If all the
objects are in a group, click the group.
2. Right-click, and then from the shortcut menu, select Properties.
The Multi-Edit property sheet opens.
Selecting Multiple Objects from the 3D Window
To select multiple objects from the 3D Window:
1. On the Home tab, in the Selection group, click Select.
2. Press and hold the CTRL key.
3. In the 3D Window, select each of the objects you want. A yellow frame surrounds each of the
selected objects.
Note: If you want to deselect an object, click the previously selected object while the CTRL key is
still pressed. The object becomes deselected in the same manner as it was selected.
4. Right-click and then from the shortcut menu, select Properties. The Multi-Edit property sheet opens.
Selecting All Objects in a Selected Area in the 3D Window
You can select an area in the 3D Window and edit all the objects within the area.
To select objects in a selected area in the 3D Window:
1. On the Home tab, in the Selection group, click the arrow under Select and then click Area
Selection.
2. In the 3D Window, select the area polygon points by clicking the mouse. You must select at least
three points in the 3D Window.
3. Set the selection area by right-clicking. All objects within this selection area are marked with yellow
selection frames.
Note: The individual objects are only marked with the yellow selection frames once the selection
process is complete.
Note: Do not overlap the lines of the selection polygon with each other. This may result in an
erroneous selection.
Note: You can repeat steps 2 and 3 several times until you get the required selection.
4. Right-click on the selection, and then from the shortcut menu, select Properties.
The Multi-Edit property sheet opens.
Note: The area selection tool does not affect the selection in the Project Tree.
To turn off the Area Selection mode:
On the View tab, in the Selection group, toggle off the Area Selection command.
Working with the Property Sheet
The property sheet is the main editing tool for all TerraExplorer Pro objects. The property sheet displays
all the parameters for the selected object and their values. The property sheet also determines the
343
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
operation mode for editing the objects in the 3D Window. See “Editing Objects in the 3D Window” in this
chapter for further information.
If a group of objects is selected for editing, the property sheet displays a set of common parameters. See
“Multi-Editing” in this chapter for further information.
Property Sheet
The property sheet has the following fields:
Property Sheet Field Description
Group Contains a group of parameters
Parameter Name Contains the name of each parameter
Parameter Value Contains the current value of each parameter
Help Text Displays the help text for the currently selected parameter
If a Group is selected for editing, the property sheet displays a tab for the group parameters and a tab for
the object parameters.
344
TerraExplorer User Guide
Group Property Sheet
If a feature layer that includes an annotation symbol is selected for editing, the property sheet displays a
tab for the layer common parameters, a tab for the features parameters (point; polyline or polygon) and a
tab for the annotations parameters. When loading feature layers, point annotation objects can be created
in the center of each layer feature, which can be used to convey information, textually or graphically,
relating to the feature.
Select the Field by Attribute button to define an expression that calculates the value of the field based
on the attribute value of each object in the layer.
Feature Layer Property Sheet
Opening the Property Sheet
To open an object’s property sheet:
In the Project Tree, right-click the object, and then from the object’s shortcut menu, select
Properties. The property sheet opens.
345
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Navigating in the Property Sheet
The parameters in the property sheet are divided into groups according to their association.
To expand a group of parameters:
Click the + sign near the name of the group or double-click the group’s name.
To collapse a group of parameters:
Click the - sign near the name of the group or double-click the group’s name.
Editing Fields
To change the value of a parameter:
1. Click the parameter’s name or value to set the focus on the parameter.
You can also set the focus by scrolling up and down between the parameters using the arrow keys.
2. For each field type use the following method:
Field Type Description
Text Field Click again with the mouse on the value field to get an edit cursor
and edit the current text string. You can start typing a new text
without getting the edit cursor first. This entirely replaces the old
text with the new text. Press the ENTER key or choose another
parameter to accept the update or press ESC to cancel and
restore the previous text.
There are three types of unique text fields:
Text parameter for Text Label: The Text parameter of the
Text Label object uses the Enter Label Text dialog box. When
you start typing text, or click the Edit button, the dialog box
opens. You can then edit the multiple lines of text. Click OK to
accept the new text or Cancel to restore the previous text.
Tooltip parameter: The Tooltip parameter can accept
multiline strings using the ENTER key. To accept the changes
for this parameter you must choose another parameter in the
property sheet or close the property sheet window.
Attributes parameter: All the parameters that were loaded
from a native feature layer are placed in the Attributes group.
The legal data type for each of the parameters in this group is
displayed in the Help text field. When you enter text in the
value field, only valid input is updated and saved.
Number Field Click again with the mouse on the value field to get an edit cursor
and edit the current number.
You can start typing a new number without getting the edit cursor
first. This entirely replaces the old number with the new number.
Press the ENTER key or choose another parameter to accept the
update or press ESC to cancel and restore the previous number.
You can also use the up and down buttons at the right side of the
value field. Click and hold the buttons to change the value. The
longer you hold the buttons the bigger the steps between the
values are. Every value-change from the up and down buttons
346
TerraExplorer User Guide
affects the object immediately and you cannot restore the old
value.
Drop-down Lists Click again with the mouse on the value field to open the drop-
down list. Select the new value using the mouse or the arrow keys.
Press the ENTER key or choose another parameter to accept the
update or press ESC to cancel and restore the previous value.
Buttons There are two types of buttons:
Button: Click once to enable the operation, or click it again to
disable.
Push Button - Click once to perform the operation.
Special Text Fields There are several custom-made value fields. You can edit these
fields as regular text fields or select the open button, at the right
side of the field, to open the special edit dialog box.
Color Field: Click to open the Colors dialog box.
File Field: Click to open the Browse dialog box.
Message Field: Click to open the Message dialog box.
See “Messages and Tooltips” in this chapter for further
information.
Editing Fields by Value
After loading a native feature layer with attribute fields, you can apply different properties such as line
color or cylinder height, based on the attribute field values of the objects.
See “About Basing Native Feature Layer Properties on Layer Attribute Fields ” in the “Feature Layers”
chapter for further information.
Multi-Editing
When you multi-select objects from the Project Tree or from the 3D Window, the Multi-Edit property
sheet opens.
The property sheet includes a set of common parameters for the different objects. Some of the
parameters only affect objects from a specific type (i.e., parameters that affect only text labels) whereas
others affect all of the objects in the selection. Each change in one of the parameters updates all the
objects to which this parameter applies.
Only parameters that are relevant to at least one object in the selected group are displayed in the Multi-
Edit property sheet. If all the selected objects have one or more parameters with the same values, these
values are displayed.
The parameters in the Multi-Edit property sheet are divided into eight groups:
Parameter Description
Appearance Visible appearance parameters relevant to all objects.
Line Style Line style parameters relevant to all objects.
Position Allows you to change the location of the objects.
Set the offset of the X, Y and Altitude from the current location of
each object.
347
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: The delta values are relative to the object’s locations at the
time the Multi-Edit property sheet was opened. For
example, if you set the delta X to 10 meters and afterward
to 20 meters, all objects move 20 meters from their
location at the time you opened the property sheet.
General General parameters relevant to all objects.
Label Options Label appearance parameters.
This group is relevant to text and image labels.
Label Geometry Label sizes and geometry parameters.
This group is relevant to text and image labels.
Label Alignment Label alignment parameters.
This group is relevant to text and image labels.
3D Model Parameters that are relevant to 3D model objects (static and
dynamic).
Dynamic Objects Parameters relevant to dynamic objects.
Texture Parameters relevant to objects with textures.
Buildings Parameters relevant to building objects.
Adjusting the Property Sheet Window Size
To change the size of the property sheet window:
1. Place the cursor over one of the four corners of the window.
2. When the cursor becomes a double-headed arrow, click and hold the mouse. Adjust the window to
the desired size by dragging the cursor.
Note: The property sheet window is always placed on top of the TerraExplorer main window.
Editing Objects in the 3D Window
You can edit objects directly in the 3D Window. On the top bar of the property sheet appear the mode
buttons. These buttons determine how the objects in the 3D Window are manipulated.
You can move the object in the XY plane and on the Z Axis. For some objects, you can edit either the
entire object or specific nodes. Other objects, like buildings, provide more complex features for 3D
Window editing.
Changing the Position of an Object
Any of the following node operations can be performed to change the position of an object in the 3D
Window:
Note: You can switch between the different move modes by pressing and holding down the shortcut
keys indicated below.
Move the object in the XY plane
Move the object in the Z plane
Move the object in the XY and Z planes based on where the mouse is pointing in the 3D Window
348
TerraExplorer User Guide
Moving an Object in the XY Plane
To move an object in the XY plane:
1. Select a single object for editing. See the “Selecting Objects for Editing” section in this chapter for
further information.
2. On the top bar of the object’s property sheet, click the Edit Object icon and the XY Plane icon
(Shortcut key: 1).
3. In the 3D Window, place the cursor over the object or the selection frame. The cursor changes to
Move mode .
4. Click the object, and drag it to the required location in the XY Plane. Release the left mouse button to
set the object at the current location.
Moving an Object in the Z Plane
To move an object in the Z plane:
1. Select a single object for editing. See the “Selecting Objects for Editing” section in this chapter for
further information.
2. On the top bar of the object’s property sheet, click the Edit Object icon and the Z Axis icon
(Shortcut key: 2).
3. In the 3D Window, place the cursor over the object. The cursor changes to a vertical arrow .
4. Click the object and drag the cursor up and down to change the object’s altitude. Release the mouse
button to set the object at the current altitude.
Moving an Object Based on Where the Mouse is Pointing in the 3D Window
This mode is recommended for positioning an object based on where the mouse is pointing in the 3D
Window. This makes it easier to move an object on a vertical plane or above a 3DML layer or other terrain
object. You can also snap the object to another object.
To move an object to where the mouse is pointing in the 3D Window:
1. Select a single object for editing. See the “Selecting Objects for Editing” section in this chapter for
further information.
2. On the top bar of the object’s property sheet, click the Edit Object icon and then do either of the
following:
If you want to set position based on mouse and snap the object to another object, click the XYZ
Snap Magnet icon (Shortcut key: 4).
If you don’t want to snap the object to another object, click the XYZ Magnet icon (Shortcut
key: 3).
Note: This mode is available for objects with any Altitude Method other than On Terrain.
3. In the 3D Window, place the cursor over the object or the selection frame. The cursor changes to
XYZ Magnet mode .
4. Click the object, and drag it to the required location in the 3D Window. Release the left mouse button
to set the object at the current location. If snapping to an object, move and snap the object to an edge
or vertex of any existing polyline, polygon, or 2D shape.
349
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Editing a 2D or 3D Object Using Object Handles
You can use the object handles for resizing, repositioning, and rotating an object.
(3D Model) Object Handles
The following 2D objects can be modified with object handles:
Rectangle
Regular Polygon
Arrow
Circle
Ellipse
Arc
The following 3D objects can be modified with object handles:
3D Model
Arrow
Pyramid
Cone
Sphere
350
TerraExplorer User Guide
Cylinder
Box
To edit an object using object handles:
1. Select a single object for editing. See the “Selecting Objects for Editing” section in this chapter for
further information.
2. On the property sheet’s top bar, click the XY Plane icon . The selection box around the object
changes to the “modify selection box”.
3. Use the object handles to edit the object:
Object Handle Description
Corner Resizers Drag the corner resizer inwards or outwards. This causes the other
corners to shift in the same direction, thus changing the object’s
width, length, and height (for 3D objects) simultaneously, and
maintaining the model’s aspect ratio.
Side Resizers Drag the side resizer inwards or outwards, to change either the
object’s length or width or height (for 3D objects) of the object.
Note: In 3D models, the side resizer maintains the model’s
aspect ratio.
Arrow Resizers 3D Objects
Drag the arrow resizers inwards or outwards to change the object
height.
Every 3D object has two arrow resizers, one at the object top and
the other at the object base.
3D Models
Drag any of the control arrows in or out.
Every 3D model has three arrow resizers, for each of the X, Y, and
Z axes.
When Aspect ratio is set to Yes in the property sheet, all three
arrow resizers are yellow. When any one of the arrow resizers
is dragged in or out, the other dimensions of the model are
changed simultaneously, to maintain the original proportional
relationship between the width, length, and height.
When Aspect ratio is set to No in the model’s property sheet,
each of the three arrow resizers is a different color (blue – z
axis, green – y axis, red- x axis), indicating that each
dimension of the model can be resized independently of the
other dimensions.
Rotators Use the rotators to rotate the object.
Every 3D object has three rotators to rotate the object around the
yaw, the pitch and the roll axis. Hover on the rotator to display the
rotation axis and perimeter.
Modifying Object Nodes
Any of the following node operations can be performed:
Moving a Node in the XY Plane
351
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Moving a Node in the Z Plane
Moving a Node Based on Where the Mouse is Pointing
Adding a Node to an Object
Deleting a Node from an Object
Moving a Node in the XY Plane
To move a node in the XY plane in the 3D Window:
1. Select a single object for editing. See the “Selecting Objects for Editing” section in this chapter for
further information.
2. On the top bar of the object’s property sheet, click both the Edit Nodes icon and the XY Plane
icon .
3. In the 3D Window, place the cursor over one of the object’s nodes. The node turns blue, and the
cursor changes to Move mode .
4. Click the node and drag it to the required location in the XY Plane. Release the mouse button to set
the node at the current location.
Moving a Node in the Z Plane
To move a node in the Z plane in the 3D Window:
1. Select a single object for editing. See the “Selecting Objects for Editing” section in this chapter for
further information.
2. On the top bar of the object’s property sheet, click both the Edit Nodes icon and the Z Axis icon
.
3. In the 3D Window, place the cursor over one of the object’s nodes. The node turns blue, and the
cursor changes to Move mode .
4. Click the node and drag it up and down to change the node’s altitude. Release the mouse button to
set the node at the current altitude.
Moving a Node Based on Where the Mouse is Pointing
This mode is recommended for moving nodes of an object that is on a vertical plane or above a 3DML
layer or other terrain object.
To move a node based on where the mouse is pointing:
1. Select a single object for editing. See the “Selecting Objects for Editing” section in this chapter for
further information.
2. On the top bar of the object’s property sheet, click the Edit Nodes icon and then do either of the
following:
If you want to set position based on mouse and snap the node to another object, click the XYZ
Snap Magnet icon .
If you don’t want to snap the object to another object, click the XYZ Magnet icon .
Note: This mode is available for objects with any Altitude Method other than On Terrain.
352
TerraExplorer User Guide
3. In the 3D Window, place the cursor over one of the object’s nodes. The node turns blue, and the
cursor changes to XYZ Magnet mode .
4. Click the node and drag it to the required location in the 3D Window. Release the mouse button to set
the node at the current location. If snapping to an object, move and snap the node to an edge (green
dot) or vertex (blue dot) of any existing polyline, polygon, or 2D shape.
Adding a Node to an Object
You can add a node to an object that is built from a few nodes (e.g., Polyline, 2D and 3D Polygon).
To add a node:
1. Select a single object for editing. See the “Selecting Objects for Editing” section in this chapter for
further information.
2. On the top bar of the object’s property sheet, click the Edit Nodes icon . A red dot appears
wherever a node can be added to the object.
3. If you want to add a node, in the 3D Window, place the cursor over a red dot (it immediately turns
light blue and the cursor changes to Move mode ), and then drag it to the required location.
Deleting a Node from an Object
You can delete an existing node from an object that is built from a few nodes (e.g., Polyline, 2D and 3D
Polygon).
To delete a node:
1. Select a single object for editing. See the “Selecting Objects for Editing” section in this chapter for
further information.
2. On the top bar of the object’s property sheet, click the Edit Nodes icon .
3. In the 3D Window, place the cursor over the object’s node you want to delete. The node turns blue,
and the cursor changes to Move mode .
4. Right-click and select Delete Node on the shortcut menu.
Navigating while Editing an Object
To switch back to the regular navigation mode while editing an object:
On the top bar of the object’s property sheet, click the Select Mode icon .While editing an object
you can point and drag to navigate in the drag mode. See “Navigating in the Drag Mode” in the
“Navigating in the 3D World” chapter for more information.
353
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Navigating while Editing an Object
Messages and Tooltips
You can add a message and tooltip to any object in the project.
What is a TerraExplorer Message?
A message is a text string, HTML page, an image, a script code, multiple links or any other file you can
display or run in one of the TerraExplorer Pro panels, a floating window or a floating pop-up window. The
floating window is the default html browser defined in your system.
You can assign a message to any object, location, and Project Tree message element, and activate one
as part of a presentation. You can also assign a message to be displayed at the beginning of the project.
See “General” in the “Setting the Project” chapter for further information.
Message types:
Type of Message Description
Text A multiline text string.
Note: A text message can also consist of HTML code, in which
case it will display as an HTML page.
You can display a text message in any one of the TerraExplorer
Pro containers. You cannot display a text message in a floating
window.
HTML/Image A full path name or URL address of a web site, HTML page or
image file.
You can display the HTML page in any one of the TerraExplorer
Pro containers, or in a floating html browser. Image files that are
supported by the browser also open in a TerraExplorer panel.
354
TerraExplorer User Guide
For feature layers, you can set different messages for different
features using attribute values, e.g.,
http://www.skylineglobe.com/CitiesLayer/[type].png
File A full path name or URL address of an image or any other file
name.
For security reasons, the file is opened in an HTML browser. If the
browser supports this file type (i.e., BMP file), it appears in the
selected container. If the browser does not support this file type or
there are security restrictions, the browser displays the appropriate
error or warning message. Image file types can be displayed in all
the containers. Other file types must be assigned to the floating
browser.
Script A VBScript code that uses the TerraExplorer API.
The script can perform any API custom operation, including
working with the object that was clicked using the “this” operator.
See “Script Messages” in the section below for further information.
Links A message with links to multiple categorized files and/or URL
addresses.
See "Messages Displaying Links to Multiple Files" in this chapter
for further information.
Attributes A message that displays selected attribute field values of an object.
Note: This feature is enabled only for feature layers that have
attribute fields information.
See “Loading Layer Attribute Fields” in the "Feature Layers"
chapter and "Attributes Messages" in this chapter for further
information.
When Does the Message Appear?
Option Description
Locations The message appears when you double-click the location’s name
in the Project Tree.
Objects The message appears when you double-click the object’s name in
the Project Tree or click the object in the 3D Window.
Groups (In locked state) The message appears when you double-click the group’s name in
the Project Tree.
Layers The message appears when you double-click the layer’s name in
the Project Tree.
Presentations The message appears when the presentation is played at the step
in the presentation at which it was set to be activated.
Project Tree Message The message appears when you double-click the message’s name
in the Project Tree.
Start Message The message appears upon opening of a project.
Adding Messages
Add a Message to a Location, Object, or Group
355
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Create a Tree Message
Cancel a Message
Adding a Message to a Location, Object, or Group
To assign a message to an object or group:
1. Open the location, object or group’s property sheet.
2. Click on the Message parameter and then click the Edit button. The Create Message dialog box
opens.
3. Edit the message parameters and click OK. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in this
chapter. The number of the message appears in the Message’s value field.
Creating a Tree Message
To create a Project Tree message:
1. On the Home tab, in the Add group, click Project Tree and then click Create Tree Message.
The Create Message dialog box opens.
2. Enter the required information. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in this chapter for further
information.
Cancelling a Message
To cancel an existing message:
1. Open the Create Message dialog box.
2. Click Reset and then click OK. The -1 number appears in the Message’s value field to indicate that
there is no message associated with this object.
Using the Create Message Dialog Box
To create a message:
1. Open the Create Message dialog box. See “Adding Messages” in this chapter for information.
356
TerraExplorer User Guide
Create Message Dialog Box
2. Enter values for the following parameters:
Parameter Description
Type Determines the type of message to be displayed.
Select Text, HTML/Image, File, Script or Links from the drop-down
list.
Path Enter the path for a local HTML/Image file, remote URL address or
any other file to be displayed. If you have selected the Text, Script
or Links type, this field is unavailable.
Client Determines the panel in which the message is displayed.
Select Left Dock, Main View, Message Bar, Floating Browser or
Floating Pop-up from the drop-down list. If you select Floating
Browser, the message is displayed in your default Internet
browser. You cannot select floating Browser for Text messages.
Bring to Front Select this check box so that the tab that contains this message is
the active tab (if there is more than one tab). This option is
available only when Left Dock or Main View was selected in the
Client field.
Caption This option is only available if Floating Popup is selected in the
Client field.
357
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Type the caption text in the Caption field.
Left/Top This option is only available if Floating Popup is selected in the
Client field.
Set the floating pop-up message initial display position. In the X
and Y boxes, type the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the
message box upper left corner respectively, relative to the top-left
corner of the 3D Window.
Use default position This option is only available if Floating Popup is selected in the
Client field and the callout option is cleared.
Select the Use default Position check box to return to the default
message box position.
Width/Height This option is only available if Floating Popup is selected in the
Client field.
Set the floating pop-up message initial size. Type the floating
message box width and height in pixels.
Auto size Select this check box to automatically set the message box size
according to the size of the HTML page.
Note: This option is not applicable for text messages (that do not
contain HTML content).
Reset to Default Size This option is only available if Floating Popup is selected in the
Client field.
Select the Reset to Default Size check box to set the height and
width of the message box to its default size.
Close after This option is only available if Floating Popup is selected in the
Client field.
Select the Close after check box to set the message display
duration, and type the timeout duration in the Seconds box.
This option is only available if Floating Popup is selected in the
Client field.
Select the geo-referencing check box to add a pointer from the
message box to the object.
Text Enter a multi-lined text string to be displayed in the selected client.
This field is only available if you selected Text in the Type field.
Script This option is only available if Script is selected in the Type field.
Enter a JavaScript code to be executed using the TerraExplorer
API. Unless you selected Script, this field is unavailable. See
“Script Messages” in this chapter for further information.
Preview Click Preview to see the selected HTML page or file in the default
Windows application.
Reset Click Reset to delete the message.
3. Click OK.
Script Messages
With Script messages, you can enter JavaScript code that uses the TerraExplorer API, into the Script
area in the Create Message dialog box. This script will be executed when the message is activated. For
a complete description of the API, see the TerraExplorer Pro Programmer’s Guide.
358
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: Legacy VBScript is also supported and will be displayed in the Create Message dialog box
without the script tags as VBScript code.
You can use the following constants that do not need to be declared:
Constant Description
ThisXXX The “thisXXX” constant represents the ITerraExplorerObject XXX
derived object that the message is assigned to. For example, for a
Text Label, you can enter the following script:
<script type = "javascript">
alert("Text is: " + This71.text);
</script>
When the message is activated, a message box appears with the
text content of the text label.
SGWorld701 Exposes the SGWorld interface.
You can use all ISGWorld properties and methods. For example,
this script:
<script type = "javascript">
SGWorld71.Open ("c:\\project.fly" );
</script>
loads the specified fly file when the message is activated.
Note: Older interfaces, e.g., This70 & SGWorld70 are also supported, but using the latest versions is
recommended.
Messages Displaying Links to Multiple Files
A Links message displays links to multiple documents or files. You can organize the hyperlinks into
categories like pictures, videos and text.
You can activate a hyperlink to launch the appropriate file viewer based on file association. For example,
a *.doc hyperlink launches the Microsoft Word application (if installed) and displays the document’s
content. For security reasons, the file is opened in an HTML browser. If the browser supports this file type
(i.e., BMP file), it appears in the selected panel. If the browser does not support this fil e type or there are
security restrictions, the browser displays the appropriate error or warning message.
359
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Create Message Dialog Box for Links Type
Use the following options to set the links parameters:
Option Description
Title Enter the title text.
The text appears as the heading of the message.
Image A full path name or URL address of an image file that is displayed
in the message.
Description Enter the text you want to appear in the message.
Use default path Select the Use default path check box to style the links message
using a default TerraExplorer XSL (Extensible Stylesheet
Language) For more information see XSL Path below.
XSL Path Enter the path for an XSL file to use to style the Links XML content.
See “Styling Links and Attributes Messages with XSL” in this
chapter for further information
Links table Description: a hyperlink text to the referenced document. The
360
TerraExplorer User Guide
text is displayed under the Description column in the
message.
Link: A full path name or URL address of the document.
Category: the category of the document that is displayed
under the Description column. You can display links from all
categories, or from a specific category.
Tool tip: Tooltip text to appear when the mouse cursor is
placed over the link.
Add Click the Add button to add a link in the Links table.
Remove Select a row from the Links table and click Remove to delete a
link.
Select a row from the Links table and use the Move Up/Down
arrows to move it up or down.
Attributes Messages
You can create an Attributes message to display selected attribute field values of an object. This feature
is enabled only for feature layers that have attribute fields information.
See “Using Attribute Fields” in the "Feature Layers" chapter for further information.
361
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Create Message Dialog Box - Attributes
The Attributes message consists of the following parameters:
Item Description
Title Enter the title text.
The text appears as the heading of the message.
Image A full path name or URL address of an image file that is displayed
in the message.
Description Enter the text you want to appear in the message.
362
TerraExplorer User Guide
Use default path Select the Use default path check box to style the links message
using a default TerraExplorer XSL (Extensible Stylesheet
Language) For more information see XSL Path below.
XSL Path Enter the path for an XSL file to use to style the Links' XML
content. See “Styling Links and Attributes Messages with XSL” in
this chapter for further information.
Attribute Select the field attribute to display from the drop-down list. The
name of the attribute field is automatically filled in the Description
column. The value column is filled with the attribute name in
brackets.
Description The textual description of the attribute.
Value Use one of the following expression formats:
Attribute Value: Attribute name in brackets, e.g., [ATTRIB],
displays the values of the attribute field for the object.
Textual expression: Attrib name in brackets with other text,
e.g., Text Before [ATTRIB] Text After.
VBScript expression: Bounded by <>, e.g.,
<LCase(“[ATTRIB] ”) & “Text”>.
Tooltip Type a tooltip text to appear when the mouse cursor is placed over
the attribute in the Message.
Styling Links and Attributes Messages with XSL
Links and Attribute messages store content in an XML document. The content is then styled using an
XSL (Extensible Stylesheet Language) file for display in the message. You can use the default XSL
provided by TerraExplorer by selecting the Use default path check box or set a path to your XSL in the
XSL Path field.
The examples below show dialog entries, and their respective resulting XML files and messages
displayed with the TerraExplorer default XSL. The default XSL code is also provided for reference.
Links Messages
The following is an example showing how the content entered in the Create Message dialog box for
Links, is put into an XML. The XML is then formatted with the default TerraExplorer XSL and displayed in
a message.
The following XML is automatically produced:
<DOCUMENT_LIST name="Links">
<DOCTITLE>
<TITLE>"My Title"</TITLE>
<DESCRIPTION>"This is a sample Links Message"</DESCRIPTION>
<IMAGE>"http://www.skylinesoft.com/logo.gif"</IMAGE>
</DOCTITLE>
<LIST_BODY>
<COLUMNS>
363
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
<COLUMN class="urlLinkDescription" urlColumnIdLink="2">
<ID>0</ID>
<NAME>Description</NAME>
<WIDTH>150</WIDTH>
<DEFAULT_VALUE>Link</DEFAULT_VALUE>
<HIDE>0</HIDE>
</COLUMN>
<COLUMN class="urlLink">
<ID>1</ID>
<NAME>Link</NAME>
<WIDTH>150</WIDTH>
<DEFAULT_VALUE>http://</DEFAULT_VALUE>
<HIDE>1</HIDE>
</COLUMN>
<COLUMN>
<ID>3</ID>
<NAME>Category</NAME>
<WIDTH>150</WIDTH>
<HIDE>0</HIDE>
</COLUMN>
<COLUMN class="ToolTip">
<ID>2</ID>
<NAME>Tooltip</NAME>
<WIDTH>150</WIDTH>
<HIDE>1</HIDE>
</COLUMN>
</COLUMNS>
<ROWS>
<ROW>
<CELL>"Link 1"</CELL>
<CELL>"http://www.link1.com"</CELL>
<CELL>"URLs"</CELL>
<CELL>"Tooltip1"</CELL>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<CELL>"Link 2"</CELL>
<CELL>"http://www.link2.com"</CELL>
<CELL>"URLs"</CELL>
<CELL>"Tooltip2"</CELL>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<CELL>"Image 1"</CELL>
364
TerraExplorer User Guide
<CELL>"http://www.skylinesoft.com/image.gif"</CELL>
<CELL>"Images"</CELL>
<CELL>"Tooltip Image 1"</CELL>
</ROW>
</ROWS>
</LIST_BODY>
</DOCUMENT_LIST>
The message is displayed as follows:
Multiple Files XSL Styled Message
The following is the default TerraExplorer XSL used when the Use Default Path check box is selected for
a hyper-link multiple files message:
<?xml version='1.0'?>
<xsl:stylesheet xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform" version="1.0">
<xsl:template match="/">
<html>
<META http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-16"/>
<script language="jscript">
<![CDATA[
var allLinksTable;
function Sort(column_index)
{
var linksTable = document.all('linksTable');
for (i=1; i < linksTable.rows.length; i++)
{
365
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
var row =linksTable.rows(i);
for (j=i+1; j < linksTable.rows.length; j++)
{
var row1 = linksTable.rows(j);
var str1 = row.cells(column_index-1).innerText;
str1 = str1.toLowerCase();
var str2 = row1.cells(column_index-1).innerText;
str2 = str2.toLowerCase();
if( str1> str2)
{
linksTable.moveRow(j,i);
row =linksTable.rows(i)
}
}
}
}
function document_onload()
{
var linksTable = document.all('linksTable');
allLinksTable = linksTable.cloneNode(true);
if(CatCombo.options.length>0)
return;
var Category = document.createElement("OPTION");
Category.text="All Categories";
Category.value=1;
CatCombo.add(Category);
for (i=1; i < linksTable.rows.length; i++)
{
var row =linksTable.rows(i);
var catName = row.cells(1).innerText;
var bFound=false;
var arr = CatCombo.options;
for(j=0;j<arr.length;j++)
{
if(row.cells(1).innerText == arr[j].innerText)
{
bFound = true;
break;
}
}
366
TerraExplorer User Guide
if(bFound==false)
{
var Category = document.createElement("OPTION");
Category.text=catName;
Category.value=i+1;
CatCombo.add(Category);
}
}
CatCombo.selectedIndex=0;
CatCombo.focus();
}
function CatCombo_onchange()
{
var linksTable;
if(CatCombo.selectedIndex==0)
linksTable = allLinksTable;
else
{
linksTable = allLinksTable.cloneNode(true);
for(j=1;j<linksTable.rows.length;j++)
{
var row = linksTable.rows(j);
if(row.cells(1).innerText!=CatCombo.options[CatCombo.selectedIndex].text )
{
row.removeNode();
j--;
}
}
}
var oldlinksTable = document.all('linksTable');
oldlinksTable.replaceNode(linksTable);
Sort(1);
}
]]>
</script>
<head>
<style>
.s8 {font-family: Arial, Helvetica; font-size: 11px; font-style: normal; font-weight: normal; color: #3B3B3B; text-decoration:
none;}
367
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
.s8w {font-family: Arial, Helvetica; font-size: 11px; font-style: normal; font-weight: normal; color: #FFFFFF; text-decoration:
underline;}
.s12 {font-family: Arial, Helvetica; font-size: 34px; font-style: normal; font-weight: normal; color: #000000; text-decoration:
none;}
TD {border:solid 1px #233141; border-top:solid 0px white;}
</style>
</head>
<body bgcolor="#FFFFFF" leftmargin="0" topmargin="0" marginwidth="0" marginheight="0">
<script LANGUAGE="javascript" FOR="window" EVENT="onload">
document_onload()
</script>
<table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0" width="100%" class="s8">
<tr >
<xsl:if test= "string-length(//DOCUMENT_LIST/DOCTITLE/IMAGE/text())>7">
<td align="right" style="border:solid 0px white;filter:progid:DXImageTransform.Microsoft.Gradient(endColorstr='#FFFFFF',
startColorstr='#3F5875', gradientType='0');">
<img src="{//DOCUMENT_LIST/DOCTITLE/IMAGE/text()}"/>
</td>
</xsl:if>
<td align='center' colspan='0' class="s12" style="border:solid 0px
white;filter:progid:DXImageTransform.Microsoft.Gradient(endColorstr='#FFFFFF', startColorstr='#3F5875',
gradientType='0');"><xsl:value-of select="//DOCUMENT_LIST/DOCTITLE/TITLE"/></td>
</tr>
</table>
<br /><span style="margin-left:5px"></span><b><xsl:copy-of
select="//DOCUMENT_LIST/DOCTITLE/DESCRIPTION"/></b>
<br /><br />
<span style="margin-left:5px"></span> Show links:
<SELECT language="javascript" id="CatCombo" style="LEFT: 12px; WIDTH: 117px; TOP: 16px"
onchange="return CatCombo_onchange()" name="CatCombo">
</SELECT>
<br />
<br />
<table id="linksTable" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="1" align="center" class="s8" width="98%">
<tr class="rowHeader" style="cursor:pointer;background-color:#3F5875">
<xsl:call-template name="ShowColumnHeader">
<xsl:with-param name="showIndex" select="1"/>
<xsl:with-param name="index" select="1"/>
</xsl:call-template>
368
TerraExplorer User Guide
</tr>
<xsl:for-each select="//COLUMNS/COLUMN">
<xsl:if test = "@class='ToolTip'">
<xsl:apply-templates select="//ROWS/ROW">
<xsl:with-param name="tooltip_pos" select="position()"/>
</xsl:apply-templates>
</xsl:if>
</xsl:for-each>
</table>
</body>
</html>
</xsl:template>
<xsl:template name="ShowColumnHeader">
<xsl:param name="showIndex"/>
<xsl:param name="index"/>
<xsl:if test="//COLUMNS/COLUMN[$index]">
<xsl:choose>
<xsl:when test="//COLUMNS/COLUMN[$index]/HIDE=1">
<xsl:call-template name="ShowColumnHeader">
<xsl:with-param name="showIndex" select="$showIndex"/>
<xsl:with-param name="index" select="$index+1"/>
</xsl:call-template>
</xsl:when>
<xsl:otherwise>
<td align='center' class='s8w' >
<xsl:attribute name="onclick">
<xsl:text>Sort(</xsl:text><xsl:value-of
select="$showIndex"/><xsl:text>)</xsl:text>
</xsl:attribute>
<xsl:value-of select="//COLUMNS/COLUMN[$index]/NAME"/>
<xsl:call-template name="ShowColumnHeader">
<xsl:with-param name="showIndex"
select="$showIndex+1"/>
<xsl:with-param name="index" select="$index+1"/>
</xsl:call-template>
</td>
</xsl:otherwise>
369
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
</xsl:choose>
</xsl:if>
</xsl:template>
<xsl:template match="//ROWS/ROW">
<xsl:param name="tooltip_pos"/>
<tr>
<xsl:for-each select="child::*">
<xsl:variable name="cell_pos" select="position()"/>
<xsl:choose>
<xsl:when test="//COLUMNS/COLUMN[$cell_pos]/@class='urlLinkDescription'">
<xsl:variable name="column_id"
select="//COLUMNS/COLUMN[$cell_pos]/@urlColumnIdLink"/>
<td><a href="{../CELL[position()=$column_id]/text()}"
title="{../CELL[$tooltip_pos]}" target="_blank"><xsl:value-of select="."/></a></td>
</xsl:when>
<xsl:otherwise>
<xsl:choose>
<xsl:when test="//COLUMNS/COLUMN[$cell_pos]/HIDE=1">
</xsl:when>
<xsl:otherwise>
<td title="{../CELL[$tooltip_pos]}"><xsl:value-of select="text()"/></td>
</xsl:otherwise>
</xsl:choose>
</xsl:otherwise>
</xsl:choose>
</xsl:for-each>
</tr>
</xsl:template>
</xsl:stylesheet>
Attributes Messages
The following is an example showing how the content entered in the Create Message dialog box for
Attributes, is put into an XML. The XML is then formatted with the default TerraExplorer XSL and
displayed in a message.
The following XML is automatically produced:
<DOCUMENT_LIST name="Attributes">
<DOCTITLE>
<TITLE>"My Title"</TITLE>
370
TerraExplorer User Guide
<DESCRIPTION>"This is a sample Attributes Message"</DESCRIPTION>
<IMAGE>"http://www.skylinesoft.com/logo.gif"</IMAGE>
</DOCTITLE>
<LIST_BODY>
<COLUMNS>
<COLUMN>
<ID>0</ID>
<NAME>Attribute</NAME>
<WIDTH>100</WIDTH>
<HIDE></HIDE>
</COLUMN>
<COLUMN>
<ID>1</ID>
<NAME>Description</NAME>
<WIDTH>150</WIDTH>
</COLUMN>
<COLUMN>
<ID>2</ID>
<NAME>Value</NAME>
<WIDTH>150</WIDTH>
</COLUMN>
<COLUMN class="ToolTip">
<ID>3</ID>
<NAME>Tooltip</NAME>
<WIDTH>150</WIDTH>
</COLUMN>
</COLUMNS>
<ROWS>
<ROW>
<CELL>"Attribute1"</CELL>
<CELL>"Attribute1"</CELL>
<CELL>"[Attribute1]"</CELL><!-- Automatically replaced by attribute value for each
object, e.g., "Information1"-->
<CELL>"tooltip for attrib1"</CELL>
</ROW>
<ROW>
<CELL>"Attribute2"</CELL>
<CELL>"Attribute2"</CELL>
<CELL>"[Attribute2]"</CELL><!-- Automatically replaced by attribute value for each
object, e.g., "Information2"-->
<CELL>"tooltip for attrib2"</CELL>
371
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
</ROW>
</ROWS>
</LIST_BODY>
</DOCUMENT_LIST>
The message is displayed as follows:
Multiple Files XSL Style Message
The following is the default TerraExplorer XSL used when the Use Default Path check box is selected for
an attributes message:
<?xml version='1.0' encoding='UTF-8'?>
<xsl:stylesheet xmlns:xsl="http://www.w3.org/1999/XSL/Transform" version="1.0">
<xsl:template match="/">
<html>
<META http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=UTF-16"/>
<head>
<style>
.s8 {font-family: Arial, Helvetica; font-size: 11px; font-style: normal; font-weight: normal; color: #3B3B3B; text-decoration:
none;}
.s8w {font-family: Arial, Helvetica; font-size: 11px; font-style: normal; font-weight: normal; color: #FFFFFF; text-decoration:
underline;}
.s12 {font-family: Arial, Helvetica; font-size: 34px; font-style: normal; font-weight: normal; color: #000000; text-decoration:
none;}
TD {border:solid 1px #233141;}
</style>
</head>
<body bgcolor="#FFFFFF" leftmargin="0" topmargin="0" marginwidth="0" marginheight="0">
372
TerraExplorer User Guide
<table border="0" cellspacing="0" cellpadding="0" width="100%" class="s8">
<tr>
<xsl:if test= "string-length(//DOCUMENT_LIST/DOCTITLE/IMAGE/text())>7">
<td class="s12" align="right" style="border:solid 0px
white;filter:progid:DXImageTransform.Microsoft.Gradient(endColorstr='#FFFFFF', startColorstr='#3F5875',
gradientType='0');"><img src="{//DOCUMENT_LIST/DOCTITLE/IMAGE/text()}"/></td>
</xsl:if>
<td align='center' class="s12" colspan='0' style="border:solid 0px
white;filter:progid:DXImageTransform.Microsoft.Gradient(endColorstr='#FFFFFF', startColorstr='#3F5875',
gradientType='0');"><xsl:value-of select="//DOCUMENT_LIST/DOCTITLE/TITLE"/></td>
<style type="text/css">
</style>
</tr>
</table>
<table class="s8">
<tr>
<td style="border:solid 0px white;">
<span style="margin-left:5px"></span><b><xsl:copy-of select="//DOCUMENT_LIST/DOCTITLE/DESCRIPTION"/>
</b></td>
</tr>
</table>
<br></br>
<table cellspacing="0" cellpadding="2" width="98%" class="s8" style="margin-left:5px">
<xsl:for-each select="//COLUMNS/COLUMN">
<xsl:if test = "@class='ToolTip'">
<xsl:apply-templates select="//ROWS/ROW">
<xsl:with-param name="tooltip_pos" select="position()"/>
</xsl:apply-templates>
</xsl:if>
</xsl:for-each>
</table>
</body>
</html>
</xsl:template>
<xsl:template match="//ROWS/ROW">
<xsl:param name="tooltip_pos"/>
373
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
<tr>
<xsl:for-each select="child::*">
<xsl:variable name="cell_pos" select="position()"/>
<xsl:if test="//COLUMNS/COLUMN[$cell_pos]/@class='ToolTip'">
</xsl:if>
<xsl:choose>
<xsl:when test="//COLUMNS/COLUMN[$cell_pos]/@class or //COLUMNS/COLUMN[$cell_pos]/HIDE">
</xsl:when>
<xsl:otherwise>
<td title="{../CELL[$tooltip_pos]}"><xsl:value-of select="text()"/></td>
</xsl:otherwise>
</xsl:choose>
</xsl:for-each>
</tr>
</xsl:template>
</xsl:stylesheet>
Adding a Tooltip
The object’s tool tip is a text string that appears when you place the cursor, in the 3D Window, above the
object for more than half a second.
You can add the tool tip through the object’s property sheet window. The tool tip string can include more
than one line of text.
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Objects
You can copy a single object or multiple objects in the 3D Window and paste them in another location.
The new objects are added under the selected group in the Project Tree.
TerraExplorer Pro has a buffer for copied objects. Every time you perform a copy or cut function on
objects in the 3D Window, the buffer is filled with the new set of objects. You can perform the paste
function at any time until you close the project.
Using advanced clipboard mechanisms, you can generate any 2D or 3D object based on the geometry of
objects in the clipboard (e.g., generate buildings according to properties of selected polygons). You can
also use the geometry of objects in the clipboard as the input for advanced spatial queries or for Duplicate
object operations.
374
TerraExplorer User Guide
Home Tab Selection Group
Copying and Pasting Objects
To copy and paste objects:
1. In the 3D Window, select the required object/s. A yellow frame surrounds each object. See the
“Selecting Objects for Editing” section in this chapter.
2. On the Home tab, in the Selection group, click Copy (CTRL+C).
Note: You can also right-click the object and select Copy from the shortcut menu.
3. In the 3D Window, place the cursor in the new location.
4. If you want to paste the object, click the arrow below Paste, and then click one of the following:
Paste in Center of Screen - To paste in the center of the screen.
Note: You can also right-click and select Paste from the shortcut menu.
Paste in Original Place - To paste in the object’s original place.
5. If you want to generate a 2D or 3D object based on the geometry of the objects in the clipboard, do
the following:
a. Click the arrow below Paste, and then click Paste Special. The Paste Special dialog box is
displayed.
375
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Paste Special Dialog Box
b. Select the Destination Object that you want to generate, and then modify its properties as
required in the Property sheet.
c. Select whether to paste the object as an object or layer:
Paste as Objects – Create a group that contains an object for each copied object.
Paste as Layer – Create a new feature layer that contains a feature for each copied object.
d. Click Paste.
Cutting and Deleting Objects
You can cut or delete a single object or multiple objects.
Note: When you “cut” an object in the 3D Window, the object is stored in the copy/cut buffer until a new
copy or cut command is performed, so you can still restore it by performing the paste function.
When you “delete” an object, however, you cannot restore it.
To delete an object or objects, do either of the following:
In the 3D Window, select the object or objects you want to delete, and then on the Home tab, in the
Selection group, click Delete.
or
376
TerraExplorer User Guide
In the Project Tree, select the object or objects you want to delete, and then right-click and select
Delete from the shortcut menu.
To cut an object or objects:
In the 3D Window, select the object or objects you want to delete, and then on the Home tab, in the
Selection group, click Cut.
or
In the 3D Window, select the object or objects you want to delete, and then right -click, and select Cut
from the shortcut menu.
See “Selecting Objects for Editing” in this chapter for more information on selecting objects from the 3D
Window or Project Tree.
Moving Objects
You can select a single object or multiple objects in the 3D Window and move them to a new location.
See “Selecting Objects for Editing” in this chapter for information.
Note: The Move function is most effective if you want to move an object to a close by location. If you
need to move the object to a more distant location, it is easier to use the cut -paste commands.
Setting Objects for Auto-Start
You can assign any object for the Auto-Start procedure of the project. The last object you assign is used.
You must save the project for this setting to take effect. You can assign static or dynamic objects with any
activation action.
The camera performs a unique flight pattern according to the object settings.
See “Setting the Auto-Start Procedure” in the “Setting the Project” chapter for further information on how
to set objects for the Auto-Start procedure.
Attaching Objects to Other Objects
You can attach an object to another object. If the second object is in motion, the attached object follows
its movements.
You can set the distance between the two objects in all three axes. Use this feature to unite several
TerraExplorer Pro objects to one virtual unit. You can also use this feature to add movement to 2D and
3D primitives that are not natively supported by the dynamic object, by creating an empty dynamic object
and attaching the primitive to the object.
It is possible to attach more than one object to the same target object. It is also possible to attach an
object, which has another object attached to it. It is illegal to attach an object to a target object that is
attached to the first object (loop).
To attach an object to another object:
1. In the Project Tree, right-click the required object, and then from the shortcut menu select Attach
object to object. If you are attaching a stationary object to a dynamic object to add movement to it,
the object you right-click needs to be the stationary object.
2. With the “attachment” mode cursor , click the target object’s name in the Project Tree. The
Attachment property sheet opens.
Note: You can right-click anywhere in the Project Tree to cancel the operation.
377
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
3. Edit the attachment properties and close the property sheet. See “Editing the Attached Parameters” in
this chapter for more information.
Detaching an Object from another Object
To detach an object from another object:
In the Project Tree, right-click the required object, and then from the shortcut menu select Detach
from object.
Editing the Attached Parameters
You can edit the attachment properties at the time you set the attachment or by right -clicking the attached
object’s name in the Project Tree and selecting the Edit Attach Parameters option.
The attachment properties allow you to set the offset between the attached object and the target object.
All offsets are relative to the target object’s axis. If the target object has pitch and roll angles, the attached
object is positioned accordingly.
Offset Settings
In the Attachment property sheet, set the following parameters:
Parameter Options and Activities
Attachment Offsets X Offset: Enter the distance between the two objects in the X-
axis of the target object. Positive values place the object on the
left side of the target object and negative values on the right
side.
Y Offset: Enter the distance between the two objects in the Y-
axis of the target object. Positive values place the object on the
left side of the target object and negative values on the right
side.
Altitude Offset: Enter the distance between the two objects in
the Altitude-axis of the target object. Positive values place the
object above the target object and negative values below it.
378
TerraExplorer User Guide
Yaw Offset: Enter the angular difference between the two
objects in the yaw axis of the target object. Positive values
place the object on the left side of the target object and
negative values on the right side.
Pitch Offset: Enter the angular difference between the two
objects in the pitch axis of the target object. Positive values
place the object on the left side of the target object and
negative values on the right side.
Roll Offset: Enter the angular difference between the two
objects in the roll axis of the target object. Positive values
place the object on the left side of the target object and
negative values on the right side.
Attachments Objects Attached Object: Shows the name of the attached object.
This field is for information only; you cannot enter a new name.
Attached To: Shows the name of the target object to which
the selected object is attached. This field is for information
only; you cannot enter a new name.
Loading Objects from the Data Library
The Data Library has four primary sets of graphic elements (icons, models, online models, and building
textures) that you can add to your project. In addition to the local data objects, the Data Library also
includes online models that can be accessed if there is an Internet connection.
Graphic Source Description
Icons Contains 2D images that you can use with Image Labels or as a
background image for Text Labels.
The images are stored in a BMP or GIF format. This group has five
sub-groups:
Map Signs: A set of commonly used map signs.
Trees: A set of tree icons you can use to cover small areas
with trees. Although the trees are not real 3D models, they give
a sufficient tree display in many cases.
Letters and Numbers: A set of letters and numbers.
Military Signs: A set of standard icons to represent military
forces.
Flags: A set of flags from nations around the world.
Models Contains 3D models that you can add to your project.
The models are stored in .x, .xpc, .flt, .fpc or .dae file formats. This
group has four sub-groups:
Traffic Signs: A set of billboard and street sign models. The
billboards contain the Skyline logo file “bb1.bmp” as a texture.
You can make a copy of these models and textures and edit
the texture file to display a different logo or message.
379
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Ground Vehicles: A set of civilian and military vehicles.
Airplanes: A set of propeller and jet planes. The model
“Triplane-Banner” contains a banner with the texture
“advertise1.bmp”. You can make a copy of this model and
texture and edit the texture file to display a different message.
Helicopters: A set of commercial and combat helicopters.
Note: Additional online models are available from the Online
Models tab.
Online Models Contains online 3D models that you can add to your project.
Building-Textures Contains texture images that you can use for Building objects.
The images are stored in a JPG format. This group has two sub-
groups:
Side-Textures: A set of images that you can use as side
textures.
Roof-Textures: A set of images that you can use as roof
textures.
Note: The feature layers in the Data Library are set to work with projects using Globe terrain models
with Lat-Long projections. You can load the feature layers to local projection terrain only if the
project contains the projection of the terrain. See “Terrain Database” in the “Setting the Project”
chapter for further information.
To load an object from the Data Library:
1. On the Objects tab, in the Libraries group, click Data Library. The Data Library dialog box is
displayed.
380
TerraExplorer User Guide
Data Library Tool
2. Click the required tab: Icons, Models, Online Models, or Building Texture, and select the graphic item
you want to add.
3. Click on the terrain to add one or more instances of the selected item.
4. To finish the operation, right-click on the terrain or select another item.
Note: You can edit the added items using TerraExplorer Pro editing tools. See “Editing Objects in
the 3D Window” in this chapter for information.
Loading Objects from Sketchup Warehouse
Sketchup 3D Warehouse is an online repository of 3D models.
To use Sketchup Warehouse:
1. On the Objects tab, in the Libraries group, click Sketchup Warehouse. The Sketchup Warehouse
dialog box is displayed.
2. Enter the model to search for and click Search. The Sketchup 3D Warehouse Search is displayed
with a collection of relevant thumbnail images.
3. Click the thumbnail image of the model you want to download and click Download.
4. From the drop-down list of formats, select either: KMZ from Sketchup or COLLADA (.zip).
5. Save the model to your local or network drive.
381
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
6. If you downloaded a model in KMZ format, load the model into your project by using TerraExplorer’s
Load KML/KMZ command.
7. If you downloaded a COLLADA (DAE) model, open the .zip file, and extract its contents to a folder.
Then load the .dae file into your project by using TerraExplorer’s Load 3D Model command.
382
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 19 OBJECTS AND LABELS
About Objects and Labels
From the Objects tab, you can create text or image labels, 2D or 3D primitives, dynamic objects, and
terrain objects and then place them in the 3D World.
Objects Tab
Text and Image Labels
You can do any of the following:
Create a new text label
Create a new image label
Create a graphic frame to surround a text or image label
Creating a New Text Label
To create a new text label:
1. On the Objects tab, in the Label group, click Text. The Enter Label Text dialog box is displayed.
Enter Label Text Dialog Box
2. Type the text in the Enter Label Text dialog box. You must enter a text and click OK before you can
place the object in the 3D World.
3. The Text Label property sheet opens. Set the other parameters of the object. See “Text Label
Property Sheet Parameters” in this chapter for more information.
4. If you want to position the label based on where the mouse is pointing in the 3D Window, on the top
bar of the label’s property sheet, click the XYZ Magnet icon . See “Moving an Object Based on
Where the Mouse is Pointing in the 3D Window” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for more
information.
5. If you want to position the label based on where the mouse is pointing in the 3D Window and snap it
to another object, on the top bar of the label’s property sheet, click the XYZ Snap Magnet icon .
383
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
See “Moving an Object Based on Where the Mouse is Pointing in the 3D Window” in the “Working
with Objects” chapter for more information.
6. If you want to position the label in the XY plane, on the top bar of the object’s property sheet, click the
XY Plane icon . See “Moving an Object in the XY Plane” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for
more information.
7. If you want to position the label in the Z plane, on the top bar of the object’s property sheet, click the Z
Plane icon . See “Moving an Object in the Z Plane” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for more
information.
8. Place the label in the 3D Window by clicking in the desired location.
9. Continue to edit the label’s parameters or close the property sheet to finish the operation.
Example of a Text Label with a Frame
Text Label Property Sheet Parameters
Object Parameter Activity
Appearance
Name Type the description or name of the label.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the object from the
Project Tree. See “Navigating to Objects” in the “Navigating in the
3D World” chapter for information.
Line to Ground Adds a line from the label’s pivot point either to the ground or to a
custom length towards the ground.
Note: A line to ground is displayed while the label is being edited
(i.e., as long as its property sheet is open), regardless of
this property value. This property only determines whether
a line to ground will continue to display even after the
label’s property sheet is closed.
Line Length Determines the length of the line to the ground.
This parameter is available only when the “Line to Ground”
parameter is set to “Custom Length”.
Line Color Sets the color of the label’s line to ground.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff). This
parameter is available only when the “Line to Ground” option is set
to “To Ground” or “Custom Length”.
Text Options
Text Edit the text for the label.
This is the text that appears in the 3D Window.
Show Text Select Always to always display the label’s text.
384
TerraExplorer User Guide
Select On Hover to display the label’s text only when the
mouse points to the label’s icon.
Note: This field is enabled only if an image file was selected in
the Image File field of the property sheet’s Image Options
group.
Text Color Sets the foreground color of the text
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in the hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue
channel 00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Text Size Select the font size, in pixels, from the drop-down list.
Font Select the font type from the drop-down list.
Bold Select for Bold font style.
Underline Select for Underline font style.
Italic Select for Italic font style.
Multiline Justification If there is more than one line of text, this option determines the
justification of the text.
Select Left Justify, Center Justify or Right Justify.
Background Color Sets the background color of the label.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Background Opacity Enter the opacity value for the label’s background.
The background covers the area of the label that is not covered by
the text or by the image file. The opacity is defined as a
percentage, where 100% is opaque and 0% is transparent. When
the opacity is set to 0%, the characters are surrounded by a solid
background color outline to highlight the text.
Frame File Add a graphic frame to the label.
Type the name of the frame file or click the Edit button to open the
Open dialog box.
See “Label’s Frame File Format” section in this chapter for further
information on how to create frame files.
Frame Index Select the index of the frame in the frame file.
This field is only available if a frame file is selected.
See “Label’s Frame File Format” for further information on how to
create frame files.
Lock Mode Set which text label position parameters are adjusted automatically
to face the camera and which are locked to the Position group field
values (See Position group below).
Decal: The text label position and reading direction are
adjusted automatically to face the camera.
Axis: All text label position parameters are locked to the
Position group field values.
Axis Text Up: The text label reading direction is adjusted
385
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
automatically to face the camera whereas the text label
position is set to the Position group field values (see below).
Axis (Auto Pitch): The text label pitch angle is adjusted
automatically to face the camera whereas the other position
parameters are set to the Position group field values.
Axis (Auto Pitch Text Up): The text label reading direction
and pitch angle are adjusted automatically to face the camera.
The other position parameters are set to the Position group
field values.
Image Options
Image Color Sets the color of the image.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Image Opacity Enter the opacity value for the image.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Image Max Size Enter a maximum size in pixels for the image.
Image File Add an image as a background to the text.
Type the name of the image file or click the Edit button to open the
Open dialog box. BMP, JPEG, GIF, PNG and ICO formats are
supported.
To use a label that contains only an image (without text), select the
Image Label option on the Objects tab.
Position
Altitude Method Sets the altitude method to be used by the label:
Select Relative to Terrain to place the label’s pivot point at a
specified altitude above the ground.
Select Absolute to place the label’s pivot point at a specified
altitude above the terrain database vertical datum base
ellipsoid.
Altitude Enter the altitude, as defined in Altitude Method, for the text label’s
pivot point.
X Enter the X-coordinate for the text label’s pivot point.
Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the text label’s pivot point.
MGRS The coordinates of the text label’s pivot point in Military Grid
Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available
if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog
box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for
more information.
Yaw Determines the direction angle of the text label along the vertical
axis relative to north.
Pitch Determines the tilt angle of the text label along its lateral axis
relative to the horizon.
386
TerraExplorer User Guide
Roll Determines the roll angle of the text label along its longitudinal
(front-to-back) axis.
Pivot Alignment Determines the alignment of the label relative to its pivot point.
Select Top, Left; Top, Center; Top, Right; Center, Left; Center,
Center; Center, Right; Bottom, Left; Bottom, Center; Bottom, Right.
Geometry
Scale Determines the dimensions, in meters per pixel, of the label.
The maximum character height is the Text Size times the Scale
value.
Limit Growth If this parameter is set to Yes, the label keeps its original size in
pixels (Text Size). It does not grow as you fly closer.
Min. Viewing Height Determines the minimum viewing height at which the label is
visible.
The label disappears when flying lower than the “Min Viewing
Height”.
Smallest Visible Size Determines the minimum font height, in pixels, at which the label
disappears as you fly away from it.
The label can grow to a maximum of the Text Size times the Scale
parameters. After that, the label starts to scale down until it
reaches the Smallest Visible Size. At this point, it disappears.
Text & Image Alignment
Text Relative to Image Select Text on Image to display the text on the background image.
Select Text Around Image to display the text next to the
background image.
Text Alignment Horizontal and Vertical justification of the text with respect to the
background image.
Select Top, Left; Top, Center; Top, Right; Center, Left; Center,
Center; Center, Right; Bottom, Left; Bottom, Center; Bottom, Right.
Timespan
Start Time Click Edit and enter the date and time the label should first
become visible.
End Time Click Edit and enter the date and time the label should stop being
visible.
General
Show in Viewer Determines if the text label appears in the 3D Window when the
file is viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic Viewer.
Message The message associated with the text label. The number displayed
is the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a tooltip text to appear when the mouse cursor is placed over
the text label in the 3D Window.
387
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the text label.
This distance is used as a stop mark for any “Fly-to” or “View
Object” operation. It is also used when selecting to edit the object
from the Project Tree.
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance for the label based on its size.
Visibility This property is only displayed for point features in a feature layer.
Sets the visibility of features based on their attribute values. Type a
search expression comprised of one or more conditions, or click
the Field by Attribute button to create the search expression
using the Attribute Table. See “Searching and Performing
Operations by Attribute (Attribute Table Tool)” in the “Feature
Layers” chapter for more information.
Creating a New Image Label
To create a new image label:
1. On the Objects tab, in the Label group, click Image. The Browse for Image dialog box is displayed.
2. Type or browse a path to a BMP, JPEG, GIF, PNG or ICO file to load as an image. You must set an
image file before you can place the object in the 3D World.
Note: Only standard 32 x 32 pixels, 256 colors, ICO files are supported.
3. Set the object’s other parameters. See “Image Label Property Sheet Parameters” in this chapter for
more information.
4. Place the label in the 3D World by clicking in the desired location.
5. Continue to edit the label’s parameters or close the property sheet to finish the operation.
Example of an Image Label
Image Label Property Sheet Parameters
Object Parameter Activity
Appearance
Name Type the description or name of the label.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the object from the
Project Tree.
Line to Ground Adds a line from the label’s pivot point either to the ground or to a
custom length toward the ground.
Note: A line to ground is displayed while the label is being edited
(i.e., as long as its property sheet is open), regardless of
this property value. This property only determines whether
388
TerraExplorer User Guide
a line to ground will continue to display even after the
label’s property sheet is closed.
Line Length Determines the length of the line to the ground.
This parameter is available only when the Line to Ground
parameter is set to “Custom Length.”
Line Color Sets the color of the label’s line to ground.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
This parameter is available only when the Line to Ground option
is set to To Ground or Custom Length.
Image Options
Image Color Sets the color of the image.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Image Opacity Enter the opacity value for the image.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Image Max Size Enter a maximum size in pixels for the image.
Note: A negative value for this parameter is defined as no
scaling of the image, so the actual image size is used.
Image File Type or browse a path to a BMP, JPEG, GIF, PNG or ICO file to
load as the image.
Frame File Add a graphic frame to the label.
Type the name of the frame file or click the Edit button to open the
Browse dialog box.
See “Label’s Frame File Format” section in this chapter for further
information on how to create frame files.
Frame Index Select the index of the frame in the Frame File.
This field is only available if a Frame File is selected.
See “Label’s Frame File Format” for further information on how to
create frame files.
Lock Mode Set which image label position parameters are adjusted
automatically to face the camera and which are locked to the
Position group fields values (See Position group below).
Decal: The image label position and reading direction are
adjusted automatically to face the camera.
Axis: All image label position parameters are locked to the
Position group field values.
Axis Text Up: The image label reading direction is adjusted
automatically to face the camera whereas the image label
position is set to the Position group field values (see below).
Axis (Auto Pitch): The image label Pitch angle is adjusted
automatically to face the camera whereas the other position
389
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
parameters are set to the Position group field values.
Axis (Auto Pitch Text Up): The image label reading direction
and Pitch angle are adjusted automatically to face the camera.
The other position parameters are set to the Position group
field values.
Geometry
Scale Determines the dimensions, in meters per pixel, of the label.
The maximum label size is the image size in pixels times the Scale
value.
Limit Growth If this parameter is set to Yes the label keeps its size in pixels and
does not grow as you fly closer.
Min Viewing Height Determines the minimum viewing height for which the label is
visible.
The label disappears when flying lower than the “Min Viewing
Height”.
Smallest Visible Size Determines the minimum image size, as a percentage of its
original size, at which the label disappears as you fly away from it.
The label can grow to a maximum of the image size times the
Scale parameters. After that, the label starts to scale down until it
reaches the smallest visible size. At this point, it disappears.
Position
Altitude Method Sets the altitude method to be used by the image label:
Select Relative to Terrain to place the image label’s pivot
point at a specified altitude above the ground.
Select Absolute to place the image label’s pivot point at a
specified altitude above the terrain database vertical datum
base ellipsoid.
Altitude Enter the altitude, as defined in Altitude Method, for the image
label’s pivot point.
X Enter the X coordinate for the image label’s pivot point.
Y Enter the Y coordinate for the image label’s pivot point.
Yaw Determines the direction angle of the image label along the vertical
axis relative to north.
Pitch Determines the tilt angle of the image label along its lateral axis
relative to the horizon.
Roll Determines the roll angle of the image label along its longitudinal
(front-to-back) axis.
Pivot Alignment Determines the alignment of the label relative to its pivot point.
Select Top, Left; Top, Center; Top, Right; Center, Left; Center,
Center; Center, Right; Bottom, Left; Bottom, Center; Bottom, Right.
General
Show in Viewer Determines if the image label appears in the 3D Window when the
file is viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic viewer.
390
TerraExplorer User Guide
Message The message associated with the image label. The number
displayed is the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a tooltip text to appear when the mouse cursor is placed over
the image label in the 3D Window.
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the image
label.
This distance is used as a stop mark for any “Fly -to” or “View
Object” operation. It is also used when selecting to edit the object
from the Project Tree.
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance for the label based on its size.
Visibility This property is only displayed for point features in a feature layer.
Sets the visibility of features based on their attribute values. Type a
search expression comprised of one or more conditions, or click
the Field by Attribute button to create the search expression
using the Attribute Table. See “Searching and Performing
Operations by Attribute (Attribute Table Tool)” in the “Feature
Layers” chapter for more information.
Label Frame File Format
Text and Image labels can include a graphic frame surrounding the text or the image. The file that
contains the frame patterns can be either a BMP or a GIF file. A single file can hold several frame
patterns.
To select a frame for a label:
Choose the frame file name and the index of the frame within the file. You can use one of the pre-
prepared frame files included in the Data Library, or you can create a custom -made frame file.
Preparing a Frame Pattern
1. Draw a small pattern of a frame. You can draw it in any size and number of colors. The actual size of
the frame is adjusted for each label.
Frame
2. Mark the corners of the frame by drawing 3 pixels per corner, as shown below. Use the same color
for marking all the pixels.
391
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Marked Frame
Note: When a pattern is used to create a frame for a label, the size of the corners is not changed.
Rather, the edges are either stretched or repeated to fit the label.
3. By default, the edge is repeated to fit the label. If you want the edge to be stretched, draw another
pixel attached to the edge.
For the top and bottom edges, the pixel should be attached to the left corners.
For the left and right edges, it should be attached to the top corners.
Each edge, within one pattern, can have a different width and can be either stretched or
repeated.
Example of frame with Stretched Top and Bottom Edges
Example of Frame with Stretched Left and Right Edges
4. To combine several frames to one file, align all the frame images (with their marking-pixels) to the top
of the image file, and align the first (left) pattern (with its marking-pixels) to the left side of the image
file.
Example of an Image File Containing Three Frame Patterns
Note: There must be a space of at least one pixel between any two patterns. The space can be of more
than one pixel.
2D Objects
You can do any of the following:
Create a polyline
Create a polygon
392
TerraExplorer User Guide
Create a 2D shape
Creating a New Polyline
You can create a polyline either by placing polyline vertices to create connected polyline segments or by
drawing freehand.
Drawing a Polyline
To draw a polyline:
1. On the Objects tab, in the 2D Objects group, click Polyline. The Polyline property sheet opens.
2. Set the parameters of the polyline. See “Polyline Property Sheet Parameters” in this chapter for
information.
3. If you want to position the polyline based on where the mouse is pointing in the 3D Window, on the
top bar of the label’s property sheet, click the XYZ Magnet icon . See “Moving an Object Based on
Where the Mouse is Pointing in the 3D Window” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for more
information.
4. If you want to position the polyline based on where the mouse is pointing in the 3D Window and snap
it to another object, on the top bar of the polyline’s property sheet, click the XYZ Snap Magnet icon
. See “Moving an Object Based on Where the Mouse is Pointing in the 3D Window” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
5. If you want to position the polyline in the XY plane, on the top bar of the object’s property sheet, click
the XY Plane icon . See “Moving an Object in the XY Plane” in the “Working with Objects” chapter
for more information.
6. If you want to position the polyline in the Z plane, on the top bar of the object’s property sheet, click
the Z Plane icon . See “Moving an Object in the Z Plane” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for
more information.
7. Place the polyline points in the 3D Window by clicking in the desired locations. You must place at
least two points.
8. Finish the polyline insertion by right-clicking.
Note: If you want to display the length of each polyline segment while creating and editing the
polyline, select the “Show segments distance while editing a polygon/polyline” check box in
the Options dialog box. See “View” in the “Options” chapter for more information.
9. Continue to edit the polyline’s parameters, or close the property sheet to finish the operation.
Drawing a Freehand Line
You can draw freeform lines that follow the movement of your pointer. This is useful for drawing curves.
To draw a freehand line:
1. On the Objects tab, in the 2D Objects group, click the arrow below Polyline, and then click
Freehand Drawing. The cursor changes to a brush icon.
2. Drag the brush in the 3D Window in the shape you want while holding down the mouse button.
Release the mouse button when the freehand line is complete. The Polyline property sheet opens.
3. Edit the polyline’s parameters or close the property sheet to finish the operation.
393
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Example of a Polyline Object
Polyline Property Sheet Parameters
Object Parameter Activity
Appearance
Name Type the description or name of the polyline.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the object from the
Project Tree.
Line Color Sets the color of the polyline.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Line Opacity Enter the opacity for the object’s lines.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Fill Color Select the fill color for the object created by the Extend Polyline.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Note: This field is only enabled when the polyline’s Extend to
Ground field is set to Yes in the property sheet.
Fill Opacity Enter the opacity for the object’s fill.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Note: This field is only enabled when the polyline’s Extend to
Ground field is set to Yes in the property sheet.
Line Style
Line Width Enter the polyline width. This field is unavailable when the
polyline’s Extend to Ground field is set to Yes in the property
sheet.
Line Back Color Sets the polyline back color. This field is unavailable when the
polyline’s Extend to Ground field is set to Yes in the property
sheet.
The line back color is visible when the Line Pattern property field is
set to non-solid pattern values, or when the Line Width property
field is set to a value that is larger than 1.
The Line Back Color field property is only enabled when the
Altitude Method field property in the Position group (See Position
Group below) is set to On Terrain value.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
394
TerraExplorer User Guide
Line Back Opacity Enter the opacity of the polyline back. This field is unavailable
when the polyline’s Extend to Ground field is set to Yes in the
property sheet.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Line Pattern Select the line pattern for the polyline, e.g., solid, dashed, dotted or
a combination of those patterns.
Line Spline Determines if the polyline is drawn as a curve based on its nodes.
Extend to Ground Extend the polyline vertically to the ground (to create a partition
such as a fence).
Select Yes from the drop-down list to extend the selected polygon.
Note: The Extend to Ground parameter is not available if the “On
Terrain” Altitude method was selected.
Timespan
Start Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the polyline should
first become visible.
End Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the polyline should
stop being visible.
Position
Altitude Method Sets the altitude method to be used by the polyline:
Select Relative to Terrain to place each point of the polyline
at a specified altitude above the ground, defined by its Point
Altitude.
Select Absolute to place each point at a specified altitude
above the terrain database vertical datum base ellipsoid. You
can use this feature to create polylines with known absolute
altitude values that are not dependent on the terrain elevation
values.
Select Relative to Pivot to place each point of the polyline at a
specified altitude above the pivot point altitude, defined by its
Point Altitude. The pivot is located at the center of the
polyline. You can use this feature to create horizontal polylines
in mountainous terrain.
Select On Terrain to create the polyline on the terrain itself.
This selection also changes the drawing method of the
polyline. Instead of straight lines between the polyline’s points,
it paints the terrain in the selected color. It is recommended to
use this feature to improve performance.
Altitude Enter the altitude, as defined in Altitude Method, for the pivot point.
The pivot’s altitude is the average altitude of all the points. This
value is used as the initial altitude of the points when you create a
new polyline.
Changing the pivot altitude to an existing polyline adjusts all the
points according to the offset from the previous value.
X Enter the X-coordinate for the polyline’s pivot point.
395
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
The pivot is located at the center of the polyline. Change this value
to move the entire polyline.
Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the polyline’s pivot point.
The pivot is located at the center of the polyline. Change this value
to move the entire polyline.
MGRS The coordinates of the polyline’s pivot point in Military Grid
Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available
if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog
box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for
more information.
Points Position
The parameters in this group are enabled only when the Edit Nodes icon on the top bar of the
property sheet is selected.
Selected Point Select the point you wish to edit. The selected point is highlighted
on the 3D Window.
Point X Enter the X-coordinate for the selected point.
Point Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the selected point.
Point MGRS The coordinates of the selected point in Military Grid Reference
System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available if Show
MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog box. See
“View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for more
information.
Point Altitude Enter the altitude above ground (when the Altitude Method is set to
Relative to Terrain), above the pivot altitude (when Altitude
Method is set to Relative to Pivot), or absolute altitude (when the
Altitude Method is set to Absolute) for the selected point.
Segment Yaw Enter the direction from the selected point to the following point.
Segment Pitch Enter the slope angle from the selected point to the following point.
Segment Length Enter the distance between the selected point and the following
point.
Texture
The parameters in this group are enabled only when the Extend to Ground parameter in the Line
Style group of the property sheet is set to Yes.
Texture File Type the full path of the file, or use the Edit button, for a BMP, GIF
or JPEG texture file to provide the texture for the object.
Note: You can set a transparent color for GIF and BMP files.
Pixels with this color appear as holes in the texture. With
GIF files, you can assign any color as the transparent color
by using the GIF transparent color feature. With BMP files,
the total-black color (RGB = 0, 0, 0) is used as the
transparent color.
Tiling Method Determines how the texture image file is applied to the polygon
(extended polyline). The options are:
Tiles per axis – Designate a set number of tiles (repeats of
the texture file) for the x and y axes of the polygon. The image
396
TerraExplorer User Guide
file will be sized to enable the set number of tiles per axis.
Meters per tile – Designate a size in meters for each tile.
Scale X Determines the scaling for the texture according to the Tiling
Method setting:
If Tiling Method is Tiles per axis: Determines the number of
repeats of the image file in the X-axis.
If Tiling Method is Meters per Tile: Determines the size, in
meters, of each tile in the X-axis.
Scale Y Determines the scaling for the texture according to the Tiling
Method setting:
If Tiling Method is Tiles per axis: Determines the number of
repeats of the image file in the Y-axis.
If Tiling Method is Meters per Tile: Determines the size, in
meters, of each tile in the Y-axis.
Rotate Determines the angular rotation of the image used for the texture.
General
Show in Viewer Determines if the polyline appears in the 3D Window when the file
is viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic viewer.
Message The message associated with the polyline. The number displayed
is the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a tooltip text to appear when the mouse cursor is placed over
the polyline in the 3D Window.
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the polyline.
This distance is used as a stop mark for any “Fly -to” or “View
Object” operation. It is also used when selecting to edit the object
from the Project Tree.
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance for the polyline based on its
size.
Max. Visibility Distance Sets the maximal distance from the camera above which the
polyline disappears.
Min. Visibility Distance Sets the minimal distance from the camera below which the
polyline disappears.
Ground Object Determines if the polyline is calculated as part of the terrain’s
elevation.
Order Determines the order of terrain objects from back to front.
Objects with higher values are displayed on top of objects with
lower values.
Visibility This property is only displayed for polyline features in a polyline
feature layer.
397
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Set the visibility of features based on their attribute values, by
entering a search expression. Type a search expression
comprised of one or more conditions, or click the Field by
Attribute button to create the search expression using the
Attribute Table. See “Using Attribute Fields” in the “Feature Layers”
chapter for more information.
Note: You can also set visibility based on attribute values directly
from the Attribute Table. See “Searching and Performing
Operations by Attribute” in the “Feature Layers” chapter for
information.
Creating a New Polygon
To create a new polygon:
1. On the Objects tab, in the 2D Objects group, click Polygon. The Polygon property sheet opens.
2. Set the parameters of the polygon. See “Polygon Property Sheet Parameters” in this chapter for
information.
3. If you want to position the polygon based on where the mouse is pointing in the 3D Window, on the
top bar of the label’s property sheet, click the XYZ Magnet icon . See “Moving an Object Based on
Where the Mouse is Pointing in the 3D Window” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for more
information.
4. If you want to position the polygon based on where the mouse is pointing in the 3D Window and snap
it to another object, on the top bar of the polygon’s property sheet, click the XYZ Snap Magnet icon
. See “Moving an Object Based on Where the Mouse is Pointing in the 3D Window” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
5. If you want to position the polygon in the XY plane, on the top bar of the object’s property sheet, click
the XY Plane icon . See “Moving an Object in the XY Plane” in the “Working with Objects” chapter
for more information.
6. If you want to position the polygon in the Z plane, on the top bar of the object’s property sheet, click
the Z Plane icon . See “Moving an Object in the Z Plane” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for
more information.
7. Place the polygon points in the 3D Window by clicking in the desired locations. You mus t place at
least three points.
Note: When creating a filled polygon, the lines of the polygon should not overlap each other. This
may result in an irregular fill pattern.
8. Finish the polygon creation by right-clicking.
Note: If you want to display the length of each polygon segment while creating and editing the
polygon, select the “Show segments distance while editing a polygon/polyline” check box in
the Options dialog box. See “View” in the “Options” chapter for more information.
9. Edit the polygon’s parameters in the 3D Window or using the property sheet. See “Editing Objects in
the 3D Window” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for information. Close the property sheet to
finish the operation.
398
TerraExplorer User Guide
Example of a Polygon Object
Polygon Property Sheet Parameters
Object Parameter Activity
Appearance
Name Type the description or name of the polygon. This text appears in
the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the object from the
Project Tree.
Line Color Select the outline color for the polygon.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Line Opacity Enter the opacity for the object’s lines.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Fill Color Select the fill color for the polygon.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Fill Opacity Enter the opacity for the object’s fill.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Line Style
Line Width Enter the polygon's line width.
The width is measured in meters.
Line Back Color Sets the polygon back color.
The line back color is visible when the Line Pattern property field
is set to non-solid pattern values, or when the Line Width property
field is set to a value that is larger than 1.
The Line Back Color field property is only enabled when the
Altitude Method field property in the Position group (See Position
Group below) is set to On Terrain value.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Line Back Opacity Enter the polygon line back opacity.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Line Pattern Select the polygon line pattern, e.g., solid, dashed, dotted or a
combination thereof.
Line Spline Determines if the polygon is drawn as a curve based on its nodes.
399
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Extend to Ground Extend the edges of the polygon vertically to the ground (to create
a partition such as a wall).
Select Yes from the drop-down list to extend the selected polygon.
Note: The Extend to Ground parameter is not available if the “On
Terrain” Altitude method was selected.
Timespan
Start Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the polygon should
first become visible.
End Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the polygon should
stop being visible.
Position
Altitude Method Sets the altitude method to be used by the polygon:
Select Relative to Terrain to place each point of the polygon
at a specified altitude above the ground, defined by its “Point
Altitude.”
Select Absolute to place each point at a specified altitude
above the terrain database vertical datum base ellipsoid. You
can use this feature to create polygons of known absolute
altitude values that are not dependent on the terrain elevation
values.
Select Relative to Pivot to place each point of the polygon at
a specified altitude above the pivot point altitude, defined by its
“Point Altitude.” The pivot is located at the center of the
polygon. You can use this feature to create horizontal polygons
in mountainous terrain.
Select On Terrain to create the polygon on the terrain itself.
This selection also changes the drawing method of the
polygon. Instead of straight lines between the polygon’s points,
it paints the terrain in the selected color. It is recommended to
use this feature to improve performance.
Altitude Enter the altitude, as defined in Altitude Method, for the pivot point.
The pivot’s altitude is the average altitude of all the points. This
value is used as the initial altitude of the points when you create a
new polygon. Changing the pivot altitude to an existing polygon
adjusts all the points according to the offset from the previous
value.
X Enter the X-coordinate for the polygon’s pivot point.
The pivot is located at the center of the polygon. Change this value
to move the entire polyline.
Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the polygon’s pivot point.
The pivot is located at the center of the polygon. Change this value
to move the entire polygon.
MGRS The coordinates of the polygon’s pivot point in Military Grid
Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available
if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog
400
TerraExplorer User Guide
box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for
more information.
Points Position
The parameters in this group are enabled only when the Edit Nodes icon on the top bar of the
property sheet is selected.
Selected Point Select the point you wish to edit.
The selected point is highlighted on the 3D Window.
Point X Enter the X-coordinate for the selected point.
Point Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the selected point.
Point MGRS The coordinates of the selected point in Military Grid Reference
System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available if Show
MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog box. See
“View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for more
information.
Point Altitude Enter the altitude above ground (when Altitude Method is set to
“Relative to Terrain”), above the pivot altitude (when Altitude
Method is set to “Relative to Pivot”), or absolute altitude (when the
Altitude Method is set to “Absolute”) for the selected point.
Segment Yaw Enter the direction from the selected point to the following point.
Segment Pitch Enter the slope angle from the selected point to the following point.
Segment Length Enter the distance between the selected point and the following
point.
Texture
Texture File Type the full path of the file, or use the Edit button, for a BMP, GIF
or JPEG texture file to provide the texture for the object. If the
polygon was extended to the ground, the texture will be applied to
all sides of the 3D polygon created.
Note: You can set a transparent color for GIF and BMP files.
Pixels with this color appear as holes in the texture. With
GIF files, you can assign any color as the transparent color
by using the GIF transparent color feature. With BMP files,
the total-black color (RGB = 0, 0, 0) is used as the
transparent color.
Tiling Method Determines how the texture image file is applied to the polygon.
The options are:
Tiles per axis – Designate a set number of tiles (repeats of
the texture file) for the x and y axes of the polygon. The image
file will be sized to enable the set number of tiles per axis.
Meters per tile – Designate a size in meters for each tile.
Scale X Determines the scaling for the texture according to the setting for
Tiling Method:
If Tiling Method is Tiles per axis: Determines the number of
repeats of the image file in the X-axis.
If Tiling Method is Meters per Tile: Determines the size, in
401
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
meters, of each tile in the X-axis.
Scale Y Determines the scaling for the texture according to the setting for
Tiling Method:
If Tiling Method is Tiles per axis: Determines the number of
repeats of the image file in the Y-axis.
If Tiling Method is Meters per Tile: Determines the size, in
meters, of each tile in the Y-axis.
Rotate Determines the angular rotation of the image used for the texture.
General
Show in Viewer Determines if the polygon appears in the 3D Window when the file
is viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic viewer.
Message The message associated with the object. The number displayed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a tooltip text to appear when the mouse cursor is placed over
the polygon in the 3D Window.
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the polygon.
This distance is used as a stop mark for any “Fly -to” or “View
Object” operation. It is also used when selecting to edit the object
from the Project Tree.
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance for the polygon based on its
size.
Max. Visibility Distance Sets the distance from the camera at which the polygon
disappears.
Min. Visibility Distance Sets the minimal distance from the camera below which the
polygon disappears.
Ground Object Determines if the object is calculated as part of the terrain’s
elevation.
Order Determines the order of terrain objects from back to front.
Objects with higher values are displayed on top of objects with
lower values.
Visibility This property is only displayed for polygon features in a polygon
feature layer. Sets the visibility of features based on their attribute
values. Type a search expression comprised of one or more
conditions, or click the Field by Attribute button to create the
search expression using the Attribute Table. See “Searching and
Performing Operations by Attribute (Attribute Table Tool)” in the
“Feature Layers” chapter for more information.
402
TerraExplorer User Guide
Creating a 2D Shape
To create a 2D shape:
1. On the Objects tab, in the 2D Objects group, click 2D Shape, and then click the required shape. The
shape’s property sheet opens.
2. Set the parameters of the 2D shape. See “2D Shape Property Sheet Parameters” in this chapter for
information.
3. If you want to position the 2D shape based on where the mouse is pointing in the 3D Window, on the
top bar of the label’s property sheet, click the XYZ Magnet icon . See “Moving an Object Based on
Where the Mouse is Pointing in the 3D Window” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for more
information.
4. If you want to position the 2D shape based on where the mouse is pointing in the 3D Window and
snap it to another object, on the top bar of the 2D shape’s property sheet, click the XYZ Snap
Magnet icon . See “Moving an Object Based on Where the Mouse is Pointing in the 3D Window”
in the “Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
5. If you want to position the 2D shape in the XY plane, on the top bar of the object’s property sheet,
click the XY Plane icon . See “Moving an Object in the XY Plane” in the “Working with Objects”
chapter for more information.
6. If you want to position the 2D shape in the Z plane, on the top bar of the object’s property sheet, click
the Z Plane icon . See “Moving an Object in the Z Plane” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for
more information.
7. Place the shape’s points in the 3D Window:
Rectangle - Click to add the first corner, and then click a second time to add the opposite
corner and complete the rectangle.
Regular Polygon -
i. Click to define the center (pivot point) of the regular polygon.
ii. Drag the mouse to set its radius.
iii. Click a second time to set the regular polygon.
Circle -
iv. Click to define the center of the circle.
v. Drag the mouse to set the radius of the circle.
vi. Click again to set the radius and complete the circle.
Ellipse
i. Click to define the center of the ellipse.
ii. Drag the mouse in the X direction to define the first radius. Drag the mouse in the Y direction
to define the second radius.
iii. Click again to complete the ellipse.
Arc
i. Click to define the center of the ellipse from which the arc is formed.
ii. Drag the mouse in the X direction to define the first radius. Drag the mouse in the Y direction
to define the second radius.
403
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
iii. Click again to complete the arc.
2D Arrow
i. Click to define the pivot point of the 2D arrow.
ii. Drag the mouse to set its size and direction.
iii. Click a second time to set the 2D arrow.
8. Edit the shape’s parameters in the open property sheet or in the 3D Window. See “Editing Objects in
the 3D Window” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for information. Close the property sheet to
finish the operation.
Examples of 2D Shapes
2D Shape Property Sheet Parameters
Object Parameter Activity
Appearance
Name Type the description or name of the shape.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the shape from the
Project Tree.
Line Color Select the outline color for the shape.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Line Opacity Enter the opacity for the shape’s lines.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Fill Opacity Enter the opacity for the shape’s fill.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Fill Color Select the fill color for the object.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Style This parameter appears in the property sheet only for the arrow 2D
Shape.
Select the style of the 2D arrow that you want to use:
Line Style
404
TerraExplorer User Guide
Line Width Enter the shape’s line width.
The width is measured in meters.
Line Back Color Sets the shape’s line-back color.
The line back color is visible when the Line Pattern property field is
set to non-solid pattern values, or when the Line Width property
field is set to a value that is larger than 1.
The Line Back Color field parameter is only enabled when the
Altitude Method field property in the Position group (See Position
Group below) is set to On Terrain value.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Line Back Opacity The Line Back Opacity parameter is only enabled when the
Altitude Method field property in the Position group (See Position
Group below) is set to On Terrain value.
Enter the shape’s line back opacity.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Line Pattern Select the shape’s line pattern, e.g., solid, dashed, dotted or a
combination thereof.
Timespan
Start Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the shape should first
become visible.
End Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the shape should
stop being visible.
Position
Altitude Method Select the drawing style of the shape:
Relative to Terrain - Places each point of the shape at a
specified altitude above the ground.
Absolute - Places each point of the shape in the altitude
above the terrain database vertical datum base ellipsoid. You
can use this feature to create shapes of known absolute
altitude values that are not dependent on the terrain elevation
values.
Relative to Pivot - Places each point of the shape at a
specified altitude above the pivot point. The pivot is located at
the center of the shape. You can use this feature to create
horizontal shapes in mountainous terrain.
On Terrain- Draws the shape on the terrain itself. This
selection also changes the drawing method of the shape.
Instead of straight lines between the shape’s points, it paints
the terrain in the selected color. It is recommended to use this
feature to improve performance.
Altitude Enter the altitude, as defined in Altitude Method, for the shape’s
pivot point.
405
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
X Enter the X-coordinate for the shape’s pivot point. This parameter
is not displayed for the arrow 2D shape.
The pivot is located at the center of the shape. Change this value
to move the entire shape.
Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the shape’s pivot point. Change this
value to move the entire shape.
This parameter is not displayed for the arrow 2D shape.
MGRS The coordinates of the shape’s pivot point in Military Grid
Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available
if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog
box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for
more information.
Yaw Determines the angle of rotation of the shape, about its pivot point.
Change this value to rotate the entire shape by a specified angle.
Note: The object’s direction is initially set as the direction of the
camera view, when the first point of the object is set in the
3D Window. To change the direction of the object after the
object is created, you can adjust the Yaw parameter.
Geometry
Length This parameter appears in the property sheet only for the rectangle
and arrow 2D shapes.
Determines the length of the shape.
Width This parameter appears in the property sheet only for the rectangle
shape.
Determines the width of the shape.
Radius This parameter appears in the property sheet only for the regular
polygon, arc, ellipse, and circle 2D shapes.
For circle and regular polygon:
Radius X - Determines the radius of the shape. This
parameter defines the shape’s size.
For arc and ellipse:
Radius X- Determines the radius of the arc in the X-axis. This
axis is vertical with respect to the object’s yaw direction.
Radius Y- Determines the radius of the arc in the Y-axis. This
axis is parallel with respect to the object’s yaw direction. These
two radius measurements define the size of the arc.
Number of Sides This parameter appears in the property sheet only for the circle,
regular polygon, arc, and ellipse 2D shapes.
For circles, arcs, and ellipses - the greater the number of sides; the
smoother the shape.
Start Angle This parameter appears in the property sheet only for the arc 2D
shape.
Determines the angle at which the arc begins (default is 0).
By changing the start and end angles, you can change the shape
of the arc.
406
TerraExplorer User Guide
End Angle This parameter appears in the property sheet only for the arc 2D
shape. Determines the angle at which the arc ends (default is 180).
Texture
Texture File Type the full path of the file, or use the Edit button, for a BMP, GIF
or JPEG texture file to provide the texture for the shape.
Note: You can set a transparent color for GIF and BMP files.
Pixels with this color appear as holes in the texture. With
GIF files, you can assign any color as the transparent color
by using the GIF transparent color feature. With BMP files,
the total-black color (RGB = 0, 0, 0) is used as the
transparent color.
Tiling Method Determines how the texture image file is applied to the shape. The
options are:
Tiles per axis – Designate a set number of tiles (repeats of
the texture file) for the x and y axes of the shape. The image
file will be sized to enable the set number of tiles per axis.
Meters per tile – Designate a size in meters for each tile.
Scale X Determines the scaling for the texture according to the setting for
Tiling Method:
If Tiling Method is Tiles per axis: Determines the number of
repeats of the image file in the X-axis.
If Tiling Method is Meters per Tile: Determines the size, in
meters, of each tile in the X-axis.
Scale Y Determines the scaling for the texture according to the setting for
Tiling Method:
If Tiling Method is Tiles per axis: Determines the number of
repeats of the image file in the Y-axis.
If Tiling Method is Meters per Tile: Determines the size, in
meters, of each tile in the Y-axis.
Rotate Determines the angular rotation of the image used for the texture.
General
Show in Viewer Determines if the shape appears in the 3D Window when the file is
viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic viewer.
Message The message associated with the object. The number displayed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a tooltip text to display when the mouse cursor is placed over
the shape in the 3D Window.
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the shape.
407
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
This distance is used as a stop mark for any “Fly -to” or “View
object” operation. It is also used when selecting to edit the object
from the Project Tree.
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance for the shape based on its size.
Min. Visibility Distance Sets the minimal distance from the camera below which the shape
disappears.
Max. Visibility Distance Sets the maximal distance from the camera above which the
shape disappears.
Ground Object Determines if the object is calculated as part of the terrain’s
elevation.
Order Determines the order of terrain objects from back to front.
Objects with higher values are displayed on top of objects with
lower values.
Visibility This property is only displayed for point features in a feature layer.
Sets the visibility of features based on their attribute values. Type a
search expression comprised of one or more conditions, or click
the Field by Attribute button to create the search expression
using the Attribute Table. See “Searching and Performing
Operations by Attribute (Attribute Table Tool)” in the “Feature
Layers” chapter for more information.
3D Objects
You can do any of the following:
Load a 3D model
Create a new building
Create a 3D shape
Loading a 3D Model
The 3D model feature allows you to place a pre-prepared 3D object at any point in the 3D terrain. These
models can be created using external design tools. Models can be loaded in any of the following formats:
COLLADA (DAE), e.g. DAE models created in PhotoMesh or Sketchup
OBJ – Wavefront simple data-format for storing 3D model surface geometry, color and texture
information.
Direct X (X) and its compressed version (XPC)
3DS - 3D studio format for exchanging 3D data models
OpenFlight (FLT) – Multigen format for exchanging 3D data models and its compressed version
(FPC)
XPL and XPL2, which provide better performance for the Direct X model (A set of XPL files is created
from a single X file where each file contains data for one Level of Detail (LOD) only)
408
TerraExplorer User Guide
All model formats support BMP, JPG, DDS, and PNG texture formats. FLT also supports S ilicon Graphics
popular texture formats (RGB, RGBA, INT, INTA, BW).
All loaded models can be optimized by conversion to XPL2, either by using the Convert Models to XPL
tool or automatically during the publishing process.
Note: Model files are automatically converted to XPL2 during the loading process if the option is
selected in Project Settings. See “General” in the “Setting the Project” chapter.
When a model file is converted to XPL, a set of XPL files is created from a single X file where each file
contains data for one Level of Detail (LOD) only. TerraExplorer displays the best LOD file based on the
viewer position in relation to the object. When downloaded from a web server, each file is also
downloaded independently. This results in an improvement in overall model display performance as well
as download rate.
Note: Generating Level of Detail is recommended for projects that have dense model layers, with non-
optimized models (e.g., KML with DAE models). Although objects may take slightly longer to load
the first time, memory usage will be optimized.
Note: XPL files were created by earlier versions of TerraExplorer Pro. Newer versions create only XPL2
files.
Note: The following limitations apply when loading 3DS files:
When 3DS animation files are loaded, only the first frame is read.
The alpha must be in the diffuse map and not in the mask map.
Note: The following limitations apply when loading OpenFlight (FLT) files:
Only the best LOD is used.
Animation is not supported.
External referencing is not supported (One FLT file cannot link to another one).
Loading a New 3D Model
To load a new 3D model:
1. On the Objects tab, in the 3D Objects group, click 3D Model. The Browse for 3D Model dialog box
is displayed.
2. Browse to the required file to load, and click Open. The 3D model is displayed in the 3D Window and
the Static 3D Model Property sheet is displayed.
3. If you want to add the 3D model based on where the mouse is pointing in the 3D Window, on the top
bar of the label’s property sheet, click the XYZ Magnet icon . See “Moving an Object Based on
Where the Mouse is Pointing in the 3D Window” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for more
information.
4. If you want to add the 3D model based on where the mouse is pointing in the 3D Window and snap it
to another object, on the top bar of the 3D model’s property sheet, click the XYZ Snap Magnet icon
. See “Moving an Object Based on Where the Mouse is Pointing in the 3D Window” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
5. If you want to add the 3D model in the XY plane, on the top bar of the object’s property sheet, click
the XY Plane icon . See “Moving an Object in the XY Plane”
6. With the cursor in the 3D Window, click the mouse to define the position of the 3D model’s pivot point
on the terrain.
409
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: The pivot point of a 3D model is set at the 0, 0, 0 point in the object’s coordinate system. It
is recommended to create the object with the pivot point located at the center of the bottom
surface of the object. To change an object’s pivot point, you should edit it with the original
tool from which it was built.
7. You can adjust the model’s position and size in the 3D Window or from the model’s property s heet.
See “Editing Objects in the 3D Window” in the “Working with Objects” chapter.
8. Using the property sheet, set the parameters of the 3D object. See “3D Model Property Sheet
Parameters” in this chapter for information.
Example of a 3D Model Object
3D Model Property Sheet Parameters
Object Parameter Activity
Appearance
Name Type the description or name of the 3D model. This text appears in
the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the 3D model from the
Project Tree.
Shadow When set to Yes, a shadow is cast on the 3D model.
The sun is positioned according to the time, date and time zone
you set using the Date and Time controls. The shadow dynamically
updates when the system date and time is changed.
Model
File Name Type or browse a path to an .x, .xpc, .flt, .fpc, .3ds or .dae file to
load as the 3D model.
Model Type Select Animation to play the object animation or Still to stop
object animation at the first frame.
This option is enabled only for Direct X animation models that
comply with the DirectX specification.
Animation Speed Rate Selects the animation speed rate.
Position
Altitude Method Sets the altitude method to be used by the 3D model:
Select Relative to Terrain to place the 3D model’s pivot point
at a specified altitude above the ground.
Select Absolute to place the 3D model’s pivot point at a
specified altitude above the terrain database vertical datum
base ellipsoid.
410
TerraExplorer User Guide
Altitude Enter the altitude, as defined in Altitude Method, for the 3D model’s
pivot point. If the model has a Z value, this value is added to each
Z-coordinate.
X Enter the X-coordinate for the 3D model’s pivot point.
Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the 3D model’s pivot point.
MGRS The coordinates of the 3D model’s pivot point in Military Grid
Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available
if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog
box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for
more information.
Yaw Determines the direction angle of the 3D model along the vertical
axis relative to north.
Pitch Determines the tilt angle of the 3D model along its lateral axis
relative to the horizon.
Roll Determines the roll angle of the 3D model along its longitudinal
(front-to-back) axis.
Geometry
Maintain Aspect Ratio Maintain the model’s proportional relationship between the width,
length, and height.
If Yes is selected, when the scale factor in one of the axis is
modified, the scale factor in the other two axes is automatically
adjusted to maintain the original width:length:height ratio.
If No is selected, the scale factor in each axis can be modified
independently of the other axis scale factors.
Scale X Determines the length on the X axis of the 3D model.
The actual X value of the model in the 3D World is the x value of
the model in its internal coordinate system times the Scale X value.
(i.e., if the model has an X value of 5 units and the Scale X is set to
10 meters per pixel, the X value of the object in the 3D World is 50
meters.)
Scale Y Determines the length on the Y axis of the 3D model.
The actual Y value of the model in the 3D World is the Y value of
the model in its internal coordinate system times the Scale Y value.
(i.e., if the model has a Y value of 10 units and the Scale Y is set to
10 meters per pixel, the Y value of the object in the 3D World is
100 meters.)
Scale Z Determines the height (Z value) of the 3D model.
The actual height of the model in the 3D World is the height of the
model in its internal coordinate system times the Scale Z value.
(i.e., if the model has a height of 5 units and the Scale Z is set to
10 meters per pixel, the height of the object in the 3D World is 50
meters.)
Best LOD Size Enter the minimum size of the object, in pixels, at which the object
is displayed in the best level of detail.
When zooming out from the best LOD size the object is displayed
using data retrieved from a lower Level Of Detail file.
411
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
For more information, see “Loading a New 3D Model” in this
chapter. This size can be set automatically by clicking the Capture
button in the Set Best LOD field.
Set Best LOD Clicking the Capture button sets the current object size as the size
where the best level of detail is used.
When the object is zoomed out from the best-fit size, it is displayed
using data retrieved from a lower Level Of Detail file.
General
Show in Viewer Determines if the 3D model appears in the 3D Window when the
file is viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic Viewer.
Message The message associated with the object. The number displayed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a tooltip text to appear when the mouse cursor is placed over
the 3D model in the 3D Window.
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the 3D model.
This distance is used as a stop mark for any “Fly -to” or “View
Object” operation. It is also used when selecting to edit the object
from the Project Tree.
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance for the model based on its size.
Max. Visibility Distance Sets the distance from the camera above which the 3D model
disappears.
Min. Visibility Distance Sets the minimal distance from the camera below which the 3D
model disappears.
Ground Object Determines if the object is calculated as part of the terrain’s
elevation.
Creating a New Building
The Building feature allows you to add 3D models to the project by manually defining the geometry of the
building rooftop and stretching it above the basic terrain, or by loading the rooftop geometry from external
feature layers.
You can define the shape of the roof as a flat surface, or as an angular surface. After defining the building
geometry, you can assign fill color and texture from external files or apply texture from the terrain to the
roof and side walls.
To create a new building:
1. On the Objects tab, in the 3D Objects group, click Building.
2. With the cursor in the 3D Window, click the mouse to add the first point of the roof.
3. Click again to add additional points of the roof’s polygon until you have marked the entire shape. You
must place at least three points to define the roof.
Note: When creating a building, the lines of the roof polygon should not overlap each other. This
may result in an irregular object.
412
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: It is recommended to keep the number of roof points to the minimum required to define the
shape. Adding unnecessary points may adversely affect performance.
4. Right-click to finish the roof polygon.
5. If there is a horizontal offset between the roof and the building base in the aerial/satellite imagery, use
the mouse pointer to drag the base polygon (in green) to its place on the imagery and left click to
finish the operation.
6. If there is no horizontal offset between the roof and the building base in the aerial/satellite imagery
right-click again to finish the operation.
7. Enter the roof height of the building under Geometry in the Building property sheet.
8. Continue to edit the building’s parameters and shape, or close the property sheet to finish the
operation.
Example of a Building Object
Defining Roof and Wall Fill Types
For each of a building’s sidewalls and its roof, you can assign a fill that is a single color, a texture from a
file, or a texture from the terrain pattern. A different fill type can be assigned to each face of the building.
To change a building’s fill type:
1. In the Texture section of the property sheet, in the Selected Face field, select the required surface.
2. In the Face Fill Type field, select the required fill type.
Note: You can select the Terrain Texture option for sidewalls only if the building has an offset
between the roof and the base frames.
3. For each surface for which you select Terrain Texture as the fill type, assign the Face Terrain
Texture parameter. If a wall has an exposed texture on the satellite/aerial imagery, you should use its
own texture. If the wall’s texture in not available, you can assign the texture from one of the other
exposed walls.
Note: It is recommended not to break an exposed wall into sub-walls. This allows you to use the
entire wall texture for non-exposed walls.
4. For each surface for which you select Single Color as the fill type, select a Face Color.
5. For each surface for which you select Image File Texture as the fill type, browse to the required
Face Texture File.
Modifying the Building Geometry and Position
After creating the building’s initial geometry, you can still modify it by selecting one of the top bar tools
and editing the building shape in the 3D Window.
413
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Mode Description
2D View mode While editing the building’s base, roof and angular roof geometry,
the building is displayed in 2D View mode.
In this mode, you can view and edit the buildings outlines and
nodes.
3D Window mode This option displays the building as a complete 3D model.
Use this option to edit the height of the building and view the result
of your 2D editing.
Building Properties Window Top Bar
Icon Function Activity
Edit roof/base position Select this option to move the building’s roof, base or the
entire shape.
Click and drag the green polygon to move the base
frame.
Click and drag the red polygon to move the roof frame.
Click and drag the yellow line to move the entire building.
Edit roof/base nodes Select this option to move, add or delete nodes on the base
or roof frames.
Click and drag a node on the green polyline to move a
node on the base frame.
Click and drag a node on the red polyline to move a node
on the roof frame.
Click and drag the yellow lines to move the base and
roof nodes simultaneously.
Select a segment between two nodes on the base or on
the roof to add an additional corner to the building.
Right-click on a base or roof node and select the Delete
Node option to delete the corner of the building.
Edit angular roof Select this option to modify the angular roof geometry.
This feature is enabled when the “Angular Roof” option is
selected.
414
TerraExplorer User Guide
3D Window mode Select this option to view the building model in its final view.
To move the building select “Move in the XY plane” mode and
drag the building to a new position. You can also change the
building height by selecting “Move in the Z axis” mode,
clicking in the 3D Window and dragging the pointer up and
down.
Move in the XY plane All movements are limited to the X and Y plane.
Move in the Z axis All movements are limited to the Z-axis. This option is only
available when working in a 3D Window mode.
Building Geometry and Position
Creating Angular Roof
To create an angular roof:
1. After creating the building geometry in the Appearance section of the property sheet, in the Rooftop
Style field, select Angular Roof.
2. On the top bar of the property sheet, click Edit Angular Roof .
3. In the 3D Window, select the angular roof points and drag them to the top-most position of the roof.
The angular roof points are located between the connecting lines (cyan) and the rooftop frame
(purple). The points of the angular roof shape should not overlap each other.
Note: For adding additional angular roof points, you must switch to Edit Nodes mode, add
additional roof point in the desired location and switch back to Edit Angular Roof mode.
4. In the Geometry section of the property sheet, set the rooftop delta height.
415
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Angular Roof Geometry Setting
Working with the Building Lean Ratio Parameters
In many cases, the aerial imagery in large parts of a city has the same pitch angle. This means that all the
buildings in this area have the same leaning ration on the imagery. After manually setting one building,
you can select all the buildings in this area and set the Building Lean X Ratio and Building Lean Y
Ratio parameters according to the values of the building you have set manually.
TerraExplorer automatically calculates the roof and base locations according to the buildings height and
the leaning ratio you have set. The calculation is valid only when the rooftop frames are located in the
correct geographic location and not according to the distorted imagery.
Note: This feature is mostly relevant when loading the rooftop geometry from an external feature layer.
Building Property Sheet Parameters
Object Parameter Activity
Appearance
Name Type the description or name of the building.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the building from the
Project Tree.
Rooftop Style Determines whether the roof is flat or angular
Position
Altitude Method Sets the altitude method to be used by the building:
Select Relative to Terrain to set the building’s altitude values
at a specified altitude above the ground.
Select Absolute to set the building’s altitude values at a
specified altitude above the terrain database vertical datum
base ellipsoid.
Base Altitude Enter the altitude, as defined in Altitude Method, for the base of the
building.
416
TerraExplorer User Guide
Roof Altitude Enter the altitude, as defined in Altitude Method, for the roof of the
building.
X Enter the X coordinate for the building’s pivot point, the center of
its base.
Y Enter the Y coordinate for the building’s pivot point, the center of
its base.
Geometry
Building Height Determines the height of the building above its base.
This is identical to the difference between the Roof Altitude and
Base Altitude.
Rooftop Delta Height Determines the height of the top of the angular roof above the
building.
This field is available only when Rooftop Style is set to Angular
roof.
Texture
Note: These fields are unavailable if you have selected the Stretch Terrain style.
Selected Face Select the face to modify.
Roof: Select this option to change the roof color or texture.
All Walls: Select this option to change the color or texture for
all walls in the building.
Wall #: Select a single wall to edit.
Note: The walls are numbered according to the creation
order. You can view the numbering labels above the
center of the roof segment for each wall.
Face Fill Type Select the fill type of the selected face.
Single Color: The face gets a single color filling according to
the Face Color field.
Image File Texture: The face gets the texture from an external
417
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
texture file according to the Face Texture File field.
Terrain Texture: The face gets the texture from the terrain
imagery according to the Face Terrain Texture field.
Face Color Select the color of the selected face.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Face Texture File Type the full path of the file, or use the Edit button, for a BMP, GIF
or JPEG texture file to provide the texture for the selected face.
Note: The faces texture dimensions must be a power of 2 (i.e.,
32 pixels by 64 pixels).
Note: You can set a transparent color for GIF and BMP files.
Pixels with this color appear as holes in the building. With
GIF files, you can assign any color as the transparent color
by using the GIF transparent color feature. With BMP files,
the total-black color (RGB = 0, 0, 0) is used as the
transparent color.
Face Terrain Texture Assign a terrain texture to the selected face.
The Face Terrain Texture drop-down list displays all the walls of
the building with exposed texture.
By default, every exposed wall gets its own texture and all other
walls get the biggest exposed texture. You can override this setting
by assigning any exposed texture to any wall of the building.
Note: This field is available only if Terrain Texture option is
selected.
Face Tiling Method Determines the type of scaling for the texture.
Note: The Face Tiling Method, Face Scale X, Face Scale Y and
Face Rotation parameters are available only for faces with
“Image File Texture” fill type.
Face Scale X Determines the scaling for the texture according to the setting for
Tiling Method:
If the Tiling Method is Tiles per face: It determines the
number of repeats, for the selected face, of the texture in the
X-axis.
If the Tiling Method is Meters per Tile: It determines the size
of each texture tile in meters in the X-axis. If the texture is
smaller than the face, it repeated until it fills the face.
Face Scale Y Determines the scaling for the texture according to the setting for
Tiling Method:
If the Tiling Method is Tiles per face: It determines the
number of repeats, for the selected face, of the texture in the
Y-axis.
If the Tiling Method is Meters per Tile: It determines the size
of each texture tile in meters in the Y-axis. If the texture is
smaller than the face, it repeated until it fills the face.
418
TerraExplorer User Guide
Face Rotation Determines the angular rotation of the texture used for the selected
face.
Building Lean X Ratio The offset in the X-axis between the roof position, in the image,
and the actual building position, divided by the building height.
Building Lean Y Ratio The offset in the Y-axis between the roof position, in the image,
and the actual building position, divided by the building height.
General
Show in Viewer Determines if the building appears in the Project Tree when the file
is viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic Viewer.
Message The message associated with the object. The number displayed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a tooltip text to appear when the mouse cursor is placed over
the building in the 3D Window.
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the building.
This distance is used as a stop mark for any “Fly -to” or “View
Object” operation. It is also used when selecting to edit the object
from the Project Tree.
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance for the building based on its
size.
Max. Visibility Distance Sets the maximum distance from the camera above which the
building disappears from view.
Min. Visibility Distance Sets the minimal distance from the camera below which the
building disappears from view.
Ground Object Determines if the object is calculated as part of the terrain’s
elevation.
Creating a 3D Shape
To create a new 3D shape:
1. On the Objects tab, in the 3D Objects group, click 3D Shape, and then click the required shape. The
3D shape’s property sheet opens.
2. In the shape’s property sheet, set the object’s parameters.
3. If you want to position the 3D shape based on where the mouse is pointing in the 3D Window, on the
top bar of the label’s property sheet, click the XYZ Magnet icon . See “Moving an Object Based on
Where the Mouse is Pointing in the 3D Window” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for more
information.
4. If you want to position the 3D shape based on where the mouse is pointing in the 3D Window and
snap it to another object, on the top bar of the 3D shape’s property sheet, click the XYZ Snap
Magnet icon . See “Moving an Object Based on Where the Mouse is Pointing in the 3D Window”
in the “Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
419
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
5. If you want to position the 3D shape in the XY plane, on the top bar of the object’s property sheet,
click the XY Plane icon . See “Moving an Object in the XY Plane” in the “Working with Objects”
chapter.
6. If you want to position the 3D shape in the Z plane, on the top bar of the object’s property sheet, click
the Z Plane icon . See “Moving an Object in the Z Plane” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for
more information.
7. With the cursor in the 3D Window, draw the particular shape required as described in the sections
below:
Box
Cylinder
Sphere
Cone
Pyramid
3D Arrow
3D Polygon
8. Edit the shape’s parameters in the 3D Window or using the property sheet. See “Editing Objects in
the 3D Window” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for information. Close the property sheet to
finish the operation.
Box
To draw a box:
1. Click the mouse to define the first corner of the box.
2. Drag the cursor to set the base of the box.
3. Once the base is set, click again to complete it.
4. Move the mouse up or down to define the height of the box.
5. Once the height is set, click again to complete the box.
Cylinder
To draw a cylinder:
1. Click the mouse to define the center point of the cylinder’s base.
2. Drag the cursor to set the base of the cylinder.
3. Once the base is set, click again to complete it.
4. Move the mouse up or down to define the height of the cylinder.
5. Once the height is set, click again to complete the cylinder.
Sphere
To draw a sphere:
Note: In the property sheet, you can choose to create a full sphere or just an upper or lower half of a
sphere. When using half a sphere you can create it with or without a base.
1. Click the mouse to define the bottom center (pivot point) of the sphere.
2. Drag the cursor to define the radius of the sphere.
3. Once the radius is set, click again to complete the sphere.
420
TerraExplorer User Guide
Cone
To draw a cone:
1. Click the mouse to define the center point of the base circle.
2. Drag the cursor to define the radius of the base circle.
3. Once the base circle is set, click again to complete it.
4. Move the mouse up or down to define the height of the cone.
5. Once the height is set, click again to complete the cone.
Pyramid
To draw a pyramid:
1. Click the mouse to define the first base point.
2. Drag the cursor to set the base of the pyramid.
3. Once the base is set, click again to complete it.
4. Move the mouse up or down to define the height of the pyramid.
5. Once the height is set, click again to complete the pyramid.
3D Arrow
To draw a 3D arrow:
1. Click the mouse to define the pivot point of the 3D arrow.
2. Drag the cursor to set the length of the 3D arrow.
3. Once the base of the arrow is set, click again to complete it.
4. Move the mouse up or down to define the height of the arrow.
5. Once the height is set, click again to complete the 3D arrow.
3D Polygon
To draw a 3D polygon:
1. Click the mouse to define the first point of the 3D polygon.
2. Drag the cursor to the second point. Click again to set the second point.
3. Repeat the above step as many times as you like, until you have created your desired shape for the
polygon. (The polygon still appears two-dimensional at this point.)
Note: When creating a 3D Polygon, the lines of the base polygon should not overlap each other.
This may result in an irregular object.
4. Once the shape is established, click the right mouse button to complete it.
5. Move the mouse up or down to define the height of the 3D polygon.
6. Once the height is set, click again to complete the 3D polygon.
Examples of 3D Shape Objects
421
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
3D Shape Property Sheet Parameters
Object Parameter Activity
Appearance
Name Type the description or name of the shape.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the shape from the
Project Tree.
Line Color Select the outline color for the shape.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Line Opacity Enter the opacity for the shape’s lines.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Fill Color Select the fill color for the shape.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff). This option
is enabled only when the Fill Opacity value is greater than zero.
Fill Opacity Enter the opacity for the shape’s fill.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Style This parameter appears only for the 3D arrow shape.
The style of the 3-dimensional arrow. Can be one of the following
when looking at the arrow from a top-view:
Sphere Style This parameter appears in the property sheet only for the sphere
3D shape.
Determines the style of the sphere.
Select Normal, or select Half up, or Half down with or without base.
Segment Density This parameter appears in the property sheet only for the sphere
3D shape.
Determines a factor used to calculate the number of sides of the
sphere.
The higher the value of the segment density, the smoother the
sphere.
Line Style
Line Pattern Select the line pattern for the shape. You can choose between
different line patterns, e.g., solid, dashed, and dotted or a
combination thereof.
Timespan
422
TerraExplorer User Guide
Start Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the shape should first
become visible.
End Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the shape should
stop being visible.
Position
Altitude Method Sets the altitude method to be used by the shape:
Select Relative to Terrain to place the shape’s pivot point at a
specified altitude above the ground.
Select Absolute to place the shape’s pivot point at a specified
altitude above the terrain database vertical datum base
ellipsoid.
Altitude Enter the altitude, as defined in Altitude Method, for the shape’s
pivot point, the center of its base.
X This parameter does not appear in the property sheet for the arrow
3D shape.
Enter the X-coordinate for the shape’s pivot point, the center of its
base.
Y This parameter does not appear in the property sheet for the arrow
3D shape.
Enter the Y-coordinate for the shape’s pivot point, the center of its
base.
MGRS The coordinates of the shape’s pivot point in Military Grid
Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available
if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog
box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for
more information.
Yaw Determines the direction angle of the shape along the vertical axis
relative to north.
Pitch Determines the tilt angle of the shape along its lateral axis relative
to the horizon.
Roll Determines the roll angle of the shape along its longitudinal (front -
to-back) axis.
Points Position
The parameters in this group appear in the property sheet only for 3D polygons. They are enabled
only when the Edit Nodes icon is selected on the property sheet top bar.
Selected Point Select the point to edit.
The selected point is highlighted on the 3D Window. When you edit
this point, the corresponding point on the base or the top of the
polygon changes accordingly.
Point X Enter the X-coordinate for the selected point.
Point Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the selected point.
Point MGRS The coordinates of the selected point in Military Grid Reference
System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available if Show
MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog box. See
423
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
“View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for more
information.
Geometry
Radius X This parameter appears in the property sheet only for the sphere,
cone, and cylinder 3D shapes.
Determines the length of the radius.
Number of sides This parameter appears in the property sheet only for the cone and
cylinder 3D shapes.
Determines the number of sides.
The greater the number of sides; the smoother the shape.
Height This parameter is displayed for all the 3D shapes except for
sphere.
Determines the height.
Length This parameter appears in the property sheet only for the box,
pyramid, and 3D arrow 3D shapes.
Determines the length. For 3D arrow, the length also affects the
width.
Width This parameter appears in the property sheet only for the box and
pyramid 3D shapes.
Determines the width.
Texture
Texture File Type the full path of the file, or use the Edit button, for a BMP, GIF
or JPEG texture file to provide the texture for the object. If the
polygon was extended to the ground, the texture will be applied to
all sides of the 3D polygon created.
Note: You can set a transparent color for GIF and BMP files.
Pixels with this color appear as holes in the texture. With
GIF files, you can assign any color as the transparent color
by using the GIF transparent color feature. With BMP files,
the total-black color (RGB = 0, 0, 0) is used as the
transparent color.
Tiling Method Determines how the texture image file is applied to the shape. The
options are:
Tiles per axis – Designate a set number of tiles (repeats of
the texture file) for the x and y axes of the shape. The image
file will be sized to enable the set number of tiles per axis.
Meters per tile – Designate a size in meters for each tile.
Scale X Determines the scaling for the texture according to the setting for
Tiling Method:
If Tiling Method is Tiles per axis: Determines the number of
repeats of the image file in the X-axis.
If Tiling Method is Meters per Tile: Determines the size, in
meters, of each tile in the X-axis.
Scale Y Determines the scaling for the texture according to the setting for
Tiling Method:
424
TerraExplorer User Guide
If Tiling Method is Tiles per axis: Determines the number of
repeats of the image file in the Y-axis.
If Tiling Method is Meters per Tile: Determines the size, in
meters, of each tile in the Y-axis.
Rotate Determines the angular rotation of the image used for the texture.
General
Show in Viewer Determines if the shape appears in the Project Tree when the file
is viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic viewer.
Message The message associated with the shape. The number display ed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a tooltip text to appear when the mouse cursor is placed over
the shape in the 3D Window.
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the shape.
This distance is used as a stop mark for any “Fly -to” or “View
Object” operation. It is also used when selecting to edit the object
from the Project Tree.
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance for the object based on its size.
Max. Visibility Distance Sets the distance from the camera above which the shape
disappears.
Min. Visibility Distance Sets the minimal distance from the camera below which the shape
disappears.
Ground Object Determines if the shape is calculated as part of the terrain’s
elevation.
Visibility This property is only displayed for point features in a feature layer.
Sets the visibility of features based on their attribute values. Type a
search expression comprised of one or more conditions, or click
the Field by Attribute button to base visibility on attribute
values using the Attribute Table. See “Searching and Performing
Operations by Attribute (Attribute Table Tool)” in the “Feature
Layers” chapter for more information.
Dynamic Objects
Dynamic objects provide an easy-to-use way to add movement to 3D objects as well as text and image
labels. You can also create a virtual dynamic object that is a dynamic route with no object assigned to it.
You can then attach any object to the virtual dynamic object, and it follows the route you have set for it.
You set the route of a dynamic object by manually placing waypoints in the 3D Window. The object’s
speed is set either by setting a specific speed for the object in the object’s property sheet, or by setting
the object to Move by Time and then defining a Start and End time. TerraExplorer Pro features a set of
ground and air vehicles that you can add to your project.
425
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Ground and Air Vehicles
Ground vehicles get pitch and roll angles according to the terrain surface under the object while it moves.
Air vehicles get pitch and roll angles according to the altitude differences between the waypoints,
regardless of the terrain surface.
Creating Dynamic Objects
To create a new dynamic object:
1. If you want to create a ground vehicle, on the Objects tab, in the Dynamic Objects group, click
Ground Object. The Dynamic Object property sheet is displayed.
2. If you want to create an air vehicle, on the Objects tab, in the Dynamic Objects group, click Aerial
Object. The Dynamic Object property sheet is displayed.
3. In the Object Options section of the property sheet, in the Object Type field, select one of the
following:
3D model
Image label
Text label
Virtual
4. In the Object Options section of the property sheet, in the Motion Style field, select one of the
following:
Ground Vehicle
Airplane
Helicopter
Hover
5. If you selected a “3D Model” or “Image Label” type, in the File Name field, select the model or image
file.
6. If you selected a “Text Label” type, in the Text field, enter the desired text string.
7. Using the property sheet, set the other parameters of the ground or aerial object. See “Creating
Dynamic Objects that Move by Time" in this chapter.
8. If you want to position the dynamic object based on where the mouse is pointing in the 3D Window,
on the top bar of the label’s property sheet, click the XYZ Magnet icon . See “Moving an Object
Based on Where the Mouse is Pointing in the 3D Window” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for
more information.
9. If you want to position the dynamic object based on where the mouse is pointing in the 3D Window
and snap it to another object, on the top bar of the dynamic object’s property sheet, click the XYZ
Snap Magnet icon . See “Moving an Object Based on Where the Mouse is Pointing in the 3D
Window” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
10. If you want to position the dynamic object in the XY plane, on the top bar of the object’s property
sheet, click the XY Plane icon . See “Moving an Object in the XY Plane” in the “Working with
Objects” chapter.
11. If you want to position the dynamic object in the Z plane, on the top bar of the object’s property sheet,
click the Z Plane icon . See “Moving an Object in the Z Plane” in the “Working with Objects”
chapter for more information.
426
TerraExplorer User Guide
12. With the cursor in the 3D Window, click the mouse to define the first waypoint of the vehicle’s route.
13. Use additional mouse clicks to add waypoints to the path.
14. When you finish adding waypoints to the path, right-click to complete the route. When you close the
property sheet, the vehicle starts moving along the route you have defined.
Note: After creation, you can change the parameters of the vehicle and the route using the property
sheet. See “Working with the Property Sheet” in the “Working with Objects” chapter.
Creating Dynamic Objects that Move by Time
Instead of setting an object’s speed and acceleration, a dynamic object’s route can be set to begin and
end at specific times. In this case, the object's acceleration is set to zero and its position is derived from
the route distance, set timespan, and current TerraExplorer time.
To set a dynamic object’s movement by time:
1. On the Objects tab, in the Dynamic Objects group, click Move By Time. The Choose Time dialog
box and Dynamic Object property sheet are displayed.
Choose Time Dialog Box
2. Enter a Start Time and End Time and click OK.
3. In the Object Options section of the property sheet, in the Object Type field, select one of the
following:
3D model
Image label
Text label
Virtual
4. In the Object Options section of the property sheet, in the Motion Style field, select one of the
following:
Ground Vehicle
Airplane
Helicopter
Hover
5. If you selected a “3D Model” or “Image Label” type, in the File Name field, select the model or image
file.
6. If you selected a “Text Label” type, in the Text field, enter the desired text string.
427
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
7. Using the property sheet, set the other parameters of the ground or aerial object. See “Dynamic
Object Property Sheet Parameters” in this chapter.
8. If you want to position the dynamic object based on where the mouse is pointing in the 3D Window,
on the top bar of the label’s property sheet, click the XYZ Magnet icon . See “Moving an Object
Based on Where the Mouse is Pointing in the 3D Window” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for
more information.
9. If you want to position the dynamic object in the XY plane, on the top bar of the object’s property
sheet, click the XY Plane icon . See “Moving an Object in the XY Plane” in the “Working with
Objects” chapter.
10. With the cursor in the 3D Window, click the mouse to define the first waypoint of the vehicle’s route.
11. Use additional mouse clicks to add waypoints to the path.
12. When you finish adding waypoints to the path, right-click to complete the route. The vehicle will only
be visible during the timespan you set.
Note: After creation, you can change the parameters of the vehicle and the route using the property
sheet. The Speed parameter will be unavailable since when moving objects by time, object speed
is determined by the speed required to travel the set route in the set timespan. See “Working with
the Property Sheet” in the “Working with Objects” chapter.
Dynamic Object Property Sheet Parameters
Object Parameter Activity
Appearance
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the dynamic object
from the Project Tree.
Name Type the description or name of the dynamic object.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Object Options
Motion Style Determines the style of motion of the dynamic object.
You can choose from Ground Vehicle, Airplane, Helicopter or
Hover.
Ground Vehicle: The object is a ground vehicle.
Airplane: The object sets the pitch angles during the flight
according to altitude differences between the waypoints. It also
rolls while turning between the waypoints.
Helicopter: The object leans forward with a fixed pitch angle of
-15 degrees. It also rolls while turning between the waypoints.
Hover: The object always keeps the pitch and roll angles set to
zero.
Manual: The object turns as fast as required to point to the
next waypoint (same as value over 1000), ignoring the Turn
Speed. An API user can further edit the waypoint orientation
(yaw, pitch, and roll).
Object Type Determines the type of object.
428
TerraExplorer User Guide
Choose “3D Model” to add a loaded 3D model, “Image Label” to
add an image label, “Text Label” to add a text label or “Virtual” to
add a virtual object.
File Name For 3D Model and Image types, select the associated file.
In the File Name field, type, or browse, a path to an .x, .xpc, .flt,
.fpc or .dae for 3D models, or, .bmp, .jpg, jpeg or .gif for Image
labels.
Text Determines the text to be used if the Object type is a Text Label.
Limit Growth This option is only available if you selected Image Label or Text
Label as the Object Type.
If this parameter is set to Yes, the label keeps its original size in
pixels (Text Size). It does not grow as you fly closer.
Font Click on the Edit button to open the Character Format dialog box.
Select the required font type, size color and style. (This option is
available only if the Text Label object type is selected.)
Background Color Select the color for the vehicle’s background.
Click in the field to open the Color dialog box. (This option is
available only if the Text Label object type is selected.)
Background Opacity Determines the type of background for the dynamic object.
Select Transparent, Opaque or None. (This option is available only
if the Text Label object type is selected.)
Scale Determines the dimensions of the object.
For 3D Model type, the actual size of the model in the 3D
World is the size of the model in its internal coordinate system
times the Scale value. (i.e., if the model has a width of 5 units
and the scale is set to 10 meters per pixel, the width of the
object in the 3D World is 50 meters.)
Route Options
Move By Time When set to Yes, the dynamic object’s movement along the route
is derived from its start and end times (as well as the route
distance and current TerraExplorer time), rather than from its
speed and acceleration. These start and end times are set in the
Timespan group of the object’s property sheet.
Altitude Method For ground vehicles, this parameter is set to Relative to terrain
and cannot be changed.
For aerial vehicles, set the altitude method to be used for the
waypoints:
Select Relative to Terrain to place the waypoint at a specified
altitude above the ground.
Select Absolute to place the waypoint at a specified altitude
above the terrain database vertical datum base ellipsoid.
Altitude During the creation of the route, this parameter determines the
altitude above ground of the next waypoint. After you have finished
placing all the waypoints on the terrain, you can use this parameter
to set a new altitude for the entire route.
429
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Speed After you have finished placing all the waypoints on the terrain, you
can use this parameter to set a new speed for the entire route.
Note: This parameter is unavailable if Move By Time was set to
Yes.
Acceleration Determines the acceleration and deceleration speed of the object.
The object tries to reach the defined speed at each waypoint by
accelerating or decelerating according to this parameter.
Note: This parameter is unavailable if the Move By Time property
was set to Yes.
Turn Speed Select the rate at which the object turns.
Note: When set to a value of 1000 or higher, the object will turn
as fast as required to point to the next waypoint ignoring
the Turn Speed.
Note: This parameter is unavailable if the Move By Time property
was set to Yes.
Circular Route Determines if the object restarts its route when it reaches the
endpoint.
Select one of the following options:
Stop at end – The object stops at the end of the route.
Move to start – The object drives/flies/walks back to the
beginning of the route when it reaches the end.
Jump to start – The object jumps to the beginning of the route
when it reaches the end.
Note: This parameter is unavailable if the Move By Time property
was set to Yes.
Play Route on Startup Determines if the dynamic object starts moving when a FLY project
opens.
Choose Yes to start the dynamic object automatically when a FLY
file opens or No to instruct the object to wait for a start command.
Waypoints
The parameters in this group are enabled only when the Edit Nodes icon on the top bar of the
property sheet is selected.
Selected Point Select the point you wish to edit. The selected point is highlighted
on the 3D Window.
Point X Enter the X-coordinate for the selected waypoint.
Point Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the selected waypoint.
Point MGRS The coordinates of the selected waypoint in Military Grid
Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available
if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog
box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for
more information.
Point Altitude Enter the altitude above ground for the selected waypoint.
Point Speed Enter the speed for the selected waypoint.
430
TerraExplorer User Guide
The object tries to achieve this speed by the time it reaches the
waypoint, under the limitation of the acceleration parameter.
Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the object should
reach the selected waypoint.
Timespan
Start Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the object should first
become visible.
End Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the object should
stop being visible.
Track Style
Show Track Determines if a track line indicating the dynamic object’s path is
displayed in the 3D Window.
Note: A track is displayed while the dynamic object is being
edited (i.e., as long as its property sheet is open),
regardless of this property value. This property only
determines whether a track will continue to display even
after the object’s property sheet is closed.
Line Color Select the color of the dynamic object’s track line.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Line Opacity Enter the opacity of the dynamic object’s track line.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Line Width Enter the line width for the dynamic object’s track line.
The width is measured in meters.
Line Pattern Select the dynamic object’s track line pattern. You can choose
between different line patterns, e.g., solid, dashed, dotted or a
combination thereof.
Line Spline Determines if the track line is drawn as a curve based on its nodes.
General
Show in Viewer Determines if the object appears in the Project Tree when the file
is viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic Viewer.
Message The message associated with the object. The number displayed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a tooltip text to appear when the mouse cursor is placed over
the object in the 3D Window.
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the object.
This distance is used as a stop mark for any “Fly -to” or “View
Object” operation. It is also used when selecting to edit the object
from the Project Tree.
431
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance for the object based on its size.
Max. Visibility Distance Sets the distance from the camera above which the object
disappears.
Min. Visibility Distance Sets the minimal distance from the camera below which the object
disappears.
Ground Object Determines if the object is calculated as part of the terrain’s
elevation.
Attaching Objects to Virtual Dynamic Objects
You can add movement to any 2D or 3D primitive by attaching them to a dynamic object with a “Virtual”
Object Type.
To add movement to any object follow these steps:
1. Create a new dynamic object, and set its waypoints. See “Creating Dynamic Objects” in this chapter
for more information.
2. In the Dynamic Object property sheet, in the Object Options section, select Virtual as the Object
Type, and then close the property sheet.
3. Create the 2D or 3D primitives you want to use.
4. Attach the primitive to the virtual dynamic object. See “Attaching Objects to Other Objects” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for further information.
Editing Dynamic Objects
You can edit dynamic objects directly in the 3D Window. This is similar to editing other objects where
changing the location of the object changes the location of the route, and changing the location of a node
changes the location of a waypoint.
See “Editing Objects in the 3D Window” in the “Working with Objects” chapter for further information.
Terrain Objects
TerraExplorer provides a set of objects that affect the terrain. You can modify the terrain, create holes in
the terrain and play a video file onto the terrain.
Objects Tab
Modifying the Terrain
Using the Modify Terrain tool, you can modify the elevation values in an area of the terrain by drawing a
polygon in the 3D Window and then setting the Modify Terrain object’s properties in its property sheet.
The surface of the terrain is raised or lowered according to the elevation values of the polygon's points.
Different elevation behaviors allow replacing, cropping above or cropping below the original values of the
terrain. The interior of the polygon can be flat or irregular in shape.
432
TerraExplorer User Guide
To modify the terrain:
1. On the Objects tab, in the Terrain Objects group, click Modify Terrain. The Modify Terrain property
sheet is displayed.
2. If you want to position the modify terrain object based on where the mouse is pointing in the 3D
Window, on the top bar of the label’s property sheet, click the XYZ Magnet icon . See “Moving an
Object Based on Where the Mouse is Pointing in the 3D Window” in the “Working with Objects”
chapter for more information.
3. If you want to position the modify terrain object in the Z plane, on the top bar of the object’s property
sheet, click the Z Plane icon . See “Moving an Object in the Z Plane” in the “Working with Objects”
chapter for more information.
4. With the cursor in the 3D Window, click to add the first point of the polygon.
5. Click again to add additional points of the polygon until you have marked the entire shape. You must
place at least three points to define the polygon.
Note: When creating a Modify Terrain object, the lines of the polygon should not overlap each
other.
Note: It is recommended to keep the number of polygon points to the minimum required to define
the shape. Adding unnecessary points may adversely affect performance.
6. Right-click to finish the object.
7. Continue to edit the object’s parameters and shape or close the property sheet to finish the operation.
Modify Terrain Property Sheet Parameters
Object Parameter Activity
Appearance
Name Type the description or name of the modified terrain.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the modified terrain
from the Project Tree.
Modify Terrain
Flat If Yes is selected, sets all points of the modified terrain at the same
altitude, creating a horizontal flat surface
Elevation Behavior Defines how the modified terrain elevation values affect the
terrain's elevation:
Replace: replaces the area defined by the modified terrain with
the selected altitude value.
Crop Below: replaces all elevation values that are lower than
the selected elevation value with the selected altitude value.
Crop Above: replaces all elevation values that are higher than
the selected elevation value with the selected altitude value.
Offset: offsets the area defined by the modified terrain with the
selected altitude value.
Feather Determines the distance along which the gradual fading of the
edges of the modified terrain is applied.
433
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Applying a feather creates continuous diagonal surfaces. These
surfaces start from the terrain database elevation value on the
polygon to the modified terrain elevation value at its respective
point on the feather polyline. Gradual fading of the edges is applied
within the distance defined by the radius parameter.
Type the required radius.
Apply To Determines what surface the terrain modification object is applied
to. If there is a 3DML in the area of the modify terrain object, click
the arrow, and then select either of the following:
Terrain – Changes the elevation values only of the terrain,
without modification to the 3DML.
[name of the 3DML] – Changes the elevation values of the
specified 3DML.
Note: A modify terrain object can also be applied to a
3DML from the 3D Mesh Layer tab. See “Modifying
a 3D Mesh Layer” in the “3D Mesh Layers” chapter
for information.
Timespan
Start Time Click Edit and enter the date and time the modified terrain should
first become visible.
End Time Click Edit and enter the date and time the modified terrain should
stop being visible.
Position
Altitude Method Sets the altitude method to be used by the modified terrain.
Always set to On Terrain.
Altitude Enter the altitude, as defined in Altitude Method, for the modified
terrain pivot point, the center of its base.
X Enter the X-coordinate for the modified terrain’s pivot point.
The pivot is located at the center of the modified terrain. Change
this value to move the entire object.
Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the modified terrain’s pivot point.
The pivot is located at the center of the modified terrain. Change
this value to move the entire object.
MGRS The coordinates of the modified terrain’s pivot point in Military Grid
Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available
if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog
box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for
more information.
Points Position
The parameters in this group are enabled only when the Edit Nodes icon is selected on the
property sheet top bar.
Selected Point Select the point to edit.
The selected point is highlighted on the 3D Window. When you edit
this point, the corresponding point on the modified terrain changes
accordingly.
434
TerraExplorer User Guide
Point X Enter the X-coordinate for the selected point.
Point Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the selected point.
Point MGRS The coordinates of the selected point in Military Grid Reference
System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available if Show
MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog box. See
“View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for more
information.
Point Altitude Enter the altitude, as defined in Altitude Method, for the selected
point.
General
Show in Viewer Determines if the modified terrain appears in the Project Tree
when the file is viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic Viewer.
Message The message associated with the object. The number displayed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a tooltip text to appear when the mouse cursor is placed over
the modified terrain in the 3D Window.
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the modified
terrain.
This distance is used as a stop mark for any Fly-to or View Object
operation. It is also used when selecting to edit the object from the
Project Tree.
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance for the modified terrain object
based on its size.
Cutting a Hole on Terrain
Cutting a hole on the terrain removes the terrain texture while maintaining the original contours of the
terrain. The objects or feature layers created on the terrain in the area of the hole are drawn on the
original contours of the terrain.
To cut a hole on the terrain:
1. On the Objects tab, in the Terrain Objects group, click Hole on Terrain. The Hole on Terrain
property sheet is displayed.
2. With the cursor in the 3D Window, click to add the first point of the hole.
3. Click again to add additional points of hole until you have marked the entire shape.
4. Right-click to finish the hole.
Note: It is recommended to keep the number of hole points to the minimum required to define the
shape. Adding unnecessary points may adversely affect performance.
5. Continue to edit the hole or close the property sheet to finish the operation.
435
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Hole on Terrain Property Sheet Parameters
Object Parameter Activity
Appearance
Name Type the description or name of the Hole on Terrain.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the Hole on Terrain
from the Project Tree.
Line Color Select the outline color for the Hole on Terrain.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Line Opacity Enter the opacity for the Hole on Terrain outline.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Line Style
Line Width Enter the Hole on Terrain line width.
The width is measured in meters.
Line Back Color Sets the Hole on Terrain line back color.
The Hole on Terrain line back color is visible when the line pattern
is set to non-solid patterns such as a dotted pattern.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Line Back Opacity Enter the Hole on Terrain line back opacity.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Line Pattern Select the Hole on Terrain line pattern. You can choose between
different line patterns, e.g., solid, dashed, dotted or a combination
thereof.
Line Spline Determines if the line around the Hole on Terrain is drawn as a
curve based on its nodes.
Timespan
Start Time Click Edit and enter the date and time the hole on terrain should
first become visible.
End Time Click Edit and enter the date and time the hole on terrain should
stop being visible.
Position
Altitude Method The altitude method used by the Hole on Terrain. Always set to On
Terrain.
Altitude The altitude of the Hole on Terrain is always set to zero, meaning
on the surface of the terrain.
X Enter the X-coordinate for the Hole on Terrain pivot point, the
center of its base.
436
TerraExplorer User Guide
Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the Hole on Terrain pivot point, the
center of its base.
MGRS The coordinates of the Hole on Terrain pivot point in Military Grid
Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available
if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog
box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for
more information.
Points Position
The parameters in this group are enabled only when the Edit Nodes icon is selected on the
property sheet top bar.
Selected Point Select the point to edit.
The selected point is highlighted on the 3D Window. When you edit
this point, the corresponding point on the hole changes
accordingly.
Point X Enter the X-coordinate for the selected point.
Point Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the selected point.
Point MGRS The coordinates of the selected point in Military Grid Reference
System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available if Show
MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog box. See
“View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for more
information.
Point Altitude The altitude of all the points is always set to zero, meaning on the
surface of the terrain.
General
Show in Viewer Determines if the terrain hole appears in the Project Tree when the
file is viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic viewer.
Message The message associated with the object. The number displayed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a tooltip text to appear when the mouse cursor is placed over
the Hole on Terrain in the 3D Window.
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the Hole on
Terrain
This distance is used as a stop mark for any Fly-to or View Object
operation. It is also used when selecting to edit the object from the
Project Tree.
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance for the Hole on Terrain object
based on its size.
Max. Visibility Distance Sets the maximal distance from the camera above which the Hole
on Terrain disappears.
Min. Visibility Distance Sets the minimal distance from the camera below which the Hole
on Terrain disappears.
437
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Video on Terrain and Video Billboard
The Video on Terrain/Video Billboard commands play a video file either on a selected area of the terrain
(Video on Terrain), or on a floating billboard (Video Billboard). Both these commands open the same
property sheet and can be converted one to the other by changing the default properties. The primary
difference between the two is the distance from the projector at which the video should be displayed
(Maximum Projection Distance property set in the property sheet). When this distance is set to zero, the
video is projected on the terrain.
The positioning of the projector and the projected video can also be determined using telemetry data that
holds positioning information for the camera based on time stamps. The telemetry data can either be
embedded in the video file or contained in a separate telemetry file.
Supported video file formats are determined by the codecs that are installed and registered on your
computer. Most files that Windows Media Player can play (e.g., *.avi, *.mpg, .mov, etc.), including
streaming Microsoft Media Server (MMS) content, can be draped on the terrain.
TerraExplorer supports the KLV (Key Length Value) format for videos with telemetry information (MISB
0601 standard). TerraExplorer can parse this data and place the video correctly on the terrain
Creating a Video on Terrain/Video Billboard
To create a video on terrain:
1. On the Objects tab, in the Video group, click Video on Terrain/Video Billboard. The Video property
sheet is displayed.
2. If you want to use telemetry data, which is either embedded in the video file or contained in a
separate telemetry file, do the following:
a. In the Use Telemetry File, select Yes.
b. In the Video File field, type or browse to a video file, whose format is supported, or type the URL
(e.g., mms://mms.skylinesoft.com/) if you want to open streaming MMS content. For video files
with telemetry information, TerraExplorer supports the KLV (Key Length Value) format (MISB
0601 standard).
c. If your telemetry data is contained in a separate telemetry file, in the Telemetry File Name field in
the property sheet, enter the Telemetry File Name.
3. If you want to set the object’s location by defining a point in the 3D World, do the following:
a. In the Video File field, type or browse to a video file, whose format is supported, or type the URL
(e.g., mms://mms.skylinesoft.com/) if you want to open streaming MMS content.
b. In the Use Telemetry File, select No. Then click the mouse in the 3D Window to define the
location of the projector.
4. After an object has been placed on the terrain, you can change its properties using the propert y
sheet.
Playing, Pausing and Stopping the Video
To play, pause or stop the video, do either of the following:
In the Project Tree, right-click a Video On Terrain/Video Billboard object and select the required
option from the shortcut menu.
In the 3D Window, right-click a Video On Terrain/Video Billboard object and select the required
option from the shortcut menu.
438
TerraExplorer User Guide
Using a Telemetry File
A telemetry file holds positioning information for the camera based on time stamps. This information is
used to automatically determine the position of the video projector in the 3D Window. This allows the
projected Video On Terrain to be draped over the same area that is captured in the video.
The file is a comma-delimited text file, with each line representing the location parameters for a certain
time stamp. Each value should be a decimal number in double-precision floating-point range.
The following values should appear for each point:
Value Description
Time The time elapsed, in seconds, from the beginning of the recording.
The first point should be set to zero. Following points can use any
increasing value, including fractions (e.g., 0.3) to represent parts of
a second.
X The X-coordinate (Longitude) of the camera.
Y The Y-coordinate (Latitude) of the camera.
Height The height of the camera above the terrain database vertical
datum base ellipsoid.
Roll The Roll of the camera, in degrees.
Pitch The Pitch of the camera, in degrees.
Yaw The Yaw of the camera, in degrees.
This is the direction in which the camera points.
Field of View The horizontal field of view covered by the camera, in degrees.
Video on Terrain/Video Billboard Property Sheet Parameters
Object Parameter Activity
Appearance
Name Type the description or name of the Video object.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the imagery layer from
the Project Tree.
Video
Video File Type the full path of the file, or use the Edit button, for a supported
media file. You can also type a URL for an MMS server.
Supported video file formats are determined by the codecs that are
installed and registered on your computer. Most files that Windows
Media Player can play (e.g., *.avi, *.mpg, etc.), including streaming
Microsoft Media Server (MMS) content, can be draped on the
terrain. TerraExplorer can also use RTSP, or any custom protocol
using “video:myprotocol://” for any custom protocol that is defined
on your system: e.g., “video:custom1://”.
Use Telemetry File Determines how the position is defined.
439
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Choose No to set the object’s route by placing the projector in the
3D World or Yes to link the object to an external set of files
containing telemetry information.
Telemetry File Name Type or browse a path to a .csv telemetry file.
Field Of View Enter the horizontal field of view, in degrees, covered by the
camera.
Calculate Hidden Surface Calculate which surfaces are visible to the projector, and project
video only onto these surfaces.
Note: Selecting this option will slightly increase TerraExplorer's
resource usage, but will result in a more realistic result.
Opacity Enter the opacity for the Video object data.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Max. Projection Distance Maximum distance from the projector at which the video should be
displayed. Set to zero to project on the terrain.
Disable Soundtrack Determines if the audio information in the video file is played.
Choose No to play the soundtrack, or Yes to disable it.
Volume Enter the audio volume level.
The level is defined as percentage, where 100% is the maximum
volume and 0% is the minimum.
Play Video On Startup Determines if the video starts playing when a FLY project opens.
Choose Yes to play the movie automatically when a FLY file opens
or No to instruct the video to wait for a play command.
Projector
TerraExplorer can display objects to mark the location of the video projector. A pyramid is used to
show the position, orientation and field of view of the projector. Four lines originating from the
projector’s location to the ground mark the projector rays. This group defines the appearance of
the projector objects in the 3D Window.
Show Projector Determines if the projector pyramid object is displayed in the 3D
Window.
Projector Color Select the color for the projector pyramid object.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format.
Projector Size Enter the height, in meters, of the projector pyramid.
Show Projector Rays Determines if the projector rays object is displayed in the 3D
Window.
Projector Rays Color Select the color for the projector rays object.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format.
Position
Altitude Method Sets the altitude method to be used by the Video object:
Select Relative to Terrain to place the projector’s position at a
specified altitude above the ground.
Select Absolute to place the projector’s position at a specified
440
TerraExplorer User Guide
altitude above the terrain database vertical datum base
ellipsoid.
Altitude Enter the altitude, as defined in Altitude Method, of the video
projector.
X Enter the X-coordinate for the video projector.
Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the video projector.
MGRS The coordinates of the video projector in Military Grid Reference
System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available if Show
MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog box. See
“View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for more
information.
Yaw Determines the direction angle of the video projector along the
vertical axis relative to north.
Pitch Determines the tilt angle of the video projector along its lateral axis
relative to the horizon.
Roll Determines the roll angle of the video projector along its
longitudinal (front-to-back) axis.
Timespan
Start Time Click Edit and enter the date and time the video should first
become visible.
End Time Click Edit and enter the date and time the video should stop being
visible.
General
Show in Viewer Determines if the video on terrain appears in the Project Tree
when the file is viewed with TerraExplorer Basic viewer.
Message The message associated with the object. The number displayed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a tooltip text to appear when the mouse cursor is placed over
the video object in the 3D Window.
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the Video
object.
This distance is used as a stop mark for any “Fly -to” or “View
object” operation. It is also used when selecting the edit operation
for the object from the Project Tree.
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance for the object based on its size.
Max. Visibility Distance Sets the maximal distance from the camera above which the Video
object disappears.
Min. Visibility Distance Sets the minimum distance from the camera, below which it will not
be visible
441
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 20 NAVIGATION MAP
About the Navigation Map
The Navigation Map window provides quick and easy navigation through the entire terrain. It shows a
raster based map and the location and direction of the camera view on the map. The Navigation Map
window offers a simple mechanism to integrate file or server based maps into the application.
The Navigation Map supports the same file formats and servers as are supported for raster layers. See
“Loading New Raster Layers” in the “Imagery and Elevation Layers” chapter for information.
The Navigation Map Window
Current Location Indicator
The Navigation Map marks the camera’s location and field of view. The indicator shows the direction of
the plane’s flight as a red plane icon, and the direction and field of the camera’s view as two blue lines.
Location Indicator
By default, the indicator is in the center of the Navigation Map. If the plane is located near the edge of the
map, the location indicator may be off the center.
In case the plane is located outside the area of the map, the location indicator is not present.
442
TerraExplorer User Guide
Using the Navigation Map
If the Navigation Map is not displayed, on the View tab, in the Show/Hide group, select the Navigation
Map check box.
Selecting a Navigation Map
The Navigation Map window can contain more than one map for the same project. At the top of the Map
Window, select the required Navigation Map from the drop-down list of available maps.
Select Map
Moving to any Location on the Terrain
Using a Navigation Map, you can jump directly to any place on the map.
To move to any location on the terrain, do either of the following:
Double-click on any area of the navigation map to jump directly to the chosen location.
or
Right-click on the required spot on the map, and select Jump from the shortcut menu.
The plane movement in the 3D 3D Window is synchronized with the plane indicator position on the
navigation map.
To turn-off synchronization:
Right-click the map area, and toggle off the Synchronize 3D option.
Adding a Navigation Map to the Navigation Map Window
To add new maps to the Navigation Map window:
1. On the Navigation tab, in the Map group, click Map. The Navigation Map Settings dialog box is
displayed.
443
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Navigation Map Settings
2. Click Add. The Open dialog box is displayed.
3. Browse to the required map and click Open.
Note: The Navigation Map supports the same file formats and servers as are supported for raster
layers. See “Loading New Raster Layers” in the “Imagery and Elevation Layers” chapter for
information. It is strongly recommended to use a compressed format (JPEG or GIF) and
not BMP, for Navigation Maps. This ensures maximum performance with slower Internet
connections.
4. In the Navigation Map Settings dialog box, define the property sheet parameters as required.
5. If the map is not referenced to the coordinate system of the terrain, do either of the following:
Reprojection - When the map is referenced to a different coordinate system than the coordinate
system of the terrain. See “Reprojecting a Navigation Map” in this chapter for further information.
Manual Adjustment - When the map is not referenced to any coordinate system. See “Adjusting
a Navigation Map Manually” in this chapter for further information.
Reprojecting a Navigation Map
When the navigation map is referenced to a coordinate system, which is different from the terrain
coordinate system, the map must be reprojected.
To reproject a map:
1. On the Navigation tab, in the Map group, click Map. The Navigation Map Settings dialog box is
displayed.
444
TerraExplorer User Guide
2. In the Maps section, select the required map.
3. In the Projection section of the property sheet, in the Reproject Source, select Yes to enable
reprojection of the source.
4. In the Coordinate System field, click Set. The Coordinate System dialog box opens. Enter the
source file’s coordinate system information. See “Coordinate System Dialog Box” in the “Basic
Concepts” chapter for information.
5. Click OK.
Adjusting a Navigation Map Manually
Adjusting a navigation map manually is required when the navigation map is not referenced to any
coordinate system.
The manual adjustment is performed by pairing map locations with their terrain counterparts.
To manually adjust a navigation map, do the following:
1. On the Navigation tab, in the Map group, click Map. The Navigation Map Settings dialog box is
displayed.
2. In the Maps section, select the required map.
3. In the Imagery section of the property sheet, in the Manual Adjustment field, click Set. The
Navigation Map Settings dialog box is minimized.
Note: If you want to restore the Navigation Map Settings dialog box, double-click its title bar.
4. Enter the first map point by right-clicking on the map and selecting Add Map Tie Point from the
shortcut menu.
5. Enter the matching Terrain point by right-clicking in the 3D Window and selecting Add Terrain Tie
Point from the shortcut menu.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the second and third location matches. The Navigation Map Settings dialog
box is restored. Click OK to set the terrain points and close the dialog box.
Setting the Maps Order in the Navigation Maps Window
You can set the order of the maps as they appear in the drop-down list of available maps in the
Navigation Maps window.
To set the order of the maps:
1. On the Navigation tab, in the Map group, click Map. The Navigation Map Settings dialog box is
displayed.
2. Select the map you wish to move up or down the list.
3. Click the arrow buttons until the map is moved to the desired position on the list.
Deleting a Navigation Map from a Project
To delete a navigation map:
1. On the Navigation tab, in the Map group, click Map. The Navigation Map Settings dialog box is
displayed.
2. Select the map you wish to delete from the Maps panel.
3. Click Remove. A dialog box is displayed confirming that you want to delete the selected map. Click
Yes to delete or No to cancel.
445
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 21 ANALYSIS TOOLS
Using Analysis Tools
Analysis Tab
The Analysis tools are accessed from the Analysis tab. To use a tool, click the required icon:
Tool Description
Measurements
Query Displays general information about any position or object in the 3D
Window that is queried.
Distance The distance tool measures and displays the following distances
between two or more points in the 3D Window:
Horizontal Distance
Aerial Distance
Vertical Distance
Area The area tool measures and displays either of the following:
Terrain Area – Measures an area on the terrain, either:
Horizontal plane – The horizontal projection of the
selected area.
Terrain surface - The surface area of the selected region
taking into account terrain contours.
3D Plane Area - Measures the area of a polygon on an
arbitrary surface whose orientation is determined by the first
three points selected.
Terrain Analysis
Contour Map Colorizes and/or overlays the terrain with contour lines, to indicate
changes in elevation. A contour map can be displayed over the
entire terrain and all 3DML layers or for a specified area of the
terrain.
Slope Map The Slope Map tools provide slope information for any of the
following:
Global Slope Map – Displays slope map for the entire terrain.
Slope Map Query – Graphically represents slope values in a
specified area using a color coded point feature layer.
Slope Cursor - Displays slope information in a specified
radius around a selected point.
446
TerraExplorer User Guide
Custom Slope Map– Displays slope map for a specified area.
Best Path Displays the best path between two locations on the terrain with
slope limits.
Terrain Profile Displays the terrain elevation profile along a path.
Flood Assesses the land area covered by water in different water
flooding scenarios.
Volume Analyzes the amount of terrain removed or added to a selected
Modify Terrain object.
Cross Section Tool Makes a horizontal or vertical straight cut to expose obscured
sections of the 3D View.
Line of Sight
Line of Sight Displays a visual marker for the existence of a line of sight from a
single observer position to one or more positions in the world.
Viewshed Calculate the view from a selected observer point or multiple
observer viewpoints:
3D Viewshed – Calculate and mark all areas on the terrain
and on 3D models and objects that are visible from a selected
point on the terrain.
2D Viewshed - Calculate and mark all areas on the terrain that
are visible from a selected point on the terrain.
Viewshed Query - Analyzes the visibility of a selected area
from multiple viewshed observer viewpoints.
Viewshed on Route Displays a viewshed analysis from a series of points along a route:
3D Viewshed on Route By Speed – Provides an animated
representation of the terrain and objects that are visible as a
dynamic object progresses along a defined route according to
a set speed
3D Viewshed on Route By Time – Provides an animated
representation of the terrain and objects that are visible as a
dynamic object progresses along a defined route over a
defined time frame.
3D Viewshed on Route Query – Analyzes the visibility of a
selected area from multiple viewshed observer viewpoints
along a route.
2D Viewshed on Route - Provides an animated
representation of the terrain that is visible as a dynamic object
progresses along a defined route.
Threat Dome Displays the visible volume from a given point on the terrain with a
specified scan field and elevation angle.
Buffer Query Detects all penetrations by 3D elements (e.g., 3D object or 3DML)
to a set buffer zone of a selected polyline. Query points with
breached buffer zones are colored in red. The output of the
analysis is a point feature layer that graphically represents the
447
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
locations along the line where a penetration to the buffer zone was
found.
Shadow
Global Shadow Cast a shadow from all buildings and 3D models.
Selection Shadow Cast a shadow for selected objects.
Shadow Query Calculates the sun-shadow ratio in a specified area, over a
selected timespan.
Comparison
Swipe The following swipe comparison tools are available:
Swipe Imagery Layers - Helps you detect changes between
two aerial images of the same location by allowing you to
dynamically compare the 3D view with and without an Imagery
layer.
Swipe Snapshots - Helps you create and compare snapshots
showing different versions of the area in view in the 3D
Window by showing or hiding objects in the Project Tree.
Swipe 3D Mesh Layers - Helps you detect changes between
two mesh layers in the same location by allowing you to
horizontally swipe between them, dynamically revealing and
hiding parts of each layer.
Elevation The following elevation comparison tools are available:
Elevation Difference – 3D Mesh Layers - Analyzes the
elevation difference between two 3D mesh layers in a defined
polygonal area.
Elevation Difference – Elevation Layers - Analyzes the
elevation difference between two elevation layers in a defined
polygonal area.
Measurement Tools
The following measurement tools are available:
Query
Distance
Area
Measurements can display dynamically as well as be saved in the Project Tree as TerraExplorer objects.
Information Query
The Information Query tool provides you with data about any point or object in the 3D World. For a point
on the terrain, location and elevation information is provided, while for an object, the query also displays
the object’s perimeter and area. If the object selected was loaded from a layer with attribute information,
the object’s attributes are also displayed.
448
TerraExplorer User Guide
To use the information query tool:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Measurement group, click Query.
2. Move the cursor over any point in the 3D Window. When you move the cursor over an object, the
object is highlighted.
3. Click on the point or object for which you require information.
In the Message Bar, TerraExplorer Pro displays the longitude, latitude and altitude.
Note: Military Grid Reference System (MGRS) coordinates are also displayed if Show MGRS
Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog box. See “View” in the “Using
TerraExplorer Options” chapter for more information.
The Query Results dialog box is displayed, showing the longitude, latitude, and elevation. When
an object is selected, general information about the object and attribute information, if available,
is displayed.
4. With the Information Query tool selected, you can click again on any point in the terrain to fi nd its
coordinates. Repeat for as many points as you wish.
5. On the Analysis tab, in the Measurement group, click Query again to close the Information Query.
Distance Tool
The Distance tool measures aerial, horizontal and vertical distance and slope between two or more
points. You can also calculate and display the terrain elevation profile for the aerial measurement line.
To use the distance tool:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Measurement group, click Distance. The Distance Measurement dialog
box is displayed with the following distance options:
Create Measurement Objects – Select the check box if you want to create measurement
objects that will be accessible from the Measurement Objects folder in the Project Tree.
Show Aerial Distance – Show a yellow line marking the aerial distance, i.e., the actual distance
between points, in the 3D Window. The aerial distance is calculated and displayed in the
Distance Measurement dialog box even if this option is not selected.
Show Horizontal Distance – Show a white line marking the horizontal distance between points
in the 3D Window. The horizontal distance is calculated and displayed in the Distance
Measurement dialog box even if this option is not selected.
Show Vertical Distance – Show a purple line marking the vertical distance between points in the
3D Window. The vertical distance is calculated and displayed in the Distance Measurement
dialog box even if this option is not selected.
449
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Distance Measurement
2. If you want to change measurement units, click the Units link. The Options dialog box is displayed,
showing the View tab. Modify the display options for Altitude and Distance and Measurement, and
then click OK. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for more information.
3. If you want to snap the measurement points to an object’s edge or vertex, click the XYZ Snap
Magnet icon . TerraExplorer automatically detects all edges, i.e., intersections of two plane faces,
and vertices, i.e. intersections of two polylines.
4. In the 3D Window, click any point on the terrain or on an object to define the start point of the
measurement. A yellow line extends from the start point. Drag the cursor to the next point and click
again. Repeat to add as many segments as required. If you want to delete the last point added, click
Delete Point .
5. Right-click to finish the measurement.
6. If you want to obtain the same measurement type between any two or more points in the terrain, with
the Distance command selected, repeat steps 2-5 above.
The Distance dialog box displays the following measurements:
Measurement Description
Total Aerial Distance The aerial distance, i.e., the actual distance between the points.
This measurement is the sum of the aerial distances between the
points as you progress from the start point to the endpoint.
Total Horizontal Distance The horizontal distance between the points.
This measurement is the sum of the horizontal distances between
the points as you progress from the start point to the endpoint.
Total Vertical Distance The difference in elevation between the points.
If you have marked more than two points, this measurement does
not take into account the elevation values of the middle points.
Slope The slope of the line between the first and last points.
450
TerraExplorer User Guide
If you have marked more than two points, this measurement does
not take into account anything other than the elevation at the start
point and the elevation at the endpoint.
7. If you want to delete the measurement polyline in the 3D Window, click Delete .
8. If you want to display the terrain elevation profile along the drawn line, and related information such
as maximum and minimum elevation values and slope, do the following:
a. Click Terrain Profile . A terrain profile graph opens, displaying the terrain elevation profile.
Terrain Profile Graph
b. Use the Zoom in , Zoom out , and Zoom to full extent of data buttons to adjust the
zoom as required.
c. Determine what information is indicated on the graph by selecting any of the following display
options:
Waypoint Select the check box to mark each of the polylines' waypoints on
the graph with a .
Min/Max Elevation Select the check box to mark each of the polylines' maximum and
minimum points with a .
Min/Max Slope Select the check box to mark each of the polylines' maximum and
minimum slope with a .
d. If you want to export the terrain profile to a shapefile layer, click Export to Layer.
e. Point to any point on the graph to display the following values. If you want to display the values
and also jump to the point on the terrain, then click instead of pointing.
Value Description
X X-coordinate of the selected point.
Y Y-coordinate of the selected point.
MGRS The coordinates of the selected point converted to Military Grid
Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available
if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog
box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for
more information.
Elevation Elevation value of the point above the terrain database vertical
datum base ellipsoid.
Slope Slope of the curve at the selected point
451
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Area Tool
The Area tool allows you to calculate area on the terrain or on an arbitrary plane.
To use the area tool:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Measurement group, click Area. The Area Measurement dialog box is
displayed.
Area Measurement Dialog Box
2. Click either of the following commands:
Horizontal plane area (2D measurement) - Calculate area on terrain. The area measured is
the horizontal projection of the area you have outlined, even if some or all of your selected area
encompasses mountainous terrain.
3D plane area - Calculate area on an arbitrary plane. The polygon’s orientation is determined
by the first three points selected.
3. If you want to save the measurement in the Project Tree as a TerraExplorer object, select Create
Measurement Objects.
4. If you want to change measurement units, click the Units link. The Options dialog box is displayed,
showing the View tab. Modify the display options for Altitude and Distance and Measurement, and
then click OK. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for more information.
5. If you want to snap the measurement points to an object’s edge or vertex, click the XYZ Snap
Magnet icon . TerraExplorer automatically detects all edges, i.e., intersections of two plane faces ,
and vertices, i.e. intersections of two polylines.
6. In the 3D Window, click any point on the terrain/plane to define the start point of the measurement.
Click to set the second point and then again for each additional point. Right-click to finish the
measurement. If the boundary line of the measured area crosses itself, it turns red. If you want to
delete the last point added, click Delete Point .
7. Right-click to finish the measurement. The Area dialog box displays area and perimeter
measurements.
8. If you want to calculate the surface area of the selected region taking into account terrain contours ,
do the following:
a. In the Surface Sample Interval field, type the desired distance between terrain sample points.
452
TerraExplorer User Guide
b. Click Terrain Surface Area (3D measurement) . The terrain surface area measurement is
displayed.
9. If you want to delete the area polygon in the 3D Window, click Delete .
Terrain Analysis Tools
The following terrain analysis tools are available:
Contour Map Tools
Slope Map Tools
Best Path Tool
Terrain Profile Tool
Flood Tool
Volume Tool
Cross Section Tool
Contour Map Tools
The Contour Map tool creates a topographic map that portrays differences in terrain elevation by
connecting points of equal elevation with contour lines or by coloring terrain according to varying
altitudes. You can choose between the following:
Global Contour Map - Apply contour colors to the entire terrain and 3DMLwith dynamically placed
contour lines that provide coarse contours when zoomed out and detailed contours when zoomed in.
Elevation labels appear only on the terrain and not on the 3DML.
Custom Contour Map - An advanced map in which parameters such as coverage area (specified
rectangular area or entire terrain), contour palette, and contour line interval can be customized and a
contour map object is added to the Project Tree. Contour colors and lines are only applied to the
terrain, and not to 3DML layers.
Global Contour Map
To toggle on/off view of a global contour map:
On the Analysis tab, in the Terrain Analysis group, click Contour Map. A contour map overlays the
entire 3D Window but no contour map object is created in the Project Tree.
Note: If you want to create a contour map object for the entire terrain that will be listed in the
Project Tree, create a custom contour map (See Custom Contour Map) and set the
Coverage Area property in the property sheet to Entire Terrain.
Custom Contour Map
To create a custom contour map:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Terrain Analysis group, click the arrow next to Contour Map, point to
Custom Contour Map Object, and then click one of the following options to indicate differences in
terrain elevation:
453
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Contour Colors - Apply different colors from a contour palette to each elevation level.
Contour Lines - Connect points of equal elevation with contour lines.
Contour Colors and Lines - Display both contour lines and contour colors.
The Contour Map property sheet is displayed.
2. If you want to apply contour colors/lines only to terrain whose altitude is within a specific range, do the
following:
a. In the Min/Max section, in the Use Min/Max field, select Yes.
b. Enter the Minimum (altitude) value and Maximum (altitude) value.
c. Select the color you want to apply to all terrain with altitude values outside of the set range.
3. In the Appearance section, in the Contour Palette field, select a contour palette from the drop-down
list.
4. In the Appearance section, in the Contour Lines Color field, click Edit and select a contour line
color.
5. In the Appearance section, in the Coverage Area field, select the coverage of the contour map:
Rectangle - A designated rectangular area.
Entire Terrain - The entire terrain.
6. If you set the Coverage Area field to Entire Terrain, skip to step 7.
7. If you set the Coverage Area field to Rectangle, place the cursor in the 3D Window, and click to add
the first corner. Then click a second time to add the opposite corner and complete the rectangle.
8. Continue to edit the contour map’s parameters, or close the property sheet to finish the operation.
See “Contour Map Property Sheet Parameters” in this chapter for information.
9. If you want to display a map legend that indicates which color represents each elevation value, right-
click the contour map, and select Show Legend from the shortcut menu.
Note: After the contour map object has been created and set to display the cont our lines, automatic tool
tips are added to the contour lines. When the cursor is placed, in the 3D Window, above a
contour line, a tool tip appears displaying the height value of the specific line. In addition, the
tooltip entered in the Contour Map property sheet, is displayed when the cursor is placed over
areas of colorized terrain.
Contour Map Property Sheet Parameters
Object Parameter Activity
Min/Max
Use Min/Max Select Yes to only display contour colors and lines for areas of the
terrain whose altitude value is between the Minimum Value and
Maximum Value entered below. Select No to display contour
colors and lines for all altitude values as set in the contour palette.
Minimum Value This field is only enabled when “Use Min/Max” is set to Yes.
Type the minimum altitude value for which contour colors and lines
should be displayed.
Maximum Value This field is only enabled when “Use Min/Max” is set to Yes.
Type the maximum altitude value for which contour colors and
lines should be displayed.
Color Outside of Range This field is only enabled when “Use Min/Max” is set to Yes.
454
TerraExplorer User Guide
Select how you want to color all the terrain whose altitude is not
within the Min/Max range:
Transparent - No color.
Red/Blue - All water is colored in blue and the rest in red.
Appearance
Name Type the description or name of the contour map.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the object from the
Project Tree.
Line Opacity Enter the opacity for the contour and outline lines.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Display Style Sets the style to display the contour map:
Select Contour lines to display contour lines at set elevation
values.
Select Contour colors to represent varying altitudes in
different colors according to the selected color scheme.
Select Contour Lines and contour colors to display both
contour lines and contour colors.
Coverage Area Determines the coverage of the contour map.
Select Rectangle to apply to a rectangular area, or Entire Terrain
to apply to the entire terrain.
Contour Palette Sets the palette style of the contour map. Select one of the
available palettes.
This field is enabled only when “Display Style” is set to “Contour
Colors”.
Fill Opacity Enter the opacity for the contour map. The opacity is defined as a
percentage, where 100% is opaque and 0% is transparent.
This field is enabled only when “Display Style” is set to “Contour
Colors”.
Contour Lines Color Select the color for the contour lines.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff). This option
is enabled only when “Display Style” is set to “Contour Lines”.
Contour Lines Interval Determines the elevation spacing between the contour lines.
The base for the contour lines is at zero elevation above the terrain
database vertical datum base ellipsoid.
Timespan
Start Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the contour map
should first become visible.
End Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the contour map
should stop being visible.
455
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Position
X Enter the X-coordinate for the rectangle’s pivot point. The pivot is
located at the center of the rectangle. Change this value to move
the entire polyline.
This field is enabled only when “Coverage Area” is set to
“Rectangle”.
Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the rectangle’s pivot point. The pivot is
located at the center of the rectangle. Change this value to move
the entire polyline.
This field is enabled only when “Coverage Area” is set to
“Rectangle”.
MGRS The coordinates of the rectangle’s pivot point converted to Military
Grid Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only
available if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options
dialog box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options”
chapter for more information.
Yaw Determines the direction angle of the contour map rectangle, along
the vertical axis relative to north.
Change this value to rotate the entire rectangle by a specified
angle. This option is enabled only when “Coverage Area” is set to
“Rectangle”.
Geometry
Length Determines the length of the rectangle.
This option is enabled only when “Coverage Area” is set to
“Rectangle”.
Width Determines the width of the rectangle.
This option is enabled only when “Coverage Area” is set to
“Rectangle”.
General
Show In Viewer Determines if the contour map appears in the Project Tree when
the file is viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic Viewer.
Message The message associated with the object. The number displayed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a tool tip text to appear when the mouse cursor is placed
over the contour map in the 3D Window.
An automatic tool tip displaying the contour line height is created
for the contour lines.
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the contour
map.
This distance is used as a stop mark for any “Fly -to” or “View
Object” operation. It is also used when editing the object from the
Project Tree.
456
TerraExplorer User Guide
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance for the map based on its size.
Max. Visibility Distance Sets the maximal distance from the camera above which the
contour map disappears.
Min. Visibility Distance Sets the minimal distance from the camera below which the
contour map disappears.
Order Set the Draw Order of the contour map. Objects with higher Order
values are drawn on top of objects with lower values.
Creating and Modifying Contour Palettes
To create or modify a contour palette:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Terrain Analysis group, click the arrow next to Contour Map, and then
click Contour Palettes. The Elevation Color Editor dialog box opens.
TerraExplorer - Elevation Color Editor
457
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
2. Do one of the following:
If you want to create a new contour palette, type the name of the new palette and click Add.
If you want to modify an existing contour palette, select the required palette.
3. If you want to add a new control handle, in the color gradient/contour box, click the location of the
required new handle.
4. If you want to delete a control handle, select it and click .
5. Navigate the color gradient/contour box using the five navigation buttons:
Button Description
Jumps to the top control handle.
Up arrow with limit
Jumps to the next control handle.
Up arrow without limit
Jumps to the currently selected control handle.
Left arrow
Jumps down to the next control handle.
Down arrow without limit
Jumps to the bottom control handle.
Down arrow with limit
6. Select the required control handle. Then click the color palette and select the required color for the
section.
7. If you want to clear the color gradient contour box, click Clear All.
8. If you want to restart editing from the original scheme after changes have been made, click Reload.
The original scheme is loaded on the color gradient/contour box.
9. Click OK to update all the schemes updated in the current session Elevation Color Editor.
Deleting a Contour Palette
To delete an existing palette:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Terrain Analysis group, click the arrow next to Contour Map, and then
click Contour Palettes. The Elevation Color Editor dialog box opens.
2. Select the required contour palette, and then click Delete. A warning message appears asking you to
verify the Delete command.
3. Click Yes to verify or No to cancel.
Slope Map Tools
The Slope Map tools provide slope information for a specified area or the entire terrain. You can choose
between the following:
Global Slope Map - Applies default palette colors and direction arrows to entire terrain according to
slope degree and aspect. Slope map colors are rendered on terrain textures as well as on 3DML
layers.
Custom Slope Map - An advanced slope map in which parameters such as coverage area (specified
rectangular area or entire terrain), slope palette, and arrow color can be customized and a slope map
object is added to the Project Tree. The custom slope map can show degree and/or aspect
(direction). Slope colors and arrows are only applied to the terrain, and not to 3DML layers.
458
TerraExplorer User Guide
Slope Map Query – Graphically represents slope values in a specified area using a color coded point
feature layer that is added to the Project Tree.
Slope Cursor - Displays slope information in a specified radius around a selected point.
Slope Palette - Opens the Elevation Color Editor to allow creation of new slope palettes or
modification of existing ones.
Global Slope Map
To toggle on/off view of a global slope map:
On the Analysis tab, in the Terrain Analysis group, click Slope Map. A slope map overlays the
entire 3D Window but no slope map object is created in the Project Tree.
Note: If you want to create a slope map object for the entire terrain that will be listed in the
Project Tree, create a custom slope map (See Custom Slope Map) and set the Coverage
Area property in the property sheet to Entire Terrain.
Custom Slope Map
To create a custom slope map:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Terrain Analysis group, click the arrow next to Slope Map, point to
Custom Slope Map Object, and then click one of the following options:
Slope Color Map - Apply palette colors to the terrain according to degree of slope.
Slope Directions - Display on terrain arrows indicating the direction of the slope.
Slope Color Map with Directions - Display both slope colors and arrows indicating slope
direction.
The Slope Map property sheet is displayed.
2. In the Slope Analysis property sheet, in the Appearance section, in the Coverage Area field,
select the coverage of the contour map:
Rectangle - A designated rectangular area.
Entire Terrain - The entire terrain.
3. If you set the Coverage Area field to Entire Terrain, skip to step 5.
4. If you set the Coverage Area field to Rectangle, place the cursor in the 3D Window, and click to add
the first corner. Then click a second time to add the opposite corner and complete the rectangle.
5. Edit the slope map’s parameters, or close the property sheet to finish the operation.
6. If you want to display the map’s legend indicating which color represents each slope range, right-click
the slope map, and select Show Legend from the shortcut menu.
Note: After the slope map object has been created and set to display the contour lines, automatic tool
tips are added to the slope lines. When the cursor is placed, in the 3D Window, above a slope
line, a tool tip appears displaying the slope of the specific line. In addition, the tooltip entered in
the Slope Analysis property sheet is displayed when the cursor is placed over areas of colorized
terrain.
Slope Analysis Property Sheet Parameters
Object Parameter Activity
Appearance
459
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Name Type the description or name of the slope map.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the object from the
Project Tree.
Display Style Sets the style to display the slope map:
Select Slope arrows to display arrows indicating where the
slope increases and where it decreases.
Select Slope colors to apply a color palette based on the
steepness of the slope.
Select Slope arrows and colors to display both slope colors
and directions.
Coverage Area Determines the coverage of the object.
Select Rectangle to apply to a rectangular area, or Entire Terrain
to apply to the entire terrain.
Slope Palette Sets the palette style of the slope map.
Select one of the available palettes. This option is enabled only
when “Display Style” is set to Slope color map or Slope directions
and color map.
Fill Opacity Enter the opacity for the slope map. The opacity is defined as a
percentage, where 100% is opaque and 0% is transparent.
Arrow Color Select the fill color for the arrows. This option is enabled only when
“Display Style” is set to Slope directions or Slope directions and
color map.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Timespan
Start Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the map should first
become visible.
End Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the map should stop
being visible.
Position
X Enter the X-coordinate for the rectangle’s pivot point. The pivot is
located at the center of the rectangle. Change this value to move
the entire polyline.
This field is enabled only when “Coverage Area” is set to
Rectangle.
Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the rectangle’s pivot point. The pivot is
located at the center of the rectangle. Change this value to move
the entire polyline.
This field is enabled only when “Coverage Area” is set to
Rectangle.
MGRS The coordinates of the rectangle’s pivot point in Military Grid
Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available
if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog
460
TerraExplorer User Guide
box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for
more information.
Yaw Determines the direction of the slope map rectangle, along the
vertical axis relative to north. Change this value to rotate the entire
rectangle by a specified angle.
This field is enabled only when “Coverage Area” is set to
Rectangle.
Geometry
Length Determines the length of the rectangle.
This field is enabled only when “Coverage Area” is set to
Rectangle.
Width Determines the width of the rectangle.
This field is enabled only when “Coverage Area” is set to
Rectangle.
General
Show in Viewer Determines if the slope map appears in the Project Tree when the
file is viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic Viewer.
Message The message associated with the object. The number displayed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a tooltip text to appear when the mouse cursor is placed over
the slope map colorized terrain area in the 3D Window.
An automatic tool tip displaying the contour line height is created
for the contour lines.
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the slope
map.
This distance is used as a stop mark for any “Fly-to” or “View
Object” operation. It is also used when editing the object from the
Project Tree.
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance for the map based on its size.
Max. Visibility Distance Sets the maximal distance from the camera above which the slope
map disappears.
Min. Visibility Distance Sets the minimal distance from the camera below which the slope
map disappears.
Order Set the Draw Order of the slope map. Objects with higher Order
values are drawn on top of objects with lower values.
Creating and Modifying Slope Palettes
Custom slope palettes can be created using the Elevation Color Editor.
461
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
To create or modify a contour palette:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Terrain Analysis group, click the arrow next to Slope Map, and then
click Slope Palettes. The Elevation Color Editor dialog box opens.
TerraExplorer - Elevation Color Editor
2. Do one of the following:
If you want to create a new slope palette, type the name of the new palette and click Add.
If you want to modify an existing contour palette, select the required palette.
3. If you want to add a new control handle, in the color gradient/contour box, click the location of the
required new handle.
4. If you want to delete a control handle, select it and click .
5. Navigate the color gradient/contour box using the five navigation buttons:
462
TerraExplorer User Guide
Button Description
Jumps to the top control handle.
Up arrow with limit
Jumps to the next control handle.
Up arrow without limit
Jumps to the currently selected control handle.
Left arrow
Jumps down to the next control handle.
Down arrow without limit
Jumps to the bottom control handle.
Down arrow with limit
6. Select the required control handle. Then click the color palette and select the required color for the
section.
7. If you want to clear the color gradient contour box, click Clear All.
8. If you want to restart editing from the original scheme after changes have been made, click Reload.
The original scheme is loaded on the color gradient/contour box.
9. Click OK to update all the schemes updated in the current session Elevation Color Editor.
Deleting a Slope Palette
To delete an existing palette:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Terrain Analysis group, click the arrow next to Slope Map, and then
click Slope Palettes. The Elevation Color Editor dialog box opens.
2. Select the required slope palette, and then click Delete. A warning message appears asking you to
verify the Delete command.
3. Click Yes to verify or No to cancel.
Slope Map Query
The Slope Map query tool calculates the slope value in a specified area. The area is defined by a drawn
line or polygon, or by a selection of points, lines or polygons.
The output of the analysis is a point feature layer that graphically represents the slope values at different
points in the specified area. Each point in the feature layer is color-coded according to the elevation
model steepness:
Sky blue = Slope value is lower than 6 degrees
Blue = Slope value is between 6 - 17 degrees
Green = Slope value is between 17 - 31 degrees
Yellow = Slope value is between 31 - 38 degrees
Orange = Slope value is between 38 - 45 degrees
Red = Slope value is greater than 45 degrees
463
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
To use the Slope Map Query tool:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Terrain Analysis group, click the arrow next to Slope Map, and then
click Slope Map Query. The Slope Map Query dialog box opens.
Slope Map Query Tool
2. Select one of the Create as options:
Layer (Entire) Create a feature layer under the application's AppData.
Layer Create a streaming feature layer under the application's AppData.
(Streaming)
3. In the Spacing field, type the horizontal and vertical spacing (in meters) between query points in the
area for which the slope is being calculated.
4. Select one of the following methods of designating the area for which the slope map query should be
calculated:
Follow Line - Query points are created along the drawn line.
Fill Area - Query points are created inside the drawn polygon.
Selected Group - Query points are created at all points, along all lines, or inside all polygons, in
the selected group. Select the required group from the Project Tree, and then click Selected
Group.
From Clipboard - Query points are created for all clipboard objects. Copy the required objects to
the clipboard, and click From Clipboard.
Slope Cursor
The Slope Cursor tool displays slope information in a specified radius around a selected point.
To use the Slope Cursor tool:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Terrain Analysis group, click the arrow next to Slope Map, and then
click Slope Cursor. The Slope Cursor dialog box opens.
464
TerraExplorer User Guide
Slope Cursor Dialog Box
2. Set the Slope Cursor properties
Property Description
Display Max Slope Values Defines whether the maximum positive and maximum negative slope
values are displayed. Choose between Never, On Click and Always.
Display Heading Slope Defines whether the heading slope value is displayed. Choose
between Never, On Click and Always.
The heading is the current direction of the camera.
Display Coordinate Info Defines whether the selected coordinate information is displayed.
Choose between Never, On Click and Always.
Measure Distance Defines the measurement radius around the center point.
Alert Slope Apply colors to slope based on Alert rating levels.
Danger Slope Apply colors to slope based on Danger rating levels.
3. Click Start Cursor to start the slope query.
4. Point to the terrain to view slope arrows showing the maximum positive and maximum negative slope
angles for the selected point.
5. Left-click to recalculate slope values using a more precise method. The calculation may take a few
seconds.
6. Right-click or click Stop to exit Slope Cursor mode.
Best Path Tool
The Best Path tool calculates the best path between two locations on the terrain without exceeding
definable climb and descent slope limits.
465
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
The tool creates a line object marked on the ground representing the calc ulated path. The calculation
takes into account the elevation values of the terrain, and implements a heuristic algorithm. The
parameters available for the search determine the time and probability of finding the best path.
Using the Best Path Tool
To use the Best Path tool:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Terrain Analysis group, click Best Path.
2. Set the required Best Path parameters.
3. With the cursor in the 3D Window, click to define the start point for the path.
4. Click again to define the endpoint of the path.
5. Once the Best Path has been calculated, it displays in the 3D Window.
6. If you want to edit its parameters and recalculate it, make the required modifications in the property
sheet and in the Recalculate Path click Apply.
7. If you want to move the path, click the Edit Nodes icon , on the top bar of the property sheet, and
move the node point to the required location.
8. Close the property sheet to end the operation.
Best Path Property Sheet Parameters
Object Parameter Activity
Appearance
Name Type the description or name of the Best Path.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when the object is selected from the
Project Tree.
Path Color Select the color for the best path.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Position
Start Location X Enter the X-coordinate for the start location.
Start Location Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the start location.
Start Location MGRS The coordinates for the start location in Military Grid Reference
System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available if Show
MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog box. See
“View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for more
information.
End Location X Enter the X-coordinate for the end location.
End Location Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the end location.
End Location MGRS The coordinates for the end location in Military Grid Reference
System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available if Show
MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog box. See
“View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for more
information.
466
TerraExplorer User Guide
Settings
Sample Interval Enter the desired value (in meters) for the resolution of the
measurement. This value represents the distance between sample
points along the path. The smaller the sample interval, the more
accurate the calculation, but the longer it takes to calculate.
Search Area Factor Enter the desired value for the area of the calculation.
This value represents the factor multiplying the distance between
each two points giving the length of the search area rectangle. The
width is set to half of the length.
Climb Slope Limit Enter the climb slope limit (in degrees) that no part in the path can
exceed.
Descent Slope Limits Enter the descent slope limit (in degrees) that no part in the path
can exceed.
No part of the path can have a steeper slope than the negative
value of this parameter.
Recalculate Path Click this button to perform the calculation again with the updated
parameters.
Timespan
Start Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the path should first
become visible.
End Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the path should stop
being visible.
General
Show in Viewer Determines if the Best Path appears in the Project Tree when the
file is viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic viewer.
Message The message associated with the object. The number displayed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a tooltip text to appear when the mouse cursor is placed over
the Best Path in the 3D Window.
Max. Visibility Distance Sets the maximal distance from the camera above which the Best
Path polygon disappears.
Min. Visibility Distance Sets the minimal distance from the camera below which the Best
Path polyline disappears.
Once completed, a single line, marked on the terrain appears between the start and end locations. This
line represents the best path between the two points under the constraints set by the slope parameters.
At any time, you can change the start and endpoints, and the various parameters, and recalculate the
path.
467
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Terrain Profile Tool
The Terrain Profile tool displays the terrain elevation profile along a defined path, and related information
on this profile such as maximum and minimum elevation values and slope. The terrain profile can also
compare between the base terrain and an elevation layer.
To use the Terrain Profile tool:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Terrain Analysis group, click Terrain Profile. The Terrain Profile dialog
box is displayed.
Terrain Profile – Compare Mode
2. Enter the following parameters:
Parameter Description
Mode Select the profile mode.
Normal – Display a profile only for the selected polyline(s).
Compare – Compare the selected polyline's profile to that of a
specified elevation layer.
Quality Determines the distance between sample points along the polyline for
which the terrain profile is being calculated. High Quality will yield a more
accurate result but take longer to calculate.
Elevation Layer Select the elevation layer to which to compare the defined polyline. This
parameter is only available if Compare is selected in the Mode field.
3. Select one of the following methods of designating the polyline(s) for which the terrain profile should
be calculated:
Follow Line – A terrain profile is created along the drawn line. In the 3D Window, left-click to
place the line waypoints, and right-click to complete the line.
468
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: When a terrain profile is created by "Follow Line", a group is created in the Project Tree
with the drawn line object.
Selected Group – A terrain profile is created for each of the polylines in the selected group.
Select the required layer from the Project Tree, and then click Selected Group.
From Clipboard – A terrain profile is created for each of the polylines in the clipboard.
A terrain profile graph opens, displaying the terrain elevation profile.
Terrain Profile Graph
4. Use the Zoom in , Zoom out , and Zoom to full extent of data buttons to adjust the zoom
as required.
5. Determine what information is indicated on the graph by selecting any of the following display options:
Waypoint Select the check box to mark each of the polylines' waypoints on
the graph with a .
Min/Max Elevation Select the check box to mark each of the polylines' maximum and
minimum points with a .
Min/Max Slope Select the check box to mark each of the polylines' maximum and
minimum slope with a .
6. If you want to export the terrain profile to a shapefile layer, click Export to Layer.
Note: When a terrain profile created for multiple lines (in a group or from clipboard), is exported
to a layer, the line color on the graph corresponds to the color of the points that make up
the line in the layer.
7. Point to any point on the graph to display the following values. If you want to display the values and
also jump to the point on the terrain, then click instead of pointing.
Value Description
X X-coordinate of the selected point.
Y Y-coordinate of the selected point.
Elevation Elevation value of the point above the terrain database vertical
datum base ellipsoid.
Slope Slope of the curve at the selected point
469
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Flood Tool
The Flood tool assesses the land area covered by water in different water flooding scenarios. The result
of the flood analysis process is a set of polygons showing the flooded areas.
Analysis can be performed based on either of the following scenarios:
Single Instance - Water level rises once (initial water level set by user).
Continuous Rise - Water level rising at a constant rate over a certain period of time (rate of rise and
rise interval set by user).
Using the Flood Tool
To use the Flood tool:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Terrain Analysis group, click Flood.
2. In the property sheet, in the Sample Interval field, enter the desired distance between sample
points.
3. In the property sheet, in the Scenario Type field, select a scenario:
Single Instance - Water level rises once.
Continuous Rise - Water level rising at a constant rate over a certain period of time.
4. If you selected Single Instance in step 4, in the Water Level Rise field, enter the initial water
elevation in meters.
5. If you selected Continuous Rise in step 4, set the following parameters in the property sheet:
Water Rise Rate
Start Time
End Time
Time Sample Interval
6. In the 3D Window, click a point to mark the center of the circular area to be analyzed.
7. Drag the mouse to set the required radius size and click again.
Note: If the Sample Interval (See below in property sheet) is smaller than necessary for an accurate
assessment, a dialog box is displayed asking if you want to increase the Sample Interval to a
recommended value. Click Yes to increase the size, or No to keep the sample size as is.
The result of the flood analysis process is a set of polygons showing the flooded areas.
Flood Analysis Property Sheet Parameters
Parameter Description
Sample Interval Enter the desired value for the resolution of the measurement. This
value represents the distance between terrain sample points. The
smaller the sample interval, the more accurate the calculation, but
the longer it takes to calculate.
Scenario Select a scenario:
Single Instance - Water level rises once.
Continuous Rise - Water level rising at a constant rate over a
certain period of time.
Water Level Rise This field is only enabled when Single Instance is selected in the
Scenario field.
470
TerraExplorer User Guide
Enter the initial water elevation in meters.
Water Rise Rate This field is only enabled when Continuous Rise is selected in the
Scenario field.
Enter the rate (meters/hour) that the water is rising.
Start Time This field is only enabled when Continuous Rise is selected in the
Scenario field.
Select the time and date that the water level begins to rise.
End Time This field is only enabled when Continuous Rise is selected in the
Scenario field.
Select the time and date that the water level stop rising.
Time Sample Interval This field is only enabled when Continuous Rise is selected in the
Scenario field.
This value determines how many samples are taken between the
Start Time and End Time. The smaller the sample interval, the
more accurate the calculation, but the longer it takes to calculate.
Volume Tool
The Volume Analysis tool analyzes the volume of the terrain or model removed or added by selected
horizontal planes or modify terrain/3DML objects.
Using the Volume Analysis Tool
To use the Volume Analysis tool:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Terrain Analysis group, click Volume. The Volume Analysis dialog box
is displayed.
Volume Analysis Tool
471
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
2. In the Compare field, select one of the following analysis modes:
Horizontal Plane – Calculate the volume added or removed by a horizontal plane defined either
by a polygon you now draw or by polygons already on the clipboard.
Modify Terrain – Draw New – Calculate the volume added or removed by a new Modify Terrain
object that you now create.
Modify Terrain – Select Existing – Calculate the volume added or removed by the Modify
Terrain object(s) selected from the list.
3. Enter the required parameters:
Parameter Description
Select This field is displayed only when Modify Terrain – Select Existing mode
is selected.
Select one or more Modify Terrain objects from the list. Use CTRL-click
or SHIFT-click to multi-select. Click Refresh list to update the list if
changes were made to the project.
Quality Determines the accuracy level by which the analysis is performed. Select
one of the following options:
Low – Performs 16K samples
Medium – Performs 65K samples
High – Performs 260K samples
Results Layer Select this option to create a point feature layer representing each
volume analysis result. The area and volume (removed or added) of
each sample in the feature layer is stored in the Volume Area and
Volume Difference attribute fields of the feature that represents the
sample.
4. Perform the steps relevant to the selected mode:
Horizontal Plane Mode
Select either of the following methods to mark your area of interest:
Draw Area – The area is marked by drawing a polygon in the 3D Window. If this option is
selected, left-click in the 3D Window to place the polygon waypoints, and right -click to
complete.
From Clipboard – Analysis is performed in the locations of all polygon clipboard objects. The
polygons must be on the clipboard before selecting this option.
Modify Terrain – Draw New Object Mode
a. Click Start Calculation. The Modify Terrain property sheet is displayed.
b. In the 3D Window, left-click to place the polygon waypoints, and right-click to complete.
c. Close the property sheet to start calculation.
Modify Terrain – Select Existing Mode
a. In the Select field, select one of the project’s modify terrain objects.
b. Click Start Calculate.
472
TerraExplorer User Guide
Draw Area – The area is marked by drawing a polygon in the 3D Window. If this option is
selected, left-click in the 3D Window to place the polygon waypoints, and right -click to
complete.
From Clipboard – Analysis is performed in the locations of all polygon clipboard objects.
4. When calculation is complete, a dialog box is displayed with the analysis results.
Cross Section Tool
The Cross Section tool makes a horizontal or vertical straight cut to expose obscured sections of the 3D
View.
Using the Cross Section Tool
To use the Cross Section tool:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Terrain Analysis group, click Cross Section. The Cross Section dialog
box is displayed.
Cross Section Tool
2. Enter the following parameters:
Parameter Description
Mode Select the mode.
Auto – The direction of the cross section is automatically determined
based on what the cursor is currently pointing at:
A vertical surface (e.g., side of a building) – Vertical cross section
The terrain or any horizontal flat surface (e.g., roof tops) –
Horizontal cross section
Horizontal – Create horizontal cross sections.
Vertical – Create vertical cross sections.
473
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Plane Size Determines the size of the cross section plane. Slide the slider to the right
to increase the plane size, and left to decrease.
Note: The initial size is defined according to the distance between the
camera and the plane.
Plane Direction Slide the Plane Direction slider to rotate the direction of the cross section
plane.
Save to Project Click Save to create a cross section object in the Project Tree.
Note: The cross section object can then be activated by selecting the
cross section plane in the 3D Window or by double-clicking the
object in the Project Tree.
3. Click Start.
4. In the 3D Window, click where you want to create a cross section. Then use the Cross Section slider
to adjust the position of the cross section plane. When cutting a horizontal cross section, slide the
slider to the left to lower the plane (increasing the section being clipped), and right to raise it. When
cutting a vertical cross section, slide the slider to the left to move the cross section plane forward, and
right to move it backward.
5. Click Stop to exit the particular cross section.
Line of Sight Tools
The following line of sight tools are available:
Line of Sight Analysis Tool
Viewshed Tool
Viewshed on Route Tool
Threat Dome Tool
Buffer Query Tool
Line of Sight Analysis Tool
The Line of Sight Analysis tool provides a visual indication of whether specific locations in the 3D World
can be seen from a selected position. The tool displays a visual marker for the existence of a line of sight
from a single observer position to multiple positions in the world.
This feature takes into account the observer’s viewpoint, direction of sight and distance of sight, to portray
which locations can be viewed from the viewpoint, and which locations cannot be viewed. The observer
and target positions can be set at any altitude above the terrain.
Using the Line of Sight Analysis Tool
To use the Line of Sight Analysis tool:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Line of Sight group, click Line of Sight.
2. In the Line of Sight Analysis property sheet, enter the following parameters:
a. In the Analysis section, in the Sampling Interval field, enter the desired value for the sample
resolution of your measurement. This value represents the distance between terrain samples for
the measurement along each line. A smaller sample size is more accurate but slower to calculate.
b. In the Observer section, in the Height field, enter the desired value for the altitude of the
observer.
474
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: The X and Y observer position fields in the Observer section are derived from the point you
select in the 3D Window (see below). They only become enabled after you place the
Observer point, so you can modify the values as required in the property sheet.
c. In the Targets section, in the Height field, enter the desired value for the altitude of the target
point or points.
3. Once you have set the necessary parameters, click the cursor to define your viewpoint for the
observer.
4. Click in the 3D Window to place the target points. You must place at least one point in the 3D
Window.
5. Right-click to finish the operation. At this point, TerraExplorer Pro begins to calculate the line of sight.
This process can take a few seconds.
6. Once the Line of Sight Analysis has been completed, you can edit the parameters and recalculate, or
close the property sheet to finish the operation.
Once completed, a single line, or group of lines, marked on the terrain appear between the viewpoint and
the endpoint. Target points that are visible from the observer viewpoint are colored green, whereas points
that are not visible from the observer viewpoint are colored red.
Note: To perform another line of sight measurement, you must first close the property sheet either by
clicking on the property sheet Close icon, or by clicking again the Line of Sight command on the
Analysis tab.
Line of Sight Property Sheet Parameters
Object Parameter Activity
Observer
All the fields in this section except Height are only enabled after the Observer viewpoint is selected
in the 3D Window.
X Enter the X-coordinate for the observer position.
Change this value to move the observer position.
Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the observer position.
Change this value to move the observer position.
MGRS The coordinates of the observer position in Military Grid Reference
System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available if Show
MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog box. See
“View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for more
information.
Height Enter the desired value for the observer altitude.
Targets
All the fields in this section except Height are only enabled after the Target points are selected in
the 3D Window.
Selected Point Select which target point’s position you want to edit.
Target X The X-coordinate for the target position.
Target Y The Y-coordinate for the target position.
Target MGRS The coordinates of the target position in Military Grid Reference
System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available if Show
MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog box. See
475
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
“View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for more
information.
Target Height Enter the desired value for the altitude of the target point (or
points).
Analysis
Sampling Interval Enter the desired value for the resolution of the measurement.
This value represents the distance between sample points along
each line. The smaller the sample interval, the more accurate the
measurement, but the longer it takes to calculate.
Recalculate Click this button to perform the calculation again with the updated
parameters.
Appearance
Name Type the description or name of the Line of Sight.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when the object is selected from the
Project Tree.
General
Show in Viewer Determines if the Line of Sight appears in the Project Tree when
the file is viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic viewer.
Message The message associated with the object. The number displayed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a tool tip to appear when the mouse cursor is placed over the
Line of Sight in the 3D Window.
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the Line of
Sight observer position.
This distance is used as a stop mark for any “Fly-to” or “View
Object” operation. It is also used when editing the object from the
Project Tree.
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance based on its size.
Max. Visibility Distance Sets the maximal distance from the camera above which the Line
of Sight disappears.
Min. Visibility Distance Sets the minimal distance from the camera below which the Line of
Sight disappears.
Viewshed
The Viewshed tools enable you to calculate the view from a selected observer point or multiple observer
viewpoints
3D Viewshed – Calculate and mark all areas on the terrain and on 3D models and objects that are
visible from a selected point on the terrain.
476
TerraExplorer User Guide
2D Viewshed - Calculate and mark all areas on the terrain that are visible from a selected point on
the terrain.
Viewshed Query - Analyzes the visibility of a selected area from multiple viewshed observer
viewpoints.
Note: To display a viewshed analysis from a series of points along a route, use the Viewshed on Route
tools. See "Viewshed on Route" in this chapter for information.
The viewshed tool takes into account the viewpoint, direction of sight and distance of sight, when
calculating which areas of the terrain are visible from the viewpoint, and which areas cannot be viewed.
The viewpoint can be set at any altitude above the terrain.
Creating a 3D Viewshed
The 3D viewshed calculates and marks all areas on the terrain and on 3D models and objects that are
visible from a selected point on the terrain.
To create a 3D viewshed:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Line of Sight group, click Viewshed. The 3D Viewshed property sheet is
displayed.
2. In the 3D Window, click to define your viewpoint for the 3D viewshed, and then click again to define
your desired endpoint (defining the distance of sight).
3. In the 3D Viewshed property sheet, set the required parameters:
Object Parameter Activity
Appearance
Name Type the description or name of the 3D viewshed.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Visible Area Color Select the fill color of the areas that are visible from the viewpoint.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Visible Area Opacity Enter the opacity for the visible area fill.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Hidden Area Color Select the fill color of the areas that are not visible from the
viewpoint.
Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box, or type the
color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel
00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Hidden Area Opacity Enter the opacity for the hidden area fill.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Border Color Select the color of the lines that define the boundaries of the
viewshed area. Click the Edit button to open the Color dialog box,
or type the color code in hexadecimal 0xBBGGRR format (B =
Blue channel 00-ff, G = Green channel 00-ff, R = Red channel 00-
ff).
477
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Border Opacity Enter the opacity of the lines that define the boundaries of the
viewshed area.
The opacity is defined as a percentage, where 100% is opaque
and 0% is transparent.
Viewer Position
Altitude Method Set the altitude method to be used for the viewer location:
Select Relative to Terrain to place the location point at a
specified altitude above the ground.
Select Absolute to place the location point at a specified
altitude above the terrain database vertical datum base
ellipsoid.
Altitude Enter the altitude above the ground for the viewer location.
X Enter the X-coordinate of the viewer location.
Y Enter the Y-coordinate of the viewer location.
MGRS The coordinates of the viewer location in Military Grid Reference
System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available if Show
MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog box. See
“View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for more
information.
Direction Enter the horizontal angle of the camera when viewing the viewer
location.
Pitch Enter the tilt angle of the viewer position along its lateral axis
relative to the horizon.
Settings
Spherical Viewshed Select Yes to create a full 360 degree sphere.
Horizontal FOV Enter the horizontal angle limits, in degrees, of the viewshed.
This field is unavailable when the Spherical Viewshed field is set
to Yes.
Vertical FOV Enter the vertical angle limits, in degrees, of the viewshed.
This field is unavailable when the Spherical Viewshed field is set
to Yes.
Distance Enter the length of the viewshed analysis from the viewer in
meters.
Quality Accuracy level of the Viewshed calculation.
Refresh Rate Rate at which the viewshed is recalculated.
Timespan
Start Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the viewshed should
start being visible.
End Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the viewshed should
stop being visible.
General
478
TerraExplorer User Guide
Show in Viewer Determines if the viewshed appears in the Project Tree when the
file is viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic Viewer.
Message The message associated with the object. The number displayed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Note: The message is triggered when the user double-clicks the
Project Tree entry that represents the viewshed or clicks
the viewshed’s rays in the 3D Window (clicking the
hidden/visible areas does not trigger the message).
Tooltip Type a tool tip to appear when the mouse cursor is placed over the
viewshed in the 3D Window.
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the viewshed.
This distance is used as a stop mark for any “Fly -to” or “View
Object” operation. It is also used when selecting to edit the object
from the Project Tree.
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance from the viewshed based on its
size.
Max. Visibility Distance Type the maximal distance from the camera above which the
viewshed disappears.
Min. Visibility Distance Type the minimal distance from the camera below which the
viewshed disappears.
Once completed, the viewshed appears on the terrain as a sector of a circle, where the center point is the
viewpoint and the arc is the endpoint (marking the end of the distance of sight analysis), and the 3D
Viewshed object appears in the Project Tree. Within the sector, areas that are visible from the viewpoint
are colored green (default color), whereas areas that are not visible from the viewpoint are colored red
(default color).
Creating a 2D Viewshed
The 2D viewshed calculates and marks all areas on the terrain that are visible from a selected point on
the terrain.
To create a viewshed:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Line of Sight group, click the arrow next to Viewshed, and then click 2D
Viewshed.
2. In the Viewshed Analysis property sheet, set the required parameters:
479
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Viewshed Analysis Property Sheet
Object Parameter Activity
Settings
Name Type the description or name of the viewshed.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Field Of View Enter a value representing the field of view (the default is 53).
Ray Spacing TerraExplorer samples several rays (lines of sight) in the area
sector. Type the space between each ray (in degrees). The smaller
the ray spacing, the more accurate the measurement, but the
longer it takes to calculate.
Max. Sample Interval Enter the desired value for the sample resolution of your
measurement. This value represents the distance between terrain
samples for the measurement along each ray. A smaller sample
size is more accurate but slower to calculate.
Save Results Select Yes to create a group in the Project Tree under which the
measurement results are saved.
Target Altitude Enter the required value for the target height.
Viewer Position
Altitude Enter the altitude above the ground for the viewer location.
X Enter the X-coordinate of the viewer location (Read-only, derived
from the points selected in the 3D Window).
Y Enter the Y-coordinate of the viewer location (Read-only, derived
from the points selected in the 3D Window).
MGRS The coordinates of the viewer location in Military Grid Reference
System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available if Show
MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog box. See
480
TerraExplorer User Guide
“View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for more
information.
Direction Enter the horizontal angle of the camera when viewing the viewer
location (Read-only, derived from the points selected in the 3D
Window).
Distance Distance of the viewshed (in meters) (Read-only, derived from the
points selected in the 3D Window).
Timespan
Start Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the viewshed should
start being visible.
End Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the viewshed should
stop being visible.
3. In the 3D Window, click to define your viewpoint for the measurement, and then c lick again to define
your desired endpoint (defining the distance of sight). The created group is locked, and appears as a
Viewshed icon in the Project Tree.
Once completed, the viewshed appears on the terrain as a sector of a circle, where the center poi nt is the
viewpoint and the arc is the endpoint (marking the end of the distance of sight), and the 2D Viewshed
object appears in the Project Tree. Within the sector, areas that are visible from the viewpoint are colored
green, whereas areas that are not visible from the viewpoint are colored red.
Viewshed Query
The Viewshed Query tool enables you to analyze the visibility from multiple viewshed observer viewpoints
to a selected area. Based on the 3D viewshed analysis object, the tool computes the overall visibility of
different points in the designated area. The output of the analysis is exported to a point feature layer that
graphically represents the visibility of the different points. Two color schemes are available; one scheme
only distinguishes between visible (green) and invisible (red), while the other one color codes the points
according to their visibility percentage:
Green = More than 80% of the selected viewsheds’ observer viewpoints are visible from this point.
Yellow = 50 - 80% of the selected viewsheds’ observer viewpoints are visible from this point.
Orange = 0-50% of the selected viewsheds’ observer viewpoints are visible from this point.
Red = 0% of the selected viewsheds’ observer viewpoints are visible from this point.
To use the Viewshed Query tool:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Line of Sight group, click the arrow next to Viewshed, and then click 3D
Viewshed Query. The Viewshed Query dialog box is displayed.
481
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Viewshed Query
2. Select one of the Create as options:
Option Description
Layer (Entire) Create a feature layer under the application’s AppData.
Layer Create a streaming feature layer under the application’s AppData.
(Streaming)
3. Enter the following parameters:
Parameter Description
Query The list displays all 3D viewsheds in the project. Only selected 3D
viewsheds are taken into account when calculating the ratio between
visible and invisible viewsheds. Click the required viewshed(s). Use
CTRL-click or SHIFT-click to multi-select.
Click Refresh list to update this list to the current project status.
Out of Range Defines how to handle query points that are outside of the calculated
areas of all selected 3D viewsheds. Select either:
Ignore Point - Do not add points outside of the range of any selected
3D viewshed.
482
TerraExplorer User Guide
Add Point - Add points outside of the range of any selected 3D
viewshed. These query points are considered to have 0% visibility
and color coded in red.
Color Scheme Defines the color coding scheme of the output points. Select either red |
green or red | orange | yellow | green.
Spacing Determines the horizontal and vertical spacing (in meters) between query
points in the area for which the viewshed query is being calculated. The
spacing property also defines the scale of the output points.
Min Altitude Defines the altitude above ground level of the closest point to the ground.
Max Altitude Defines the maximum altitude above ground level. If the Max Altitude is
higher than the Min Altitude, the 3D Viewshed Query tool generates a
matrix of points according to the Spacing value.
4. Select one of the following methods of designating the area for which the viewshed should be
calculated:
Follow Line – Query points are created along the drawn line. In the 3D Window, left-click to
place the line waypoints, and right-click to complete the line.
Fill Area – Query points are created inside the drawn polygon.
Selected Group – Query points are created at all points, along all lines, or inside all polygons, in
the selected feature layer. Select the required layer from the Project Tree, and then click
Selected Group.
From Clipboard - Query points are created at all clipboard objects.
Viewshed Area - Query points are created exactly in the area of the selected 3D viewsheds.
Viewshed on Route
The Viewshed on Route tools provide you with a graphical representation of the view on the terrain from a
series of points (route):
3D Viewshed on Route By Speed – Provides an animated representation of the terrain and objects
that are visible as a dynamic object progresses along a defined route according to a set speed.
3D Viewshed on Route By Time – Provides an animated representation of the terrain and objects
that are visible as a dynamic object progresses along a defined route over a defined time frame.
3D Viewshed on Route Query– Analyzes the visibility of a selected area from multiple viewshed
observer viewpoints along a route.
2D Viewshed on Route - Provides an animated representation of the terrain that is visible as a
dynamic object progresses along a defined route
Note: When calculating the viewshed from a route, the field of view is automatically set to 360.
Creating a 3D Viewshed on Route – By Speed
The 3D viewshed on route – by speed provides an animated representation of the terrain and objects that
are visible as a dynamic object progresses along a defined route according to a set speed.
To create a viewshed from a route – by speed:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Line of Sight group, click the arrow next to Viewshed on Route, and
then click 3D Viewshed on Route – By Speed.
The 3D Viewshed on Route property sheet is displayed.
483
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Viewshed on Route – By Speed Dialog Box
2. In the Viewshed on Route dialog box, set the required parameters:
Property Description
Model Type Graphic representation of the dynamic object. Select one of
the 3D models: Car, Humvee or Tank, Icon for a 2D image
icon, or Empty for no graphic representation.
Speed Speed of the dynamic object in mph or km/h.
Loop Defines whether the dynamic object stops at the end of the
path or loops back to the beginning.
Viewer Height Altitude of your viewpoints.
Viewshed Distance Distance of the 3D viewshed (in meters).
Spherical Viewshed Select Yes to create a full 360 degree sphere.
Color Scheme Select the colors that will represent the visible and non-visible
areas from the viewshed.
Clipboard Viewpoints are created at all clipboard objects.
3. Once you have set the necessary parameters, click in the 3D Window to define the first waypoint on
your route. Drag and click the mouse to define the route’sother waypoints. Right-click to finish. The
Dynamic 3D Viewshed group appears in the Project Tree. As the dynamic object moves along the
defined route according to the set speed, the viewshed dynamically changes providing an animated
representation of the terrain and objects that are visible from each point on the route.
Creating a 3D Viewshed on Route – By Time
The 3D viewshed on route – by time calculates and dynamically marks the terrain and objects that are
visible from an object as it moves along a defined route over the course of a set time frame.
484
TerraExplorer User Guide
To create a viewshed from a route – by time:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Line of Sight group, click the arrow next to Viewshed on Route, and
then click 3D Viewshed on Route – By Time. The 3D Viewshed on Route property sheet is
displayed.
Viewshed on Route – By Time Dialog Box
2. In the Viewshed on Route dialog box, set the required parameters:
Property Description
Model Type Graphic representation of the dynamic object. Select one of
the 3D models: Car, Humvee or Tank, Icon for a 2D image
icon, or Empty for no graphic representation.
Start Time The time the dynamic object begins moving along the defined
route.
The date and time slider automatically adjusts to correspond to
the timespan defined by the Start Time and End Time.
End Time The time the dynamic object reaches the end of the defined
route.
Viewer Height Altitude of your viewpoints.
Viewshed Distance Distance of the 3D viewshed (in meters).
Spherical Viewshed Select Yes to create a full 360 degree sphere.
Color Scheme Select the colors that will represent the visible and non-visible
areas from the viewshed.
Clipboard Viewpoints are created at all clipboard objects.
3. Once you have set the necessary parameters, click in the 3D Window to define the first waypoint on
your route. Drag and click the mouse to define the route’s other waypoints. Right-click to finish. The
created 3D Viewshed on Route group appears in the Project Tree. When the time and date are
adjusted in the Time and Date slider and the dynamic object moves along the defined route, the
viewshed dynamically changes, providing a representation of the terrain and objects that are visible
from each point on the route.
485
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Querying a 3D Viewshed on Route
The Viewshed Query tool enables you to analyze the visibility from multiple viewshed observer viewpoints
along a route to a selected area. Based on the 3D viewshed analysis object, the tool computes the overall
visibility of different points in the designated area. The output of the analysis is exported to a point feature
layer that graphically represents the visibility of the different points. Two color schemes are available; one
scheme only distinguishes between visible (green) and invisible (red), while the other one color codes the
points according to their visibility percentage:
Green = More than 80% of the route’s viewpoints are visible from this point.
Yellow = 50 - 80% of the route’s viewpoints are visible from this point.
Orange = 0-50% of the route’s viewpoints are visible from this point.
Red = 0% of the route’s viewpoints are visible from this point.
To create a 3D viewshed on route – query:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Line of Sight group, click the arrow next to Viewshed on Route, and
then click 3D Viewshed on Route – Query. The 3D Viewshed on Route property sheet is displayed.
Viewshed on Route – Query Dialog Box
2. In the Viewshed on Route dialog box, set the required parameters:
Property Description
Viewshed Interval The distance between terrain samples for the measurement
along each ray. A smaller sample size is more accurate but
slower to calculate.
486
TerraExplorer User Guide
Viewer Height Altitude of your viewpoints.
Viewshed Distance Distance of the 3D viewshed (in meters).
Spherical Viewshed Select Yes to create a full 360 degree sphere.
Quality Accuracy level of the viewshed calculation.
Min Altitude Defines the altitude above ground level of the closest point to
the ground.
Max Altitude Defines the maximum altitude above ground level. If the Max
Altitude is higher than the Min Altitude, the 3D Viewshed
Query tool generates a matrix of points according to the
Spacing value.
Spacing Determines the horizontal and vertical spacing (in meters)
between query points in the area for which the viewshed query
is being calculated. The spacing property also defines the
scale of the output points.
Clipboard Viewpoints are created at all clipboard objects.
3. Once you have set the necessary parameters, click in the 3D Window to define the first waypoint on
your route. Drag and click the mouse to define the route’s other waypoints. Right-click to finish. The
output of the analysis is exported to a point feature layer that graphically represents the visibility of
the different points.
4. In the 3D Window, click any of the route’s Indicator icons to toggle display of the viewshed from
that individual point.
Creating a 2D Viewshed on Route
The 2D Viewshed on Route calculates the terrain that is visible as a dynamic object progresses along a
defined route.
There are three options for displaying the calculated route viewshed:
Individual viewshed results for each selected point along the route
A series of individual viewshed results that display according to a set timespan
A single composite viewshed showing visible area from any of the route’s waypoints
Note: When calculating the viewshed from a route, the field of view is automatically set to 360.
To create a viewshed from a route:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Line of Sight group, click the arrow next to Viewshed on Route, and
then click 2D Viewshed on Route:
The Viewshed on Route property sheet is displayed.
487
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Viewshed on Route Property Sheet
2. In the Viewshed Analysis property sheet, set the required parameters:
Property Description
Name Type the description or name of the viewshed.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the
object.
Ray Spacing Determines the horizontal and vertical spacing (in meters)
between each ray (in degrees). The smaller the ray spacing,
the more accurate the measurement, but the longer it takes to
calculate.
Max. Sample Interval The distance between terrain samples for the measurement
along each ray. A smaller sample size is more accurate but
slower to calculate.
Distance Length of the 3D viewshed from the viewer (in meters).
Viewer Height Altitude of your viewpoints.
Analysis Type Select one of the options for displaying the viewshed:
Viewshed on Route: Individual viewshed results for each
selected point along the route. Each circle has a radius
equal to the Distance of Sight.
Timespan Viewshed on Route: A series of individual
viewshed results that display according to a set timespan
Cumulative Viewshed on Route : A single composite
viewshed showing visible area from any of the route’s
waypoints
488
TerraExplorer User Guide
Start Time The time the dynamic object begins moving along the defined
route.
The date and time slider automatically adjusts to correspond to
the timespan defined by the Start Time and End Time.
End Time The time the dynamic object reaches the end of the defined
route.
Dist. Between Waypoints Distance between sample route waypoints.
3. Once you have set the necessary parameters, click in the 3D Window to define the first waypoint on
your route. Drag and click the mouse to define the route’sother waypoints. Right-click to finish.
Note: While creating the route, the Dist. Between Waypoints property is still editable.
4. Click Calculate. The created Viewshed on Route locked group appears in the Project Tree.
5. Once you establish the endpoint, all of the parameters become read-only. At this point, TerraExplorer
Pro begins to calculate the viewshed measurement. This process can take some time if the route has
a considerable number of waypoints.
Threat Dome Tool
The threat dome tool analyzes and displays the area that is visible from a given point on the terrain within
a 360 horizontal field of view. Several display options for the threat dome are available so that the
particular information required can be easily visualized. The threat dome can be generated as a sphere
that defines the outer boundaries of the volume that is visible from the viewpoint, as a dome base that
divides between visible and non-visible areas, or alternatively as a skyline that highlights obstructions to
the field of view. After generating the threat dome, results can be further analyzed by creating a profile
graph.
Using the Threat Dome Tool
To use the threat dome tool:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Terrain Analysis group, click Threat Dome. The Threat Dome dialog
box is displayed.
489
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Threat Dome
2. Set the Threat Dome properties:
Property Description
Type Output of the tool. Select one of the options for representing
the visible area from the threat point:
Dome – A spherical dome is generated that encloses all
points that can be viewed from the dome’s viewpoint.
Dome base – A 2D circular surface is generated defining
the area below which all points are not visible from the
dome's viewpoint.
Skyline – An outline of the visible terrain and objects is
generated, highlighting any objects (e.g., buildings or
mountains) that block the viewpoint's field of view.
Quality Determines the distance between sample points by which the
threat dome is being calculated. High Quality will yield a more
accurate result, but take longer to calculate.
Radius Radius of the threat dome.
Viewer Altitude Altitude above the ground for the viewer location.
Elevation Angle Enter the angle, from the ground, below which the viewpoint
cannot see. For example, an elevation angle of zero creates a
complete half sphere (or base of a half sphere if Type is set to
Dome base), whereas an angle of 30 degrees creates an
inverted cone, topped by a section of a sphere (or just an
inverted cone if Type is set to Dome base).
Note: This field is not available if Type is set to Skyline.
490
TerraExplorer User Guide
3. Select one of the following methods of designating the area for which the threat dome should be
calculated. If the input group contains multiple points, then individual threat domes are generated for
each of the points
Set Position – Click in the desired location for the threat dome query. A marker is created at
the drawn point.
Selected Group - Query points are created at all point elements (point features or point objects)
in the selected group. Select the required group from the Project Tree, and then click Selected
Group. A separate threat dome is created for each of the point elements, with the center of each
threat dome indicated by a different color marker.
From Clipboard - Query points are created for all point elements in the clipboard. Copy the
required elements to the clipboard, and click From Clipboard.
The created Threat Dome group appears in the Threat Dome group in the Project Tree.
4. If you want to display a graph of the threat dome profile for the last created threat dome, click Show
Profile. Note that if the input group contains multiple points, the color of each profile line on the Dome
Ring Profile graph matches the color of the corresponding threat dome's query point marker in the 3D
Window.
Note: The Show Profile button is only displayed after a threat dome is created.
A threat dome profile graph opens, displaying the terrain elevation profile.
Threat Dome Profile Graph
5. Use the Zoom in , Zoom out , and Zoom to full extent of data buttons to adjust the zoom
as required.
6. Determine what information is indicated on the graph by selecting any of the following display options:
Waypoint Select the check box to mark the waypoints on the graph with a .
Min/Max Elevation Select the check box to mark the maximum and minimum points
with a .
Min/Max Slope Select the check box to mark the maximum and minimum slope
with a .
7. If you want to export the threat dome profile to a shapefile layer, click Export to Layer.
Note: When a threat dome profile is exported to a layer, the line color on the graph corresponds
to the color of the points that make up the line in the layer.
8. Point to any point on the graph to display the following values. If you want to display the values and
also jump to the point on the terrain, then click instead of pointing.
491
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Value Description
X X-coordinate of the selected point.
Y Y-coordinate of the selected point.
Elevation Elevation value of the point above the terrain database vertical
datum base ellipsoid.
Slope Slope of the curve at the selected point
Threat Dome Property Sheet Parameters
Object Parameter Activity
Appearance
Name Type the description or name of the threat dome.
This text appears in the Project Tree as the name of the object.
Activation Action Select the action to perform when selecting the object from the
Project Tree.
Color Select the color for the threat dome. Click the Edit button to open
the Color dialog box, or type the color code in hexadecimal
0xBBGGRR format (B = Blue channel 00-ff, G = Green channel
00-ff, R = Red channel 00-ff).
Settings
Radius Type the radius of the threat dome.
Ray Spacing Type the space between each sampling ray.
The smaller the ray spacing, the more accurate the measurement,
but the longer it takes to calculate.
Sample Interval Enter the desired value for the resolution of the measurement.
This value represents the distance between sample points along
each ray. The smaller the sample interval, the more accurate the
measurement, but the longer it takes to calculate.
Direction Enter a value representing the center direction of the scan.
Scan Field Enter a value in degrees, representing the scan field.
Elevation Angle Enter the angle, from the ground, below which the pivot point
cannot see. For example, an elevation angle of zero creates a
complete half sphere, whereas an angle of 30 degrees creates an
inverted cone, topped by a section of a sphere.
Position
Altitude Enter the altitude above ground for the threat dome’s pivot point.
X Enter the X-coordinate for the threat dome’s pivot point.
Change this value to move the entire threat dome.
Y Enter the Y-coordinate for the threat dome’s pivot point.
Change this value to move the entire threat dome.
MGRS The coordinates of the threat dome’s pivot point in Military Grid
Reference System (MGRS) coordinates. This field is only available
492
TerraExplorer User Guide
if Show MGRS Coordinates was selected in the Options dialog
box. See “View” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options” chapter for
more information.
Timespan
Start Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the threat dome
should first become visible.
End Time Click Edit and select the date and time when the threat dome
should stop being visible.
General
Show in Viewer Determines if the threat dome appears in the Project Tree when
the file is viewed with the TerraExplorer Basic Viewer.
Message The message associated with the object. The number displayed is
the number of the message.
To create a new message, or update an existing message, open
the Create Message dialog box by clicking in this field and
selecting Edit. See “Using the Create Message Dialog Box” in the
“Working with Objects” chapter for more information.
Tooltip Type a tool tip to appear when the mouse cursor is placed over the
threat dome in the 3D Window.
Default Viewing Distance Determines the viewing distance of the camera from the threat
dome.
This distance is used as a stop mark for any “Fly-to” or “View
Object” operation. It is also used when selecting to edit the object
from the Project Tree.
When this value is set to the default of -1, TerraExplorer calculates
and sets the ideal viewing distance from the threat dome based on
its size.
Max. Visibility Distance Sets the maximal distance from the camera above which the threat
dome disappears.
Min. Visibility Distance Sets the minimal distance from the camera below which the threat
dome disappears.
Buffer Query Tool
The Buffer Query tool detects all penetrations by 3D elements (e.g., 3D object or 3DML) to a set buffer
zone of a selected polyline. This can be used, for example, in implementing safety requirements related
to safe distances from a power line. The tool scans the buffer zone of each of the polyline's query points,
and colors in red all query points with breached buffer zones. Clicking this query point highlights in red the
3D element that was found.
The output of the analysis is a point feature layer that graphically represents the locations along the line
where a penetration to the buffer zone was found.
To use the Buffer Query tool:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Line of Sight group, click Buffer Query. The Buffer Query dialog box is
displayed.
493
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Buffer Query
2. Set the scan properties:
Buffer Radius of the buffer zone (in meters) from each of the polyline's query
Radius points
Min Minimum distance (in meters) from the polyline for inclusion in the
Distance buffer zone.
Scanning The area to be scanned. Select Above query point (180°) to limit the
Area scan to the FOV above the query point. Select Above & sides below
(270°) to skip only the FOV directly below the query point.
3. Select one of the following methods for selecting the polylines for the buffer query. If the input group
contains multiple polylines, each one is scanned, and the results collected in a in a single result layer
Selected Group - Buffer scans are performed for all polylines in the selected group or layer. The
required Project Tree group must be selected before selecting this option.
From Clipboard - Buffer scans are performed for all polylines on the clipboard. The polylines
must be on the clipboard before selecting this option.
4. Review the buffer query results. All query points in whose buffer zone one or more 3D elements were
found are colored in red. Click a red query point to highlight in red the 3D elements that were found.
Click the point again to toggle off that query point's highlighting. Click the Clear button to clear all
highlighting from any query point.
5. The buffer query results are automatically exported to a point shapefile that is listed in the Project
Tree and saved under the application AppData. You can find the full path to this shapefile in the
layer's property sheet, in the File Name property under the Layer tab.
Shadow Tools
The following shadow tools are available:
494
TerraExplorer User Guide
Global Shadow
Selection Shadow
Shadow Query
Global Shadow
You can display a shadow effect for an entire scene (including terrain and all 3D models, objects, and
buildings), for a more realistic visualization that takes far less time to create than shadow generation per
individual object. Using TerraExplorer Options, you can select the precise color of the shadow to more
accurately simulate the actual lighting conditions. See “Graphics” in the “Using TerraExplorer Options”
chapter for more information.
Shadows can be cast for all 3D objects in the 3D Window (whose ground object property is set to Yes)
based on the sun’s position. The sun is positioned according to the time, date and time zone you set
using the Date and Time controls. The shadows dynamically update when the system date and time is
changed.
Note: Project startup settings for shadows can be set in the Date and Light tab in the Project Settings
dialog box. See “Date and Light Effects” in the “Setting the Project” chapter for further
information.
Note: The degree of shadow coverage in a specified area and period of time can be calculated using
the Shadow Query tool. See “Shadow Query” in this chapter for further information.
Displaying a Shadow
To display a shadow:
1. In the 3D Window, set the time, date and time zone using the Date and Time controls. See “Date and
Time Slider” in this chapter for information.
2. On the Analysis tab, in the Shadow group, click Shadow.
Note: If you want to cast a shadow only for currently selected buildings and 3D models, you can
create a selection shadow. See “Selection Shadow” in this chapter.
Selection Shadow
In addition to the option to cast a global shadow for all 3D objects, shadows can also be cast only for
selected objects. This enables you to visualize the shadow effect of a particular object on surrounding
buildings and terrain.
You can cast a shadow from any 3D object whose ground object property is set to Yes, based on the
sun’s position. The sun is positioned according to the time, date and time zone you set using the Date
and Time controls. The shadows dynamically update when the system date and time is changed.
To display a shadow for selected objects:
1. In the 3D Window, set the time, date and time zone using the Date and Time controls. See “Date and
Time slider” in the “Basic Concepts” chapter for information.
2. Select the objects from which you want to cast a shadow.
3. On the Analysis tab, in the Shadow group, click Selection Shadow.
Note: A selection shadow persists even after the object is deselected.
4. If you want to clear a selection shadow, on the Analysis tab, in the Shadow group, toggle off
Selection Shadow.
495
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
5. If you want to recast the shadow from the previously selected object to a currently selected object,
click the arrow next to Selection Shadow, and then click Update Selection.
Shadow Query
The Shadow Query tool calculates the sun-shadow ratio in a specified area, over a selected timespan.
The area is defined by a drawn line or polygon, or by a selection of points, lines or polygons. Shadow
analysis can be based on the shadow effect of selected objects (Selection Shadow) or of all the project’s
objects. See “Global Shadow” for information on viewing and creating global shadows. See “Selection
Shadow” in this chapter for information on creating shadows for selected objects.
The output of the analysis is a point feature layer that graphically represents the sun-shadow ratio at
different points in the specified area. Each point in the feature layer is color-coded according to its sun-
shadow ratio:
Green = Point receives 100% exposure to sunlight during the selected timespan
Yellow = Point receives more than 65% exposure to sunlight during the selected timespan
Orange = Point receives between 35-65% exposure to sunlight over the selected timespan
Red = Point receives less than 35% exposure to sunlight over the selected timespan
To use the Shadow Query tool:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Shadow group, click Shadow Query. The Shadow Query dialog box is
displayed.
496
TerraExplorer User Guide
Shadow Query
2. Select one of the Create as options:
Option Description
Layer (Entire) Create a feature layer under the application’s AppData.
Layer Create a streaming feature layer under the application’s AppData.
(Streaming)
3. Enter the following parameters:
Parameter Description
Query Defines which objects’ shadows are taken into account in the shadow
query:
Global Shadow – Measure the sun-shadow ratio for each query point
based on the shadow cast by all objects in the project.
Selection Shadow – Measure the sun-shadow ratio for each query
point based only on the objects selected in the Selection Shadow. See
“Selection Shadow” in this chapter.
Selection Shadow supplement - Measure the sun-shadow ratio for
each query point based only on shadows cast exclusively by the
objects selected in the Selection Shadow.
Spacing Determines the horizontal and vertical spacing (in meters) between query
points in the area for which the sun-shadow ratio is being calculated.
497
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Min Altitude Defines the altitude above ground level of the closest point to the ground.
Note: When selecting points from a group, layer or the clipboard, the
query points are created according to the altitude of the selected
points and not according to the Min/Max altitude parameters.
Max Altitude Defines the maximum altitude above ground level. If the Max Altitude is
higher than the Min Altitude, the Shadow Query tool generates a matrix of
points according to the Spacing value.
Time Zone Time zone of the Start Time and End Time. The time zone should reflect
the actual time zone in the query area. The tool tries to select the best
match according to the camera’s position when the tool is opened. If the
user navigates to an area in another time zone, while the tool is open, the
user may need to manually select the appropriate time zone. If the
difference between the calculated time zone and the selected time zone is
too large, an alert message is displayed.
Start Time Start time on the day of the query. The date of the query (day, month and
year) is based on the current TerraExplorer date (showing on the Time
Slider or defined in the Date and Time Settings dialog box).
End Time End time on the day of the query. The date of the query (day, month and
year) is based on the current TerraExplorer date (showing on the Time
Slider or defined in the Date and Time Settings dialog box).
Measure every The interval (in minutes) between the Start Time and End Time. The
smaller the interval, the more accurate the calculation, but the longer it
takes to calculate.
4. Select one of the following methods of designating the area for which the sun-shadow ratio should be
calculated:
Follow Line – Query points are created along the drawn line. In the 3D Window, left-click to
place the line waypoints, and right-click to complete the line.
Fill Area – Query points are created inside the drawn polygon.
Selected Group – Query points are created at all points, along all lines, or inside all polygons, in
the selected feature layer. Select the required layer from the Project Tree, and then click
Selected Group.
From Clipboard - Query points are created at all clipboard objects.
Comparison Tools
The following comparison tools are available:
Swipe Imagery Layers
Swipe Snapshots
Swipe 3D Mesh Layers
Elevation Difference – 3D Mesh Layers
Elevation Difference – Elevation Layers
498
TerraExplorer User Guide
Swipe Imagery Layers
The Swipe Imagery Layers tool helps you detect the changes between two images of the same location
or between an imagery layer and the base terrain by allowing you to dynamically compare the 3D view
with and without a particular imagery layer.
Swipe Imagery Layers Tool
To use the Swipe Imagery Layers tool:
Note: The tool selects the first visible layer. If you want to compare a specific imagery layer to the base
terrain, make only that layer visible.
1. Zoom in on an area with a visible imagery layer.
2. On the Analysis tab, in the Comparison group, click the arrow under Swipe, and select Swipe
Imagery Layers. The Swipe Imagery Layers controls are displayed.
3. Use the following controls:
Mode selection – Selects the slider control mode. Choose between four clipping modes (right -
left, left-right, top-bottom and bottom-top) and Transparency mode.
Slider control – Defines the clipping or transparency level extent. Slide the slider all the way to
the right to completely reveal the top layer, and all the way to the left to entirely clip it. As the
slider moves between these extremes, the top layer is gradually clipped or opacity decreased to
reveal the bottom layer or terrain.
Auto button - Automatically loop the slider value between 0-100% to dynamically change the top
layer clipping or transparency level.
4. Pan and zoom the 3D view to your area of interest. The tool automatically updates the imagery layer
clipping according to the current view.
Swipe Snapshots
The Swipe Snapshots tool helps you create and compare snapshots showing different versions of the
area in view in the 3D Window by showing or hiding objects in the Project Tree.
499
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Swipe Snapshots Tool
To use the Swipe Snapshots tool:
1. In the 3D Window, navigate to the required area, and then create the required scene by using the
Project Tree to show or hide objects.
2. On the Analysis tab, in the Comparison group, click the arrow under Swipe, and select Swipe
Snapshots. A message is displayed informing you that a high quality snapshot of the scene is being
generated. When snapshot generation is complete, a Swipe Snapshots dialog box is displayed.
Create Modified Scene
3. Create a modified scene by showing or hiding objects in the Project Tree, and then click Compare.
4. When the snapshot is generated, use the following controls:
Mode selection – Selects the slider control mode. Choose between four clipping modes (right -
left, left-right, top-bottom and bottom-top) and Transparency mode.
500
TerraExplorer User Guide
Slider control – Defines the clipping or transparency level extent. Slide the slider all the way to
the left to completely show the first snapshot, and all the way to the right to completely show the
second one. As the slider moves between these extremes, the first snapshot is gradually clipped
or opacity decreased to reveal the second one.
Swipe 3D Mesh Layers
The Swipe 3D Mesh Layers tool helps you detect the changes between two mesh layers in the same
location by allowing you to horizontally swipe between them, dynamically revealing and hiding parts of
each layer.
Swipe 3D Mesh Layer Tool
To use the Swipe 3D Mesh Layers tool:
1. Zoom in on an area with two visible mesh layers.
2. On the Analysis tab, in the Comparison group, click the arrow under Swipe, and select Swipe 3D
Mesh Layers. The Swipe 3D Mesh Layers controls are displayed.
3. Select the mesh layers from the two drop-down lists, and select the mesh model display style for
each:
Texture
Texture + wireframe
Solid color
Solid color + wireframe
X-ray - Semi-transparent model, enabling you to see through all model walls
4. If you want to refresh the drop-down layers, and automatically detect and select the mesh layers in
current view, click Refresh & Detect.
5. Click Start. Slide the slider all the way to the right to completely show the first mesh layer, and all the
way to the left to completely show the second one. As the slider moves between these extremes, the
first mesh layer is gradually clipped to reveal the second one.
6. Click Auto-Repeat to automatically loop the slider value between 0-100% to dynamically change
the top layer clipping. Click Freeze at any point to freeze the slider at a specific value.
Elevation Difference – 3D Mesh Layers
The Elevation Difference – 3D Mesh Layers tool analyzes the elevation difference between two mesh
layers in a defined polygonal area. This allows you to carefully compare between two layers and identify
where there have been changes, e.g., for use in urban development to monitor compliance with building
zone regulations and detect illegal construction.
501
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
The area for analysis is defined by a drawn polygon or by objects already on the clipboard. The output of
the analysis is a point feature layer that stores the elevation difference information in its attribute fields
and graphically represents the elevation difference at different points in the defined area. Only elevation
differences that you consider significant for your analysis, i.e. that are above the Mi n Difference that you
set, are marked:
Cyan (Blue-green) – Layer 1 is higher than Layer 2
Yellow – Layer 2 is higher than Layer 1
A summary is also generated, with statistics on the percentage of points in which each layer was higher
and the maximum elevation difference between the two.
To use the Elevation Difference – 3D Mesh Layers tool:
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Comparison group, click the arrow under Elevation and select
Elevation Difference – 3D Mesh Layers. The Elevation Difference – 3D Mesh Layers dialog box is
displayed.
Elevation Difference – 3D Mesh Layers
2. Select the layers for comparison. If you want to refresh the drop-down layers, and automatically
detect and select the mesh layers in current view, click Refresh & Detect.
3. Select the Quality of the result layer. This determines the accuracy level by which the analysis is
performed. Select one of the following options:
Low – Performs approximately 16K samples
Medium – Performs approximately 65K samples
High – Performs approximately 260K samples
4. In the Min Difference field, select the minimum elevation difference between the layers that should
be marked.
5. Select either of the following methods to mark your area of interest:
502
TerraExplorer User Guide
Draw Area – The area is marked by drawing a polygon in the 3D W indow. If this option is
selected, left-click in the 3D Window to place the polygon waypoints, and right -click to complete.
From Clipboard – Analysis is performed in the locations of all polygon clipboard objects. The
polygons must be on the clipboard before selecting this option.
6. After the analysis is complete, a results dialog is displayed:
Number of sampled points for which the elevation difference between the layers was greater than
the Min Difference set.
Number of sampled points above Min Difference in which Layer 1 was higher than Layer 2.
Number of sampled points above Min Difference in which Layer 2 was higher than Layer 1.
Maximum elevation difference in which Layer 1 was higher than Layer 2.
Maximum elevation difference in which Layer 2 was higher than Layer 1.
7. Review the elevation difference results, graphically represented by the generated point feature layer.
Only elevation differences. that are above the Min Difference that you set, are marked:
Cyan (Blue-green) – Layer 1 is higher than Layer 2
Yellow – Layer 2 is higher than Layer 1
Point to any point on the graph to display the elevation and volume difference at that point.
8. The elevation difference results are automatically exported to a point shapefile that is listed in the
Project Tree and saved under the application AppData. You can find the full path to this shapefile in
the layer's property sheet, in the File Name property under the Layer tab.
9. If you want to compare further between the two mesh layers, on the Analysis tab, in the
Comparison group, click the arrow under Swipe, and select Swipe 3D Mesh Layers. Then use the
Swipe 3D Mesh Layers controls to horizontally swipe between the layers, dynamically revealing and
hiding parts of each layer.
Elevation Difference – Elevation Layers
The Elevation Difference – Elevation Layers tool analyzes the elevation difference between two elevation
layers or between an elevation layer and base terrain in a defined polygonal area. This allows you to
carefully compare between two layers to contrast between the state of an area before and after a
landslide or volcano, or to evaluate restorative efforts following mining activity.
The area for analysis is defined by a drawn polygon or by objects already on the clipboard. The output of
the analysis is a point feature layer that stores the elevation difference information in its attribute fields
and graphically represents the elevation difference at different points in the defined area. Only elevation
differences that you consider significant for your analys is, i.e. that are above the Min Difference that you
set, are marked:
Cyan (Blue-green) – Layer 1 is higher than Layer 2
Yellow – Layer 2 is higher than Layer 1
A summary is also generated, with statistics on the percentage of points in which each layer was higher
and the maximum elevation difference between the two.
To use the Elevation Difference – Elevation Layers tool:
503
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
1. On the Analysis tab, in the Comparison group, click the arrow under Elevation and select
Elevation Difference – Elevation Layers. The Elevation Difference – Elevation Layers dialog box is
displayed.
Elevation Difference – Elevation Layers
2. Select two layers for comparison, or layer and base terrain. If you want to refresh the drop-down
layers, and automatically detect and select the elevation layers in current view, click Refresh &
Detect.
3. Select the Quality of the result layer. This determines the accuracy level by which the analysis is
performed. Select one of the following options:
Low – Performs approximately 16K samples
Medium – Performs approximately 65K samples
High – Performs approximately 260K samples
4. In the Min Difference field, select the minimum elevation difference between the layers that should
be marked.
5. Select either of the following methods to mark your area of interest:
Draw Area – The area is marked by drawing a polygon in the 3D Window. If this option is
selected, left-click in the 3D Window to place the polygon waypoints, and right -click to complete.
From Clipboard – Analysis is performed in the locations of all polygon clipboard objects. The
polygons must be on the clipboard before selecting this option.
6. After the analysis is complete, a results dialog is displayed:
Number of sampled points for which the elevation difference between the layers was greater than
the Min Difference set.
Number of sampled points above Min Difference in which Layer 1 was higher than Layer 2.
Number of sampled points above Min Difference in which Layer 2 was higher than Layer 1.
Maximum elevation difference in which Layer 1 was higher than Layer 2.
Maximum elevation difference in which Layer 2 was higher than Layer 1.
504
TerraExplorer User Guide
7. Review the elevation difference results, graphically represented by the generated point feature layer.
Only elevation differences. that are above the Min Difference that you set, are marked:
Cyan (Blue-green) – Layer 1 is higher than Layer 2
Yellow – Layer 2 is higher than Layer 1
Point to any point on the graph to display the elevation and volume difference at that point.
8. The elevation difference results are automatically exported to a point shapefile that is listed in the
Project Tree and saved under the application AppData. You can find the full path to this shapefile in
the layer's property sheet, in the File Name property under the Layer tab.
505
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
CHAPTER 22 WORKING WITH TOOLS
About the Tools
TerraExplorer Pro Tools are a set of external tools that communicate with TerraExplorer Pro using t he
TerraExplorer API and provide an extended set of features to the user.
The following tools are available from the Tools tab.
Tool Description
Snapshot Tool Takes a snapshot of the current 3D Window:
Opens the snapshot in a new window.
Saves the snapshot to a file.
Extract to MPT Extracts and creates a subset of a local or remote terrain database
on the user’s local computer.
Extract to VRML Extracts and creates a VRML model from a local or remote terrain
database that can be displayed in VRML viewers, 3D printing etc.
Extract to Zebra Extracts and creates a Zebra Imaging model from a local or remote
terrain database, which you can use for producing 3D hologram
images.
Collaboration Tool Allows the user to share an interactive Fly session over the
network.
Urban Design Creates simple and/or customized objects including markers,
freehand lines, Mil-Std-2525b symbols, and urban designs.
Duplicate Objects Creates multiple instances of the same object along a line or inside
an area.
Power Lines Creates a power line by placing power poles along a user-defined
path and connecting them with power lines.
Pipelines Creates a pipeline along a user defined path.
Fence and Wall Creates fences and walls in the precise dimensions, shape and
texture you require. The output can be saved as a TerraExplorer
group of objects or as a feature layer (shapefile).
Timespan Tags Assign timespan tags to groups. Determine whether objects within
each subgroup display successively, each for a fraction of the total
timespan, or whether all objects in each subgroup should hide and
display simultaneously.
Block Width Determine an appropriate layer block width for efficient streaming
of layers.
Using Tools
To use a tool:
On the Tools tab, click the required tool. The tool opens in a new window. When more than one tool is
open, use the tabs at the bottom of the tool window to switch between tools.
506
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: All TerraExplorer tools initially open in the same location - at the bottom, left side of the
screen. When multiple tools are opened simultaneously, a tab displays for each tool on the
bottom of the tool window.
Tool Tabs
To close a tool:
On the Tools tab, click the currently selected tool, or click the Close link in the upper-right corner of
the tool’s window.
Snapshot Tool
The Snapshot Tool copies the current 3D Window to a floating window so you can edit it in a Paint
program before saving to an image file.
507
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Snapshot Tool
To use the Snapshot tool:
1. On the Tools tab, in the Snapshot group, set the dimensions of the screen capture:
If you want to set a specific size for the screen capture, select the Custom Size check box, and
enter the Width and Height measurements.
If you want to base the dimensions of the screen capture on those of the current screen, clear the
Custom Size check box.
2. If you want to “paint” the screen capture before saving it to a file, click the arrow below Snapshot,
and then click Snapshot to New Window .
3. If you want to save the screen capture, click the arrow below Snapshot, and then click Snapshot to
File. In the Save As dialog box, browse to where you want to save the screen capture, type a File
Name, and click Save.
Collaboration Tool
This tool connects TerraExplorer users on one collaborative network. Connecting over the
internet/intranet, users can chat, annotate the terrain with text labels and freehand drawing, point using a
virtual cursor and synchronize their flight.
One user serves as the manager of the session, while the rest connect to the session as clients. The
collaboration server can also reside on a SkylineGlobe server to enable better management and control
and to solve security problems when accessing end-user computers behind firewalls.
About the Collaboration Server
The collaboration server is a communication program responsible for managing collaboration sessions,
and delivering all contents, via TCP/IP networks, to all members.
The collaboration server can run on a local computer of one of the session members, or as part of an
existing TerraGate server. When a collaboration server is activated, using the Start Local Session
request, it serves the current session on a local machine and after the termination of the session the
508
TerraExplorer User Guide
server shuts down. When the collaboration server is set up as part of the TerraGate server it is always up
and running and can server several sessions.
Note: The collaboration server is only available until TerraGate server 6.6.1. If collaboration services
are required, contact [email protected] for information about a standalone installation.
Note: For further information on setting and controlling a collaboration service on a TerraGate server,
see the TerraGate User Manual.
Joining or Opening a Session
To join or open a Collaboration session:
1. On the Tools tab, in the Collaboration group, click Collaboration. The Collaboration tool box opens.
Collaboration Tool – Before a Session
2. Select the connection type:
Connection Type Description
Create Local Session To start a communication server on your local computer, open a
session and become the Manager and the Leader of the session.
Create Session on Server To create a new session on a TerraGate server running the
communication service and become the manager and the leader of
the session
Join Session To join an ongoing session opened by another user on its local
computer or on a TerraGate server.
Note: The Manager of the session is the only participant that has permission to give the
leadership of the session to another user. The Leader of the session is the user that sets
509
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
the location of the camera by navigating freely in the 3D World and all other users can
attach to this point of view.
3. Enter the Server Host Name, which is the IP address of the communication server:
If you want to join an ongoing session, type the name or address of the Manager’s local
computer or the TerraGate server.
If you want to create a new session on a TerraGate server, type the name or address of the
server.
4. In the Choose Session Name field, type the session’s name:
If you create a new session on a TerraGate server, type a unique session name. If you create a
local session, the session name serves as an additional protection from unwanted guests.
If you join an ongoing session, type the session name that was given by the manager.
5. In the Choose User Name field, type a user name. Each member of the session must have a unique
user name. The user name is shown in the Participants list and will be attached to the chat
messages.
6. If you started a local or a server session, from the On User Connection drop-down list, select one of
the following options:
Option Description
Don’t Send Fly When other users join the session, they do not receive any
FLY project. They have to manually open a valid project
before joining the collaboration session.
Send Fly Link When other users join the session, the current FLY project
name is sent to them and their local TerraExplorer opens this
project before connecting to the session.
Send Fly File When other users join the session, the FLY project is sent to
them.
The collaboration server sends the content of the FLY project,
but not the additional resources.
Note: Use the Send Fly Link option only when the FLY project and all additional resources in the
FLY project (e.g., MPT database, 3D models or icons) reside on a local or remote network
storage that is shared and accessible to all participants in the session. It is recommended
to use this option when you use an Internet kit created using the “Create TerraExplorer Kit”
option. Use Send FLY File only when the MPT database is on a TerraGate server or on a
shared storage and there are no additional resources or all resources reside on a shared
storage.
7. Click the Start Session button to create the session or Join Session to join an ongoing session. A
second Collaboration dialog box opens.
8. If you want to close a session you created, click Stop Session. If you want to disconnect from a
session you joined, click Disconnect.
510
TerraExplorer User Guide
Managing the Session
Collaboration Tool
To manage a session:
The Participants list displays all connected users to the session. If you want to appoint another
participant leader, select the required name in the list, and click Set as Leader.
Controlling the Camera
If you created a local or a server session, select the Broadcast location check box to send your
camera position to all other participants in the session.
If you joined a session, select the Follow leader check box to attach your 3D Window (camera) to the
session leader view. Clear this option to navigate freely on the terrain, and select it again to get re-
attached to the session view.
Inviting Participants to the Session
If you started a local or a server session, you can invite other users to the session by e-mail.
To invite participants to the session:
1. In the Collaboration dialog box, click the Invite button. The Enter Email(s) field is displayed in the
lower half of the dialog box.
2. In the Enter Email(s) field, type the required e-mail address. If you want to send the message to
multiple recipients, separate their addresses by commas.
3. Click the Invite button. Your default mail client opens with a new e-mail message.
4. Follow the instructions in the message body and send the mail. Recipients of the message can
connect to the session by simply opening the mail attachment.
511
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Chatting with Other Participants
To type a chat message:
1. In the Collaboration dialog box, in the Chat field, type the message text.
2. Click Send to send this chat message to all other participants in the session. The text appears i n the
Chat box preceded by the name of the sender.
3. If the message box is not displayed, click the Show button to display it.
Using the Virtual Cursor
You can use a virtual cursor to point to an area on the 3D Window. The cursor, which is available in
different colors, is visible to all the participants in the session.
To use the virtual cursor:
1. In the Collaboration tool box, click the Virtual Cursor button.
2. Click the Color button to set the virtual cursor's color and select a color from the color
palette.
3. Click and hold the mouse button to display the Virtual Cursor.
4. Right-click to finish the operation.
Sharing Your Content
The collaboration tool allows you to share new content you create in the 3D World with other participants.
All content located under your sharing group can be shared with session participants.
To share content:
1. Turn on the automatic sharing option or click the Share Now link. The collaboration tool will
send all content located under your sharing group to the session participants.
2. Use the Text label or Freehand drawing tools to add content directly to the sharing group
3. You can create any TerraExplorer object or layer using the TerraExplorer standard tools and drag the
object or the group to your sharing group.
Note: The collaboration sharing tool sends the objects and layers under the sharing group but does not
send resources used by these objects or layers. Make sure you use resources accessible by all
other participants in the session.
512
TerraExplorer User Guide
Adding a Text Label
To add a text label:
1. In the Collaboration tool box, click the Add Text Label button. The Text Label field is
displayed in the lower half of the dialog box.
2. In the Text Label field, type a text string.
3. Click the My Color button to set the color of the text, and select a color from the color
palette.
4. In the 3D Window, click the terrain location where you want to insert the text label. The label is
displayed in the 3D Window at the same location, for all other participants of the session.
Using the Freehand Drawing Tool
You can draw freehand in the 3D Window. Your drawings are visible to all participants in the session.
To draw freehand:
1. In the Collaboration tool box, click the Draw button.
2. Click the Color button to set the drawing tool’s color and select a color from the color palette.
3. Click and hold the mouse button to draw.
4. Right-click to finish the operation.
Extracting Terrain to MPT
The Extract Terrain tool extracts and creates a subset of a local or remote terrain database.
Using the Extract Terrain tool, you can create a terrain database for distribution using an external storage
device or even create a local MPT from a DirectConnect project.
The extracted terrain is built from a high-resolution polygon, a medium resolution rectangle surrounding
the high-resolution area and a low-resolution area that always covers the entire terrain. You can control
the size of the high- and medium-resolution areas and control the quality of all three areas.
Note: Because the low-resolution area always covers the entire source terrain database, although it can
be set for a very poor quality to save storage space, the original FLY project always runs on the
new terrain database and all locations and objects have a valid coordinates in the extracted
terrain.
513
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Extract Terrain to MPT Tool
Using the Extract Terrain to MPT Tool
To extract terrain to MPT:
1. On the Tools tab, in the Extract Terrain group, click Extract to MPT. The Extract Terrain to MPT
tool opens.
2. Create a high resolution area polygon by doing the following:
a. Click Add.
b. In the 3D Window, click in the required locations to place the polygon points. You must place at
least three points.
c. Right-click to finish the polygon creation.
d. Perform any of the following editing operations if required:
Move a node – Click Edit. Then in the 3D Window, place the cursor over one of the
polygon’s nodes. The node turns blue, and the cursor changes to Move mode . Click
the node and drag it to the required location in the XY Plane. Release the mouse button to
set the node at the current location.
Add a node – Click Edit. Then in the 3D Window, place the cursor over one of the polygon’s
lines. Where a node can be added, a red node appears on the line and the cursor changes to
Add Node mode . Click to add a node, and then drag it to the required location.
514
TerraExplorer User Guide
Delete a node – Click Edit. Then in the 3D Window, place the cursor over the node you
want to delete. The node turns blue, and the cursor changes to Move mode . Right-
click, and select Delete Node from the shortcut menu.
Note: If you want to remove the polygon and create a new one, click Remove and repeat steps
a-d.
e. Set the quality of the high-resolution area by selecting a Unit Per Pixel value from the drop-down
list.
Note: The Unit Per Pixel list of values is created from the terrain database (MPT file) pyramid of
resolutions.
3. Type the Length of and resolution of the Medium Resolution Area Square . The medium resolution
area square always surrounds the high-resolution polygon. Type 0 to remove the square. The Unit
per Pixel value must be higher (lower resolution) than the value set in the High-resolution polygon.
4. Select the Low Resolution Area Unit Per Pixel value.
The Low Resolution Area always covers the entire MPT database to ensure that the current project
will run.
Note: It is recommended to set a medium resolution area around the High-resolution polygon to
get a smooth transition between the high-quality terrain and the very low-resolution
background. It is recommended that the medium resolution be four levels higher than the
selected high-resolution. The Low Resolution Area can be set to the wors t resolution to
reduce the size of the extracted MPT.
5. Click Scan to get a better estimation of the size of the new MPT. If you want to stop the scanning
process, click Abort.
Note: While setting the size and resolutions of the different areas, the Extract Terrain tool
displays an estimated size of the new MPT file based on a calculation (multiplication of the
areas and the selected resolutions). After clicking the Scan option, the Extract Terrain tool
scans the three areas and calculates the size based on the actual resolution of the terrain
in these areas. The final size of the new MPT file can be distinctly different from the
calculated and scan sizes if the original MPT file has many areas with different resolutions.
6. Select the name of the extracted MPT file by typing a valid file name, or click the Browse button and
select an existing directory and file name on your system.
7. Click Create MPT to start downloading and creating the new MPT file.
8. Click Abort to stop the creation process, or Pause and Resume to temporarily halt the process and
resume it from the same location.
Extracting Terrain to VRML
The Extract Terrain tool creates a VRML model from a local or remote MPT database to your local
machine. Using the Extract Terrain tool, you can create a VRML model for display in VRML viewers, 3D
printing etc.
The extracted terrain includes the elevation and imagery information from the terrain database, and
buildings created by TerraExplorer Pro.
Building textures are currently not supported. You can control the size of the VRML model by defining the
export area, and the image and elevation quality.
515
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Extract MPT to VRML Tool
Using the Extract Terrain to VRML Tool
To extract terrain to VRML:
1. On the Tools tab, in the Extract Terrain group, click Extract to VRML, and select Extract to VRML.
The Extract MPT to VRML dialog box is displayed.
2. Type the Project Name. A folder by this name is created in the Location path together with a VRML
model.
3. In the Location field, browse to the directory in which to create the project.
4. Click Add Area, and then click on the terrain to mark one corner of the rectangle, and click once
again to mark the opposite corner and finish the operation.
Note: If you want to remove the rectangle and create a new one, click Remove Area and repeat
step 3.
5. If you want to modify the dimensions of the rectangle, edit the Left and Right X and Upper and
Lower Y values.
6. Enter the model’s Length and Width values, in inches. The selected area is scaled to this size for
printing.
516
TerraExplorer User Guide
7. Select the Elevation Quality value.
8. Select the Image Quality in dpi.
9. Click Create VRML to start creating the VRML model. If you want to stop the creation process, click
Abort.
Note: The size of the image generated depends on the width, length and image quality. An image size
less than 20.000 dots on each axis is recommended.
Extracting Terrain to Zebra
The Extract Terrain to Zebra tool creates a Zebra Imaging model from a local or rem ote MPT database to
your local machine. Using the Extract Terrain to Zebra tool, you can create a Zebra model for producing
3D hologram images. For more information on Zebra Imaging, see http://www.zebraimaging.com/.
The extracted model includes the elevation and imagery information from the terrain database and
buildings created by TerraExplorer Pro.
Building textures are currently not supported. You can control the size of the Zebra model by defining the
export area, dimensions, and the image and elevation quality.
Extract MPT to Zebra Tool
517
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Using the Extract Terrain to Zebra Tool
To extract a zebra model:
1. On the Tools tab, in the Extract Terrain group, click Extract to VRML, and select Extract to Zebra.
The Export MPT to Zebra dialog box is displayed.
2. Type the Project Name. A zip file by this name is created in the Location path.
3. In the Location field, browse to the directory in which to create the project.
4. Click Add Area, and then click on the terrain to mark one corner of the rectangle, and click once
again to mark the opposite corner and finish the operation.
Note: If you want to remove the rectangle and create a new one, click Remove Area and repeat
step 3.
5. If you want to modify the dimensions of the rectangle, edit the Left and Right X and Upper and
Lower Y values.
6. Select the Elevation Quality value.
7. Select the Image Quality in dpi.
8. Set the final hologram View Mode. Select Wall if the image is intended to be displayed on a wall or
Desktop if it is intended to be displayed on a desktop.
9. Click the Create Zebra button to start creating the Zebra model. If you want to stop the creation
process, click the Abort.
Note: The size of the image generated depends on the Dimensions, Elevation and Image Quality. We
recommend that the image size be less than 20.000 dots on each axis.
Drawing Tools
Terra Explorer Pro’s drawing tools allow you to:
Create an urban scenario with its own roads, junctions and traffic lights (Urban design).
Create multiple instances of the same object along a broken line, or within a closed polygon shape
area.
Create power lines along a user-defined path.
Create pipelines along a user-defined path.
Create fences and walls along a user-defined path.
Urban Design
The Urban Design tool enables you to create an urban scenario with its own roads, junctions and traffic
lights.
To add urban design objects:
1. On the Tools tab, in the Draw Tool group, click Urban Design. The Urban Design toolbar is
displayed.
518
TerraExplorer User Guide
Urban Design Draw Tool
2. On the Urban Design toolbar, select the required drawing object.
Road
Junction
Traffic Light
3. In the property sheet, set the object parameters.
4. In the 3D Window, use the mouse to create the object.
Roads Object Parameters
Urban Design - Build Roads Tool Property Sheet
Parameter Activity
Road Style Select one of the available road styles from the drop-down list.
Road Width Set the road’s width in meters.
Tree Type You can add trees by the road from the types of trees available:
None, Style A - F or Random.
519
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Position Set the trees’ position to be on Both Sides, Right, Left or Center.
Spacing Set the spacing between the road and the trees in meters.
Distance from Road Set the tree’s distance from the road in meters.
Pole Type Add a pole by the road from 4 different types of poles available:
Style A - D
Position Set the pole’s position to be on Both Sides, Right or Left Side.
Spacing Set the spacing of the pole(s) from the road in meters.
Distance from Road Set the distance of the poles(s) from the road in meters.
Junctions Object Parameters
Draw Tool - Urban Design
Parameter Activity
Style Select from one of the junction types.
520
TerraExplorer User Guide
Traffic Lights Object Parameters
Draw Tool - Urban Design
Parameter Activity
Traffic Light Select from one of the traffic light types.
Deleting Urban Design Objects
To delete an urban design object from the 3D Window:
1. On the Urban Design toolbar, click Delete ..
2. In the 3D Window, click the object you want to delete.
Editing Urban Design Objects
To edit an urban design object:
1. On the Urban Design toolbar, click Edit ..
2. In the 3D Window, click the object you want to edit. The object's property sheet is displayed.
3. Modify the object's parameters as required.
Duplicate Objects
The Duplicate Objects tool creates multiple instances of the same object along a broken line, or within a
closed polygon shape area. For example, you may need to place street lights, phone booths, or bus stops
along a section of a road, or place trees in a forest or park. The tool allows the user to set the basic
graphic representation of the object and the spacing between the instances.
The output of a Duplicate Object operation is either a group of TerraExplorer objects or a Points layer that
can be saved to a local data source (Shapefile format) and loaded as a Streaming or Entire layer.
521
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Duplicate Objects Tool
To use the Duplicate Objects tool:
1. On the Tools tab, in the Draw Tool group, click Duplicate Objects. The Duplicate Objects dialog
box is displayed.
2. Select the Create as option:
Option Description
Group Create a group with objects.
Layer (Entire) Create feature layer under the application AppData.
Layer (Streaming) Create streaming feature layer under the application
AppData.
3. Select the required Object Type, and then enter the other parameter values:
Parameter Description
Object Type Type of object: Text/Image Label, 3D Model, Regular Polygon, or
one of the 2D or 3D Shapes
Scale Determines the dimensions of the object.
File Name This parameter is only displayed when the Image Label or 3D
Model object type is selected.
Browse to the required file.
Text This parameter is only displayed when the Text Label object type
is selected.
522
TerraExplorer User Guide
Type the required label text.
Segments This parameter is only displayed when the Regular Polygon
object type is selected.
Type the number of sides required.
Second Radius This parameter is only displayed when the Ellipse object type is
selected.
Type the required value.
Height This parameter is only displayed when the Box Cone, Pyramid,
Arrow, or Cylinder object type is selected.
Type the required height.
Spacing Type the required distance between every two objects.
Max Random Offset If this parameter is larger than 0, the objects are placed at
random distances from the required location up to the maximum
parameter.
Visibility Distance Set the visibility distance of the objects.
4. Select one of the following methods of designating the placement of the duplicated objects:
Method Description
Follow Line Duplicate the object along a line.
Click Follow Line. Then in the 3D Window, left-click to place
the line waypoints, and right-click to complete the line.
Fill Area Duplicate the selected object inside the drawn polygon.
Click Fill Area. Then in the 3D Window, left-click to set the
line or polygon waypoint, and right-click to complete it.
Selected Group Duplicate the object along all polylines or polygons in a
selected group or layer.
Select the required group or layer from the Project Tree and
then click Selected Group.
Note: Only first level polygons and polylines in an existing
group are included.
From Clipboard Duplicate the selected object based on a polyline or polygon
clipboard object:
Polyline clipboard object - Object is duplicated along
the line.
Polygon clipboard object - Object is duplicated inside
the polygon.
Click From Clipboard.
5. In the 3D Window, left-click to place the line or polygon waypoints, and then right-click to complete
the line or polygon.
6. If you want to modify additional parameters, in the Project Tree Window, right-click the duplication
group and select Properties
523
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Create Power Lines
This tool creates a power line by placing power poles along a user-defined path and connecting them with
power lines.
The output of a create power line operation is either a group of TerraExplorer objects or a Point layer that
can be saved to a local data source (Shapefile format) and loaded as a Streaming or Entire layer.
Power Lines Dialog Box
To use the Create Power Lines tool:
1. On the Tools tab, in the Draw Tool group, click Power Lines. The Create Power Lines dialog box is
displayed.
2. Select the Create as option:
Option Description
Group Create a group with objects.
Layer (Entire) Create feature layer under the application AppData.
Layer (Streaming) Create streaming feature layer under the application
AppData.
3. Enter the following parameters:
524
TerraExplorer User Guide
Parameter Description
Method Select the required creation method:
Pole every waypoint – To add a single pole on every
left-click on the terrain.
Fixed distance between poles – To add several poles
between clicks with a fixed distance between each pole.
Pole Type Pole Type A creates a power line with two connecting
wires.
Pole Type B and Pole Type C create a power line with
three connecting wires.
Distance between poles This field is enabled when the Fixed distance between poles
method is selected.
Segments in sections The number of segments for connected power lines between
two poles.
Maximum Line Depth The height difference of the connected power lines between
the highest and lowest points.
Visibility Distance Set the visibility distance of the objects.
Line Color The color of the drawn power line.
4. Select one of the following methods of designating the power lines to be created:
Method Description
Follow Line Create power lines along a line.
Click Follow Line. Then in the 3D Window, left-click to place
the line waypoints, and right-click to complete the line
Selected Group Create power lines along all polylines in a selected group or
layer.
Select the required group or layer from the Project Tree and
then click Selected Group.
Note: Only first level polylines in an existing group are
included.
From Clipboard Create power lines along a clipboard object.
Note: Power lines are only created for polyline clipboard
objects.
Click From Clipboard.
5. If you want to edit additional parameters, right-click the Power Line group/layer in the Project Tree
and select Properties.
Create Pipelines
This tool creates 3D pipelines long a user-defined path. The output of a create pipeline operation is either
a group of TerraExplorer objects or two Point layers, one for the pipes and the second for the connectors,
which can be saved to local data sources (Shapefile format) and loaded as a Streaming or Entire layer.
Note: The pipelines tool does not support multipart features.
525
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Create Pipelines Dialog Box
To create pipelines:
1. On the Tools tab, in the Draw Tool group, click Pipelines. The Create Pipelines dialog box is
displayed.
2. Select the Create as option:
Option Description
Group Create a group with objects.
Layer (Entire) Create feature layer under the application AppData.
Layer (Streaming) Create streaming feature layer under the application
AppData.
3. Enter the following parameters:
Parameter Description
Pipe Diameter Type the desired diameter.
Pipe Color Select the required color.
Visibility Distance Set the visibility distance of the objects.
4. Select one of the following methods of designating the pipelines to be created:
Method Description
Follow Line Create pipelines along a line.
Click Follow Line. Then in the 3D Window, left-click to place
the line waypoints, and right-click to complete the line
Selected Group Create pipelines along all polylines in a selected group or
layer.
Select the required group or layer from the Project Tree and
then click Selected Group.
526
TerraExplorer User Guide
Note: Only first level polylines in an existing group are
included.
Note: The pipelines tool does not support multipart
polylines.
From Clipboard Create pipelines along a clipboard object.
Note: Pipelines are only created for polyline clipboard
objects.
Click From Clipboard.
5. If you want to edit additional parameters, right-click the pipeline group/layer in the Project Tree and
select Properties.
Create Fences and Walls Tool
The Create Fences and Walls tool enables you to easily create fences and walls in the precise
dimensions, shape and texture you require. The output can be saved as a TerraExplorer group of objects
or as a feature layer (shapefile).
A fence or wall can be created through the simple view (by clicking on the required fence/wall image) or
through the advanced view that enables manual setting of relevant parameters.
To use the Create Fences and Walls tool:
1. On the Tools tab, in the Draw Tool group, click Create Fences and Walls. The Create Fences and
Walls dialog box is displayed.
527
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Fence and Wall Tool
2. If you want to create the fence or wall through the Simple view, select the required fence or wall style,
by clicking a fence or wall image. This will automatically set the appropriate texture file as well as
other parameters and create a Project Tree group that contains all the created fences/walls .
Note: Once parameters are set in the Advanced mode (see below), these parameters are applied
to all fences and walls created while the Fence and Wall tool remains open. Once the
Fence and Wall tool is closed, the default parameters are restored.
3. If you want to use a different texture and/or manually set other parameters for the fence or wall, click
Advanced. A Fence and Wall property sheet displays with fence/wall parameters.
528
TerraExplorer User Guide
Fence and Wall Parameters
4. In the General Settings section, enter the following parameters:
Note: Once the Object Type is selected, the settings displayed below the General Settings
section change to correspond to the selected type.
Parameter Description
Object Type Select one of the following:
Mesh Fence – Fence with either a solid colored or
textured surface.
Wall – Object with measurable width.
529
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Wall with Fence Top – Wall with a mesh fence (solid
colored or textured) on top of it.
Wire Strand Fence – Fence made of horizontal wires.
Note: A wall differs from a fence in that it has measureable
width.
Create as Select one of the following:
Group – Create a group with fence/wall objects. If the
fences or walls are being created based on the polylines
or polygons in a selected group or layer (See step 6
below), the new group will contain a fence/wall object for
each polyline or polygon in the original group or layer.
Layer (Entire) – Create a feature layer under the
application AppData. If the fences or walls are being
created based on the polylines or polygons in a selected
group or layer (See step 6 below), the new layer will
contain a feature for each polyline or polygon in the
original group or layer.
Layer (Streaming) – Create a streaming feature layer
under the application AppData.
Visibility Distance Sets the maximal distance from the camera above which the
fence/wall disappears.
5. Enter the parameters that are relevant for the selected object type:
Parameter Description
Wire Strand Settings (For Wire Strand Fence)
# of Strands Number of horizontal wires to be placed within the height of
the fence.
Strand Color Color of the wires.
Height Height of the fence.
Sampling Distance between points added to the fence, in meters. The
smaller the spacing, the more accurately the fence follows the
terrain, but the longer it takes to calculate.
Minimize line points Simplifies the number of sampling points calculated for the
fence.
Fence Post Settings
(For Mesh Fence, Wire Strand Fence, and Wall with Fence Top)
Post Type Select one of the following types:
None – No fence posts are rendered.
Circular – Fence posts are rendered as cylindrical
objects.
Square – Fence posts are rendered as rectangular
objects.
Fill Style Select the fill type for the posts:
530
TerraExplorer User Guide
Color – The posts get a single color filling according to
the Color field.
Texture – The posts get the texture from an external
texture file according to the Texture field.
Color Select the color of the posts and the % opacity of the post fill.
Texture Browse to the GIF, JPEG, or PNG to provide the texture for
the posts.
Post Spacing Type the required distance between posts, in meters. The
smaller the spacing, the more accurately the fence follows the
terrain, but the longer it takes to calculate.
Post Extension Height, in meters, that the posts extend above the fence.
Post Diameter Diameter of the rendered circular posts or width of the
rendered rectangular posts, in meters.
Wall Settings
(For Wall and Wall with Fence Top)
Fill Style Select the fill type for the wall:
Color – The wall gets a single color filling according to
the Color field.
Texture – The wall gets the texture from an external
texture file according to the Texture field.
Color Select the color of the wall and the % opacity of the fill.
Texture Browse to the GIF, JPEG, or PNG to provide the texture for
the wall.
Height Height of the wall in meters.
Wall Width Width of the wall in meters.
Sampling Distance between points added to the wall, in meters. The
smaller the spacing, the more accurately the wall follows the
terrain, but the longer it takes to calculate.
Minimize line points Simplifies the number of sampling points calculated for the
wall.
Wall Post Settings
(For Wall and Wall with Fence Top)
Post Type Select one of the following types:
None - No wall posts are rendered.
Circular – Wall posts are rendered as cylindrical objects.
Square – Wall posts are rendered as rectangular objects.
Fill Style Select the fill type for the posts:
Color – The posts get a single color filling according to
the Color field.
Texture – The posts get the texture from an external
531
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
texture file according to the Texture field.
Color Select the color of the posts and the % opacity of the post fill.
Texture Browse to the GIF, JPEG, or PNG to provide the texture for
the posts.
Post Spacing Type the required distance between posts, in meters. The
smaller the spacing, the more accurately the wall follows the
terrain, but the longer it takes to calculate.
Post Extension Height, in meters, that the posts extend above the wall.
Post Diameter Diameter of the rendered circular posts or width of the
rendered rectangular posts, in meters.
Fence Settings
(For Wall with Fence Top)
Fill Style Select the fill type for the fence top:
Color – The fence gets a single color filling according to
the Color field.
Texture – The fence gets the texture from an external
texture file according to the Texture field.
Color Select the color of the fence top and the % opacity of the fill.
Texture Browse to the GIF, JPEG, or PNG to provide the texture for
the fence top.
Height Height of the fence top, in meters.
6. Select one of the following methods of designating the fences/walls to be created:
Method Description
Follow Line Build a fence or wall along a line.
Click Follow Line. Then in the 3D Window, left-click to place
the line waypoints, and right-click to complete the line
Create Polygon Build a fence or wall along a polygon’s borders.
Click Create Polygon. Then in the 3D Window, left-click to
place the polygon waypoints, and right-click to complete the
polygon.
Selected Group Build fences or walls along all polygons or polylines in a
selected group or layer.
Select the required group or layer from the Project Tree and
then click Selected Group.
Note: Only first level polygons and polylines in an existing
group are included.
From Clipboard Build a fence or wall along a polyline or polygon clipboard
object.
Click From Clipboard.
7. If you want to edit these or additional parameters, right-click the group/layer in the Project Tree and
select Properties.
532
TerraExplorer User Guide
Timespan Tool
Timespan tags restrict the visibility of data to a specific period of time. Timespans are usually used for
data sets that appear in multiple locations (e.g., Placemarks moving along a path). The data associated
with a timespan is visible only when the time slider is showing the time interval defined in the timespan
tag.
The timespan for an individual object can be set in its property sheet. Similarly , the timespan for a group
can be set from the group property sheet, when you want all objects in the group and all subgroup objects
to have the same timespan. The Timespan Tool is necessary when you want to evenly split a timespan,
either between a group’s subgroups or between all the objects in all of a group’s subgroups.
Using the Timespan Tags Tool
To use the Timespan Tags tool:
1. In the Project Tree, select the group.
2. On the Tools tab, in the Time group, click Timespan Tags. The Timespan Tags dialog box is
displayed.
Timespan Tags
3. Select a Method:
Time Sequence – Split the timespan evenly between the group objects with each object
displaying after the one that preceded it on the Project Tree, for an equal fraction of the total
time.
Full Time Range – Set the entire timespan for each of the group objects (so that they all display
for the entire timespan).Click the Start Date icon and enter a start date and time.
4. Enter a Start Time and End Time.
5. If the group contains subgroups, in the Subgroup Objects field, define how the objects within each
subgroup should display:
Note: When the Method is set to Full Time Range, this field is not available.
533
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
Consecutive - The objects within each subgroup display successively, each for an equal fraction
of the total timespan.
Simultaneous - Each subgroup should function like a unified object, with all the objects within
each subgroup displaying simultaneously during the subgroup’s segment of the total timespan.
6. In the Apply to field, select to apply the group timespan to either:
All – All objects in the group. Any timespan tags previously set for individual objects in the group
are deleted and reset in accordance with the timespan set in this tool.
Objects without time – Only group objects that didn’t already have a timespan tag. All objects
with a previously set timespan tag will display according to that timespan tag.
7. Click Apply to Group. A timeline is displayed showing each object in the group and the date and
time in which it will be visible.
Timespan Timeline
8. If you want to clear the timespan set for the group, click Clear Group.
9. If you want to modify an object's display, click the required object on the timeline and then do any of
the following:
To remove the object from the timespan group - click the red x next to the object.
To modify the sequence in which an object displays, drag the object to the required position on
the timeline.
To change the length of time for which the object displays, point to the edge of the required
object until the cursor becomes a double-sided arrow. Then click and drag the mouse to resize
the selected object.
10. If you want to automatically cycle through the group objects with each displaying in turn in the 3D
Window during its segment of the group timespan, click Play . Set the time for each cycle in the
sec per loop field.
11. Use the Zoom in/out icons to zoom in and out of the timeline.
If you want to clear the timespan set for a particular group (after closing the group’s timeline):
1. On the Tools tab, in the Time group, click Timespan Tags.
2. In the Project Tree, select the required group.
3. In the Timespan Tags table, click Clear Group.
534
TerraExplorer User Guide
Block Width Tool
Determining an Appropriate Layer Block Width.
An appropriate Block Width is one of the most critical parameters used to stream a layer efficiently. In
some cases, setting the best Block Width for a layer is an iterative process. Two major factors influence
the selection of the Block Width for a layer:
Layer’s Maximum Visibility Distance – The higher you want to view the data, the bigger the Block
Width should be.
Density and Precision Level - The denser and precise the data, i.e., the mean points or vertices per
area, the smaller the Block Width should be.
Sometimes, although the data is very dense and precise, you might want to view it from a high visibility
distance. In this situation, it is advised to simplify the layer.
If the block width is too big, it will take time to request for the data from the data source and i t could take a
lot longer to render it. If the block width is too small, TerraExplorer “wastes” many requests transmitting
data it could have easily transmitted in one request. This also results in “bothering” the data source with
many small requests.
Using the Block Width Tool
To use the Block Width tool:
1. On the Tools tab, in the Calculate group, click Block Width. The Block Width dialog box is
displayed.
Block Width Tool
535
TerraExplorer User Guide
TerraExplorer User Guide
2. Select the layer’s type
3. Position the camera at the layer's planned maximum altitude
4. Click Calculate.
OR
From the drop-down list, manually select the Block Width dimensions and view it on the terrain.
536
You might also like
- Microstation V8 Training Manual 2D Level 2No ratings yetMicrostation V8 Training Manual 2D Level 29 pages
- ArcGIS Enterprise Deployment 10.5.1 2.0 PDF100% (1)ArcGIS Enterprise Deployment 10.5.1 2.0 PDF113 pages
- Reference Guide: Marketed and Supported byNo ratings yetReference Guide: Marketed and Supported by73 pages
- Using Google Earth For Infrastructure Planning100% (1)Using Google Earth For Infrastructure Planning20 pages
- How To: Use The 7-Segment Microdrivers From Flightsimparts - Eu With Arduino and Airmanager For FSX, P3D or XplaneNo ratings yetHow To: Use The 7-Segment Microdrivers From Flightsimparts - Eu With Arduino and Airmanager For FSX, P3D or Xplane4 pages
- Using The Checklist Script: Carsten Lynker March 16, 2013No ratings yetUsing The Checklist Script: Carsten Lynker March 16, 20136 pages
- AACS1674 Introduction To Information Technology: Chapter 4No ratings yetAACS1674 Introduction To Information Technology: Chapter 439 pages
- Instant Download Low-Code Development With Appsmith 1st Edition Rahul Sharma PDF All Chapters100% (3)Instant Download Low-Code Development With Appsmith 1st Edition Rahul Sharma PDF All Chapters66 pages
- 100+ Robotics Projects For Final Year Engineering StudentsNo ratings yet100+ Robotics Projects For Final Year Engineering Students23 pages
- Dan Saffer - Designing For Interaction - Creating Smart Applications and Clever Devices - Peachpit Press (2006) PDFNo ratings yetDan Saffer - Designing For Interaction - Creating Smart Applications and Clever Devices - Peachpit Press (2006) PDF506 pages
- 100 Mind-Blowing Facts Related To Technology That Will Leave You AstonishedNo ratings yet100 Mind-Blowing Facts Related To Technology That Will Leave You Astonished8 pages
- LDL0300X - Guardium Inspection Engine Management For Discovered DatabasesNo ratings yetLDL0300X - Guardium Inspection Engine Management For Discovered Databases27 pages
- Polytechnic University of The Philippines College of Engineering Computer Engineering DepartmentNo ratings yetPolytechnic University of The Philippines College of Engineering Computer Engineering Department5 pages
- Broadworks Access Mediation Server Ems Configuration Management GuideNo ratings yetBroadworks Access Mediation Server Ems Configuration Management Guide118 pages
